SD5078 DRAFT-UK Nondom NC 2018-Manual PDF

PLEASE READ: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 consultation i
PLEASE READ: BREEAM UK New

Construction 2018 consultation
After 12 months of industry consultation and technical development, BRE has published the DRAFT 2018 version of
the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme.
Feedback received so far has been collated to inform the development of BREEAM UK New Construction 2018
version. Our aim with the update continue to be to provide a robust and evidenced-based evaluation of
performance of new building projects. We welcome feedback on all issues contained within this DRAFT manual.
Please note, as this is a DRAFT document, we are aware there are a few typos and formatting issues, all of which will
be rectified for the FINAL manual. Please focus your comments on the technical proposals.
We are considering a re-structure to the transport-related issues in the manual. This has not yet been incorporated
in the DRAFT manual to enable consultation. We felt it important to consult on the concept prior to making the
amendments to the individual issues. Below outlines our proposed re-structure of the transport section.
Transport proposal
The aim of the transport-related issues in BREEAM is to encourage access to sustainable means of transport for
building users. These support reductions in transport-related energy use, pollution and congestion over the life of
the building. Historically the BREEAM transport category has favoured site locations in urban or metropolitan areas.
These areas are invariably well served by public transport networks, in close proximity to a wide range of local
amenities and services, and have restrictions on land available for car parking. In such cases, projects typically achieve
a significant number of credits for the transport category by default. Conversely, projects in rural areas typically
struggle to achieve credits due to the site’s location, regardless of efforts made to implement sustainable
transport initiatives.
Given the above, we are proposing to re-structure the criteria. This will reward projects that maximise opportunities
to deliver the outcomes that BREEAM is seeking to promote. The proposal attempts to refocus and adapt the
current requirements, rather than introduce a radically different approach.
The starting point will be an initial transport assessment in order to determine the ‘baseline’ for the assessment.
This can form the basis for developing a travel plan or strategy. Projects would be rewarded for the measures
implemented to improve upon the identified baseline.
The following provides an overview of the proposed structure and associated content for the updated transport
category.
– Tra 01 transport assessment and travel plan Understanding the baseline - essentially the current Tra 05
requirements with some minor amendments to the text. The criteria would include reporting on the number and
type of amenities within 500m of the site (based on current Tra 02 criteria), and reporting on the public
transport accessibility (i.e. Tra 01 - proximity to train, bus etc. stops and frequency of services), which could
include calculation of the Accessibility Index for the site.
– Tra 02 Sustainable transport measures Implementing sustainable transport measures - would reward projects
implementing sustainable transport measures recommended in the travel plan , with credits dependent upon
how many measures are implemented. A possible list of options could include:
– Improvements to local cycling or footpath network
– Provision of signposting to public transport, local amenities or both
– Negotiation with local bus, train or tram companies to increase service provision
– Provision of electric recharging stations
– Car sharing facilities or car pool
– Compliant cycle storage spaces and facilities
– Car parking provision exceeds the local authority’s maximum car parking standard relevant to the project
(i.e. provides less car parking than the prescribed maximum)
– Provision of amenities and services on site where these are not available locally (i.e. within ~500m from the
site)
To achieve any Tra 02 credits, it would be a prerequisite to achieve the Tra 01 credits for undertaking the site-
specific transport assessment and travel plan. We would appreciate feedback on the proposed re-structure via the
ii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
online survey which can be found here. In addition to the transport category, another change is proposed for
BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 manual. This is not currently included in this DRAFT, will be in the Land-use and
Ecology section.
Land-use and Ecology: Implementation of the BREEAM UK

Strategic Ecology Framework: Ecology Assessment Issue Public
Consultation
The proposed Ecology section for this scheme is subject to separate consultation and has not been included in this
manual.
The BREEAM UK Strategic Ecology Framework (SEF) is currently being implemented across the BREEAM family of
schemes as these are updated. This process involves development of the assessment issues, alignment, synergy
and consistency where relevant across BREEAM schemes and built environment lifecycle stages. In support of this
the proposed ecology assessment issues for this scheme are available for review in a separate consultation
document.
The Assessment issues are available here: www.breeam.com/strategic-ecology-framework
This contains the proposed content of the revised Ecology Assessment issues in this category. It outlines the
proposed Assessment Issues and contains the detailed criteria for review and comment.
We are seeking input from a wide range of stakeholders who are involved in planning, delivering or maintaining
BREEAM Ecology related aspects of development and assets. We very much welcome your input into this process.
Further information about the SEF and the consultation process is also available on the website.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS iii
TERMS AND CONDITIONS

Disclaimer
This Scheme Document is the property of BRE Global Limited (“Global”) and is made publicly available, and free of
charge, for information purposes only. Any testing, assessment, certification or approval activities relating to this
Scheme Document (“the Activities”) must be conducted in accordance with Global’s approved processes, where
the Activities are undertaken by authorised employees, agents, and associates of Building Research Establishment
Limited (“BRE”), Global, or approved Activities providers. Please email [email protected] if you wish to receive
further information as to how to become an approved Activities provider. For the avoidance of doubt, anyone
wishing to use or reproduce this Scheme Document to offer testing, assessment, certification or approval services,
must apply to Global for the right to offer such services. Global accepts no responsibility for any unauthorised use
or distribution by others of this Scheme Document and may take legal action where unauthorised use is discovered.
Copyright
Save where Global has acknowledged third party-owned sources, the copyright in this Scheme Document is owned
by Global. The Scheme Document may be downloaded and reproduced only where:
– the reproduction is for academic and other non-commercial purposes;

– the Scheme Document is reproduced in full; and
– Global’s copyright in the Scheme Document is acknowledged.
Any other use of the Scheme Document shall be subject to specific agreements with Global.
Trade Marks
“BRE”, “BRE Global”, “BREEAM”, “SMARTWaste" and “the Green Guide” are all trademarks, whether registered or
unregistered, and are owned by either BRE or Global, and may not be used without written permission from BRE or
BRE Global Limited.
© BRE Global Ltd 2018

iv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Acknowledgements
This manual has been made possible through the continued efforts of many dedicated BRE Group staff members,
the BRE Global Limited Governing Body, the BRE Global Limited Standing Panel of Experts, BREEAM Assessors and
those who have responded to our consultation calls and meetings or provided feedback in other ways. BRE Global
Limited also extends its gratitude to those who support BREEAM by continuing to specify and apply the method
and contribute towards a sustainable built environment.
Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only
© BRE Global Ltd 2018

Table of contents v
Table of contents
PLEASE READ: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 consultation i
What the new icons mean xiii
About BRE Global Limited xv
About this Scheme Document xvi
Introduction to BREEAM 17
BREEAM UK New Construction 20
Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018scheme version 25
Building life cycle stages covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 scheme version 28
Buildings types not covered under the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 scheme version 30
Building life cycle stages not covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 scheme version 31
Scoring and rating BREEAM-assessed buildings 32
BREEAM rating benchmarks 33
Minimum standards 35
BREEAM assessment issues and credits 36
Calculating a building's BREEAM rating 37
The BREEAM evidential requirements 38
Management xliv
Man 01 Project brief and design xlv
Man 01 Project brief and design xlvii
Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning liv
Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning lvi
Man 03 Responsible construction practices lx
Man 03 Responsible construction practices lxii
Man 04 Commissioning and handover lxxi
Man 04 Commissioning and handover lxxiv
Man 05 Aftercare lxxx
Man 05 Aftercare lxxxii
Health and Wellbeing lxxxviii
Hea 01 Visual comfort lxxxix
Hea 01 Visual comfort xci
Hea 02 Indoor air quality cvi
Hea 02 Indoor air quality cviii
Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories cxx
Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories cxxii
Hea 04 Thermal comfort cxxvi

vi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Hea 04 Thermal comfort cxxviii
Hea 05 Acoustic performance cxxxiv
Hea 05 Acoustic performance cxxxvi
Hea 06 Security cxlv
Hea 06 Security cxlvii
Hea 07 Safe and healthy surroundings clii
Hea 07 Safe and healthy surroundings cliv
Energy clviii
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions clix
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions clxi
Ene 02 Energy monitoring clxxiii
Ene 02 Energy monitoring clxxvii
Ene 03 External lighting clxxxii
Ene 03 External lighting clxxxiv
Ene 04 Low carbon design clxxxvii
Ene 04 Low carbon design clxxxix
Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage cxcvii
Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage cxcix
Ene 06 Energy efficient transport systems ccii
Ene 06 Energy efficient transport systems cciv
Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems ccviii
Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems ccx
Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment ccxv
Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment ccxvii
Transport ccxxii
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility ccxxiii
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility ccxxv
Tra 02 Proximity to amenities ccxxxi
Tra 02 Proximity to amenities ccxxxiii
Tra 03 Alternative modes of transport ccxxxvi
Tra 03 Alternative modes of transport ccxxxviii
Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity ccxlvi
Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity ccxlviii
Tra 05 Travel plan ccliv
Tra 05 Travel plan cclvi
Water cclix
Table of contents vii
Wat 01 Water consumption cclx
Wat 01 Waterconsumption cclxii
Wat 02 Water monitoring cclxxii
Wat 02 Water monitoring cclxxiv
Wat 03 Water leak detection cclxxvii
Wat 03 Water leak detection cclxxix
Wat 04 Water efficient equipment cclxxxii
Wat 04 Water efficient equipment cclxxxiv
Materials cclxxxvi
Mat 01 Environmental impacts from construction products - Building life cycle assessment 287
Mat 02 Environmental impacts from construction products 302
Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials 307
Mat 04 Insulation 318
Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience 319
Mat 06 Material efficiency 325
Waste 331
Wst 01 Construction waste management 332
Wst 02 Use of recycled and sustainably sourced aggregates 342
Wst 03 Operational waste 352
Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes 357
Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change 361
Wst 06 Design for disassembly and adaptability 368
Land Use and Ecology 375
LE 01 Site selection 376
Pollution 381
viii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants 382
Pol 02 Local air quality 391
Pol 03 Flood and surface water management 397
Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution 413
Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution 417
Innovation 422
Inn 01 Innovation 423
Appendices cdxxviii
Appendix A – Healthcare building types A
Appendix B – Education building types B
Appendix C – Multi-residential building types C
Appendix D – Shell only and Shell and Core Project Assessments D
Appendix E – Simple Building Assessments I
Appendix F – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates M
Appendix G – Notes for compliance 18
References 25
List of tables ix
List of tables
Table 1 BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 environmental sections and assessment
issues 20
Table 2 Non-domestic building types covered underBREEAM UK New Construction 2018 25
Table 3 BREEAM rating benchmarks 33
Table 4 BREEAM Environmental section weightings 33
Table 5 Minimum BREEAM standards by rating level 35
Table 6 Example BREEAM score and rating calculation 37
Table 7 Minimum standards for a BREEAM Very Good rating 37
Table 8 BREEAM evidence principles 40
Table 9 General evidence types 41
Table 10 Minimum values of average daylight factor required xci
Table 11 Daylighting uniformity criteria xcii
Table 12 Space type and illuminance requirements - both criteria (average illuminance and
minimum point illuminance) should be met. xciii
Table 13 Additional alternative route for healthcare building types only xciv
Table 14 View out building specific requirements. xciv
Table 15 Internal and external lighting building specific requirements. xcvi
Table 16 Exemplary level values of average daylight factor required. xcvii
Table 17 Exemplary level illuminance value requirements. Both criteria (average

illuminance and minimum point illuminance) should be met. xcviii
Table 18 Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights xcix
Table 19 Recommended number of grid points c
Table 20 : Exemplary level emission criteria byproduct type cix
Table 21 : Emission criteria byproduct type cxiii
Table 22 Maximum TVOC content for paints and coatings cxv
Table 23 BREEAM acoustic criteria for education buildings cxxxvi
Table 24 BREEAM acoustic criteria for healthcare buildings cxxxvii
Table 25 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Office buildings cxxxviii
Table 26 BREEAM acoustic criteria for law court buildings cxxxviii
Table 27 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and Other building types cxxxix
Table 28 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Multi-residential buildings cxxxix
Table 29 Ene 01 EPR NC benchmark scale clxi
Table 30 Exemplary performance credits clxii
Table 31 Best practice energy efficient measures in laboratories ccxi
Table 32 Examples of significant contributors to unregulated energy consumption, for a

number of different building types or functions, and the solutions deemed to comply. ccxvii
x SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Table 33 Credits available for each building type relating to the public transport AI
score. ccxxv
Table 34 Default hours of operation by building type for a typical day ccxxv
Table 35 Criteria and credits for different building groups ccxxxiii
Table 36 Criteria and credits for alternative modes of transport ccxxxviii
Table 37 Cycle storage criteria for each building type ccxxxix
Table 38 Credits available in Tra04. Maximum car parking capacity for different
building types ccxlviii
Table 39 Default occupancy rates by building type ccli
Table 40 BREEAM Credits available for percentage improvement over baseline building
water consumption cclxii
Table 41 : BREEAM credits based on overall performance level. cclxiv
Table 42 Water efficient consumption levels by component type cclxv
Table 43 Data requirements for each domestic component type cclxv
Table 44 Credit summary table 291
Table 45 Superstructure – In scope (criteria 1 to 5) 296
Table 46 Substructure and hard landscaping – In scope (applicable to criteria 6 and 7) 297
Table 47 Core building Services – In scope (applicable to criteria 8 and 9) 297
Table 48 LCA Quality requirements 297
Table 49 Superstructure – Out of scope 298
Table 50 Substructure and hard landscaping – Out of scope 299
Table 51 Core building Services – Out of scope 299
Table 52 EPD points for different types of EPD 304
Table 53 Material classification 305
Table 54 BREEAM credits available for percentage of RSM points achieved 309
Table 55 Scope assessment, common building element designation and location and
use categories 311
Table 56 Materialcategories 314
Table 57 Examples of relevant industry durability or quality standards and design guides 324
Table 58 Examples of material efficiencies at each work stage 328
Table 59 Construction waste resource efficiency benchmarks 334
Table 60 Diversion from landfill benchmarks 335
Table 61 Construction waste groups 339
Table 62 Credits available relating to the Project Sustainable Aggregate points 344
Table 63 Aggregate uses 345
Table 64 Aggregate types 346
Table 65 Region of source (quarry or marine dredge site) 347
Table 66 Aggregate regional abiotic depletion potential 349

List of tables xi
Table 67 Social cost of transport 350
Table 68 Carbon footprint 350
Table 69 Criterion 5 on page 1 requirements 363
Table 70 Climate change adaptation strategy appraisal examples 366
Table 71 Design measures allowing future adaptation 373
Table 72 Examples of design measures and aspects to consider regarding future

disassembly 374
Table 73 Default system operational design life values 386
Table 74 Default values for DELC calculation when manufacturer's figures are not
available 386
Table 75 List of some common refrigerant types with low GWP 389
Table 76 Maximum NOx emission levels by appliance type, fuel and AQMA 393
Table 77 Maximum particulate matter and volatile organic compound emissions for
appliances using biomass, solid fuel and wood pellets 393
Table 78 Definition of flood zones by country 410
Table 79 BREEAM UK New Construction 2018issue applicability for Simple building

assessments J
xii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
List of figures
Figure 1 The BREEAM Certification mark 19
Figure 2 BREEAM assessment and certification stages and the Royal Institute of British
Architects (RIBA) Outline Plan of Work 2013 21
What the new icons mean xiii
What the new icons mean

Icons have been designed to visually represent some of the information in the manual to assist your understanding.
These are colour coded to align with the BREEAM category colours.
BREEAM assessment types Category weightings Assessment issue credits

Fully-fitted
Simple building
Shell and core
Shell only
Category weightings
Four icons showing the weighting for each assessment type within the category. For example, if the weighting for
fully fitted assessment is 15% then the icon will contain the figure 15%.
Assessment issue credits

Four icons representing the four assessment types and the number of credits available for that assessment issue.
For example, if two credits are available for a Simple building (SB) assessment, the SB icon will contain the number 2.
Where exemplary credits are available for an assessment issue, these are shown as a star in the top right hand
corner of the assessment issue icons. The number of exemplary credits is shown within the star.
Where there are exemplary credits available
Two exemplary credits are available
The combined icon would look like this

xiv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Minimum standard
One of six minimum standard icons is shown along with the assessment issue credit icon. The minimum standard
star cluster indicates which BREEAM rating the assessment issue minimum standard applies to.
Ratings with a minimum standard Icon

No Minimum standard
Outstanding
Excellent and Outstanding
Very good, Excellent and Outstanding
Good, Very good, Excellent and Outstanding
Pass, Good, Very good, Excellent and Outstanding

About BRE Global Limited xv
About BRE Global Limited

BRE Global Limited (part of the BRE (Building Research Establishment) Group) is an independent third party
approvals body offering certification of fire, security and sustainability products and services to an international
market.
BRE Global Limited’s mission is to 'Protect People, Property and the Planet'.
We aim to achieve this by:
1. Researching and writing standards

2. Testing and certification in the areas of fire, electronics, security and sustainability
3. Developing world-leading sustainability assessment methods
4. Undertaking research and consultancy for clients and regulators
5. Promulgating standards and knowledge throughout the industry through publications and events
6. Developing and delivering training
BRE Global Limited’s product testing and approvals are carried out by recognised experts in our world renowned
testing laboratories.
BRE Global Limited is custodian of a number of world-leading brands including:
1. Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method (BREEAM) - the world’s leading
environmental assessment method for buildings
2. Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB) for approval of fire and security products and services.
BRE Global Limited is a trading subsidiary of the BRE Trust, the registered research and education charity which owns
the BRE Group.
BRE Global Limited Bucknalls Lane Watford Hertfordshire WD25 9XX
T +44 (0)333 321 8811 F +44 (0)1923 664 910
E [email protected]
www.breglobal.comwww.greenbooklive.com
xvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
About this Scheme Document

This document is the technical manual for the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 Scheme. It describes an
environmental performance standard against which new, non-domestic buildings in the UK can be assessed and
achieve a BREEAM New Construction rating.
The Scheme Document and the information detailed within is intended for use by trained, qualified and licensed
BREEAM UK Assessors in accordance with the procedural and operational requirements of BREEAM (as described
in the BREEAM and CSH: Operational Guidance, SD5070) under the terms and conditions of a BREEAM UK licence.
This document should be used by non-BREEAM UK Assessors for reference purposes only.
Application of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 scheme

in Wales, Scotland, England and Northern Ireland
Standalone versions of the technical manual of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 scheme are available for
the assessment of buildings in Scotland, Northern Ireland, England and Wales. These technical manuals detail the
country-specific criteria and benchmarks applicable to BREEAM assessments of new buildings in their respective
territory.
The online version of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 technical manual contains all applicable criteria and
benchmarks for all countries of the UK. Both the UK online and downloadable country-specific manuals for
Scotland, Wales, Northern Ireland and England are available from www.breeam.com
This document is the Scotland Wales Northern Ireland England UK technical manual for the BREEAM UK New
Construction 2018 Scheme. It describes an environmental performance standard against which new, non-
domestic buildings in this territory can be assessed and achieve a BREEAM New Construction rating.
The Scheme Document and the information detailed within is intended for use by trained, qualified and licensed
BREEAM UK Assessors in accordance with the procedural and operational requirements of BREEAM (as described
in the BREEAM and CSH: Operational Guidance, SD5070) under the terms and conditions of a BREEAM UK licence.
This document should be used by non-BREEAM UK Assessors for reference purposes only.
The full online version of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 technical manual contains the criteria and
benchmarks for all territories of the UK. Both the UK online and downloadable country-specific manuals for
Scotland, Wales, Northern Ireland and England are available from www.breeam.com
Changes to this BREEAM Scheme Document

This Scheme Document is subject to revision and can be re-issued from time-to-time by BRE Global Limited. A
schedule of the publication date for each issue of this document is provided below.
Any additions to this document that necessitates its re-issue will be highlighted throughout the text (note: deletions
are not identified in the updated issue). A detailed list of all additions and deletions made to each issue is available
separately. BREEAM Assessors can download this list of changes from the BREEAM Assessor's Extranet. The list of
changes is also available to other parties on request; please email [email protected].
Introduction to BREEAM
BREEAM is the world’s first and leading sustainability assessment and certification scheme for the built environment.
It is an international standard that is locally adapted, operated and applied through a network of scheme
operators, assessors and industry professionals.
Through its application, BREEAM recognises and reflects the value in higher performing assets and aims to inspire
and empower change by rewarding and motivating sustainability across the life cycle of master-planning projects,
infrastructure and buildings.
Launched in 1990, to date, BREEAM has been used to certify over 590,000 assessments of buildings across the
building life cycle and is being applied in over 78 countries.
BREEAM aim and objectives

BREEAM assesses, encourages and rewards environmental, social and economic sustainability throughout the built
environment. The BREEAM schemes:
– encourage continuous performance improvement and innovation by setting and assessing against a broad
range of scientifically rigorous requirements that go beyond current regulations and practice,
– empower those who own, commission, deliver, manage or use buildings, infrastructure or communities to
achieve their sustainability aspirations,
– build confidence and value by providing independent certification that demonstrates the wider benefits to
individuals, business, society and the environment.
Objectives of BREEAM UK New Construction

– To provide market recognition of buildings with a low environmental impact
– To ensure best environmental practice is incorporated in the planning, design, construction and operation of
buildings and the wider built environment.
– To challenge the market to provide innovative, cost effective solutions that minimise the environmental impact of
buildings.
– To allow organisations to demonstrate progress towards corporate environmental objectives.
BREEAM is developed and operated to meet the following underlying principles:
– Ensure environmental quality through an accessible, holistic and balanced measure of environmental impacts.
– Use quantified measures for determining environmental quality.
– Adopt a flexible approach that encourages and rewards positive outcomes, avoiding prescribed solutions.
– Use robust science and best practice as the basis for quantifying and calibrating a cost effective and rigorous
performance standard for defining environmental quality.
– Integrate building professionals in the development and operational processes to ensure wide understanding
and accessibility.
– Adopt third party certification to ensure independence, credibility and consistency of the label.
– Adopt existing industry tools, practices and other standards wherever possible to support developments in
policy and technology, build on existing skills and understanding and minimise costs.
– Align technically and operationally with relevant international standards, including the suite of standards on the
‘Sustainability of Construction Works’ prepared by the European Committee for Standardisation Technical
Committee CEN/TC 350.
– Engage with a representative range of stakeholders to inform ongoing development in accordance with the
underlying principles and the pace of change in performance standards (accounting for policy, regulation and
market capability).
The aims, objectives and principles of BREEAM are embodied within a Core Standard (Process, Science and
Technical) owned and managed by BRE Global Limited. This Core Standard is applied to cover aspects of the built
environment life through a suite of BREEAM Schemes.Locally developed and operated versions of the schemes are
used in other countries by organisations known as National Scheme Operators (NSOs).
All NSOs are required to maintain scheme operations to internationally agreed standards and seek accreditation
from a national accreditation body to demonstrate competence, impartiality and performance capability.
For a full list of BREEAM National Scheme Operators and Schemes visit www.breeam.com.
18 SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
The UK BREEAM Schemes

BRE Global Limited is the scheme operator of BREEAM in the UK. We develop and operate a number of BREEAM
versions, each designed to assess the sustainability performance of buildings, projects or assets at various stages
in the life cycle, and these include:
– BREEAM Communities for the master-planning of a larger community of buildings

– BREEAM New Construction:Buildings for new build, domestic and non-domestic buildings
– BREEAM New Construction: Infrastructure for new build infrastructure projects
– BREEAM In-Use for existing non-domestic buildings in-use
– BREEAM Refurbishmentand Fit Out for domestic and non-domestic building fit-outs and refurbishments
Trust in the Mark

It is important that developers and their customers can have trust in the integrity and rigour of BREEAM. As a formal
third party certification scheme, robustness and fairness are key aspects that underpin the method. BREEAM
provides confidence in two ways:
1. Creation and operation of the Mark

The credibility and consistency of the BREEAM assessment and rating is a fundamental part of the scheme. As the
UK’s leading building science centre, BRE is owned by the BRE Trust, a registered charity that works to improve the
quality and sustainability of our buildings and built environment for the wider public benefit. BRE promotes best
practice and develops knowledge and understanding throughout the sector and is independent from those
interest groups involved in the design and construction of new buildings.
BRE is highly respected as a world leading authority in building performance research, testing, evaluation, standard
setting and certification with over 90 years of experience operating both within the UK and internationally. The
science-based content and independent application in accordance with recognised International Standards(4)
underpin both the creation and operation of BREEAM. BRE Global, the BRE’s certification body and operators of
BREEAM, is accredited by the United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) against these standards to ensure
independence, competence and impartiality.
A key aspect of this impartiality is the open and accountable governance structure. The operation of BREEAM (as
with all our assurance activities) is overseen by an independent Governing Body and a broad cross-industry
Standing Panel who provide peer and market review as well as technical and operational oversight of our activities.
The Governing Body represents a breadth of stakeholder interests to ensure, among other things, that BRE Global
acts in a manner that is beyond reproach, operates our processes correctly, treats our customers fairly and is
always acting for the public good.
2. Process of certification
Independence is a key feature of BREEAM as it provides confidence to the consumer. Assessors are trained and
licensed by BRE to undertake the BREEAM assessment and determine a rating. To view a current list of BREEAM
Assessors visit www.greenbooklive.com
The BREEAM Assessor will evaluate the design, specification and construction of a new development using the
criteria and methodologies defined in this technical manual and it’s supporting assessment tools.
Once an assessment is complete and has achieved a positive outcome in the BRE Global quality assurance
procedure, a certificate will be issued. The certificate provides formal verification that the BREEAM Assessor has
completed their assessment in accordance with the requirements of the scheme and its quality standards. In turn
providing confidence to any interested party or stakeholder in the BREEAM rating and performance of the new
development.
Anyone wishing to verify a certified assessment and rating of a new development against BREEAM can do so by
either checking its BREEAM certificate, see examples in Appendix F – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction
certificates on page M, which will contain the scheme’s certification mark (see Figure 1 on the facing page), or by
searching the project listings on Green Book Live www.greenbooklive.com.
Figure 1 The BREEAM Certification mark
All NSOs are required to maintain scheme operations to internationally agreed standards and seek accreditation
from a national accreditation body to demonstrate competence, impartiality and performance capability.
BREEAM UK New Construction

The BREEAM UK New Construction scheme is a performance based assessment method and certification scheme
for new buildings.
The primary aim of BREEAM UK New Construction is to mitigate the life cycle impacts of new buildings on the
environment in a robust and cost effective manner. This is achieved through integration and use of the scheme by
clients and their project teams at key stages in the design and construction process.
Clients can measure, evaluate and reflect the performance of their new building against best practice in an
independent and robust manner.
Performance is quantified by individual measures and associated criteria stretching across a range of
environmental issues and expressed as a single certified BREEAM rating, i.e. the label.
Table 1 BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 environmental sections and assessment issues
Management Health and wellbeing
– Project brief and design – Visual comfort
– Life cycle cost and service life planning – Indoor air quality
– Responsible construction practices – Safe containment in laboratories
– Commissioning and handover – Thermal comfort
– Aftercare – Acoustic performance
– Safety and security
– Safe and healthy surroundings
Energy Transport - subject to consultation
– Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions – Public transport accessibility
– Energy monitoring – Proximity to amenities
– External lighting – Cyclist facilities
– Low carbon design – Maximum car parking capacity
– Energy efficient cold storage – Travel plan
– Energy efficient transport systems
– Energy efficient laboratory systems
– Energy efficient equipment
Water Materials
– Water consumption – Building life cycle assessment
– Water monitoring – Environmental Product Declarations
– Water leak detection – Responsible sourcing of materials
– Water efficient equipment – Designing for durability and resilience
– Material efficiency
Waste Land use and ecology - subject to consultation
– Construction waste management – Site selection
– Low impact aggregates in the construction process
– Operational waste
– Speculative floor and ceiling finishes
– Adaptation to climate change
– Design for disassembly and functional adaptability
Pollution Innovation
– Impact of refrigerants – Innovation
– Local air quality
– Surface water run-off
– Reduction of night time light pollution
– Reduction of noise pollution
When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme 21
When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New

Construction scheme
Early engagement with the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme and appointment of a licensed BREEAM
Assessor is important to achieve optimal integration of the methodology into the new build procurement process.
At this early stage, the performance of the building and the desired BREEAM rating can be achieved while there is
greater flexibility and choice in design solutions and spending decisions.
Figure 2 below shows the link between the BREEAM UK New Construction assessment and certification stages and
the RIBA Outline Plan of Work 2013.
Clients can use this to understand when they should ideally engage with BREEAM and appoint a BREEAM Advisory
Professional and BREEAM Assessor.
Up to date listings of licensed BREEAM UK New Construction Assessors and BREEAM Advisory Professionals are
available at Green Book Live www.greenbooklive.com.
BREEAM primarily reflects the overall performance of the building rather than just the opportunities or limitations
placed on specific stakeholders involved in the process. In the case of new builds, this means that the client, design
team, principal contractor and BREEAM Assessor, as well as other specialist disciplines, have an important role to
play throughout the procurement process, if the desired performance level is to be achieved and reflected through
the certified BREEAM rating.
Orientating the brief towards BREEAM needs to come first and foremost from the client. BRE recommends that
clients and their project teams engage with a licensed BREEAM Assessor and BREEAM Advisory Professional no
later than the Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) and ideally sooner . This will ensure that
realistic targets are set and can be met, appropriate responsibilities can be defined and understood and low or no
cost solutions to environmental impacts can be sought and applied wherever possible.
Figure 2 BREEAM assessment and certification stages and the Royal Institute of British Architects (RIBA) Outline Plan
of Work 2013
Plan of Work for BREEAM

Work sponsored by the UK government to support the use of building information modelling (BIM) introduced an
agreed pan-industry protocol, the Digital Plan of Work (DPoW). The DPoW is applicable to all construction
disciplines: infrastructure, buildings etc., and is a framework that enables the deliverables required at each stage of
a construction project, from developing the strategy through to managing the asset, to be defined. There is little
difference between the DPoW and more familiar RIBA Plan of Works 2013 (RIBAPoW), and while rapid adoption of
the DPoW is occurring, particularly for projects that may not be architecture led, primary reference in the new
version of the UK New Construction scheme continues to be the RIBAPoW.
How to use the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 23
How to use the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018

This technical document has been created to:
1. Enable licensed BREEAM Assessors to complete BREEAM assessments and determine a rating
2. Enable BRE Global Ltd to complete quality assurance evaluation of a BREEAM Assessor's assessment and
make a certification decision.
3. Aid BREEAM Advisory Professionals (AP) to undertake project team facilitation, in defining, monitoring and
successfully achieving the desired BREEAM rating
4. Act as a reference for clients and members of the project team whose proposed building is being
BREEAM-assessed.
The document has six parts:
1. Introduction to BREEAM on page 17

2. Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018scheme version on page 25
3. Scoring and rating BREEAM-assessed buildings on page 32, including minimum standards
4. The BREEAM evidential requirements on page 38
5. BREEAM categories
6. Appendices on page cdxxviii (A–G).
The Scope section describes the types of buildings and stages of assessment that this version of the BREEAM UK
New Construction scheme can be applied to. Appendices A to F provide additional scoping guidance for specific
building and project types. The Scope section can be used by clients and BREEAM Assessors to check whether this is
the correct BREEAM scheme to use for their project.
The Scoring and rating section illustrates how a building’s assessed performance is measured and rated. It outlines
the rating level benchmarks, the minimum standards for each rating level and the environmental section weightings.
It also includes a description of the BREEAM assessment issues and ‘credits’, including ‘Innovation credits’, and how
performance against these is calculated and expressed as a BREEAM rating.
The BREEAM evidential requirements section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the various
types and forms of evidence required by the BREEAM Assessor to demonstrate compliance with assessment
criteria. This includes a description of why BREEAM requires an auditable trail of evidence, a table of general types of
information produced during a building project, and therefore typically required and used as evidence of
compliance, and guidance on the differing forms of evidence that can be used and at what stages of the
assessment, such as letters of commitment.
The BREEAM categories section includes the assessment issues, categorised in 10 environmental sections. Each
issue defines a level of performance (the assessment criteria) against which the assessed building demonstrates
compliance (using appropriate project information, i.e. evidence) in order to achieve BREEAM credits.
The majority of BREEAM issues and credits are tradable so a client and their project team can pick and choose which
ones to target to build their BREEAM score and achieve the desired rating. Several assessment issues have minimum
standards, meaning that specific credits or criteria must be achieved for a particular BREEAM rating (BREEAM
minimum standards are identified in the Scoring and rating BREEAM-assessed buildings section).
Each BREEAM issue is structured as follows:
1. Issue information: contains the assessment issue reference, title, number of credits available(1) and
whether the issue forms part of the BREEAM minimum standards.
2. Aim: outlines the objective of the issue and the impact it measures or mitigates.
3. Value and context: outlines the key value of the issue and summarises beneficial outcomes resulting from
compliance with the issue criteria
4. Assessment scope: indicates how to apply the issue for different types of assessment and project specific
circumstances
5. Assessment criteria: identifies how many parts for the issue and the number of credits associated with
those parts. States each of the requirements of the issue and in affect the means by which the issue aim is
achieved and value is realised by the project, in complying. Where the building complies with all the relevant
criteria, as determined by the licensed BREEAM Assessor, the requisite number of credits can be awarded.
Some issues also have Exemplary Level Criteria with additional exemplary credits available where a building
demonstrates that it meets this criteria (refer to Innovation on page 422 for more details). Up to a
maximum of 10 Innovation credits are available.
6. Methodology: includes a description of any methodology used to determine the number of credits
achieved for a given level of building performance. It includes, for example, calculation procedures or
guidance on how to relate non-BREEAM schemes, standards or qualifications referenced to the
assessment criteria.
7. Evidence: describes the types of project information that the design team or client must provide to the
licensed BREEAM Assessor to enable verification of the building’s performance against the assessment
criteria and justification of credits awarded. The BREEAM evidence requirements section provides further
guidance on evidential requirements.
8. Definitions: includes any definition of terms used in the assessment issue
9. Checklists and tables: contains any checklists and useful tables.
10. Additional information: contains any further information relevant to the application of the assessment
criteria, or sources of additional information that may be of use in addressing the issue.
The Appendices provide supporting information relevant to either the scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction
2018 or its assessment criteria.
Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction

2018scheme version
The BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 scheme can be used to assess the environmental life cycle impacts of new
non-domestic buildings at the design and construction stages. ‘New Construction’ is defined as development that
results in a new standalone structure, or new extension to an existing structure, which will come into operation or
use for the first time upon completion of the works.
This BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 scheme version is applicable to new non-domestic buildings in the United
Kingdom only.
Type of buildings that can be assessed using the BREEAM UK

New Construction 2018 scheme version
The non-domestic building types which can be assessed and rated using this scheme version are outlined in Table 2
below. Additional guidance for some of the building types listed is also provided in the appendices (refer to the
footnotes).
Table 2 Non-domestic building types covered underBREEAM UK New Construction 2018

Building type Description
Commercial
Office – General office buildings
– Offices with research and development areas (i.e. category 1 labs only)
Industrial – Industrial unit – warehouse storage or distribution
– Industrial unit – process, manufacturing or vehicle servicing
Retail – Shop or shopping centre
– Retail park or warehouse
– ‘Over the counter’ service provider, e.g. financial, estate and employment
agencies and betting offices
– Showroom
– Restaurant, café and drinking establishment
– Hot food takeaway
Public (non-housing)
Education(2) – Preschool
– Schools and sixth form colleges
– Further educational or vocational colleges
– Higher education institutions
Healthcare(3) – Teaching or specialist hospitals
– General acute hospitals
– Community and mental health hospitals
– GP surgeries
– Health centres and clinics
Prison(4) – High security prison
– Standard secured prison
– Young offender institution and juvenile prisons
– Local prison
– Holding centre
Law Court – Law courts
– Crown and criminal courts
– County courts
– Magistrates' courts
– Civil justice centres
– Family courts
– Youth courts
– Combined courts
Building type Description

Multi-residential accommodation or supported living facility(5)
Residential institution (long – Residential care home
term stay) – Sheltered accommodation
– Residential college or school (halls of residence)
– Local authority secure residential accommodation
– Military barracks
Other
Residential institution (short – Hotel, hostel, boarding and guest house
term stay) – Secure training centre
– Residential training centre
Non-residential institution – Art gallery, museum
– Library
– Day centre, hall, civic or community centre
– Place of worship
Assembly and leisure – Cinema
– Theatre, music or concert hall
– Exhibition or conference hall
– Indoor or outdoor sports, fitness and recreation centre (with or without
pool)
Other – Transport hub (coach or bus station and above ground rail station)
– Research and development (category 2 or 3 laboratories - non-higher
education)
– Crèche
– Fire Stations
– Visitor Centres
Bespoke Building types that are not listed in this table must undergo a scoping and
tailoring exercise to facilitate an assessment and rating. For an individual
project this involves BRE Global selecting appropriate issues from the existing
pool of assessment issues to provide criteria against which the building can be
assessed. This is sometimes known as a ‘bespoke’ assessment. Further
guidance on the ‘bespoke’ process can be found in BREEAM Bespoke Process
Guidance Note GN23.
Mixed use developments and building types

Developments with a number of separate buildings of differing functional types, or a single building with different
functions, e.g. office and retail or retail and GP surgery, will require an assessment and therefore BREEAM rating and
certificate for each individual building in the development or each functional use within a single building.
This is necessary as BREEAM defines criteria and benchmarks for some assessment issues according to building
type, function and use. To maintain comparability and consistency of the assessment and BREEAM rating, a
separate registration, assessment score and rating are therefore required for each building type function or use in
the development.
Licensed Assessors will find further guidance on how to define mixed use developments for the purpose of an
assessment in Guidance Note GN10 – Mixed use developments and similar buildings (or units).
BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 assessment types

A number of assessment types are defined and can be applied to assess and rate the performance of a new
building. These are:
– Fully fitted (applicable to all buildings apart from those defined as a 'simple' building)
– Fully fitted – 'simple' building (see Appendix E – Simple Building Assessments on page I)
– Shell and Core (see Appendix D – Shell only and Shell and Core Project Assessments on page D)
– Shell only (see Appendix D – Shell only and Shell and Core Project Assessments on page D)
The assessment criteria for these options are identified in each assessment issue in this technical manual. The
assessor in collaboration with the client and design team should determine which assessment type is relevant for
their project and assess the criteria accordingly.
Similar building types (or units) on the same site

A number of separate but similar buildings, or individual units within a larger building development can be assessed
and rated with one BREEAM assessment. Further guidance on applying BREEAM in this way can be found in
Guidance Note GN10 – Mixed use developments and similar buildings (or units).
Part new-build, part refurbishment projects

For developments that are a mix of new-build and refurbishment of existing spaces the choice of scheme selection
and application is determined according to the scope of the new build and refurbishment works.
For smaller projects, where the total development area is less than 1000m², a single BREEAM assessment can be
undertaken to cover both the new-build and refurbished areas. The choice of BREEAM New Construction or
BREEAM Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme should be based on whichever (new-build or refurbishment)
constitutes the majority of the assessed floor area.
For larger projects a single New Construction assessment can be undertaken, however the refurbished areas have
to comply with assessment criteria designed for new builds, which can be more challenging in some instances. If the
development is predominantly a refurbishment with new-build extension then the BREEAM Refurbishment and Fit-
out scheme may be the most appropriate, as it contains thresholds under which a single Refurbishment and Fit-out
assessment can be completed.
Where none of the above options are deemed suitable for the project there are two further options:
Option 1: Separate BREEAM New Construction and BREEAM Refurbishment and Fit-out assessments
Under option 1, two separate BREEAM assessments would be conducted with a BREEAM New Construction
assessment undertaken on the new extension and a BREEAM Refurbishment and Fit-out assessment undertaken on
the existing building refurbishment or fit-out. Two separate certificates and ratings can be obtained to indicate the
performance of both the new extension and existing building refurbishment or fit-out.
Option 2: Bespoke BREEAM combined New Construction and Refurbishment and Fit-out assessment
Under option 2, BRE Global will produce a Bespoke criteria appendix document which will determine, for specific
BREEAM issues, which issues and assessment criteria are applicable to the part new build-part refurbishment
project. It will refer to both the BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit Out manual and the BREEAM UK New
Construction manuals. A bespoke Scoring and Reporting tool will also be produced for the project.
As part of the bespoke criteria development for issue Ene 01 we allow the new build to be assessed against the
New Construction scheme and the refurbishment against the RFO scheme. The tool performs an area-weighted
average score. It is also possible for the extension to be included under the RFO criteria where following CN6
'Extensions to existing buildings and new constructed thermal elements'. The tool also creates area-weighted
construction resource benchmarks for the Resource efficiency credit in issue Wst 01 Construction waste
management on page 332.
In determining the appropriate option for a part new build part-refurbishment project, the BREEAM Assessor
should review the scope of the proposed works and consider in particular the scope of the refurbished elements.
Considerations such as whether it is a major refurbishment, will there be a significant change of use and will the
building's thermal and structural elements remain unchanged? Using this information the assessor should advise
the client on the most suitable BREEAM version or scheme for maximising the building's environmental
performance.
Building life cycle stages covered by the

scheme version
This BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme can be used to assess and rate the environmental impacts arising from
a newly constructed building development (including external site areas), at the following life cycle stages:
1. New Build Design Stage (DS) (optional) - leading to an Interim BREEAM rating and certificate of assessment
2. New Build post-construction Stage (PCS) – leading to a Final BREEAM rating and certificate of assessment
3. New Build Verification Stage (optional) - leading to a certification relating to robust best practice, to meet
design aspirations, in the following areas:
a. post occupancy handover and commissioning processes
b. performance monitoring
c. actions undertaken post occupancy to understand and manage the actual performance of the building.
Design Stage
The DS assessment and interim BREEAM rating is optional and can be used to demonstrate the proposed new
building’s performance at the design stage of the life cycle. It is strongly recommended that assessment and
certification should occur prior to the beginning of operations on site. The BREEAM rating at this stage is labelled as
‘interim’ because it does not represent the building’s final, new construction BREEAM performance.
To complete an assessment at this stage the design must be advanced to a point where the relevant design
information is available to enable the BREEAM Assessor to evaluate and verify the building’s performance against
the criteria defined in this Scheme Document. The interim DS assessment will therefore be completed and certified
at the scheme design or detailed design stages.
Post-construction Stage (PCS)

The PCS assessment and BREEAM rating is a mandatory certification stage that can be used to demonstrate the
final ‘as-built’ performance of the building at the new construction stage of the life cycle. A final PCS assessment is
completed and certified after practical completion of the building works.
There are two approaches to assessment at the PCS:
1. A post-construction review (PCR) based on a completed interim design stage assessment

2. A standalone post-construction assessment (PCA)
A PCR serves to confirm the assessment of a the building’s ‘as-built’ performance and rating and where
appropriate that it is in accordance with the assessment certified at the interim design stage. Where an interim DS
assessment has not been carried out and a BREEAM assessment and rating is required, a full post-construction
stage assessment can be conducted.
Verification Stage
The verification stage is an optional third stage of assessment under the UK New Construction scheme. This stage
confirms the process of monitoring, reviewing and reporting on the performance of the building once occupied. It
is carried out a minimum of 12 months after occupation and would normally be before a period of 2 years has
lapsed from the date of ‘full’ occupation (defined as occupation of 70% of the occupiable space in the building).
This will focus on best practice project commissioning and handover and post occupation support and aims to
help the Design Team, Facilities Manager and building owner understand the actual performance of the building
and optimise this in line with design expectations. The assessment will review post occupancy monitoring
processes and identify where there are deficiencies to rectify or opportunities to take. The verification stage is only
applicable to fully fitted assessments, it is not available for shell only and shell and core assessments.
The verification stage will also entail a review of commitments made at the Post Construction stage within the UK
New Construction scheme .
Building life cycle stages covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 scheme version 29
In order to complete the verification stage, various issues in the UK New Construction scheme need to be achieved
at the post construction stage, as follows:
1. Man 05 Aftercare on page lxxx (3 credits)

2. Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions on page clix (4 credits)
3. Wat 01 Water consumption on page cclx (up to 5 credits)
For these issues, evidence must be collated after the building has been handed over to demonstrate compliance at
the verification stage. Evidence requirements are detailed in the individual assessment issues.
Additional credits are available within the UK New Construction scheme (Ene 01) where a contractual commitment
is made to complete and achieve certification at the verification stage. The verification stage is only applicable to
fully fitted assessments and is not available for Shell only and Shell and core assessments.
The verification stage can provide an interim step between the UK New Construction Post Construction
assessment and assessment in occupation under BREEAM In-Use. It provides a more realistic view of building
performance and occupation patterns than is possible at the new construction stage and so, helps to ensure that
the building performs as expected.
A more specific consultation on the details of the Verification stage process will follow this DRAFT manual and can
be found here.
Buildings types not covered under the

scheme version
Building types not listed in Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018scheme version �Table 2 on page 25
will fall into one of two categories, those where a current but separate BREEAM UK New Construction scheme
technical manual exists and those which currently do not have an existing and current technical manual.
Other current BREEAM New Construction schemes

Data centres
A BREEAM UK New Construction scheme 2010 version and technical manual for Data Centres (SD5068) should be
used for the assessment and certification of data centres in the UK.
Other building types not defined

If your building type is not defined in scope the of this manual, it can still be assessed using BREEAM UK New
Construction scheme. Such building types are assessed using a bespoke set of UK New Construction assessment
criteria. Licensed BREEAM Assessors and clients should refer to Guidance note GN23 for information on how to
proceed.
Building life cycle stages not covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 scheme 31
version
Building life cycle stages not covered by

the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018
scheme version
The BREEAM UK New Construction scheme is not designed to assess the environmental impacts of buildings at the
following life cycle stages:
1. Existing building major and minor refurbishments and fit-outs (See scope of BREEAM UK Refurbishment
and Fit-out scheme)
2. Existing building in operation or existing unoccupied building (BREEAM In-Use scheme)
3. Existing building de-construction (no BREEAM scheme for this life cycle stage at present)
4. Infrastructure projects (BREEAM infrastructure pilot scheme)
Scoring and rating BREEAM-assessed

buildings
Scoring and rating BREEAM-assessed buildings 33
BREEAM rating benchmarks

There are a number of elements that determine the overall performance of a new construction project assessed
using BREEAM, these are :
1. The BREEAM rating level benchmarks

2. The minimum BREEAM standards
3. The environmental section weightings
4. The BREEAM assessment issues and credits
The next sections summarise how these elements combine to produce a BREEAM rating for a new building and are
followed by a description and example calculation of a rating.
BREEAM rating benchmarks for projects assessed using the 2018 version of BREEAM UK New Construction are:
Table 3 BREEAM rating benchmarks

BREEAM Rating % score
Outstanding ≥ 85
Excellent ≥ 70
Very good ≥ 55
Good ≥ 45
Pass ≥ 30
Unclassified < 30
BREEAM rating benchmarks enable a client and all other stakeholders to compare the performance of a newly
constructed building with other BREEAM rated buildings, and the typical sustainability performance of a stock of
new non-domestic buildings in the UK.
In this respect each BREEAM rating broadly represents performance equivalent to:
1. Outstanding: Less than top 1% of UK new non-domestic buildings (innovator)

2. Excellent: Top 10% of UK new non-domestic buildings (best practice)
3. Very Good: Top 25% of UK new non-domestic buildings (advanced good practice)
4. Good: Top 50% of UK new non-domestic buildings (intermediate good practice)
5. Pass: Top 75% of UK new non-domestic buildings (standard good practice)
An unclassified BREEAM rating represents performance that is non-compliant with BREEAM, in terms of failing to
meet either the BREEAM minimum standards of performance for key environmental issues or the overall threshold
score required to achieve at least a Pass rating.
BREEAM category weightings

Category weightings are fundamental to any building environmental assessment method providing a means of
defining and ranking the relative impact of environmental issues. BREEAM uses an explicit weighting system to
determine the overall BREEAM score.
This weighting system is defined in greater detail within the BRE Global Core Process Standard (BES 5301) and it’s
supporting procedural documents. The process for defining the weightings is set out in a briefing available on the
BREEAM website.These form part of the over-arching BREEAM Standard and the Code for a Sustainable Built
Environment.
Table 4 BREEAM Environmental section weightings

Environmental section Weighting
Fully fitted out Simple building Shell and core only Shell only
Management 11% 9.5% 11% 12%
Health and Wellbeing 14% 15.5% 8.5% 7.5%
Energy 16% 14.5% 14.5% 9.5%
Transport 10% 9% 12% 14.5%
Environmental section Weighting

Fully fitted out Simple building Shell and core only Shell only
Water 7% 4.5% 4% 2%
Materials 15% 18% 18% 21.5%
Waste 6% 7.5% 7% 8.5%
Land Use and Ecology 13% 12.5% 15.5% 19%
Pollution 8% 9% 9.5% 5.5%
Total 100% 100% 100% 100%
Innovation (additional) 10% 10% 10% 10%
Minimum standards 35
Minimum standards
To ensure performance against fundamental environmental issues is not overlooked in pursuit of a particular
rating, BREEAM sets minimum standards of performance in key areas, e.g. energy, water, waste etc. The majority of
BREEAM credits can, however, be traded, so non-compliance in one area can be offset through compliance in
another to achieve the target BREEAM rating.
The minimum acceptable levels of performance for each rating are summaries in Table 5 below.
To achieve a particular BREEAM rating, the minimum overall percentage score must be achieved as well as the
minimum standards detailed in Table 5 below.
Table 5 Minimum BREEAM standards by rating level

Minimum standards by BREEAM rating level
BREEAM issue Pass Good Very Excellent Outstanding
Good
Man 03 None None None One credit Two credits
Responsible (responsible (responsible
construction construction construction
practices management) management)
Man 04 None None None Criterion 11 Criterion 11
Commissioning (Building User (Building User
and handover Guide) Guide)
Man 05 Aftercare None None None One credit ( One credit (
commissioning- commissioning-
implementation) implementation)
Ene 01 Reduction None None None Four credits Six
of energy use and
carbon emissions
Ene 02 Energy None None One credit One credit One credit
monitoring (First sub- (First sub- (First sub-
metering metering credit) metering credit)
credit)
Wat 01 Water None One credit One credit One credit Two credits
consumption
Wat 02 Water None Criterion 1 Criterion 1 Criterion 1 only Criterion 1 only
monitoring only only
Mat 03 Criterion 1 Criterion 1 Criterion 1 Criterion 1 only Criterion 1 only
Responsible only only only
sourcing of
materials
Wst 01 None None None None One credit
Construction
waste
management
Wst 03 None None None One credit One credit
Operational waste
BREEAM assessment issues and credits

BREEAM UK New Construction consists of individual assessment issues across nine environmental categories, plus a
tenth ‘innovation’ category. Each assessment issue addresses a specific building related environmental impact or
issue and is assigned a number of credits.
BREEAM credits are awarded where a development meets the best practice performance levels defined for an
assessment issue, i.e. the impact has been mitigated. For example in the case of the health and wellbeing section, a
specific building occupant-related issue has been addressed, e.g. thermal comfort.
The number of credits available for an individual assessment issue will vary and generally reflect the importance of
mitigating the impact of the assessment issue. In most cases, where there are multiple credits available, the number
awarded is based on a sliding scale or benchmark, where progressively higher standards of building performance
are rewarded with a higher number of credits.
In addition to the category section score, overall score and BREEAM rating, verified performance against individual
assessment issues also provides users with a credible set of key building performance indicators for a range of
embodied, operational and construction phase building impacts. It is therefore possible to use the method to
define performance levels in support of specific organisational policy objectives for individual environmental issues
as well as using BREEAM to define overall targets. However, be aware that design flexibility and project cost
implications can occur if design targets are set using individual issues and credit levels.
‘Credits’ for innovation

BREEAM seeks to support innovation within the construction industry and its supply chain. One way it does this is
through the availability of additional credits to recognise sustainability related benefits or performance levels not
currently recognised by standard BREEAM assessment issues and criteria. This rewards developments that go
beyond best practice in a particular aspect of sustainability, i.e. demonstrated innovation.
Awarding credits for innovation enables clients and design teams to boost their building’s BREEAM performance
and, also helps to support the market for new innovative technologies, and design or construction practices.
Two ways in which BREEAM awards innovation credits:
1. By meeting exemplary performance criteria defined within an existing BREEAM issue, i.e. going beyond the
standard BREEAM assessment criteria
2. By the project’s licensed BREEAM Assessor applying to BRE Global to have a particular building technology
or feature, design or construction method or process recognised as ‘innovative’. If the application is
successful and subsequently compliance is verified, an ‘innovation credit’ can be awarded.
Each innovation credit achieved adds 1% to a building's overall score. The maximum number of ’innovation credits’
that can be awarded for any one building is 10; therefore the maximum additional score available for ‘innovation’ is
10%.
Innovation credits can be awarded regardless of the building’s final BREEAM rating, i.e. they can be awarded at any
BREEAM rating level. Refer to Inn 01 Innovation on page 423 for more detail.
Calculating a building's BREEAM rating 37
Calculating a building's BREEAM rating

A BREEAM Assessor must determine the BREEAM rating using the appropriate assessment tools and calculators
and only a certified assessment can claim a BREEAM Rating. An indication of performance against the BREEAM
scheme can be determined by anyone using a BREEAM Pre-Assessment Estimator available from the BREEAM
website www.breeam.com.
The process of determining a BREEAM rating and an example calculation, see Table 6 below
1. For each of BREEAM’s nine categories the number of credits awarded is determined by the BREEAM
Assessor according to the number of credits available when the criteria of each assessment issue have
been met (as detailed in the technical sections of this document).
2. The percentage of available credits achieved is calculated for each section.
3. The percentage of credits achieved in each section is multiplied by the corresponding weighting for each
section to give the overall environmental category score.
4. The section scores are added together to give the overall BREEAM score.
5. The overall score is compared to the BREEAM rating benchmark levels and, provided all minimum
standards have been met, the relevant BREEAM rating is achieved.
6. An additional 1% can be added to the final BREEAM score for each innovation credit achieved (up to a
maximum of 10% with the total BREEAM score capped at 100%).
Table 6 Example BREEAM score and rating calculation

BREEAM Credits Credits % of Credits Category weighting Section
Section Achieved Available Achieved (fully fitted) Score
Management 10 21 52.38% 0.14 7.38%
Health and 14 22 63.64% 0.15 9.40%
Wellbeing
Energy 16 31 51.61% 0.21 10.74%
Transport 10 12 83.33% 0.08 6.71%
Water 7 10 70.00% 0.07 4.70%
Materials 5 14 35.71% 0.09 3.36%
Waste 6 6 100.00% 0.04 4.03%
Land Use and 5 10 50.00% 0.07 3.36%
Ecology
Pollution 8 13 61.54% 0.09 5.37%
Innovation 2 10 20.00% 0.07 1.34
%
Final BREEAM score 56.38%
BREEAM Rating VERY GOOD
Table 7 Minimum standards for a BREEAM Very Good rating

Minimum standards for BREEAM ‘Very Good’ rating Achieved?
Ene 02 Energy monitoring on page clxxiii Y
Wat 01 Water consumption on page cclx Y
Wat 02 Water monitoring on page cclxxii Y
Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials on page 307 Y
The BREEAM evidential requirements

This section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the types of evidence required to demonstrate
compliance with BREEAM issues.
Why does BREEAM require evidence?

BREEAM is a third party certification scheme operated in accordance with international standards to ensure it is
applied in a consistent , impartial and robust manner. The BREEAM Assessor's assessment report and the BRE
Global Quality Assurance and certification process are core elements of BREEAM, and they are designed to ensure
that clients can have confidence in the BREEAM rating determined by the assessor.
To maintain consistency and confidence certification requires that , all assessment decisions be based on verified
and credible project information that can be traced, i.e. decisions are evidence based. This is not only important for
compliance with the international standards to which BRE Global is accredited as a certification body, but also
manages risk to clients and BREEAM Assessors in the event that a certification outcome is challenged.
The assessment report and the BREEAM Assessor role

The role of the BREEAM Assessor is to gather project information in a competent and impartial manner and use it
to assess performance against the BREEAM scheme . To award a BREEAM credit, the assessor must be satisfied
that the evidence gathered demonstrates unambiguous compliance with all relevant criteria defined in the BREEAM
scheme. All evidence must be referenced appropriately by the assessor in their assessment submissions and made
available to BRE Global Ltd for quality assurance checks.
Clear, ordered and well referenced evidence for each BREEAM issue and criterion addressed facilitates efficient
quality assurance and a certification decision BREEAM Assessors can access further guidance on assessment
referencing in Assessor Guidance Note 01, and the 'Reporting process' webinar, both available from the Resources
section of the BREEAM Projects website.
The BREEAM Assessor determines the BREEAM rating and their submitted assessment report is the formal record
of an assessor’s audit against the criteria defined in the technical manual for a BREEAM scheme. The BREEAM
certificate issued by BRE Global provides assurance that the service provided by the assessor , i.e. the assessment
and determination of the BREEAM rating has been conducted in accordance with the requirements of the scheme.
Evidence types
Evidence does not necessarily need to be prepared specifically for the purpose of the BREEAM assessment. In many
instances, the assessor should source readily available and prepared project information to demonstrate
compliance. For this reason, BREEAM aims to avoid being prescriptive on the type of evidence required, although
some issues do require specific documents to be provided.
The BREEAM Assessor and project team will find that many assessment issues require more than one piece or type
of information to demonstrate compliance with one criterion.Alternatively, one piece of information may be
sufficient to demonstrate compliance with multiple criteria.
To help project teams and the BREEAM Assessor understand how the different types of building information
documentation they collate can be used as evidence at each stage of assessment, the evidence types are grouped
broadly into three categories:
1. General evidence type

2. Specific evidence type
3. Other evidence type.
For some assessment issues, the assessor will require a mixture of general and specific evidence types.
General evidence includes a broad list of defined building information commonly produced for a building project.
One or more pieces of this type of information can be used to demonstrate compliance for one or more of the
assessment issues and criteria, as deemed appropriate by the BREEAM Assessor for the stage of assessment.
General BREEAM evidence types are listed in Table 9 on page 41, and not specifically in the Evidence section within
each BREEAM issue. Not all general evidence types will be appropriate for all assessment issues and it is the
responsibility of the assessor to ensure that the evidence specifically demonstrates compliance and is fully
referenced in the assessment submission .
Specific evidence is particular building information that must be provided to verify compliance with the relevant
criteria for the BREEAM credit sought. In all cases this is the only type of evidence acceptable to BRE Global Ltd for
that particular issue or criteria. If the specific evidence is not provided and referenced appropriately in the
assessment submission , the Quality Assurance audit will identify it is a non-conformity and a certification decision
will be delayed until such time as the non-conformity is addressed. An example of specific evidence is a copy of the
Building Regulations output document from the approved software for BREEAM issue Ene 01 which is listed in the
evidence table for this issue.
When required, specific evidence is defined and listed in the Evidence section of the assessment issue for both
interim and final stages of assessment. Specific evidence required to demonstrate compliance with particular
criteria is listed but this evidence alone may not be sufficient to demonstrate full compliance. Additional general
evidence types may also be required. For example for Mat 01; to demonstrate compliance with criteria 1–5 at the
design stage, a copy of the Mat 01 Calculator tool is listed in the ‘Evidence’ table. However, in addition to the Mat 01
Calculator tool, further evidence is required to demonstrate how the inputs for this tool have been determined, i.e.
general evidence types such as building specifications or drawings etc., confirming the material specifications to be
used. Not all BREEAM issues have specific evidence requirements.
Other types of evidence provided by a client or design team not listed in Table 9 on page 41 or the ‘Evidence’
section for each issue, can still be used. To avoid non-conformities and delays in certification, other types of
evidence must be credible, robust and traceable to the same assurance level as, or better than, specified or general
evidence types defined in the technical manual. If in doubt, BRE should be contacted prior to awarding credits and
referencing such evidence in the submission for QA and certification decision.
Written commitments at the interim stage of assessment – Design

stage
At the interim design stage of assessment letters or emails to demonstrate intent to comply with BREEAM criteria
can be used, provided they meet the requirements for communication records. Such evidence must make clear the
actions that will be undertaken and evidence that will be provided, i.e. the commitment to ensure the project's
compliance, particularly at the final stage of assessment e. The party who makes the commitment must be clearly
aware of the actions and evidence that needs to be undertaken and supplied to demonstrate compliance with
BREEAM at the final stage of assessment. For example, in many circumstances it would not be acceptable for the
design team to simply copy and paste the BREEAM criteria into a written commitment (BREEAM criteria does not
generally prescribe solutions). The commitment should specifically detail how criteria are to be achieved (the
solution) in the context of the assessment, and often copying and pasting the BREEAM criteria will not provide this
detail. This therefore does not demonstrate the degree of confidence in the solution necessary for certification.
While letters of commitment can play a role in demonstrating compliance, they are not a replacement for more
formal and established types of project information. The assessor must not award credits where they have a
reason to doubt the validity or intent of written commitments, or where it is not unreasonable to expect formal
design or specification information to be available to confirm compliance.
Written commitments at the final stage of assessment – post-

construction
Two types of assessment can be carried out at the post-construction stage, a post-construction review of a design
stage assessment, or a post-construction assessment where no design stage assessment has been carried out.
The 'Final post-construction stage' column of the evidence table in each issue assumes that a design stage
assessment has been completed and certified. Where a design stage assessment has not been completed, the
assessor will need to review both the 'Interim design stage' and 'Final post-construction stage' evidence listed in the
evidence table and ensure sufficient evidence is submitted with the assessment to demonstrate compliance with
the criteria.
Evidence supplied at the post-construction stage must be reflective of the completed building and must therefore
demonstrate what has actually been implemented. For example, if sub-meters have been specified at the design
stage, evidence at the post-construction stage would need to demonstrate that these have actually been installed.
Appropriate evidence may be a site inspection report with supporting photographs or as-built drawings showing
the location of the sub-meters.
Letters of commitment cannot be used to demonstrate compliance at the final, post-construction stage of
assessment. The only exception to this is where the criteria require an action to take place after handover and
possibly during the initial stages of building operation, i.e. after completion of the post-construction stage of
assessment. An example could be a written commitment from the building owner or occupier making a
commitment to conduct post occupancy evaluation.
Evidence principles that BREEAM Assessors and the BRE

Global Ltd Quality Assurance work to
Where specific evidence is in the ‘evidence’ table within each assessment issue, this must be sourced and verified by
the BREEAM Assessor.
Where no specific evidence is listed , this means there are potentially a number of different types of ‘general’ project
information, as per Table 9 on the facing page that the BREEAM Assessor can source and use to demonstrate
compliance.
To determine whether general evidence types are appropriate for an assessment issue, the BREEAM Assessor
must consider the BREEAM evidence principles see BREEAM evidence principles below . Where the ‘general
evidence types’ meet the principles outlined in Table 8 below and the guidance provided in the ‘robustness of
evidence’ section, where appropriate, such evidence is admissible for the assessment and the BRE Global Quality
Assurance audit.
These principles are not listed in a hierarchical order and are all equally important when considering which evidence
type to assess, reference and submit.
Table 8 BREEAM evidence principles

Principle Objective A question to ask to check
1 - Evidence for all criteria and all credits sought
Evidence demonstrates that ALL relevant criteria Completeness Are all criteria covered? Have all
and sub-criteria are achieved for each credit relevant compliance notes and
sought and where relevant, is provided to definitions been addressed?
support compliance notes, definitions etc.
Where the assessor or design team deem specific
criteria not relevant to the assessment, a full
justification should be collated and then
submitted as a technical query for review by BRE
Global Ltd.
2 - Unambiguous assessment
The assessment demonstrates unambiguous Independent Would a third party (e.g. BRE
compliance and the evidence supports this review Global Ltd) come to the same
assessment. compatibility assessment decision as me
Evidence (and supporting notes) clearly based on the evidence
demonstrate to a third party reviewer that the submitted?
criteria have been met.
3 - Robust
Always ensure the Evidence type selected is Proof that Using an assessor's judgment , is
robust and relevant to the stage of assessment. evidence is the evidence robust enough to
Evidence selected contains all relevant basic robust and from demonstrate compliance with
information along with robust constituent parts a reliable source the criterion? Does the evidence
that are needed. contain all the relevant basic
(see Robustness of Evidence on the facing page information? Does it provide a
for further details on both of the above) fully auditable trail of compliance?
Principle Objective A question to ask to check

4 - Use existing evidence
Use existing project information to demonstrate Minimises Does an existing type of project
compliance. In most cases evidence should not evidence and information robustly
need to be ‘created’ for BREEAM compliance reduces time and demonstrate compliance for the
purposes. cost of credits sought?
compliance
Robustness of Evidence
Robust evidence provides confirmation that the assessment has been carried out correctly and the building
complies with the criteria for the BREEAM credits sought. The assessor should consider the following when
gathering project information and evaluating whether the evidence provided is as ‘robust’ as possible:
– Is there more than one piece of evidence that could be used to demonstrate compliance?
– Is the chosen evidence robust and appropriate to demonstrate that a particular criterion has been achieved?
Any evidence submitted for a BREEAM assessment must be robust in terms of its source and its traceability. The
minimum information the assessor must expect to see when certain types of evidence are submitted is:
Communication records: Any communication records used as evidence must provide clear confirmation of the site
name, author’s identity and role, the date and recipients identity.
Formal letters of correspondence: On company or organisation headed note-paper with a signature (electronic
signatures are acceptable). Ideally letters should be a secured document. (Please see sections relating to written
commitment for further information.)
Meeting minutes: Include date, location and attendee information (names, organisations and roles), along with a
record of the meeting and agreed actions.
Drawings: All drawings have the building or site name, phase (if applicable), title of drawing, date, revision number
and a scale.
Specification: A specification clearly relates to the project under assessment, and it has a date and revision number.
Where sections of a specification are provided the assessor should reference the extract and as a minimum submit
the front page of the specification detailing the project name, revision number and date.
Site inspection report: A site inspection report includes the building or site name, date, author and summary text to
detail what was witnessed, confirming compliance. Photographic evidence can be used to support the text in the
report.
For other types of evidence not listed, the assessor should use this minimum information list as a guide to suitable
evidence. As a minimum the evidence used to assess compliance must contain key information such as the project
name, the author, date, revision numbers etc.
Table 9 General evidence types

Ref Document or Description and notes
evidence type
E1 As constructed Information produced at the end of a project to represent what has been
information constructed. This will comprise a mixture of ‘as-built’ information or
drawings and surveys from specialist subcontractors and the ‘final
construction issue’ from design team members.
E2 Building The BIM (or BIM files) used for the project containing relevant information
information model or evidence of compliance.
(BIM)
E3 BRE Global For example the reference number for a BRE Global response to an
correspondence assessor's technical query.
reference number
E4 BREEAM Assessor’s A formal report based on the BREEAM Assessor's own survey of the site or
site inspection building to confirm compliance with BREEAM criteria. An assessor’s site

evidence type
report inspection report will be distinct from their formal BREEAM assessment
report, serving as a form of evidence of compliance in its own right, and it
may include photographs taken by the assessor as part of the survey.
E5 Building contracts The building contract (or excerpts or clauses from it) between the client
and the contractor for the construction of the project. In some instances,
the building contract may contain design duties for specialist
subcontractors or design team members.
E6 Certificates of Examples include ISO 14001, BES 6001, FSC (Forest Stewardship Council),
compliance (third EPC (environmental profile certificate), EPD (environmental product
party) declaration), Considerate Constructors etc.
E7 Communication Formal communication records between or from relevant project
records stakeholders or other third parties confirming an appointment, action or
outcome. This may be in the form of a letter, meeting minutes, email
correspondence, publication or another form of media (see also
additional guidance on following pages).
E8 Communication The strategy that sets out when the project team will meet, how they will
strategy communicate effectively and the protocols for issuing information
between the various parties, both informally and at information
exchanges.
E9 Computer aided Examples include thermal modelling, flooding, life cycle assessment, life
modelling results cycle costing, ventilation modelling etc.
and outputs
E10 Construction The specification for the project or building.(6)
specification
E11 Construction stage For example, purchase orders, metering data, log books, commissioning
data and records, reports etc.
information
E12 Contractual tree A diagram that clarifies the contractual relationship between the client and
the parties undertaking the roles required on a project.
E13 Cost information Project costs, including the cost estimate and life cycle costs.
E14 Design drawings(7) Developed Design and Technical Design, including the coordinated
architectural, structural and building services design. Site plans, drainage
designs.
E15 Design A programme setting out the strategic dates in relation to the design
programme process. It is aligned with the Project Programme but is strategic in its
nature, due to the iterative nature of the design process, particularly in the
early stages.
E16 Design A matrix that sets out who is responsible for designing each aspect of the
responsibility project and when. This document sets out the extent of any performance
matrix specified design.
E17 Feasibility study Studies undertaken to test the feasibility of the Initial Project Brief for the
site or in a specific context and to consider how site-wide issues will be
addressed.
E18 Final project brief The Initial Project Brief amended so that it is aligned with the Concept
Design and any briefing decisions made during this stage.
E19 Other third party For example, maps, public transport timetables, product data or details,
information manufacturers’ literature, government or EU standards or codes, EU
labelling.
E20 Professional An agreement to provide professional or consulting services such as
services contract designing, feasibility studies, or legal or technical advice.
E21 Professional Professional reports resulting from specialist surveys, studies or test
specialist reports results, e.g. contaminated land, ecology, flood risk assessment, surface

evidence type
water run-off report, site investigation, acoustics, indoor air quality plan,
low and zero carbon technologies study, transport analysis,
commissioning reports, passive design analysis report, free cooling
analysis report, life cycle assessment, landscape and habitat management
plan etc.
E22 Project Execution or The Project Execution Plan is produced in collaboration with the project
Quality Plan lead and lead designer, with contributions from other designers and
members of the project team. The Project Execution Plan sets out the
processes and protocols to be used to develop the design.
E23 Project The overall period for the briefing, design, construction and post
programme completion activities of a project.
E24 Project roles table A table that sets out the roles required on a project as well as defining the
stages during which those roles are required and the parties responsible
for carrying out the roles.
E25 Project strategy The strategies developed in parallel with the Concept Design to support
the design and, in certain instances, to respond to the Final Project Brief as
it is concluded. Examples include strategies for sustainability, acoustics,
handover, maintenance and operational, fire engineering, building control,
technology, health and safety, construction, travel plan, sustainable
procurement plan.
E26 Risk assessment The risk assessment considers the various design risks and other risks on a
project and how each risk will be managed and the party responsible for
managing each risk.
E27 Schedule of services A list of specific services and tasks to be undertaken by a party involved in
the project which is incorporated into their professional services contract.
E28 Strategic or initial The brief prepared following discussions with the client to ascertain the
project brief project objectives, the client’s business case and, in certain instances, in
response to site feasibility studies.
E29 BREEAM AP output Examples of evidence that could be used to demonstrate compliance with
some of the requirements of the BREEAM AP related criteria (in Man 01
and Man 03) include, but are not limited to the following:
– Meetings minutes, communication records, formal notes of
conversations and other statements reporting on discussions related to
performance targets and maximising performance.
– Risks and opportunities documentation
E30 Responsible Examples of evidence that satisfy criteria 1 to 6 include, but are not limited
construction to the following:
management – Company’s policy and procedure documents (including environmental
documentation management, pollution prevention, security)
– Construction logistics plan
– Responsibility matrix
– Statement of confirmation by the ‘dedicated person on site’
– Training records
– Photographic evidence
– Records of communication with the neighbouring community
– Contracts or formal agreements
– Reporting documents and logs
– Reporting procedures
Evidence produced by third party schemes (e.g. CCS monitor’s report,

FORS, CLOCS, Yellow Jacket documentation).
xliv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Management
11% 9.5% 11% 12%
Fully fitted Simple building Shell & core Shell only
Summary
This category encourages the adoption of sustainable management practices in connection with design,
construction, commissioning, handover and aftercare. This ensures that robust sustainability objectives are set and
followed through into the operation of the building. Issues in this section focus on embedding sustainability
through the key stages of design, procurement and initial occupation, from the initial project brief stage to the
appropriate provision of aftercare.
Category summary table

Man 01 Project brief and design 4 credits
– Encouraging an integrated design process, considering BREEAM performance targets early, to influence
decision-making and optimise building performance, while avoiding unnecessary costs.
Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning 4 credits
– Promoting the business case for sustainable buildings through the enhanced understanding of capital cost.
– Improving design, specification, maintenance and operation, by encouraging the use of life cycle costing.
Man 03 Responsible construction practices min standards 6 credits
– Encouraging construction sites to be managed in an environmentally and socially considerate and responsible
manner.
– Monitoring encourages continuous improvements and utility consumption reduction.
Man 04 Commissioning and handover min standards 4 credits
– Encouraging a well-managed handover and commissioning process, which will ensure building services and
fabric defects are identified and rectified.
– The building responds to the needs of the occupants.
Man 05 Aftercare min standards 3 credits
– Encouraging aftercare support during the first year of the building operation, to ensure the building operates in
accordance with the design intent and in response to the building occupants’ needs.
Man 01 Project brief and design xlv
Man 01 Project brief and design
4 2 4 4
Fully fitted Simple building Shell & core Shell only No Minimum standard
Aim
To optimise final building designthrough recognising and encouraging an integrated design process and robust
stakeholder engagement.
Value
– Identification of variation in stakeholder
needs, so maximising benefits and
acceptability of the project in operation to
users and those affected by it.
– Enhanced project team integration and
efficiency.
– Helping to achieve project targets and
maximise opportunities for project
performance.
– Minimise risks to project performance, delays
and cost arising as a result of ongoing design
development and project changes.
– Help to meet performance expectations in
operation and so minimise the risks of a
performance gap.
Context
Early stakeholder engagement ensures that key project stakeholders are identified and engaged to determine end
user requirements and operational adaptability, allowing them to be taken in to account throughout the project.
xlvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Research(8)highlights that when project stakeholders are not satisfied with the project management quality of the
final project, the project team will need to adjust the scope, time and cost to meet stakeholder requirements and
expectations on quality issues.
Adopting integrated design and engagement processes has been demonstrated to result in improved
operational performance, greater project efficiencies and reduced risks to performance, time and cost.
Following an integrated design process, maximises the opportunities for performance and minimises risks of
design conflicts appearing later on in a project when risks to time and cost are higher.
Assessment scope
Fully fitted Simple building Shell and core Shell only

Applicable Assessment criteria All 1–7 All All
Assessment type specific notes None 9–10 (1 exemplary credit) None None
11–12 (1 exemplary credit)
Assessment type specific

None
Building type specific
1.0 Education, Healthcare, Law courts and Major Transport hub building types See criterion 8.
Man 01 Project brief and design xlvii
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into two parts:
– Stakeholder consultation (two credits)

– BREEAM Advisory Professional (AP) (two credits).
One credit - Stakeholder consultation (project delivery)

1 Prior to completion of the Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent), the project delivery stakeholders (see
Definitions on page l) meet to identify and define for each key phase of project delivery:
1.a: Roles
1.b: Responsibilities
1.c: Contributions.
2 Consider each one of the following items when defining roles, responsibilities and contributions for each key
phase of the project:
2.a: End user requirements
2.b: Aims of the design and design strategy
2.c: Particular installation and construction requirements or limitations
2.d: Occupiers' budget and technical expertise in maintaining any proposed systems
2.e: Maintainability and adaptability of the proposals
2.f: Requirements for the production of project and end user documentation
2.g: Requirements for commissioning, training and aftercare support.
Where the building occupants are not known, the list of considerations above still applies. The appropriate project
delivery stakeholder considers each item, based on likely scenarios of building occupancy.
3 The project team demonstrates how the project delivery stakeholders' contributions and the consultation
process outcomes influence the following:
3.a: Initial Project Brief
3.b: Project Execution Plan (see Definitions on page l)
3.c: Communication Strategy (see Definitions on page l)
3.d: Concept Design.
One credit - Stakeholder consultation (interested parties)

4 Prior to completion of the Concept Design stage, the design team consult with all interested parties (see
Definitions on page l) on matters that cover the minimum consultation content (see Methodology).
xlviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
5 Relevant members of the design team organise a design workshop focusing on operational energy (see Ene
01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions on page clxi).
6 Demonstrate how the stakeholder contributions and consultation exercise outcomes influence the Initial
Project Brief and Concept Design.
7 Prior to completion of the detailed design (RIBA Stage 4, Technical Design or equivalent), all interested parties
(see Definitions on page l) give and receive consultation feedback .
Additionally for Education, Healthcare, Law courts and Major transport hub
building types only:
8 An independent party (see Definitions on page l) carries out the consultation exercise. As an example, the
Design Quality Indicator (DQI) could be used as a method to assess the design quality of buildings.
Prerequisite for BREEAM Advisory Professional credits (Concept and

DevelopedDesign)
9 The project team, including the client, formally agree strategic performance targets (see Definitions on page l)
early in the design process (with the support of the BREEAM AP where appointed).
One credit - BREEAM AP (Concept Design)

10 Involve a BREEAM AP in the project at an appropriate time and level to:
10.a:Work with the project team, including the client, to consider the links between BREEAM issues and assist
them in maximising the project’s overall performance against BREEAM, from their appointment and
throughout the Concept Design stage.
10.b:Monitor progress against the performance targets (see Definitions on page l) agreed under criterion 9
above throughout all stages after their appointment where decisions critically impact BREEAM
performance.
10.c:Proactively identify risks and opportunities related to the achievement of the targets agreed under
criterion 9 above.
10.d:Provide feedback to the project team as appropriate, to support them in taking corrective actions and
achieving their agreed performance targets.
10.e:Monitor and, where relevant, coordinate the generation of appropriate evidence by the project team.
One credit - BREEAM AP (Developed Design)

11 Criteria 9 and 10 above are achieved.
12 Involve the BREEAM AP in the project at an appropriate time and level to:
12.a:Work with the project team, including the client, to consider the links between BREEAM issues and to assist
them in maximising the project’s overall performance against BREEAM throughout the Developed Design
stages.
12.b:Monitor progress against the performance targets agreed under criterion 9 above throughout all stages
where decisions critically impact the specification and tendering process and the BREEAM performance.
12.c:Proactively identify risks and opportunities related to the achievement of the targets agreed under
criterion 9 above.
12.d:Provide feedback to the project team as appropriate, to support them in taking corrective actions and
achieving their agreed performance targets.
12.e:Monitor and, where relevant, coordinate the generation of appropriate evidence by the project team.
Man 01 Project brief and design xlix
Compliance notes
Compliance notes are located in Appendix G – Notes for compliance on page 18 for the consultation. These
compliance notes will be available through the knowledge base when the scheme goes live.
Methodology
Minimum consultation content

The minimum consultation content (see criterion 4 on page xlvii) of the consultation plan is dependent on the
building, but typically includes:
1. Functionality, build quality and impact (including aesthetics).

2. Provision of appropriate internal and external facilities (for future building occupants and visitors or users).
3. Management and operational implications.
4. Maintenance resources implications.
5. Impacts on the local community, e.g. local traffic or transport impact.
6. Opportunities for shared use of facilities and infrastructure with the community or appropriate
stakeholders.
7. Compliance with statutory (national or local) consultation requirements.
8. Inclusive and accessible design.
In the case of educational building types, minimum content also includes:
9. How the building or grounds could best be designed to facilitate learning and provide a range of social
spaces appropriate to the needs of pupils, students and other users.
In the case of building types containing technical areas or functions, e.g. laboratories, workshops etc., minimum
content also includes:
10. The end users' broad requirements for such facilities, including appropriate sizing, optimisation and
integration of equipment and systems.
In the case of transport hubs, minimum content also includes:
11. How to ensure a smooth, safe and secure transition between different modes of transport (air, rail, road,
bike and pedestrian).
Monitoring progress and providing feedback

In order to monitor progress and provide feedback, the BREEAM AP must attend key meetings (see Definitions on
the next page) with the project team during the Concept Design, Developed Design and Technical Design stages,
as defined by the RIBA Plan of Work 2013.
The role of the BREEAM AP

The AP does not have to be the same person throughout the process. However, they need to keep records of
targets, reasons behind decisions, risks etc. and make sure these are handed over if a new AP joins the team.
Early in the design process

The project team, including the client, agree performance targets early enough to enable a smooth process
without posing unnecessary barriers to achievements of criteria at a later stage. This is to ensure the performance
targets will have an influence throughout the project, including prior to planning approval.
l SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Evidence
Criteria Interim design stage Final post-construction stage

All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential
requirements on page 38 can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
4, 7 Consultation plan setting out the process As per interim design stage.
and scope of the consultation.
9–12 See E29 in The BREEAM evidential As per interim design stage.
requirements �Table 8 on page 40
Definitions
Communication strategy
The RIBA Plan of Work 2013 defines the Communication Strategy as the strategy that sets out when the project
team will meet, how they will communicate effectively and the protocols for issuing information between the
various parties, both informally and at Information Exchanges.
Concept design
The objective at this stage is to develop outline proposals including site and spatial planning, building form,
structural and building services strategies, outline specifications, preliminary cost budgets including relevant
project strategies which support or influence the design programme and the ability to comply with BREEAM
requirements as the project progresses.
Activities can include: preparing the sustainability strategy, maintenance and operational strategy, handover
strategies, carrying out risk assessments, reviewing the project programme, considering construction logistics to
ensure efficiency, developing health and safety strategy, undertaking any third party consultations as required
and any research and development aspects.
Consultation feedback
This feedback focuses on the stakeholders' suggestions, comments, recommendations and the consultation
outcomes. It includes how the suggestions and outcomes influenced, or resulted in modifications to the
proposed design and building operation or use.
Developed Design
The objective at this stage is to develop detailed design proposals for built form, layout, constructional and
structural design, building services systems, specifications and cost information based on the concept design
and project strategies. Activities can include: reviewing and updating the sustainability strategy, maintenance and
operational strategy, handover strategies, risk assessments, construction logistics and health and safety
strategies, undertaking any third party consultations as required and concluding any research and development
aspects in accordance with the design.
Man 01 Project brief and design li
Formally agree
The term 'formally agreed' relates to performance targets. Examples of formal agreements include a contract or
letters of appointment with the architect and with other relevant project team members.
Independent party
A third-party, a person or body internal to a party involved (parties involved are typically a supplier (1st party) or
purchaser (2nd party)), who shall not be involved in the issue in question, and shall not have conflicts of interests
resulting from their position.To comply with the criterion relating to the use of an independent party, the client or
design team needs to demonstrate either :
1. They have used a party independent of the design process to conduct the necessary consultation
exercise; OR
2. If the consultation is to be carried out by an organisation involved with the design of the building, e.g. the
project architect, then they must present the assessor with evidence that robustly demonstrates the
independence of the consultation process. BREEAM has not attempted to define what form this
evidence must take; the onus is on the design team or relevant individual to clearly demonstrate to the
BREEAM Assessor a credible level of independence.
Interested parties
This includes but is not limited to:
1. Actual or intended building users (if known) including facilities management staff or those responsible
for the day-to-day operation of the building and grounds.
2. Representative consultation group from the existing community (if the building is a new development in
an existing community) or for a community still under construction.
3. Existing partnerships and networks that have knowledge of, and experience working on, existing
buildings of the same type.
4. Potential users of any shared facilities, e.g. operators of clubs and community groups.
AND the following where relevant:
5. In educational building types, representatives of local education Authorities, board of governors etc.
6. Local or national historic or heritage groups (over and above any requirements relating to statutory
consultees).
7. Specialist service and maintenance contractors or representatives where the building function has
particular technical requirements in complex environments, e.g. buildings containing laboratories.
8. For stations, passenger focus groups, train and station operations groups.
See criterion 7 on page xlviii.
Key meetings with the project team

Key meetings are defined as those where fundamental decisions that influence or affect the building’s proposed
design and its construction are discussed and made. These decisions are also expected to have a direct and
significant impact to the building’s sustainability credentials and performance. These meetings might include:
1. Representatives of the client or developer

2. The principal contractor
3. The architect
4. Structural engineers
5. Building services engineers
6. Cost consultants
7. Environmental consultants
8. Project management consultants.
lii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Key phases
The key phases of project delivery are:
– Concept Design
– Developed Design
– Construction
– Commissioning and Handover
– In-Use occupation.
Performance targets
Performance targets refer to the BREEAM rating and minimum standards required. Where appropriate,
performance targets can be related to individual BREEAM credits. However, performance targets may also
involve other targets related to issues covered in BREEAM assessments, e.g. energy, health and wellbeing.
Project delivery stakeholders

The purpose of criterion 1 on page xlvii is to reflect the need to consider the input of all major project
stakeholders from the earliest practical stage, to ensure smooth and successful delivery of the project's
sustainability objectives. Project delivery stakeholders include the client, the building occupier (where known), the
design team and the principal contractor. Contractors' involvement ensures their input in terms of formulating
sustainable design solutions, commenting or inputting on the practicality and buildability of (one or more) design
solutions and their impact on programming, cost etc. BREEAM recognises that traditionally for some projects, the
contractor for the works is not appointed at the early project stages and therefore compliance with this criterion
would not be possible. In these instances, to ensure the aim of the criteria is upheld, the criterion is met if a suitably
experienced person with substantial construction or contracting experience in projects similar to the proposed
works is involved prior to appointment of the contractor. A suitably experienced person could be a contractor
appointed as a consultant for this stage or a construction project manager.
Project Execution Plan

The RIBA Plan of Work 2013 defines a Project Execution Plan as a plan produced in collaboration between the
project lead and lead designer, with contributions from other designers and members of the project team. The
Project Execution Plan sets out the processes and protocols to be used to develop the design. It is sometimes
referred to as a 'project quality plan'.
Project team
The composition of the project team may change through the duration of a project and may include several
members. This includes but is not limited to the client, the design teams, contractors etc.
Strategic performance targets

Strategic performance targets are set early in the design process. They cover generally the same areas as those
identified in 'performance targets' (see Definitions on page l), however they can be set at a more strategic level,
defining aspirations and project performance objectives more broadly compared to the performance targets.
Third party
A person or body that is recognised as being independent of the parties involved (parties involved are typically a
supplier (1st party) or purchaser (2nd party)), as concerns the issue in question.
Man 01 Project brief and design liii
Additional information
BREEAM Advisory Professional and existing Accredited Professionals and

Site Sustainability Managers
All current BREEAM Accredited Professionals will automatically be qualified as BREEAM Advisory Professionals and
will be able to carry out their work under the title of ‘BREEAM Advisory Professional Design and Site’ under the new
scheme. Existing Site Sustainability Managers, likewise, will automatically be qualified as BREEAM Advisory
Professionals and will be able to continue to carry out their work under the title of ‘BREEAM AP Site’.
The value of the BREEAM AP

The BREEAM AP can be called on and provide ‘scheme related’ expertise to design teams, specifiers, constructors
and other key stakeholders. This will inform decision-making and therefore identify opportunities to maximise
performance and work towards a targeted rating in the most cost-effective, timely and solutions orientated way.
An AP can work for a construction organisation frequently undertaking BREEAM related work. Moreover, the
BREEAM AP can be the same person as the BREEAM Assessor. This allows flexibility and versatility of their role.
Cost efficiencies are expected where the appointed licensed assessor also acts as the BREEAM AP for a project.
In either case, an efficient AP will coordinate with the BREEAM Assessor to ensure an efficient and smooth
assessment process, aiming to maximise the performance of the assessed project.
Soft Landings Framework

A framework written and produced by Usable Buildings Trust (UBT) and Building Services Research and Information
Association (BSRIA)(9) that seeks to promote improved briefing, design, handover and building performance in-
use. Embedding the principles of this framework within a project should ensure that the evidence is available to
demonstrate compliance with particular aspects of the criteria under this BREEAM issue. Please also note that BSRIA
has produced a BREEAM New Construction or Soft Landings interpretation note(10) for clients and design teams.
The Government Soft Landings (GSL) is a version of the Soft Landings concept tailored for use on public sector
related projects to link in with the work of the government’s Building Information Modelling Task Group. It is
expected to be mandated alongside building information modelling (BIM) Level 2 and is to be implemented by
central government departments. It should be noted that the GSL programme will become compulsory for local
government developments. Further information is available from: www.bimtaskgroup.org.
liv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life

planning
4 1 4 4

No Minimum standards
Aim
To promote the business case for sustainable buildings and to deliver whole life value by encouraging the use of life
cycle costing to improve design, specification, through-life maintenance and operation.
Value
– Provide greater confidence in future
operational and maintenance costs.
– Focus design decision-making on whole life
costs throughout the project.
– Facilitate robust funding proposals and help
to make the business case for projects.
– Increase long term asset value.
– Support potential tenants by providing
credible information on the maintenance and
operational costs of a building when
choosing a property.
– Capital cost reporting provides invaluable
feedback into the design process improving
future design decisions and helping to
reinforce the business case for more
sustainable buildings.
Context
Property procurement decisions are predominantly made on the basis of upfront capital cost and a lack of
understanding of operational factors affecting cost, performance and satisfaction. Life cycle costing (LCC) is well
established in many sectors as a means of improving the consideration of operational and maintenance factors
Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning lv
throughout the procurement process. It is becoming part of Government policy for public sector procurement, as
emphasised in the UK Construction 2025 (11) strategy document. This is related to great financial and time-related
benefits: the construction industry and Government jointly aspire to achieve a 33% reduction in both the initial cost
of construction and the life cycle cost of assets.
Assessment scope

Applicable assessment criteria All 6 All All
Assessment type specific notes None None see ref. 1.0 see ref. 1.0

1.0 Component level LCC plan must include all component types installed by the developer.
2.0 Law court buildings Responsibility for complying rests with any or all of the project team and is likely
to vary depending on the procurement route used. The project team includes the Ministry of
Justice.
lvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life

planning
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into three parts:
– Elemental life cycle cost (LCC) (two credits)

– Component level life options appraisal (one credit)
– Capital cost reporting (one credit)
Credits for each one of the three parts are awarded independently from one another.
Two credits - Elemental LCC

1 Carry out an outline, entire asset LCC plan at Process Stage 2 (equivalent to Concept Design - RIBA Stage 2)
together with any design options appraisals in line with 'Standardised method of life cycle costing for
construction procurement' PD 156865: 2008 (12).
2 The elemental LCC plan:
2.a: Provides an indication of future replacement costs over a period of analysis as required by the client (e.g.
20, 30, 50 or 60 years);
2.b: Includes service life, maintenance and operation cost estimates.
The study period should ideally be agreed by the client, in line with the design life expectancy of the building.
However, where the life expectancy of the building is not yet formally agreed (due to being at very early design
stages), the default design life of 60 years should be used for modelling purposes (in line with the UK default).
3 Demonstrate, using appropriate examples provided by the design team, how the elemental LCC plan has
been used to influence building and systems design and specification to minimise life cycle costs and maximise
critical value.
One credit - Component level LCC options appraisal

4 Develop a component level LCC options appraisal by the end of Process Stage 4 (equivalent to Technical
Design – RIBA Stage 4) in line with PD 156865: 2008. The component level LCC includes (where present):
4.a: Envelope, e.g. cladding, windows, or roofing
4.b: Services, e.g. heat source cooling source, or controls
4.c: Finishes, e.g. walls, floors or ceilings
4.d: External spaces, e.g. alternative hard landscaping, boundary protection.
The Component level LCC option appraisal should review all of the above component types (where present).
However, you do not need to consider every single example cited under each component; only a selection of those
most likely to draw valued comparisons. This is to ensure that a wide range of options are considered and help
focus the analysis on components which would benefit the most from appraisal.
5 Demonstrate, using appropriate examples provided by the design team, how the component level LCC
options appraisal has been used to influence building and systems design and specification to minimise life
cycle costs and maximise critical value.
Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning lvii
One credit - Capital cost reporting

6 Report via BREEAM Projects the capital cost for the building in pounds per square metre of internal floor area
(£k/m²). See also Methodology below and Additional informationAdditional information on page lix .
Compliance notes
Methodology
Appropriate LCC examples

The options selected to minimise life cycle costs and maximise critical value, shall be appropriate in terms of their
relative impact on project costs, future building maintenance burden and size (volume or area) and the project
stage of the project (see criteria 3 and 5 on the previous page).
At stage 2, when considering the outputs from the elemental LCC plan, examples could be in the form of elemental
appraisals (where appropriate), evolutions in concept design to reduce maintenance or replacement costs or
contracts for further elemental analysis.
At stage 4, when considering the outputs from the component level option analysis, examples are likely to be in the
form of component specifications coupled with justifications for their selection (i.e. how they reduce life cycle costs
or maximise critical value).
BSRIA Guide BG 67/2016 provides examples on identifying alternative solutions, calculating their life cycle costs and
interpreting the results.
The professional guidance note by RICS on LCC(13) summarises what is LCC and whole life costing service for both
new construction works and for the refurbishment of existing assets.
Capital cost reporting

At design stage, if the final information is not available, award the credit if the client provides the predicted capital
cost, including contingencies, and commits to providing this information for the final assessment stage. At the final
stage, if the final capital cost is not known, provide the client's or cost consultant's best estimate.
This data will be anonymised and used to inform future BREEAM performance benchmarking.
Pre-defined specifications
Where the building is constructed to a pre-defined standard specification, use the LCC elemental plan for this
specification to help demonstrate compliance.
Evidence

lviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft

1, 2 and 3 Elemental LCC plan. As per interim design stage.
4 and 5 Component level LCC options appraisal As per interim design stage.
plan.
6 Predicted capital costs via BREEAM Capital costs via BREEAM Projects.
Projects.
Definitions
Capital cost
The capital cost for the building includes the expenses related to the initial construction of the building:
– Construction, including preparatory works, materials, equipment and labour

– Site management
– Construction financing
– Insurance and taxes during construction
– Inspection and testing
Costs related to land procurement, clearance, design, statutory approvals and post occupancy aftercare are not
included.
Component level LCC options appraisal

A component level LCC options appraisal is commonly used for cost planning specification choices of systems or
component levels during design development. Component level LCC options appraisal for service life planning
requires the environment of the building and other local conditions to be identified and the fundamental
requirements to be met in planning the service life of the building. Decisions should be made on:
– the likely design life of the building (rather than the contractual design life)
– minimum functional performance criteria for each component over the building’s design life
– components that must be repairable, maintainable or replaceable within the design life of the building. Only
the key differentiators between components and systems need to be comparatively modelled.
Elemental LCC plan

This is commonly used for developing solutions at project level during options appraisals. Costs are normally at
building elemental level on the entire asset. Information may be a mix of typical benchmark costs for key
elements, comparative cost modelling or approximate estimates. It is expressed as cost per square metre of
gross internal floor area (GIFA) and presented for elemental analysis, aligned to the level of capital cost plans.
LCC
The cost of an asset or its parts throughout its life cycle, while fulfilling the performance requirements; a
methodology for systematic economic evaluation of life cycle costs over a period of analysis, as defined in the
agreed scope.
BSRIA Guide BG 67/2016
BSRIA Guide BG 67/2016 (14) on Life Cycle Costing presents a practical approach LCC for the construction and
operation of buildings and is compatible with the parts of ISO 15686 that provide recommendations for life
Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning lix
cycle costing.
This document can be used as guidance illustrating the principles of LCC. It provides examples of considering
alternative solutions, calculating and fine-tuning life cycle costs, as well as interpreting the results of this analysis.
Capital cost reporting

The lack of data related to capital and life cycle costs and benefits arising from more sustainable building design
presents a major barrier to the uptake of more sustainable solutions. This part of the issue seeks to encourage
the sharing of data to break down these barriers and to ensure that BREEAM continues to encourage cost
effective and financially beneficial solutions. This information is collected to assist research into the cost and
savings of developing sustainable or BREEAM-assessed buildings, to inform the business case for sustainability
and the ongoing development of BREEAM. All data submitted will be treated as confidential and will only be used
anonymously.
When to undertake LCC

LCC is relevant throughout the constructed asset’s life cycle, in particular during the project planning, design and
construction and also during the in-use phases. For further information please refer to guide PD 156865: 2008.
Standardised method for life cycle costing (SMLCC) for construction

The guide PD 156865: 2008 describes the SMLCC for construction procurement. The objectives of this guide are
to provide:
1. A UK standard cost data structure for LCC, which aligns with BS ISO 15686-5 and with the Building Cost
Information Service (BCIS) Standard Form of Capital Cost Analysis (SFCA) and industry recognised
occupancy cost codes. (Refer to Annexes A, B and C) (www.rics.org).
2. LCC practitioners with a standardised method of applying LCC, applicable to the UK construction
industry and to the key stages of the procurement process.
3. Process mapping the LCC stages – to help structure how to plan, generate, and interpret and present
the results for a variety of different purposes and levels of life cycle cost planning.
4. Instructions on how to define the client’s specific requirements for LCC and the required outputs and
forms of reporting – and to decide on which method of economic evaluation to apply.
5. Simplification and demystification – by providing practical guidance, instructions and definitions,
together with informative worked examples on how to undertake LCC (for construction).
6. An industry accepted methodology, to facilitate a more accurate, consistent and robust application of
LCC estimation and options appraisals, thereby creating a more effective and robust basis for LCC
analysis and benchmarking. The guide PD 156865: 2008 also seeks to help eliminate confusion over
scoping and terminology and to address concerns over the uncertainty and risks that are undermining
confidence in life cycle costs used for construction procurement. For further information, please refer to
PD 156865: 2008.
lx SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Man 03 Responsible construction practices
6 4 6 6
Minimum standards
Aim
To recognise and encourage construction sites which are managed in an environmentally and socially considerate,
responsible and accountable manner.
Value
– Prevent risks and liabilities arising from
pollution to the surrounding areas during
construction activities.
– Improve the safety of vehicle deliveries to
and around a site.
– Improve on-site and off-site health and
safety, including road safety.
– Improve project efficiency and
understanding of construction performance
through continuous construction progress
monitoring.
– Improve understanding of construction
impacts and resources helping to enhance
resource efficiency on current and future
projects.
Context
Adoption of more responsible construction practices can lead to a wide range of environmental, social and
financial benefits.
Building construction activities create many local ground, water and air quality pollution risks affecting workers on
site as well as others in the surrounding area. These can lead to significant liabilities on contractors and their clients.
Preventing pollution during construction is hence a major priority.
Man 03 Responsible construction practices lxi
The health and safety of the site operatives is a major concern within the construction sector. Within the UK
construction sector, 43 workers were fatally injured in 2015/16 and 66,000 non-fatal workplace injuries were
reported. Mental health is also a major cause of sickness and lost productivity in the construction sector with a CIOB
survey indicating almost a third of respondents felt that stress at work was impacting on their health and wellbeing.
In addition to the human cost of unaddressed mental health issues, there is also a financial one, with absences due
to sickness costing British businesses £26bn a year in lost productivity. But construction also impacts on health and
safety off site: approximately 19% of cyclist and 15% of pedestrian fatalities in the UK(15) involve large goods
vehicles over 3.5 tonnes many of which are related to construction traffic.
Monitoring health and safety procedures, resources, construction progress and site conditions is valuable in
informing construction practices and maximising project performance.
Assessment scope

Applicable assessment criteria All 1–4, 7–22 All All
Assessment type specific notes None 23–27 (1 exemplary credit) None None
26 (1 exemplary credit)
24.b see ref.1.0

1.0 As a minimum, construction waste transport covers inert materials, metals and mixed waste
groups.
None
lxii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Assessment criteria
This issue is split in to four parts:
– Environmental management (one credit)

– BREEAM Advisory Professional (AP) (site) (one credit)
– Responsible construction management (up to two credits)
– Monitoring of construction site impacts (up to two credits)
Prerequisite - Legally harvested and traded timber

1 All timber and timber-based products used during the construction process of the project are 'legally
harvested and traded timber' (see Definitions on page lxviii).
For other materials there are no prerequisite requirements at this stage.
Prerequisite - For Healthcare NHS buildings only:

2 To award any of the available credits for this issue, any party who at any stage manages the construction site
(e.g. the principal contractor, the demolition contractor) operates an Environmental Management System
(EMS) (see requirements of criterion 3 below).
One credit – Environmental management

3 Any party who at any stage manages the construction site (e.g. the principal contractor, the demolition
contractor) operates an EMS covering their main operations.
The EMS must:
3.a: Be third party certified, to ISO 14001: 2015 (16), EMAS (EU Eco-Management and Audit Scheme) or
equivalent standard;
OR
3.b: In compliance with BS 8555: 2016 (17) have:
3.b.i Appropriate structure
3.b.ii Reached implementation stage phase four ‘implementation and operation of the environmental
management system’
3.b.iii Completed defined phase audits one to four.
4 Any party who at any point manages the construction site (e.g. the principal contractor, the demolition
contractor) implements best practice pollution prevention policies and procedures on-site in accordance with
Working at construction and demolition sites: PPG6, Pollution Prevention Guidelines(18).
One credit – BREEAM AP (site)

Prerequisite for the BREEAM AP credit
5 The client and the contractor formally agree performance targets.
Man 03 Responsible construction practices lxiii
One credit – BREEAM AP (site)

6 Involve a BREEAM AP in the project at an appropriate time and level to:
6.a: Work with the project team, including the client, to consider the links between BREEAM issues and assist
them in achieving and if possible going beyond the design intent, to maximise the project’s performance
against the agreed performance targets throughout the Construction, Handover and Close Out stages.
6.b: Monitor construction progress against the performance targets agreed under criterion 5 on the previous
page throughout all stages where decisions critically impact BREEAM performance.
6.c: Proactively identify risks and opportunities related to the procurement and construction process and the
achievement of the targets agreed under criterion 5 on the previous page.
6.d: Provide feedback to the constructors and the project team as appropriate, to support them in taking
corrective actions and achieving their agreed performance targets.
6.e: Monitor and, where relevant, coordinate the generation of appropriate evidence by the project team and
the provision to the assessor.
Up to two credits - Responsible construction management

Route 1 Using the BREEAM checklist - up to two credits
One credit – Risk evaluation and implementation
7 Appoint a dedicated person to be responsible for monitoring and reporting on activities against risk
evaluation documents collected for criteria 6,8, 11 on the next page and 12 on the next page are sought.
8 The principal contractor evaluates the risks (on-site and off-site), plans and implements actions to minimise the
identified risks, covering the following, where appropriate:
8.a: Vehicle movement on and near site:
8.a.i Manage the construction site entrance to minimise the impacts related to the above arising from
vehicles approaching and leaving the site.
8.a.ii Ensure the site is accessible for delivery vehicles, including those fitted with safety features (e.g. side
under run protection).
8.a.iii Identify access routes to the site, including for heavy vehicles, that minimise traffic disruption and
safety risks to others.
8.b: Pollution management:
8.b.i Minimise risks of vibration, air, land, water, light, noise pollution etc. within the assessment zone (see
Definitions).
8.b.ii Minimise risks of vibration, air, land, water, light, noise pollution etc. in the affected areas (see
Definitions).
8.c: Tidiness:
8.c.i Practices ensure the assessment zone is safe, clean and organised at all times. This includes, but is not
limited to facilities, materials and waste storage.
8.c.ii Remove all plant, surplus materials and temporary structures from the construction zone, on
completion of the construction works.
8.d: Health and wellbeing:
8.d.i Provide processes and equipment required to respond to medical emergencies.
8.d.ii Establish initiatives by the principal contractor or employer promoting and maintaining the health
and wellbeing (e.g. occupational, physical and mental health) of the workforce.
lxiv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
8.d.iii Establish management practices and facilities encouraging equality, diversity, fair treatment and
respect of all site operatives, including accessible design, religious practices etc.
8.d.iv Provide secure, clean and organised facilities (e.g. changing and storage facilities) within a location in
the construction zone.
8.e: Security processes:
8.e.i Minimise security risks and ensure site security.
8.e.ii Minimise risks and ensure security of the neighbouring community.
One credit – Training, awareness, monitoring and reporting

9 Achieve criteria 7 and 8.
10 Achieve criterion 11 OR 12.
11 Training, awareness and feedback. The principal contractor is responsible for ensuring:
11.a:The community affected by the site works is identified, notified and kept informed on aspects of the
construction process that might influence them, ensuring that nuisance and intrusion are minimised.
11.b:Attitudes and conduct of the personnel associated with the site ensure safety and continuous
improvements to safety and nuisance.
11.c:All operatives and visitors are made aware of health and safety risks and any actions they must take to
reduce the risks within the assessment zone.
11.d:The principal contractor or employer addresses personal development needs of operatives through
training.
11.e:All relevant environmental risks and management practices are communicated to the operatives, the site
visitors and the neighbouring community.
11.f:The fleet operator (where present) undertakes driver training and awareness to promote safety within
the construction zone and off-site.
12 Monitoring and reporting. The principal contractor ensures:
12.a:The fleet operator (where present) captures, analyses and investigates any road traffic accidents, incidents
and near misses and reports them back to the principal contractor. Include all items listed under criterion 8.
12.b:All accidents, incidents and near misses are recorded and action is taken to reduce the likelihood of them
reoccurring. Include all items listed in criteria 8 and 11.
12.c:Processes are in place to facilitate collecting and recording feedback from the community and to address
any concerns related to the construction zone and works.
Route 2: Using a compliant considerate construction scheme - one credit

13 The principal contractor complies with the criteria of a ‘compliant’ organisational, local or national considerate
construction scheme and their performance against the scheme has been confirmed by independent
assessment and verification. Refer to the Definitions on page lxviii section for compliant organisational, local or
national considerate construction schemes.
Up to two credits - Monitoring of construction site impacts

14 Assign responsibility to an individual for monitoring, recording and reporting energy use, water consumption
and transport data (where measured) resulting from all on-site construction processes (and dedicated off-site
manufacturing) throughout the build programme. To ensure the robust collection of information, this
individual must have the appropriate authority and responsibility to request and access the data required.
Where appointed, the BREEAM AP could perform this role.
Man 03 Responsible construction practices lxv
First monitoring credit - Utility consumption

Energy consumption
15 Achieve criterion 14
16 Set targets for the site energy consumption in kWh (and where relevant, litres of fuel used) as a result of the use
of construction plant, equipment (mobile and fixed) and site accommodation.
17 Monitor and record data for the energy consumption described in criterion 16
18 Report the total carbon dioxide emissions (total kgCO2/project value) from the construction process via
BREEAM Projects (for the purposes of potential future BREEAM performance benchmarking).
Water consumption
20 Set targets for the potable water consumption (m³) arising from the use of construction plant, equipment
(mobile and fixed) and site accommodation.
21 Monitor and record data for the potable water consumption described in criterion 20.
22 Use the collated data to report the total net water consumption (m³), i.e. consumption minus any recycled
water use from the construction process via BREEAM Projects (for the purposes of potential future BREEAM
performance benchmarking).
Second monitoring credit - Transport of construction materials and waste

24 Set targets for transport movements and impacts resulting from delivery of the majority of construction
materials to site and construction waste from site. As a minimum cover:
24.a:Transport of materials from the point of supply to the building site, including any transport, intermediate
storage and point of supply (see Definitions on page lxviii). Monitor as a minimum:
24.a.i Materials used in major building elements (i.e. those defined in BREEAM issue Mat 01 Environmental
impacts from construction products - Building life cycle assessment on page 287).
24.a.iiGround works and landscaping materials.
24.b:Transport of construction waste from the construction gate to waste disposal processing or recovery
centre gate. This monitoring must cover the construction waste groups outlined in the project's resource
management plan.
25 Monitor and record data for the transport movements as described in criterion 24 above.
26 Using the collated data, report separately for materials and waste, the total transport-related carbon dioxide
emissions (kgCO2 eq), plus total distance travelled (km) via BREEAM Projects (for the purposes of potential
future BREEAM performance benchmarking).
Exemplary level criteria: one credit

To achieve an exemplary performance credit:
27 Responsible construction management, criteria 7 to 12 are achieved.
Compliance notes
lxvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Methodology
The role of the BREEAM AP

The AP does not have to be the same person throughout the process. However, they need to keep records of
targets, reasons behind decisions, risks etc. and make sure these are handed over if a new AP joins the team.
BREEAM AP monitoring construction progress

To monitor construction progress against the agreed performance targets (see criterion 6.b on page lxiii), the
BREEAM AP should ideally be site based or visit the site regularly to carry out spot checks and may advise actions to
be taken to address shortcomings in compliance. The BREEAM AP should monitor site activities with sufficient
frequency to identify risks of non-compliance.
In this context, visits should occur at key stages of the construction process, at times where:
– works can be observed before they are covered up or new works or trades start
– there are significant risks of conflicts or errors occurring
– timing is critical for demonstrating compliance
– key evidence is required to be produced at specific times. This includes, but is not limited to, photographic
evidence, delivery notes and other documentary evidence.
– different trades and systems come together and one could harm the integrity or compliance of another
system's performance against BREEAM requirements.
Calculating total transport-related carbon dioxide emissions (kgeq)

Fuel and vehicle-distance conversion factors(19) published by the Department for Environment Food and Rural
Affairs (Defra) shall be used to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions from modes of transport for which carbon
conversion factors are available(20). For other modes of transport (freight, rail, sea tanker, cargo ship, planes) refer
to the Defra carbon factors for freighting goods. The first of the methodologies below that is practical to
implement must be followed for each vehicle type:
1. If data are available on the amount of fuel consumed, then multiply this by the fuel emission factor to
calculate the emissions produced.
2. If data are available on the cost of the fuel consumed, then divide this by the price (specific supplier’s price
where possible, historic average otherwise) to give the amount of fuel consumed, which can then be used
to calculate the emissions produced (via method 1).
3. If data are available on the distance travelled, vehicle loading and fuel efficiency of the vehicle at that
loading, then divide the distance by the efficiency to give an estimate of the amount of fuel consumed,
which can then be used to calculate the emissions produced (via method 1).
4. If data are available on the distance travelled and fuel efficiency of the vehicle at average loading, then
divide the distance by the efficiency to give an estimate of the amount of fuel consumed, which can then be
used to calculate the emissions produced (via method 1).
5. If data are available on the distance travelled and vehicle loading, then multiply the distance by the distance
emission factor appropriate for the vehicle type and loading to calculate an estimate of the emissions
produced.
6. If data are available only on the distance travelled, then multiply the distance by the distance emission
factor appropriate for the vehicle type at average loading to calculate an estimate of the emissions
produced.
Scope of the responsible construction management issue

This issue includes demolition and construction activities on site, from the beginning of demolition to the
completion of the construction. Where the site is taken over by the developer after demolition, the demolition
Man 03 Responsible construction practices lxvii
phase can be excluded from the scope of this part of the issue.
Training
See criterion 11.
For the purposes of this BREEAM issue, training can be teaching, or developing in oneself or others, any skills and
knowledge that relate to specific useful competencies.
Training includes, but is not limited to the following:
1. Formal external training

2. On site learning from trained or experienced people
3. Provision of training material or instructions for carrying out tasks
Responsible construction management: Frequency of monitoring

See criteria 11 and 12
Site monitoring and visits shall occur at stages where:
– significant health and safety risks or errors are likely to occur

– timing is critical for demonstrating compliance with the criteria of this issue
– key evidence is required to be produced at specific times. This includes, but is not limited to photographic
evidence, delivery notes and other documentary evidence.
Dedicated persons
This can be a member of the project team or not. The person should ideally be based on site or frequently be on
site.
This does not have to be the same person throughout the process. However, they need to keep any records
required for BREEAM evidence purposes and make sure these are handed over if a new person takes over.
There can be one or more dedicated persons on site at the same time responsible for different items within criteria
11 and 12.
Evidence

1 Refer to generic evidence requirement Where certified materials were used,
above copies of all relevant certificates or chain
of custody evidence.
3 Refer to generic evidence requirement A copy of the principal contractors
above EMS/EMAS certificate or for BS 8555,
evidence of their status, e.g. a copy of
their phase 4 audit.
13 Refer to generic evidence requirement Scheme certificate and compliance
above report.
5–14 See E29 in The BREEAM evidential As per interim design stage.
requirements �Table 8 on page 40
lxviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Definitions
Affected areas
The areas over which ecological features, animals and humans may be affected by vibration, air, land, water, light,
noise pollution etc. caused by activities within the assessment zone.
Assessment zone
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the assessment zone is defined as any land on the site which is being
developed (and therefore disturbed) for buildings, hardstanding, soft landscaping, site access, plus a 3m wide
zone measured outward from the boundary around these areas irrespective of site boundary. It also includes
any areas used for temporary site storage and buildings.
If it is not known exactly where buildings, hardstanding, site access and temporary storage will be located, it must
be assumed that the assessment zone is the entire site.
Compliant organisational, local or national considerate construction schemes

The Considerate Constructors Scheme (CCS) is defined as a compliant scheme for the purpose of this BREEAM
issue: To achieve BREEAM credits using the CCS and its Code of Considerate Practice, the principal contractor
must achieve scheme certification and a CCS score of 40 or more (a score of at least 8 in each of the five sections
must be achieved). A site can be visited by a CCS Monitor more than once and the CCS Certificate will be awarded
based on the results of the CCS Monitor’s final visit. At the final stage of the BREEAM assessment, the number of
BREEAM credits awarded shall therefore be based on the final visit and the subsequent Monitor’s report and
certified CCS score.
Where a considerate construction or constructor’s scheme exists and is not listed as a compliant scheme, the
scheme administrator or operator shall apply to BRE Global for details on how to achieve recognition as a
compliant scheme.
Considerate Constructors Scheme (CCS)

The CCS is a national initiative set up by the UK construction industry to improve its image. The scheme is a self-
financing, independent organisation owned by the Construction Umbrella Bodies (Holdings) Ltd (made up of the
Construction Products Association and the Construction Industry Council). Sites and companies that register with
the scheme sign up and are monitored against a Code of Considerate Practice, designed to encourage best
practice beyond statutory requirements.
Construction process
The construction process includes the enabling works, assembly, installation and dis-assembly activities necessary
for servicing the construction and completion of a new building.
Dedicated off-site manufacturing or fabrication

Production of a component or material carried out in an off-site manufacturing or processing facility specifically
set up for the development project.
Formally agree
The term 'formally agreed' relates to performance targets. Examples of formal agreements include a contract or
letters of appointment with the architect and with other relevant project team members.
Man 03 Responsible construction practices lxix
Legally harvested and traded timber

BREEAM follows the UK government's definition of legally sourced timber, as outlined in the Central Point of
Timber (CPET) 5th Editionon the UK Government Timber Procurement Policy (TPP). At the time of writing, the
policy requires all timber and wood-based products to be covered by at least one of the following (but the
webpage below should be checked for changes):
1. Independently verifiable legal and sustainable sources (FSC or PEFC)

2. Forest Law Enforcement, Governance and Trade (FLEGT)—licensed timber or equivalent sources
3. Evidence on a case-by-case basis in line with the Framework for Evaluating Category B evidence
For the avoidance of doubt, 100% of the timber and timber-based products must be compliant.
Further information on the UK Government's TPP and compliant responsible sourcing certification schemes is
available from the CPET website www.gov.uk/guidance/.
Reused timber formwork automatically complies. Reusable timber formwork itself does not automatically
comply. All timber used in the manufacturing of the formwork must be covered by a responsible sourcing
certification scheme (RSCS) recognised by BREEAM. See Guidance Note 18 for the BREEAM recognised RSCS
schemes.
Performance targets
Performance targets refer to the BREEAM rating and minimum standards required. Where appropriate,
performance targets can be related to individual BREEAM credits.
However, performance targets may also involve other targets related to issues covered in BREEAM
assessments, e.g. energy, health and wellbeing.
Point of supply
For the purposes of this issue, point of supply is the point where the product is supplied from to the site. This may
be the factory gate or the distribution centre, depending on the product type.
The factory gate is defined as the product manufacturer gate (i.e. where manufacture and pre-assembly finishes
and the material is in its final product form). Examples might include:
1. steel, concrete or glass manufacturers for cladding, windows and beams etc.
2. quarry gate for aggregate and sand
3. concrete plant for concrete
4. saw mill and timber processing plant for timber.
Project team
The composition of the project team may change through the duration of a project and may include several
members. This includes but is not limited to the client, the design teams, contractors etc.
CO2 reporting protocols

At time of publication, the following guidance is available for CO2 measuring protocols.
1. Encord: www.encord.org. They have launched a CO2 reporting protocol.

2. GHG Protocol - www.ghgprotocol.org.
lxx SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
3. DECC guidance for business: www.gov.uk/guidance/measuring-and-reporting-environmental-impacts-

guidance-for-businesses
Tools for monitoring and targeting construction site impacts

BRE’s online environmental reporting tool, SMARTWaste, enables users to capture, monitor and target a project's
on-site energy consumption and produce a CO2 footprint, water consumption and responsible sourcing of timber.
Transport and CCS data can also be collected. The system can be used as a tool to help meet the criteria of this
issue and as a source of evidence for demonstrating compliance. It is available through the SMARTWaste
membership scheme by developing tailor-made versions of SMARTWaste. More details on the tool and
membership are available at www.smartwaste.co.uk.
Constructing Excellence and reporting of construction site impacts

Constructing Excellence publishes the construction industry key performance indicators (KPIs) based on data
collected by the Department for Business, Innovation and Skills via a voluntary quarterly survey returned by
contractors throughout the UK. The Office of National Statistics also reports the annual results in the Construction
Statistics Annual. One of the key performance indicators is the ‘amount of CO2 emissions caused by the energy
used during the construction process per £100,000 of project value (kgCO2/£100k).
Information collated by contractors as part of their voluntary submissions to Constructing Excellence may also
serve to help demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue.
BREEAM Advisory Professional and existing Accredited Professionals and

Site Sustainability Managers
All current BREEAM Accredited Professionals will automatically be qualified as BREEAM Advisory Professionals and
will be able to carry out their work under the title of ‘BREEAM Advisory Professional Design and Site’ under the new
scheme. Existing Site Sustainability Managers, likewise, will automatically be qualified as BREEAM Advisory
Professionals and will be able to continue to carry out their work under the title of ‘BREEAM AP Site’.
The value of the BREEAM AP

The BREEAM AP can be called on and provide ‘scheme related’ expertise to design teams, specifiers, constructors
and other key stakeholders. This will inform decision-making and therefore identify opportunities to maximise
performance and work towards a targeted rating in the most cost-effective, timely and solutions orientated way.
An AP can work for a construction organisation frequently undertaking BREEAM related work. Moreover, the
BREEAM AP can be the same person as the BREEAM Assessor. This allows flexibility and versatility of their role.
Cost efficiencies are expected where the appointed licensed assessor also acts as the BREEAM AP for a project.
In either case, an efficient AP will coordinate with the BREEAM Assessor to ensure an efficient and smooth
assessment process, aiming to maximise the performance of the assessed project.
Tools and schemes for responsible construction management

There are several tools and schemes which can contribute to achieving this credit, although none of them
addresses all of the criteria on its own. Examples include but are not limited to the following: Fleet Operator
Recognition Scheme (FORS), Construction Logistics and Cyclist Safety (CLOCS) and Yellow Jacket.
Man 04 Commissioning and handover lxxi
Man 04 Commissioning and handover
4 2 4 2

Minimum standards
Aim
To encourage a properly planned handover and commissioning process that reflects the needs of the building
occupants.
lxxii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Value
– Improve actual building performance by
ensuring systems are adequately
commissioned prior to and following
handover.
– Reduce the gap between predicted design
performance and as-built actual
performance.
– Improve occupant comfort conditions and
meet end user requirements, therefore
boosting satisfaction and productivity.
– Reduce operation and maintenance costs
through robust and efficient maintenance
schedules, increased systems’ lifetime and
well trained operational and maintenance
staff.
– Allow facilities managers and building
owners to better understand the functionality of the building and how to ensure it continues to perform at
optimum levels.
Context
The performance of building services has a significant environmental, financial and health impact for buildings
occupants and owners. Operational energy consumption, and the associated CO2 emissions, can be up to five
times higher than design stage predictions(21) and much of this can be attributed to deficient management
practices and a lack of understanding of the design intentions. Badly installed and inadequately commissioned
ductwork is one of the biggest causes of poorly performing ventilation systems (www.cambridge-k1.co.uk),
leading to reductions in indoor air quality.
From a financial perspective, UK research (www.usablebuildings.co.uk) suggests that 90% of heating and
ventilating systems in buildings are ‘out of control’, costing industry and commerce an additional £500m per
annum in energy costs.
Assessment scope

Applicable assessment criteria All 2–5, 11 and 12 All 9 and 10
Assessment type specific notes None None see ref. 1.0 and 1.1 see ref. 1.1

1.0 Commissioning testing schedule and responsibilities and design and preparation is applicable
according to the scope of services being specified or installed.
1.1 The guides and training schedules include, as far as possible, all relevant sections regarding the
services and fabric installed. On completion of works the building owner, agent or user hands it
Man 04 Commissioning and handover lxxiii
over to the fit-out contractor, who can then complete the relevant sections based on the fit-out
strategy.
None
lxxiv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into four parts:
– Commissioning - testing schedule and responsibilities (one credit)

– Commissioning - design and preparation (one credit)
– Testing and inspecting building fabric (one credit)
– Handover (one credit).
One credit - Commissioning - testing schedule and responsibilities

1 Prepare a schedule of commissioning and testing. The schedule identifies and includes a suitable timescale for
commissioning and re-commissioning of all complex and non-complex building services and control systems
and for testing and inspecting building fabric.
2 The schedule identifies the appropriate standards for all commissioning activities to be conducted, where
applicable, in accordance with:
2.a: Current Building Regulations
2.b: BSRIA guidelines(22)
2.c: CIBSE guidelines(23)
2.d: Other appropriate standards (see Methodology on the facing page)
Exclude from the assessment any process or manufacture-related equipment specified as part of the project.
However, include such equipment in cases where they form an integral part of the building HVAC services, such
as some heat recovery systems.
3 Where a building management system (BMS) is specified:
3.a: Carry out commissioning of air and water systems when all control devices are installed, wired and
functional
3.b: Include physical measurements of room temperatures, off-coil temperatures and other key parameters,
as appropriate, in commissioning results
3.c: The BMS or controls installation should be running in auto with satisfactory internal conditions prior to
handover
3.d: All BMS schematics and graphics (if BMS is present) are fully installed and functional to user interface prior
to handover
3.e: Fully train the occupier or facilities team in the operation of the system.
4 Appoint an appropriate project team member to monitor and programme pre-commissioning,

commissioning and testing. Where necessary include re-commissioning activities on behalf of the client.
5 The principal contractor accounts for the commissioning and testing programme, responsibilities and criteria
within their budget and the main programme of works. Allow the required time to complete all
commissioning and testing activities prior to handover.
Man 04 Commissioning and handover lxxv
One credit - Commissioning - design and preparation

6 Achieve criteria 1 to 5.
7 During the design stage, the client or the principal contractor appoints an appropriate project team member
(see criterion 4), provided they are not involved in the general installation works for the building services
systems, with responsibility for:
7.a: Undertaking design reviews and giving advice on suitability for ease of commissioning.
7.b: Providing commissioning management input to construction programming and during installation
stages.
7.c: Management of commissioning, performance testing and handover or post-handover stages.
For buildings with complex building services and systems, this role needs to be carried out by a specialist
commissioning manager.
One credit - Testing and inspecting building fabric

9 Complete post-construction testing and inspection to quality-assure the integrity of the building fabric,
including continuity of insulation, avoidance of thermal bridging and air leakage paths (this is through air
tightness testing and a thermographic survey). A suitably qualified professional (see Definitions on page lxxviii)
undertakes the survey and testing in accordance with the appropriate standard.
10 Rectify any defects identified during post-construction testing and inspection prior to building handover and
close out. Any remedial work meets the required performance characteristics for the building or element as
defined at the design stage (see Methodology).
One credit - Handover

11 Prior to handover, develop two building user guides (see Methodology) for the following users:
11.a:A non-technical user guide for distribution to the building occupiers.
11.b:A technical user guide for the premises facilities managers.
A draft copy is developed and discussed with users first (where the building occupants are known) to ensure the
guide is most appropriate and useful to potential users.
12 Prepare two training schedules timed appropriately around handover and proposed occupation plans for the
following users:
12.a:A non-technical training schedule for the building occupiers.
12.b:A technical training schedule for the premises facilities managers.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Building user guide

The building user guides shall be building or site-specific guidance. The purpose of the guides is to help building
lxxvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
users access, understand and operate the building efficiently and in accordance with the original design intent. The
content of the guides is specific to the building type and end users, but broadly should include information on the
following:
– Overview of the building and its environmental strategy, e.g. energy, water or waste efficiency policy or strategy
and how users should engage with and deliver the policy or strategy.
– Provision of, and access to, shared facilities.
– Safety and emergency information or instructions.
– Building-related operational procedures specific to building type or operation, e.g. laboratories.
– Building-related incident reporting and feedback arrangements.
– Provision of and access to transport facilities, e.g. public transport, cyclist facilities, pedestrian routes etc.
– Provision of and access to local amenities.
– Links, references and relevant contact details.
Additionally, for the building occupiers’ guide:
– Building services overview and access to building occupant controls, e.g. where to find them, what they control,
how to operate effectively and efficiently etc.
– Pre-arrival information for visitors, e.g. access and security procedures or provisions
Additionally, for the facilities managers’ guide:
– Building services overview and access to facilities management controls, e.g. where to find them, what they
control, how to operate effectively and efficiently etc.
– Re-fit, refurbishment and maintenance arrangements or considerations
– Building related training information or links
The building user guide for building occupiers shall be written in plain English and provide easily accessible and
understandable information relevant to the building’s staff (or where relevant residents) and to other building
users, e.g., visitors or community users.
The building user guide for facilities managers can use more technical language if appropriate and provide
understandable information relevant to the professionals managing the building facilities. This guide could be part
of the operations and maintenance (O&M) manual.
There is no requirement on the format the building user guide should take.
Commissioning - testing schedule and responsibilities: other appropriate

standards
Appropriate standards for completion of criterion 2.d on page lxxiv include the following:
Building fabric
1. BS EN 13187: 1999 Thermal performance of buildings. Qualitative detection of thermal irregularities in
building envelopes. Infrared method (24)
2. BS EN ISO 9972: 2015 Thermal performance of buildings – Determination of air permeability of buildings –
Fan pressurisation method (25)
Commercial refrigeration
1. Guide to Good Commercial Refrigeration Practice, Part 5 Commissioning (26)
2. GPG 347 Installation and Commissioning of refrigeration systems (27)
Fume cupboards
1. Labs21programme: A design Guide for energy Efficient Research Laboratories: Commissioning section
(28) - (Applicable to Education building types only)
2. BS 7989:2001 Specification for recirculatory filtration fume cupboards(29)
3. BS EN 14175-4: 2004 Fume cupboards. On-site test methods(30)
4. CLEAPSS G9 Fume Cupboards in Schools - revision of DfEE (Department of Education and Employment)
Building Bulletin 88 (31)
Man 04 Commissioning and handover lxxvii
Microbiological safety cabinets

1. Labs21 programme: A design Guide for energy Efficient Research Laboratories: Commissioning section-
(Applicable to Education building types only)
Thermographic survey
Scope
The thermographic survey must cover 100% of the treated spaces, unless it is a large complex building (see below).
Ensure that all elements of the building fabric that enclose an internal heated or conditioned (treated) zone of the
building are tested. This includes internal walls separating treated and untreated zones.
Large complex buildings

In the case of large complex buildings, it may be impractical for the thermographic survey and air tightness testing
to cover 100% of the building. Where a complete thermographic survey is deemed impractical by a Level 2
qualified thermographic surveyor, the guidance in air tightness standard TSL2 (32) should be followed on the extent
of the survey and testing. This could include airports, large hospitals and high-rise buildings.
Remediation work
Any remediation work undertaken, resulting from a thermographic survey and air tightness test of the building,
should be robust and durable, i.e. the remedial work must have the same performance characteristics and life
expectancy of the surrounding elements.
Training schedule
The training schedules shall include the following as a minimum:
– The building’s design intent.
Additionally, for the building occupiers’ training schedule:
– Introduction to the building user guide for building occupiers and other relevant building documentation
Additionally, for the facilities managers’ training schedule:
– The available aftercare provision and aftercare team main contacts, including any scheduled commissioning and
post occupancy evaluation.
– Introduction to, and demonstration of, installed systems and key features, particularly building management
systems, controls and their interfaces.
– Introduction to the facilities managers’ user guide and other relevant building documentation, e.g. design data,
technical guides, maintenance strategy, operations and maintenance (O&M) manual, commissioning records, log
book etc.
– Maintenance requirements, including any maintenance contracts and regimes in place.
Evidence
Criteria Interim Final post-

design construction
stage stage
All One or more of the appropriate
evidence types listed in The
BREEAM evidential
lxxviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Criteria Interim Final post-

design construction
stage stage
requirements on page 38 can
be used to demonstrate
compliance with these criteria.
9 and 10 Refer to Thermographic
generic survey and
evidence Level 2
requirement thermography
above certificate
11 and 12 Refer to Building user
generic guide
evidence
requirement
above
Definitions
Complex systems
These include, but are not limited to, air-conditioning, comfort cooling, mechanical ventilation, displacement
ventilation, complex passive ventilation, BMS, renewable energy sources, microbiological safety cabinets and
fume cupboards, cold storage enclosures and refrigeration plant.
Specialist commissioning managers

The specialist commissioning manager is a specialist contractor rather than a general sub-contractor, who in the
opinion of the assessor has experience or qualifications that enable them to undertake the responsibilities
described in this issue.
Suitably Qualified Professionals - thermographic survey and airtightness testing

Thermography surveys and airtightness testing are to be undertaken by suitably qualified professionals in
accordance with the appropriate standards, as follows:
Airtightness testing: by professionals with membership of Air Tightness Testing and Measurement Association
(ATTMA) or Independent Air Tightness Testing Scheme (IATS) attained at organisational level maintaining UKAS
(United Kingdom Accreditation Service) accreditation (as air tightness testing laboratories to ISO 17025).
Thermographic survey: by professionals holding a valid Category 2, e.g. PCN (Personnel Certification in Non-
Destructive Testing) or QCF (Ofqual's Qualification and Credit Framework) or RQF (Regulated Qualifications
Framework) Level 4, e.g. ABBE (Awarding Body for the Built Environment), certificate in thermography (as defined
by the UKTA (UK Thermography Authority) website). Where a Category 2 or Level 4 thermographer is not
available, the survey may be undertaken by a Category 1 thermographer and then the images interpreted by a
Category 2 or Level 4 thermographer.
Thermal bridging assessments

It is good practice to carry out thermal bridging assessments at the design stage. This is encouraged through
building regulations for energy conservation by allowing the use of actual values in the energy calculation, which
could make a significant improvement over using the default values in the National Calculation Methodology.
Man 04 Commissioning and handover lxxix
This is reflected in Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions on page clix, so no additional credit is
offered within this issue for thermal bridging assessments. However, good thermal bridging design and
assessment will contribute to successful building fabric testing results and the associated credit.
Useful guidance
– Hawkins G. Commissioning Job Book - A framework for managing the commissioning process (BG 11/2010).
BSRIA; 2010.
– Parsloe C. Commissioning Water Systems (BG 2/2010). BSRIA; 2010.
– Brown R, Parsloe C. Pre-Commission Cleaning of Pipework Systems (BG 29/2012). BSRIA; 2012.
– CIBSE. CCB Commissioning Code B: Boilers. CIBSE; 2002. CIBSE. CCC Commissioning Code C: Automatic Controls.
CIBSE; 2001.
– CIBSE. CCL Commissioning Code L: Lighting. CIBSE; 2003. CIBSE. CCM Commissioning Code M: Commissioning
Management. CIBSE; 2003.
– CIBSE. CCR Commissioning Code R: Refrigerating Systems. CIBSE; 2002.
– CIBSE. CCW Commissioning Code W: Water Distribution Systems. CIBSE; 2010.
– Parsloe C. Commissioning Air Systems (BG 49/2015). BSRIA; 2015.
– Measuring air permeability of building envelopes (non-dwellings), Technical standard Level 2 (TSL2). The Air
Tightness Testing and Measurement Association (ATTMA). October 2010.
lxxx SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Man 05 Aftercare
3 3 Not applicable Not applicable
Fully fitted Simple building Shell & core Shell only Minimum standards
Aim
To ensure the building operates in accordance with the design intent and operational demands, through providing
aftercare to the building owner and occupants during the first year of occupation.
Value
– Improve building performance by
continuing to monitor and commission the
building in early stages of occupation.
– Reduce the gap between predicted design
and as-built actual energy and environmental
performance.
– Improve occupant comfort and indoor
environmental conditions to meet end user
requirements and maximise occupant health
and wellbeing.
– Increase occupant satisfaction.
– Improve learning from actual building
performance to inform future procurement,
design, construction and management
practices as well as enhance asset value and
satisfaction.
Context
Buildings seldom perform in operation as they were predicted to do during design. This is caused by a variety of
factors, but deficiencies in operational management and a lack of user understanding play a significant part in this.
Man 05 Aftercare lxxxi
A lack of communication between building designers, installers and those who will operate them is a major factor.
Improved ongoing commissioning practices can help considerably in allowing for this transfer of knowledge and
understanding as well as ironing out teething problems in the building and its systems as occupants begin to settle
in.
Post Occupancy Evaluation (POE) is increasingly recognised as a valuable means of gaining understanding on how a
building is working for those that live and work in it. POE is becoming mandatory on many public sector projects but
is valuable in all sectors as poor building performance can impact on running costs, occupant wellbeing and
business efficiency. A POE can help to identify teething problems, gaps in building operation understanding and can
help share lessons for the benefit of future new build or refurbishment projects, improving our understanding of
how buildings are actually used and operated in practice.
Assessment scope

Assessment criteria applicable All All Not applicable Not applicable
Assessment type specific notes None None None None

None
None
lxxxii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Man 05 Aftercare
Assessment criteria
– Aftercare support (one credit)

– Commissioning - implementation (one credit)
– Post Occupancy Evaluation (POE) (one credit).
One credit - Aftercare support

1 Provide aftercare support to the building occupiers through having in place operational infrastructure and
resources. This includes as a minimum:
1.a: A meeting between the aftercare support team or individual and the building occupier or management
team (prior to initial occupation, or as soon as possible thereafter) to:
1.a.i Introduce the aftercare support available, including the building user guide (where existing) and
training schedule and their content.
1.a.ii Present key information on the building including the design intent and how to use the building to
ensure it operates as efficiently and effectively as possible.
1.b: On-site facilities management training including:
1.b.i a walkabout of the building
AND
1.b.ii introduction to and familiarisation with the building systems, their controls and how to operate
them in accordance with the design intent and operational demands.
1.c: Provide initial aftercare support for at least the first month of building occupation, e.g. weekly attendance
on-site, to support building users and management (the level of frequency will depend on the complexity
of the building and building operations).
1.d: Provide longer term aftercare support for occupiers for at least the first 12 months from occupation, e.g.
a helpline, nominated individual or other appropriate system to support building users and management.
2 Establish operational infrastructure and resources to coordinate the collection and monitoring of energy and
water consumption data for a minimum of 12 months, once the building is substantially occupied. This
facilitates analysis of discrepancies between actual and predicted performance, with a view to adjusting
systems and user behaviours accordingly.
One credit - Commissioning - implementation

3 Complete the following commissioning activities over a minimum 12-month period, once the building
becomes substantially occupied:
3.a: Complex systems: The specialist commissioning manager will:
3.a.i Identify changes made by the owner or operator that might have caused any impaired
performance.
Man 05 Aftercare lxxxiii
3.a.ii Test all building services under full load conditions, i.e. heating equipment in mid-winter, cooling and
ventilation equipment in mid-summer and under part load conditions (spring and autumn).
3.a.iii Where applicable, carry out testing during periods of extreme (high or low) occupancy.
3.a.iv Interview building occupants (where they are affected by the complex services) to identify problems
or concerns regarding the effectiveness of the systems.
3.a.v Produce monthly reports comparing sub-metered energy performance to the predicted one (see
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions on page clix).
3.a.vi Identify inefficiencies and areas in need of improvement.
3.a.vii Re-commission systems (following any work needed to serve revised loads), and incorporate any
revisions in operating procedures into the operations and maintenance (O&M) manuals.
3.b: Simple systems (naturally ventilated): The external consultant, aftercare team or facilities manager will:
3.b.i Review thermal comfort, ventilation, and lighting, at three, six and nine month intervals after initial
occupation, either by measurement or occupant feedback.
3.b.ii Identify deficiencies and areas in need of improvement.
3.b.iii Re-commission systems and incorporate any relevant revisions in operating procedures into the
O&M manuals.
One credit - Post occupancy evaluation (POE)

4 The client or building occupier commits to carry out a POE exercise (see Definitions on page lxxxv) one year after
the building is substantially occupied. This gains comprehensive in-use performance feedback (see criterion
5.b.v below) and identifies gaps between design intent and in-use performance. The aim is to highlight any
improvements or interventions that need to be made and to inform operational processes.
5 An independent party (see Definitions on page lxxxv) carries out the POE covering:
5.a: A review of the design intent and construction process (review of design, procurement, construction and
handover processes).
5.b: Feedback from a wide range of building users including facilities management on the design and
environmental conditions of the building covering:
5.b.i Internal environmental conditions (light, noise, temperature, air quality)
5.b.ii Control, operation and maintenance
5.b.iii Facilities and amenities
5.b.iv Access and layout
5.b.v Energy and water consumption (see criterion 2 and Methodology
5.b.vi Other relevant issues, where appropriate (see Definitions on page lxxxv)
6 The client or building occupier commits funds to pay for the POE in advance. This requires an independent party
to be appointed to carry out the POE as described in criterion 5. Evidence of the appointment of the
independent party and schedule of responsibilities which fulfils the BREEAM criteria are acceptable to
demonstrate compliance.
Compliance notes
lxxxiv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Methodology
Data collection and provision
Collection and monitoring of energy and water consumption data

This function (see criteria 2 and 5.b.v on the previous page) can be coordinated or carried out by:
a dedicated aftercare team
OR
by the building owner or occupier's estates or facilities management team, where the building occupier is known
and able to confirm compliance based on their existing or proposed operations for the building.
Provision of annual energy and water consumption

One way of demonstrating compliance with this criterion is for the client or end user (see criterion 4) to register and
therefore commit the building for assessment under the relevant part of the BREEAM In-Use scheme.
Evidence

1 Refer to generic evidence requirement Contract to provide compliant aftercare
above support and training
2 Refer to generic evidence requirement Commissioning records, reports and
above letter of appointment
4 Refer to generic evidence requirement Where the criteria require the
above commissioning activities to be
completed over a minimum 12-month
period following (substantial) building
occupation, it is accepted that completed
records may not be available at the time
of final certification. In such cases,
evidence of the appointment of a
commissioning manager and schedule of
commissioning responsibilities which
fulfils the BREEAM criteria are acceptable
to demonstrate compliance.
Man 05 Aftercare lxxxv
Definitions
Complex systems
These include, but are not limited to, air-conditioning, comfort cooling, mechanical ventilation, displacement
ventilation, complex passive ventilation, BMS, renewable energy sources, microbiological safety cabinets and
fume cupboards, cold storage enclosures and refrigeration plant.
Independent party
A third-party, a person or body internal to a party involved (parties involved are typically a supplier (1st party) or
purchaser (2nd party)), who shall not be involved in the issue in question, and shall not have conflicts of interests
resulting from their position.To comply with the criterion relating to the use of an independent party, the client or
design team needs to demonstrate either :
1. They have used a party independent of the design process to conduct the necessary consultation
exercise; OR
2. If the consultation is to be carried out by an organisation involved with the design of the building, e.g. the
project architect, then they must present the assessor with evidence that robustly demonstrates the
independence of the consultation process. BREEAM has not attempted to define what form this
evidence must take; the onus is on the design team or relevant individual to clearly demonstrate to the
BREEAM Assessor a credible level of independence.
Other relevant issues

Other relevant issues include the following:
– Health, safety and well-being

– Building user information including training for building users and operators
– Value for money, achievement of business objectives
– Sector–specific issues, such as impacts on absenteeism in offices, infection rates in healthcare facilities, pupil
performance in schools etc.
– Sustainability performance (performance of any sustainable features or technologies, e.g. materials,
renewable energy, rainwater harvesting etc.).
POE
POE is also known as Building Performance Evaluation (BPE).
The POE is used to improve the building operation, occupants' comfort and other areas based on its outcomes.
Therefore, the POE provides suggestions on potential improvements, including, but not limited to the following:
– Re-commissioning activities
– Measures that maintain or improve end users’ comfort and productivity
– Health and safety
A POE can also be used as part of the stakeholder consultation at the briefing stage for a new building or the
refurbishment of an existing one, in cases where the building occupants are the same. This can be achieved
through the use of a questionnaire or workshops to highlight lessons from the orl or existing building that could
be taken into account in the design of the new project.
POE Methodologies
Any POE or BPE methodology that fulfils the criteria can be used. Further guidance on POE can be found in the
following resources:
lxxxvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
– BCO guide to Post Occupancy Evaluation, British Council for Offices (BCO), 2007 (33)
– BRE’s Design Quality Method (DQM) is a tried and tested, independent, post occupancy evaluation (POE)
method used by all UK auditing authorities, and many funding bodies. Further information can be found at
www.bre.co.uk
– BRE Digest 478, Building performance feedback: getting started (34)
– Guide to Post Occupancy Evaluation Report and Toolkit (35)
– The Building Use Studies (BUS) methodology is an occupant satisfaction survey that will fulfil part of the POE
credit requirement, occupant feedback stage: www.busmethodology.org.uk/.
– The Design Quality Indicator (DQI) is a method to assess the design quality of buildings. DQI is a process that
actively involves a wide group of stakeholders in the design of building. It is delivered though a facilitated
workshop that enables representatives from both the demand and supply side to work together to achieve
the best outcome. Completion of the DQI Stage 5, In-use stage workshop could fulfil part of the POE credit
requirement, the occupant feedback stage. See www.dqi.org.uk
– BSRIA Guide to Building Performance Evaluation in Non-Domestic Buildings (36) is a general introduction to BPE,
and explains why it is important and how it can be carried out.
Specialist commissioning managers

The specialist commissioning manager is a specialist contractor rather than a general sub-contractor, who in the
opinion of the assessor has experience or qualifications that enable them to undertake the responsibilities
described in this issue.
Substantially occupied
For the purposes of this BREEAM issue, a building is considered as substantially occupied when 80% of each
building function area is occupied.
Third party
A person or body that is recognised as being independent of the parties involved (parties involved are typically a
supplier (1st party) or purchaser (2nd party)), as concerns the issue in question.
Absence of predicted performance data

Where building occupiers do not have predicted performance models, it may be more appropriate to benchmark
actual building performance data with other sources of Building Performance Evaluation Data and benchmarks.
Sources of benchmarking information can be found in the following documents here: Building performance
benchmarks can be found in CIBSE Guidance including:
– CIBSE Guide F: Energy Efficiency in Buildings(37)

– CIBSE TM46: Energy Benchmarks(38)
– CIBSE TM47: Operational Ratings and Display Energy Certificate(39)
Actual building performance data can also be found here:
– CarbonBuzz: www.carbonbuzz.org
– Technology Strategy Board Building Performance Evaluation: connect.innovateuk.org
– Centre for Sustainable Energy, Display Energy Certificate Data, www.cse.org.uk
Actual vs predicted performance

In most cases it is not feasible to accurately compare predicted vs actual performance due to variances in the
assumptions used in the predicted vs actual models. Figures reported via the Carbon Buzz website show that on
average, buildings consume between 1.5 and 2.5 times the predicted values. When comparing predicted with
Man 05 Aftercare lxxxvii
actual, an analysis should be carried out to understand why there may be discrepancies in performance. These
discrepancies can be due to reasons including:
– Predicted energy consumption is normally based upon building regulation compliance models which only focus
on ‘regulated’ energy use, therefore additional unregulated energy use may not have been modelled in the
design prediction model.
– There may be extended use due to extra occupancy and operating hours, which is not accounted for in
predicted models.
– Inefficiencies from poor control, bad commissioning or poor maintenance
– Additional special functions such as cafeteria, server rooms etc. not accounted for in the predicted model.
– Variances in actual occupant behaviour that vary from the predicted one, such as use of small power and lighting.
CIBSE TM54 (40) provides guidance on how to improve the accuracy of the model for operational energy use of
buildings at the design stage. The Carbon Trust guidance, ‘Closing the gap: Lessons learned on realising the
potential of low carbon building design’(41), also provides additional guidance on this issue.
lxxxviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Health and Wellbeing
14% 13% 7% 5%
Summary
This category encourages the increased health, wellbeing and safety of building users. Issues within this category
reward building design and specification decisions that create a healthy, safe and comfortable internal and external
environment. .
Hea 01 Visual comfort Up to 5 credits
– Providing occupants with the conditions that facilitate good visual comfort by designing out the potential for
glare, achieving good practice daylight factors and having an adequate view out.
– Internal and external lighting systems are designed to provide appropriate illuminance (lux) levels to provide a
more comfortable environment for occupants and internal lighting is zoned to allow for occupant control.
Hea 02 Indoor air quality 5 credits
– Indoor air pollution is considered, and a mitigation strategy in place, early in the design process so as to facilitate
good indoor air quality. s.
– Harmful emissions from building products are managed by specifying finishes and products that have been
tested in accordance with the appropriate standards.
– Specification of an appropriate ventilation strategy that maintains good indoor air quality in-use.
Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories
2 credits
– Health and safety risks in laboratories are assessed and managed through best practice safety and
performance requirements.
– Mitigating health & nuisance effects of the dispersion and dilution of fumes from laboratories.
Hea 04 Thermal comfort 3 credits
– Thermal modelling informs the building design to provide a comfortable thermal environment that considers
current climatic conditions, and projected climate change scenario conditions.
– Occupants have control over their environment through appropriate temperature control strategies and
thermal zoning. .
Hea 05 Acoustic performance Up to 4 credits
– Occupants experience best practice acoustic performance levels appropriate to the functional activities in
occupied spaces.
Hea 06 Security 1 credit
– The building is designed to consider and take into account security needs to ensure occupants safety and
wellbeing.
Hea 07 Safe and healthy surroundings 2 credits
– External site areas are provided for safe occupant use

– The wellbeing of building users is enhanced with access to an outdoor space.
Hea 01 Visual comfort lxxxix
Hea 01 Visual comfort
up to 5 up to 5 up to 3 up to 3
Fully-fitted Simple building Shell & core Shell only

Aim
To encourage best practice in visual performance and comfort by ensuring daylighting, artificial lighting and
occupant controls are considered.
Value
– Supports building occupier health, mental
wellbeing and productivity
– Helps to provide a connection to nature by
maximising natural daylight and encouraging
an external view out
– Helps to reduce energy costs and
environmental impact by reducing the need
for artificial light
Context
Visual comfort is an important part of ensuring building occupant health, comfort and wellbeing. Reducing glare
that can cause discomfort and distraction, and enabling occupant lighting control, the building can increase
productivity of its users.By reducing the impacts of glare that can cause discomfort and distraction, and enabling
xc SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
occupants to have a level of control over their visual environment, the building can increase productivity of its users.
Maximising exposure to natural daylight and providing an external view out provides users with a connection to
nature. This can in turn support mental wellbeing, for example by improving people’s mood and reducing the
symptoms of depression. Increasing the level of daylight within the building also reduces the need for artificial
lighting, which can reduce operational costs and environmental impacts of the building. Further to this, naturally lit
environments increase occupant productivity, and support the regulation of circadian rhythms.
Assessment scope
Fully Simple Shell and core Shell only

fitted building
Applicable assessment All All 4, 5–7, 10–11, and 4, 5–7, 10–11, and
criteria 15 15
Assessment type specific None None See ref 1.0 See ref 1.0
notes

1.0 View Out
If it is not possible to confirm which areas of the building will contain workstations, benches or
desks, all areas of the building designed for or likely to be occupied by workstations, benches or
desks must comply with the relevant criteria.
2.0 Prison buildings
None The criteria for zoning of lighting control are excluded for assessments of prison buildings.
Hea 01 Visual comfort xci
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into four parts:
– Control of glare from sunlight control (one credit)

– Daylighting (up to two credits - building type dependent)
– View out (one credit all buildings, two credits healthcare buildings with inpatient areas.)
– Internal and external lighting (one credit)
One credit - Control of glare from sunlight

1 Identify areas at risk of glare using a glare control assessment. The glare control assessment also justifies any
areas deemed not at risk of glare.
2 A glare control strategy designs out potential glare in all relevant building areas where risk has been identified.
This should be achieved through building form and layout or building design measures.
3 The glare control strategy does not increase energy consumption used for lighting. This is achieved by:
3.a: Maximising daylight levels in all weather, cloudy or sunny AND
3.b: Ensuring the use or location of shading does not conflict with the operation of lighting control systems.
Up to two credits - Daylighting (building type dependent)

4 Daylighting criteria have been met using either of the following options:
4.a: The relevant building areas meet good practice daylight factors and other criterion as outlined in Table 10
and Table 11 on the next page OR
4.b: The relevant building areas meet good practice average and minimum point daylight illuminance criteria as
outlined in Table 12 on page xciii.
Additional alternative route for healthcare building types only:
4.c: The relevant building areas meet the median daylight factors and minimum daylight factors in Table 13 on
page xciv (see Methodology on page xcix).
Table 10 Minimum values of average daylight factor required

Building or area type Credits Average Minimum Other requirements
daylight area (m²) to
factor comply
required
Education buildings
Preschools, schools, further education- 2 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b)
occupied spaces and (c)} in Table 11
Higher education- 1 2% 60%
occupied spaces 2 2% 80%
Healthcare buildings
xcii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Building or area type Credits Average Minimum Other requirements

factor comply
required
Staff and public areas 1 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b)
Occupied patient’s areas (dayrooms, 2% 80% and (c)} in Table 11
wards) and consulting rooms
Staff & public areas 2 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b)
Occupied patient's areas (dayrooms, 3% 80% and (c)] in Table 11
Multi-residential buildings
Kitchen 2 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR (c) in
Living rooms, dining rooms, studies 2% 80% Table 11
(including home office)
Non-residential or communal occupied 2% 80%
spaces
Retail buildings
Sales areas 1 - 35% Point daylight
factors of 2% or
more
Other occupied areas 1 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b)
and (c)} in Table 11
Prison buildings
Cells and custody cells 2 1.5% 80% N/A
Internal association or atrium area 3% 80% EITHER a uniformity
ratio of at least 0.7
OR a minimum point
daylight factor of
2.1%
Patient care spaces 3% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b)
Teaching, lecture and seminar spaces 2% 80% EITHER (a) OR {(b)
Office Buildings
All occupied spaces, unless indicated in 2 2% 80% EITHER (a) or {(b) and
Daylighting relevant building areas on (c)} in Table 11
page cii
Crèche buildings
All occupied spaces, unless indicated in 2 2% 80% EITHER (a) or {(b) and
Daylighting relevant building areas on (c)} in Table 11
page cii
Courts, Industrial and Other building types
All occupied spaces unless indicated in 1 2% 80% EITHER (a) or [(b) and
Daylighting relevant building areas on (c)] in Table 11
page cii
Table 11 Daylighting uniformity criteria

Ref Criteria
(a) A uniformity ratio of at least 0.3. Or, a minimum point daylight factor of at least 0.3 times the
relevant average daylight factor value in Table 10 on the previous page. Spaces with glazed roofs,
such as atria, must achieve a uniformity ratio of at least 0.7. Or, a minimum point daylight factor of
at least 0.7 times the relevant average daylight factor value in Table 10.
(b) At least 80% of the room has a view of sky from desk or table top height (0.85m in multi-residential
Hea 01 Visual comfort xciii
Ref Criteria
buildings, 0.7m in other buildings).
(c) The room depth criterion d/w +d/HW < 2/(1-RB) is satisfied.
Where:
d = room depth,
w = room width,
HW = window head height from floor level,
RB = average reflectance of surfaces in the rear half of the room,
Table 18 on page xcix gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and
window head heights of side-lit rooms
Table 12 Space type and illuminance requirements - both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point
illuminance) should be met.
Area type Credits Minimum Average daylight Minimum daylight
area to illuminance (averaged illuminance at worst lit
comply over entire space) point
Education buildings
Preschools, schools, further 2 80% At least 300 lux for At least 90 lux for 2000
education - occupied 2000 hours per year or hours per year or more
spaces more
Higher education - 1 60%
occupied spaces
OR Higher education - 2 80%
occupied spaces
Healthcare buildings
Staff and public areas 1 80% At least 300 lux for At least 90 lux for 2000
2000 hours per year or hours per year or more
more
Occupied patients areas 80% At least 300 lux for At least 90 lux for 2000
(dayrooms, wards) and 2000 hours per year or hours per year or more
consulting rooms more
Staff and public areas 2 80% At least 300 lux for At least 90 lux for 2650
more
Occupied patients areas 80% At least 300 lux for At least 90 lux for 2650
(dayrooms, wards) and 2650 hours per year or hours per year or more
consulting rooms more
Multi-residential buildings
Kitchen 2 100% At least 100 lux for At least 30 lux for 3450
more
Living rooms, dining rooms, At least 100 lux for At least 30 lux for 3450
studies (including home 3450 hours per year or hours per year or more
office) more
Non-residential or 80% At least 200 lux for At least 60 lux for 2650
communal occupied spaces 2650 hours per year or hours per year or more
more
Retail buildings
Sales areas 1 35% At least 200 lux point daylight illuminances for 2650
hours per year or more
Other occupied areas 1 80% At least 200 lux for At least 60 lux for 2650
more
Prison buildings
xciv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Area type Credits Minimum Average daylight Minimum daylight

area to illuminance (averaged illuminance at worst lit
comply over entire space) point
Cells and custody cells 2 80% At least 100 lux for N/A
3150 hours per year or
more
Internal association or 80% At least 300 lux for At least 210 lux for
atrium 2650 hours per year or 2650 hours per year
more
Patient care spaces 80% At least 300 lux for At least 210 lux for
2650 hours per year or 2650 hours per year or
more more
Teaching, lecture and 80% At least 300 lux for At least 90 lux for 2000
seminar spaces 2000 hours per year or hours per year or more
more
Office buildings
All occupied spaces, unless 2 80% At least 300 lux for At least 90 lux for 2000
indicated in Daylighting 2000 hours per year or hours per year or more
relevant building areas on more
page cii
Crèche buildings
page cii
Courts, Industrial and all Other building types
page cii
Table 13 Additional alternative route for healthcare building types only

Healthcare Buildings Credits Median Minimum Minimum area
daylight daylight to comply
factor factor
Staff and public areas 1 2% 0.6% 80%
Occupied patients areas (dayrooms, 2% 0.6%
Staff and public areas 2 2% 0.6% 80%
Occupied patients areas (dayrooms, 3% 0.9%
One credit - View out

5 95% of the floor area in 95% of spaces for each relevant building area is within 8m of a wall. The wall has a
window or permanent opening that provides an adequate view out.
6 The window or opening must be 20% of the surrounding wall area (refer to Definitions on page ci). Where the
room depth is greater than 8m, compliance is only possible where the percentage of window or opening is
the same as, or greater than, the values in Table 1.0 of BS 8206 (42).
7 In addition, the building type criteria in Table 14 below are applicable to view out criteria.
Table 14 View out building specific requirements.

Building type View out requirements
Prison buildings Cells
Hea 01 Visual comfort xcv
Building type View out requirements

An adequate view out from a normal standing or sitting position.The distance
between each window and nearest external solid object (i.e. buildings, screens,
walls or fences) is ≥ 10m.
Where existing features prevent compliance with this criteria in less than 20% of
the cells within the building, the credit can still be awarded.
Patient occupied spaces
See healthcare requirements for these spaces.
Multi-residential Self-contained flats - living rooms
buildings Sheltered housing - communal lounges, individual bedrooms and bedsits
All positions within relevant areas are to be within 5m of a wall which has a
window or permanent opening providing an adequate view out. The window or
opening must be ≥ 20% of the surrounding wall area.
Healthcare buildings Patient occupied spaces, e.g. wards and dayrooms
with inpatient areas As criteria 4 and 5 for the relevant building areas PLUS the distance between the
(one additional credit) wall with the window or opening and nearest external solid object (e.g. buildings,
screens, walls or fences) is ≥10m.
One credit - Internal and external lighting levels, zoning and control
Internal lighting
8 Internal lighting in all relevant areas of the building is designed to provide illuminance (lux) levels and colouring
rendering index in accordance with the SLL Code for Lighting 2012 and any other relevant industry standard.
Internal lighting should be appropriate to the tasks undertaken, accounting for building user concentration and
comfort levels.
9 For areas where computer screens are regularly used, the lighting design complies with CIBSE Lighting Guide 7
(43) sections 2.4, 2.13 to 2.15, 2.20, and 6.10 to 6.20. This gives recommendations highlighting:
9.a: Limits to the luminance of the luminaires to avoid screen reflections. (Manufacturers’ data for the
luminaires should be sought to confirm this.)
9.b: For uplighting, the recommendations refer to the luminance of the lit ceiling rather than the luminaire; a
design team calculation is usually required to demonstrate this.
9.c: Recommendations for direct lighting, ceiling illuminance, and average wall illuminance.
External lighting
10 All external lighting located within the construction zone is specified in accordance with BS 5489-1:2013
Lighting of roads and public amenity areas(44) and BS EN 12464-2:2014 (45) Light and lighting - Lighting of
work places - Part 2: Outdoor work places. External lighting should provide illuminance levels that enable users
to perform outdoor visual tasks efficiently and accurately, especially during the night.
11 Where no external light fittings are specified (either separate from or mounted on the external building façade
or roof), the criteria relating to external lighting do not apply and the credit can be awarded on the basis of
compliance with criteria 8 above–9.c above.
Zoning and occupant control

12 Internal lighting is zoned to allow for occupant control. Zoning is in accordance with the criteria below for
relevant areas present within the building:
12.a:In office areas, zones of no more than four workplaces
12.b:Workstations adjacent to windows or atria and other building areas separately zoned and controlled
12.c:Seminar and lecture rooms: zoned for presentation and audience areas
12.d:Library spaces: separate zoning of stacks, reading and counter areas

xcvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
12.e:Teaching space or demonstration area
12.f:Whiteboard or display screen
12.g:Auditoria: zoning of seating areas, circulation space and lectern area
12.h:Dining, restaurant, café areas: separate zoning of servery and seating or dining areas
12.i: Retail: separate zoning of display and counter areas
12.j: Bar areas: separate zoning of bar and seating areas
12.k:Wards or bedded areas: zoned lighting control for individual bed spaces and control for staff over groups
of bed spaces
12.l: Treatment areas, dayrooms, waiting areas: zoning of seating and activity areas and circulation space with
controls accessible to staff.
13 Areas used for teaching, seminar or lecture purposes have lighting controls provided in accordance with CIBSE
Lighting Guide 5 (46).
14 In addition the building type criteria in Table 15 below (where relevant).
Table 15 Internal and external lighting building specific requirements.

Building type Internal and external lighting requirements
Education buildings Manual lighting controls are easily accessible for the teacher while teaching and on
entering or leaving the teaching space. Manual lighting controls need only be
provided for staff, not the children.
Prison buildings Cells
Lit to a maintained illuminance of 200 lux at table top level. In addition there must
be the facility (using, for example, dimming, step switching or separate task and
general lighting) for the occupant of the cell to select a lower level of general
lighting if required.
Exercise yards
Lit to a maintained illuminance of at least 10 lux. However, if such spaces are, or will
be, used as sports facilities they must be lit to a maintained illuminance of 100 lux.
Court buildings Separate zoning is also provided for the following areas (as a minimum):
1. Judge's or magistrate's bench
2. Dock
3. Jury area
4. Public seating area.
Lighting control of the zones in the above spaces, and the court as a whole, cater
for the following settings:
1. Full lighting (to allow cleaning etc.)
2. Normal lighting (for court sessions)
3. Dimmed (for the purpose of showing audio-visual evidence, but allowing
enough light for note taking).
Small spaces (less than Buildings consisting entirely of small rooms or spaces (less than 40m²) which do not
40m²) require any subdivision of lighting zones or control will meet the zoning criteria by
default.
Lighting zoning and The controls specified will depend on the size and use of the space but a typical
control - auditoria auditorium or lecture theatre with stepped seating and a formal lectern,
spaces demonstration or performance area would typically be expected to have lighting
controls as follows:
1. Full normal lighting (to allow for entry, exit, cleaning etc.)
2. Demonstration area lighting off and audience area lighting reduced to a
low level (for the purpose of line slide projection, but allowing enough light
for the audience to take notes)
3. All lighting off (for the projection of tone slides, colour slides, and for the
purposes of visual demonstrations or performances)
Hea 01 Visual comfort xcvii
Building type Internal and external lighting requirements

4. Separate localised lectern lighting.
Internal areas The following internal areas are excluded from the lighting zone requirements:
excluded from the 1. Media and arts production spaces
lighting zone 2. Sports facilities (exercise spaces only, including hydrotherapy and
requirements physiotherapy areas).
Exemplary level criteria

To achieve an exemplary performance credit for daylighting:
15 Daylighting criteria have been met using either of the following options:
15.a:Relevant building areas meet exemplary daylight factors and the relevant criteria in Table 16 below.
15.b:Relevant building areas meet exemplary average and minimum point daylight illuminance criteria in Table
17 on the next page.
To achieve an exemplary performance credit for Internal and external lighting levels, zoning and control:
16 Lighting in each zone can be manually dimmed by occupants down to 20% of the maximum light output using
dimmer switches positioned in accessible locations. Dimming and control gear should avoid flicker and noise.
Table 16 Exemplary level values of average daylight factor required.

Area type Credits Average Minimum Other requirements
factor comply
required
All building types The criteria outlined in Table 10 and Table 11 on page xcii concerning
uniformity ratio (a), view of sky (b) or room depth criterion (c) are met where
they are used to demonstrate compliance.
All building types (excluding retail – see below)
Functions as identified in the 1 3% 80% Where used, a minimum
standard criteria (multi- point daylight factor of
storey buildings) 1.2% OR 2.1% for spaces
with glazed roofs, such as
atria
Functions as identified in the 4% 80% Where used, a minimum
standard criteria (single point daylight factor of
storey buildings) 1.6% OR 2.8% for spaces
atria
Prisons and court cells 2% 80% N/A
Prison internal association or 5% 80% A uniformity ratio of at least
atrium area 0.7 or a minimum point
daylight factor of 3.5%
Retail
Sales areas 1 N/A 50% A minimum point daylight
factor of 2% must be
achieved in the compliant
areas. Assess total sales
areas without rounding up
to the nearest room.
Common areas and offices 3% 80% Where used, a minimum
(multi-storey buildings) point daylight factor of
1.2% OR 2.1% for spaces
xcviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Area type Credits Average Minimum Other requirements

factor comply
required
atria
Common areas and offices 4% 80% Where used, a minimum
(single storey buildings) point daylight factor of
1.6% OR 2.8% for spaces
atria
Table 17 Exemplary level illuminance value requirements. Both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point
illuminance) should be met.
Area type Credits Minimum Average daylight Minimum
area to illuminance daylight
comply (averaged over illuminance at
entire space) worst lit point
All building types (excluding retail – see below)
Multi-storey buildings 1 80% At least 300 lux At least 90 lux for
Occupied spaces for 2650 hours 2650 hours per
(unless indicated below) per year or more year or more
Single storey buildings 80% At least 300 lux At least 120 lux
Occupied spaces for 3000 hours for 3000 hours
(unless indicated below) per year or more per year or more;
or in spaces with
glazed roofs
(such as atria),
at least 210 lux
for 3000 hours
per year or more
Prisons and courts buildings 80% At least 100 lux N/A
Cells and custody cells for 3450 hours
per year or more
Prison buildings 80% At least 300 lux At least 210 lux
Internal association or atrium areas for 3250 hours for 3250 hours
per year or more per year or more
Retail
Retail buildings 1 50% At least 300 lux point daylight
Sales areas illuminances for 2000 hours per year or
more
Retail buildings 80% Select relevant
Other occupied areas criteria above for
occupied spaces
dependent on
whether you are
assessing a
multi-storey or
single- storey
building.
Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights

The table below gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and window head heights of
side-lit rooms.
Hea 01 Visual comfort xcix
Table 18 Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights
Reflectance (RB) 0.4 0.5 0.6
Room width (m) 3 10 3 10 3 10
Window head height (m)
2.5 4.5 6.7 5.4 8.0 6.8 10.0
3.0 5.0 7.7 6.0 9.2 7.5 11.5
3.5 5.4 8.6 6.5 10.4 8.1 13.0
Compliance notes
Methodology
Glare control
Glare control assessment

A glare control assessment is used to determine the areas of the building that are at risk of glare, including a
demonstration of the building areas not at risk. This can be achieved through a survey of or modelling of the
relationship between sunlight and the building. Design studies can be used to demonstrate that sunlight cannot
reach the eyes of building occupants, or the computer screens they are using, during occupied hours.
Assessing compliant forms of glare control

Control of glare from the sun is required in spaces with computer workstations such as offices, laboratories, study
bedrooms, libraries, control rooms and reception desks. It is also required in spaces where people have to spend
time in fixed locations such as classrooms, hospital wards, court rooms and factory production lines.
Compliant shading measures for meeting glare control criteria can include:
– building integrated measures (e.g. overhangs or fins)

– occupant controlled devices such as opaque Venetian or close weave (fabric blinds, where the openness factor
of blinds is 1% or less, and where the fabric light transmittance value is < 0.1 (10%))
– external shading or brise soleil.
or combination of the above.
Glare control must provide shading from both high level summer and low level winter sun. Design studies can be
used to demonstrate the sunlight is prevented from reaching the eyes of building occupants, or the computer
screens they are using, during occupied hours.
Curtains (where used without other forms of shading) do not meet the criteria for the glare control credit. This is
because they do not provide sufficient control to optimise daylight in to the space. A such, the use of curtains to
control glare is likely to cause occupants to rely more on artificial lighting.
Daylight issue calculations
Calculating the percentage of assessed area

The percentage of the total floor area of all relevant rooms must comply where the criteria specify a percentage of
floor area must have adequate daylight illuminance. For example, six relevant rooms each have a floor area of
150m²making a total relevant floor area of 900 80% of this floor area must meet the criterion, so 720m²must
c SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
comply. This is the equivalent to 4.8 rooms. The number of rooms must always be rounded up so, in this example,
five rooms must comply to achieve the credit.
Using the point daylight factor to determine compliance for retail sales areas, the minimum percentage area is
based on the total floor area being assessed. Individual 'rooms' or sub-areas do not need to meet the minimum
thresholds. This allows for typical building form restrictions and layout configurations for these types of spaces.
External obstructions
In calculating minimum and average daylight factors and daylight illuminances, external obstructions should be
taken into account. For illuminance calculations, the reflectance of external obstructions should be taken as 0.2
unless on-site measurements of external reflectance have been made.
Dirt factors
Daylight calculations should include a maintenance factor for dirt on the windows, as given in British Standard Code
of Practice for daylighting, BS 8206 Part 2, appendix A1.3.
Borrowed light
For areas where borrowed light is used to demonstrate compliance with daylighting criteria, calculations or results
from appropriate lighting design software must be provided to demonstrate that such areas meet the BREEAM
criteria (if the light from these sources is required in order for the room to comply). Examples of borrowed light
include: light shelves, clerestory glazing, sun pipes or internal translucent or transparent partitions (such as those
using frosted glass).
Room depth criterion- rooms lit from two opposite sites or via rooflights
For rooms lit by windows on two opposite sides, the maximum room depth that can be satisfactorily illuminated
by daylight is twice the limiting room depth (d) (measured from window wall to window wall; CIBSE Lighting Guide
LG10. The reflectance of the imaginary internal wall should be taken as 1.
The room depth criteria cannot be used where the lighting strategy relies on rooflights. In such areas either
appropriate software has to be used to calculate the uniformity ratio or, in the case of a regular array of rooflights
across the whole of the space, figure 2.11 (page 17) within CIBSE Lighting Guide 'LG10: Daylighting- a guide for
designers' can be used to determine the uniformity ratio.
Uniformity ratio calculation

The uniformity ratio calculation, minimum point daylight factor and minimum daylight illuminance can exclude areas
within 0.5m of walls. Areas within 0.5m are not regarded as part of the working plane for this purpose, although
they are included in the average daylight factor and average daylight illuminance calculations.
View of sky calculation

To comply with the view of sky criterion (ref (b)) in Table 11 on page xcii, at least 80% of the room that complies
with the average daylight factor requirement must receive direct light from the sky, i.e. it is permissible for up to
20% of the room not to meet the view of sky requirement and still achieve a compliant room.
Alternative route for healthcare buildings

For the calculation of median daylight factor using a grid of point daylight factors, the spacing of grid points should
not be greater than that given in section 4.4 of EN12464-1 Light and lighting- Lighting of work places Part 1:
Indoor work places. Table 19 below gives the recommended number of grid points in each linear dimension. For
example, a space 5m x 5m would have 8 x 8 = 64 grid.
In the calculations for the median daylight factor the areas within the space which are permanently occupied should
be used; this may exclude areas close to the walls unless work stations are located there.
Table 19 Recommended number of grid points

Length of the area (m) Maximum distance between grid points (m) Minimum number of grid points
Hea 01 Visual comfort ci
0.4 0.15 3
0.6 0.2 3
1 0.2 5
2 0.3 6
5 0.6 8
10 1 10
25 2 12
50 3 17
100 5 20
The median daylight factor in an area is the daylight factor exceeded over 50% of the working plane in that area.
Internal and external lighting levels, zoning and control
Occupancy or workstation layout

The limit of four workspaces is indicative of the required standard but is not a fixed requirement. Where there is
justification for this to be increased to fit with the adopted lighting strategy, this may be accepted provided that
the assessor is satisfied that the aim of this criterion is upheld, i.e. that there is suitable zoning or control of lighting
to enable a reasonable degree of occupant control over lighting in their personable work area. The relevant design
team member, e.g. lighting consultant, should set out how this is to be achieved in such an instance.
Where occupancy or workstation layout is not known, lighting control can be zoned on the basis of 40m²grids, i.e.
an assumption of 1 person or workspace per m².
Evidence

3, 4 Daylighting calculations Refer to generic evidence requirement
above
Definitions
Accessible locations
An accessible location for dimming switches is a location that can be easily accessed by all of the building users in
that zone.
Adequate view out

BREEAM defines an adequate view out as a view of a landscape or buildings (rather than just the sky) at seated
eye level (1.2 – 1.3m) within the relevant building areas and should ideally be through an external window. A view
into an internal courtyard or atrium will comply provided the distance from the opening to the back wall of the
courtyard or atrium is at least 10m (therefore allowing enough distance for the eyes to refocus). The view cannot
cii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
be an internal view across the room, as this is likely to become obstructed by partitions, filing cabinets etc. In
addition to this, an external view out can offer positive effects on health and wellbeing that cannot be offered by
an internal view.
Average daylight factor

The average daylight factor is the average indoor illuminance (from daylight) on the working plane within a room.
This is expressed as a percentage of the simultaneous outdoor illuminance on a horizontal plane under an
unobstructed CIE Standard Overcast Sky.
Clinical areas
Areas of the building in which medical functions are carried out that require specific restricted environmental
conditions such as humidity, daylighting, temperature, etc. (e.g. X-ray, operating department, delivery room, etc.).
Computer simulation
Software tools that can be used to model more complex room geometries for daylighting.
Construction zone
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the
BREEAM-assessed building. This includes the external site areas that fall within the scope of the new works.
Daylight factor
The daylight factor is defined as the ratio of the illuminance at a point on a given plane due to the light received
directly or indirectly from a sky assumed or known luminance distribution, to the illuminance on a horizontal plane
due to an unobstructed hemisphere of this sky, excluding the contribution of direct sunlight to both illuminances.
Daylighting relevant building areas

For the purpose of BREEAM this is defined as areas within the building where good daylighting is considered to
be of benefit to the building users (typically those areas occupied continuously for 30 minutes or more). This
includes the following (where occupied continuously for 30 minutes or more) specifically stated because they are
often omitted;
1. Sports hall exercise spaces

2. Laboratory areas unless the type of research that will be carried out requires strictly controlled
environmental conditions, such as the exclusion of natural light at all times.
3. Self-contained flats
4. Kitchen and catering areas
5. General communal areas
6. Small offices (including those within multi-residential buildings)
7. Meeting rooms
8. General communal areas
9. Small offices (including those within multi-residential buildings)
10. Meeting rooms (including those within multi-residential buildings)
11. Leisure areas
12. Any area that may involve close up work
However, this excludes the following (where present):
1. Media, arts production, SEN sensory spaces, x-ray rooms and other areas requiring strictly controlled
acoustic or lighting conditions
2. Clinical areas with controlled environmental conditions, e.g. operating theatres, delivery rooms or
pathology. However, BREEAM strongly advises that the benefits from daylighting and view out are
seriously considered when designing areas of critical and intensive care in healthcare buildings.
Hea 01 Visual comfort ciii
Glare control relevant building areas

For glare control include areas of the building where lighting and resultant glare could be problematic for users,
e.g. those areas that have been designed to contain or use workstations, projector screens etc. and sports halls.
Spaces in the categories described above, for which daylight and view out are excluded, should not be assessed
against the glare control criteria.
Illuminance
The amount of light falling on a surface per unit area, measured in lux.
Internal and external lighting

Where no external light fittings are specified (either separate from or mounted on the external building façade or
roof), the criteria relating to external lighting do not apply. The credit can be awarded on the basis of compliance
with the internal lighting criteria. The following internal areas are excluded from the lighting zone requirements:
1. Media and arts production spaces

2. Sports facilities (exercise spaces only, including hydrotherapy and physiotherapy areas).
Lighting zoning
For rooms or spaces not listed within 12 on page xcv, the assessor can exercise an element of judgment when
determining whether the specification is appropriate for the space given its end use, and the aim and criteria of
this BREEAM issue.
Occupied space
A room or space within the assessed building that is likely to be occupied for 30 minutes or more by a building
user. Please note there is a specific, unrelated, definition of 'unoccupied' with reference to acoustic testing and
measurement and this should not be confused with the definition used here.
Patient areas
Areas of the building used mainly by inpatients (e.g. wards, dayrooms, etc.).
Point daylight factor

A point daylight factor is expressed as a percentage based on the ratio of the daylight illuminance at a specific
point on the working plane within a room compared with the illuminance on an outdoor unobstructed horizontal
plane. An overcast sky is assumed by the ‘CIE (Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage) overcast sky’. For points
on the working plane:
– Minimum point daylight factor is the lowest value daylight factor at a point that is not within 0.5m of a wall.
– Minimum illuminance is illuminance at the worst lit point that is not within 0.5m of a wall.
– These points usually occur close to a rear corner of the room. Computer simulations are the most appropriate
tools to allow for point daylight factors and illuminances to be calculated.
Public areas
Within a healthcare building type, this includes areas of the building designed for public use where no medical
functions are carried out (e.g. reception, retail unit, waiting areas).
civ SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Separate zoning control

Light switches or controls for a particular area or zone of the building that can be accessed and operated by the
individuals occupying that area or zone. Such controls will be located within, or within the vicinity of, the zone or
area they control.
Staff areas
Areas of the building used mainly by staff (e.g. offices, meeting rooms, staff rooms) and medical areas where
patients are admitted but that do not require restricted environmental conditions (e.g. consulting rooms,
physiotherapy, etc.).
Surrounding wall area

Surrounding wall area refers to the area (in m²) of the internal wall on which the window or opening is located,
including the area of the window or opening itself.
Uniformity
The uniformity is the ratio between the minimum illuminance (from daylight) on the working plane within a room
(or minimum daylight factor) and the average illuminance (from daylight) on the same working plane (or average
daylight factor).
View of sky and no-sky line

Areas of the working plane have a view of sky when they receive direct light from the sky, i.e. when the sky can be
seen from working plane height. The no-sky line divides those areas of the working plane, which can receive direct
skylight, from those that cannot.
View out relevant building areas

BREEAM defines relevant building areas requiring a view out to include areas of the building where:
1. There are or will be workstations or benches or desks for building users.

2. Close work will be undertaken or visual aids will be used.
Excluded areas for each of these might include:
1. Nurse bases where they are located centrally in a ward or patient area in order to enable patient
observation.
2. Courts and interview rooms where compliance is not possible due to security or privacy criteria.
3. Prison staff areas containing workstations that for security or observational purposes must be located
centrally within the building.
4. Any clinical areas where the control of environmental or operational conditions prevents such spaces
from providing a view out.
5. Conference rooms, lecture theatres, sports halls, acute SEN and also any spaces where the exclusion or
limitation of natural light is a functional requirement, e.g. laboratories, media spaces, etc.
6. Isolated work station for intermittent, short term work, e.g. work station within a server room
Working plane
CIBSE LG10 defines the working plane as the horizontal, vertical or inclined plane in which a visual task lies. The
working plane is normally taken as 0.7m above the floor for offices and 0.85m for industry.
Hea 01 Visual comfort cv
Internal and external lighting levels, zoning and control

Relevant industry standards for lighting design
For preschools, schools and sixth form colleges, the following can be considered a relevant industry standard for
lighting design:
– Building Bulletin 90: ‘Lighting Design for Schools’
For care homes housing people with dementia the following standard can be used instead of the SLL Code for
Lighting:
– Design Lighting for People with Dementia, University of Stirling, Stirling, 2013.
For multi-residential buildings, CIBSE SLL LG9 (47) can be considered as a relevant standard in addition to, or instead
of SLL Code for Lighting 2012
Please note that the illuminance levels specified in the SLL Code for Lighting, 2012 align with BS EN 12464-1.
BREEAM has not attempted to list all appropriate industry standards. Any recognised collaborative industry or
sector best practice standard or guidance that sets levels appropriate to the tasks undertaken, accounting for
building user concentration and comfort levels, can be considered an appropriate industry standard for the
purposes of this BREEAM issue.
cvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Hea 02 Indoor air quality
4 4 2 1

Aim
To encourage and support healthy internal environments with good indoor air quality.
Value
– Reduces the potential for indoor air
pollution from a variety of pollution sources
– Supports the physical health of building
occupants by reducing the risk of health
concerns associated with indoor air pollution
– Supports building occupant comfort and
productivity
Context
It is widely accepted that the quality of the indoor environment can impact occupant health. Poor indoor air quality
can have a range of negative impacts on the physical health of building occupants. These effects can include
Hea 02 Indoor air quality cvii
immediate impacts such eye, nose and throat irritation, headaches, dizziness and fatigue, while also contributing to
more long-term health issues such as asthma, respiratory diseases, heart disease and cancer.
Further to this, through the Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) Regulations (2002), in workplaces
employers are required to control any substance in the workplace that may be hazardous to health.
As a result, measures need to be taken to ensure the internal environment maintains good air quality and reduces
the presence of common indoor air pollutants such as carbon dioxide, nitrogen dioxide, and volatile organic
compounds.
The quality of the indoor environment is a complex combination of both externally and internally generated
pollutants, which may be compounded by occupant behaviour.
Producing a project specific indoor air quality plan leads to building design, specification of products and
installation of ventilation systems that will minimise indoor air pollution.
Assessment scope

Applicable assessment criteria All 2.a–2.d, 3, 5 and 2.a–2.d, 3, 5 and 3, 4 and
Assessment type specific notes None None see ref 1.0 None

1.0 Ventilation
If ventilation systems are not within the remit of the shell and core developer, compliance can be
demonstrated through the building servicing strategy where this is predetermined by the built
form or core services provision.
2.0 Industrial
This issue's criteria only apply to office areas and not to operational areas. If the industrial building
does not contain any office areas, this issue is not applicable.
cviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Assessment criteria
This issue is split into five parts:
– Indoor air quality (prerequisite)

– Ventilation (one credit)
– User control (one credit)
– Emissions from building products (two credits)
– Post-construction indoor air quality measurement (one credit)
Prerequisite- Indoor air quality (IAQ) plan

1 A site-specific indoor air quality plan has been produced and implemented. The objective of the plan is to
facilitate a process that leads to design, specification and installation decisions and actions that minimise
indoor air pollution during occupation of the building. The indoor air quality plan must consider the following:
1.a: Removal of contaminant sources
1.b: Dilution and control of contaminant sources
1.c: Procedures for pre-occupancy flush out
1.d: Third party testing and analysis
1.e: Maintaining good indoor air quality in-use
One credit- Ventilation

2 The building has been designed to minimise the indoor concentration and recirculation of pollutants in the
building as follows:
2.a: Provide fresh air into the building in accordance with the criteria of the relevant standard for ventilation.
2.b: Ventilation pathways are designed to minimise the ingress and build-up of air pollutants inside the
building (see Methodology on page cxi).
2.c: Where present, HVAC systems must incorporate suitable filtration to minimise external air pollution, as
defined in BS EN 13779:2007 Annex A3 (48).The specified filters should achieve a minimum Indoor Air
Quality of IDA2.
2.d: Areas of the building subject to large and unpredictable or variable occupancy patterns have carbon
dioxide (CO2) or air quality sensors specified and:
2.d.i In mechanically ventilated buildings or spaces: sensors are linked to the mechanical ventilation
system and provide demand-controlled ventilation to the space.
2.d.ii In naturally ventilated buildings or spaces: sensors either have the ability to alert the building owner
or manager when CO2 levels exceed the recommended set point, or are linked to controls with the
ability to adjust the quantity of fresh air, i.e. automatic opening windows or roof vents.
One credit- User control

3 The natural ventilation strategy is capable of providing at least two levels of user-control on the supply of fresh
Hea 02 Indoor air quality cix
air to the occupied space.
Two credits - Emissions from building products

4 All product types listed in Table 21 on page cxiii meet the emission limits, testing requirements and any
additional requirements listed in Table 21 on page cxiii
One credit - Post-construction indoor air quality measurement

5 The formaldehyde concentration in indoor air is measured post construction (but pre-occupancy) and does
not exceed 100µg/m3 averaged over 30 minutes (World Health Organisation guidelines for indoor air quality:
Selected pollutants, 2010 (49)).
6 The formaldehyde sampling and analysis is performed in accordance with ISO 16000-2 (50) and ISO 16000-3
(51).
7 The total volatile organic compound (TVOC) concentration in indoor air is measured post construction (but
pre-occupancy) and does not exceed 500µg/m3over 8 hours.
8 The TVOC sampling and analysis is performed in accordance with ISO 16000-5 (52) and ISO 16000-6 (53) or ISO
16017-1 (54).
9 Where levels are found to exceed these limits, the project team confirms the measures that have, or will be,
undertaken in accordance with the IAQ plan, to reduce the TVOC and formaldehyde levels to within the above
limits.
10 The measured concentration levels of formaldehyde (µg/m³) and TVOC (µg/m³) are reported, via the BREEAM
Scoring and Reporting Tool.
Minimising sources of air pollution - Emissions from building products

To achieve one exemplary performance credit:
One credit
11 All product types listed in Table 20 below meet the emission limits, testing requirements and any additional
requirements listed in Table 20 below.
Table 20 : Exemplary level emission criteria byproduct type

Product Emission limit Additional
type (see Formaldehyd Total Total Category Testing requirement
CN7.2) e volatile semi- 1A and 1B requirement
organic volatile carcinoge (see CN7.3
compoun organic ns and CN7.4)
ds compoun
(TVOC)# ds
(TSVOC)
Interior ≤ 0.01 mg/m³ ≤ 0.3 ≤ 0.1 ≤ 0.001 EN 16402 Meet VOC
paints and mg/m³ mg/m³ mg/m³ or content
coatings ISO 16000-9 limits (Table
or 22 on
CEN/TS page cxv).
16516 Paints used
or in wet areas
CDPH (e.g.
Standard bathrooms,
Method v1.1 kitchens,
utility
cx SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft

ds compoun
(TVOC)# ds
(TSVOC)
rooms)
should
protect
against
mould
growth (see
Methodolo
gy on the
facing page.
Wood- ≤ 0.06 ≤ 0.3 ≤ 0.1 ≤ 0.001 ISO 16000-9 N/A
based mg/m³and ze mg/m³ mg/m³ mg/m³ or
products ro added CEN/TS
including formaldehyd 16516
wood e resin or or
flooring adhesive CDPH
Standard
Method v1.1
or
EN 717-1
(formaldehy
de emissions
only)
Flooring ≤ 0.01 mg/m³ ≤ 0.3 ≤ 0.1 ≤ 0.001 ISO 10580 N/A
materials mg/m³ mg/m³ mg/m³ or
(including ISO 16000-9
floor or
levelling CEN/TS
compoun 16516
ds and or
resin CDPH
flooring) Standard
Method v1.1
Ceiling, ≤ 0.01 mg/m³ ≤ 0.3 ≤ 0.1 ≤ 0.001 ISO 10580 N/A
wall, and mg/m³ mg/m³ mg/m³ or
acoustic ISO 16000-9
and or
thermal CEN/TS
insulation 16516
materials or
CDPH
Standard
Method v1.1
Interior ≤ 0.01 mg/m³ ≤ 0.3 ≤ 0.1 ≤ 0.001 EN 13999 N/A
adhesives mg/m³ mg/m³ mg/m³ (Parts 1-4)
and or
sealants ISO 16000-9
(including or
flooring CEN/TS
adhesives) 16516
Hea 02 Indoor air quality cxi

ds compoun
(TVOC)# ds
(TSVOC)
or
CDPH
Standard
Method v1.1
* Compliance with emission limits shall be demonstrated after 28 days in an emission test chamber or earlier
as stipulated by the relevant testing requirements standard. The emission rate obtained from the chamber
test method must be extrapolated to predict what the concentration would be in the air of the theoretical
model or reference room (as detailed in the respective testing standard) and this extrapolated concentration
compared with the emission limit in this table.
# Where test results for a product exceed the TVOC emission limit, compliance with the above requirements
can still be achieved where the test results demonstrate an R-value ≤ 1 after 28 days.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Ventilation
The design of air-conditioned and mixed-mode buildings should minimise the build-up of air pollutants. Locations
of ventilation intakes and airflow pathways should be designed in accordance with any or a combination of the
following methods;
1. Locating the building's air intakes and exhausts, in relation to each other and sources of external pollution, in
accordance with the following best practice as appropriate;
a. BS EN 13779:2007 Annex 2 (55),
b. BRE FB 30 Ventilation for healthy buildings: Reducing the impact of urban air pollution (2011)(56),
c. BRE IP 9/14 Locating ventilation inlets to reduce ingress of external pollutants into buildings(57), as
appropriate, and
d. CIBSE TM21 (58).
2. Pollutant dispersion modelling can be used to inform the location of the building's air intakes and exhausts
in relation to each other and sources of external pollution. This can be achieved using either wind tunnel
modelling or numerical modelling. Pollutant dispersion modelling in urban areas is complex, so it is
important that the person carrying out the modelling is a competent individual (See Definitions on
page cxv).
3. Positioning the building's air intakes and exhausts at least 10m of horizontal distance apart. Positioning
intakes at least 10m horizontal distance from sources of external pollution (including the location of air
exhausts from other buildings). The building's air intakes and exhausts should be located to reduce the
intake air being contaminated by the exhausts. Exhausts or other pollutant sources should not be
discharged into enclosed spaces, such as courtyards, in which intakes are also located.
Where a site is located within an Air Quality Management Area (AQMA) affected by gaseous pollutants (e.g. NOx)
the design should adopt a strategy that minimises indoor air quality impacts arising from local high pollution levels.
cxii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Where this approach involves the use of gas phase filtration, these should be tested in accordance with BS EN ISO
10121 1:2014 (BS 2014) 'Test method for assessing the performance of gas-phase air cleaning media and
devices for general ventilation'(59). Design teams must ensure that filter performance is appropriate for the
pollutant conditions experienced at the site.
The design of naturally ventilated buildings should minimise the build-up of air pollutants. Ventilation intakes and
airflow pathways should be designed using the following methods;
– Following guidance given in;

– BRE FB 30 Ventilation for healthy buildings: Reducing the impact of urban air pollution (2011),
– BRE IP 9/14 Locating ventilation inlets to reduce ingress of external pollutants into buildings (2014), and,
– CIBSE TM21 Minimising pollutants at air intakes (1999), as appropriate.
These give guidance on ventilation strategies, and the optimum location of ventilation inlets, openable windows,
and trickle and background ventilators to reduce ingress of external pollutants into buildings.
– Positioning openable windows/ and background ventilators over at least 10m of horizontal distance from
sources of external pollution (including the location of any building related air exhausts).
User Control
For user control, the two levels of ventilation must be able to achieve the following:
– Higher level: higher rates of ventilation achievable to remove short term odours or prevent summertime
overheating
– Lower level: adequate levels of draught-free fresh air to meet the need for good indoor air quality throughout
the year, sufficient for the occupancy load and the internal pollution loads of the space.
Any opening mechanisms must be easily accessible and provide adequate user-control over air flow rates to avoid
draughts. Relevant industry standards for ventilation can be used to define 'adequate levels of fresh air' sufficient
for occupancy and internal air pollution loads relevant to the building type.
Multi-residential buildings with self-contained flats and individual bedrooms must have a degree of openable
window function. This does not need to provide two levels of user-control (as required above), but must be
occupant controlled.
Sampling and analysis of indoor air and analysis of emissions from building
products
Accreditation of organisations performing sampling or laboratory analysis

All organisations used for sampling and analysis of indoor air or for analysis of emissions from building products
must be accredited to ISO/IEC 17025 (60) with specific accreditation covering:
–
Sampling: Pumped sampling for formaldehyde in air; Pumped sampling for VOCs in air
– Chemical analysis: Determination of formaldehyde; Determination of VOCs
Sampling and chemical analysis of indoor air can be performed by separate organisations, but both must be
accredited.
Self-declaration of emission levels from building products

Manufacturers self-declaration of emission levels from building products is acceptable if testing has been
performed by an accredited laboratory in accordance with the above. Or, where the manufacturer declares that
the product contains no formaldehyde or VOC emitting substances.
Hea 02 Indoor air quality cxiii
Emission from building products
Scope of assessment of emissions from building products

The scope of the VOC credit issues does not extend to furnishings, e.g. desks or shelving, it focuses on the key
internal finishes and fittings integral to the building.
Only products that are installed or applied in parts of the building where their emissions are likely to affect indoor air
quality need to be assessed. For the purposes of this issue, this means any product installed or applied:
– Inside of the inner surface of the building's infiltration

– Inside of the vapour or waterproof membrane or
– Inside of the inner surface of the building envelope's interior facing thermal insulation layer, where present.
Inherently non-VOC emitting products do not need to be assessed and can be deemed fully compliant with the
criteria. Examples of non-VOC emitting products include:
– Brick
– Natural stone
– Concrete
– Ceramic tile
– Glass
– Metal surfaces etc.
This is unless organic-based coatings, binders, or sealants are used in their production or finishes.
When assessing paints used in wet areas, evidence must be provided to show that the paints protect against
mould growth. Evidence could include appropriate test results (e.g. fungal or algal resistance testing) or
manufacturer’s product information or declaration. There are European standard tests which could be used: EN
15457 (61) and EN 15458 (62).
All products specified for a project that fall within one of the product types listed in Table 21 below and Table 20
on page cix must be assessed under this issue. However, it is accepted that it may be difficult to control the
specification of some products (e.g. sealants) that are used in small quantities for ad hoc purposes such as ‘making
good’. As such, any products used in this way do not need to be assessed for this issue. The BREEAM Assessor
should use their judgment to determine whether products being used or intended to be used for ad hoc purposes
will be used in significant quantities and therefore need to be assessed for this issue.
Guidance note 22 available from the BREEAM website provides a list of approved alternative schemes recognised
by BREEAM and that can be used to demonstrate compliance for the VOC emission levels. If assessors, clients or
scheme operators wish to seek recognition of other schemes not currently listed, please contact the BREEAM office
([email protected]) for details of the application process.
Table 21 : Emission criteria byproduct type

Product type Emission limit* Testing Additional
Formaldehyde Total Category requirement requirements
volatile 1A and 1B
organic carcinogens
compounds
(TVOC)
Interior paints ≤ 0.06 mg/m³ ≤ 1.0 ≤ 0.001 EN 16402 (63) Meet TVOC
and coatings mg/m³ mg/m³ or content limits (See
ISO 16000-9 Table 22 on
(64) page cxv) Paints
or used in wet areas
CEN/TS 16516 (e.g. bathrooms,
(65)
kitchens, utility
or rooms) should
CDPH protect against
Standard
cxiv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Product type Emission limit* Testing Additional

Formaldehyde Total Category requirement requirements
volatile 1A and 1B
organic carcinogens
compounds
(TVOC)
Method v1.1 mould growth
(66) (See
Methodology on
page cxi).
Wood-based ≤ 0.06 ≤ 1.0 ≤ 0.001 ISO 16000-9 N/A
products mg/m³m³ mg/m³ mg/m³ or
(including (Non-MDF) CEN/TS 16516
wood flooring) ≤ 0.08 mg/m³ or
(MDF) CDPH
Standard
Method v1.1
or
EN 717-1
(formaldehyde
emissions only)
(67)
Flooring ≤ 0.06 mg/m³ ≤ 1.0 ≤ 0.001 ISO 10580 N/A
materials mg/m³ mg/m³ or
(including floor ISO 16000-9
levelling or
compounds CEN/TS 16516
and resin or
flooring) CDPH
Standard
Method v1.1
Ceiling, wall, ≤ 0.06 mg/m³ ≤ 1.0 ≤ 0.001 N/A
and acoustic mg/m³ mg/m³
and thermal
insulation
materials
Interior ≤ 0.06 mg/m³ ≤ 1.0 ≤ 0.001 EN 13999 N/A
adhesives and mg/m³ mg/m³ (Parts 1-4) (68)
sealants (69)(70)(71)
(including or
flooring ISO 16000-9
adhesives) or
CEN/TS 16516
or
CDPH
Standard
Method v1.1
* Compliance with emission limits shall be demonstrated after 28 days in an emission test chamber or earlier
as stipulated by the relevant testing requirements standard. The emission rate obtained from the chamber
test method must be extrapolated to predict what the concentration would be in the air of the theoretical
model or reference room (as detailed in the respective testing standard) and this extrapolated concentration
compared with the emission limit in this table.
# Where test results for a product exceed the TVOC emission limit, compliance with the above requirements
can still be achieved where the test results demonstrate an R-value ≤ 1 after 28 days.
Hea 02 Indoor air quality cxv
Table 22 Maximum TVOC content for paints and coatings

Product category Free TVOC content of Testing requirements
ready-to-use product (see CN7.4)
(g/l)
Interior matt walls and ceilings (Gloss <25@60°) 10 ISO 11890-2
Interior glossy walls and ceilings (Gloss >25@60°) 40 or
Interior trim and cladding paints for wood and metal 90 ISO 17895
or
Interior trim varnishes and wood stains, including 65 Calculation based on
opaque wood stains the ingredients and raw
Interior minimal build wood stains 50 materials
Primers 15
Binding primers 15
One-pack performance coatings 100
Two-pack reactive performance coatings for specific 80
end use such as floors
Multi-coloured coatings 80
Decorative effect coatings 80
Post-construction indoor air quality measurement
Testing requirements for emission limits

The testing requirements for emission limits are based on the use of standardised emission test chamber
methods. Perforator, flask, desiccator and other extraction based test methods are specifically excluded.
Compliance with these requirements may be met using alternative standards, where these stipulate emission test
chamber methods similar to those in the standards listed in Table 21 on page cxiii and Table 20 on page cix .
BREEAM Assessors must submit details of any alternative standards to BRE Global for approval prior to awarding
any credits for this issue.
Evidence

requirements on page 38 can be used to demonstrate compliance with these
criteria.
Definitions
Areas with a large and unpredictable occupancy

The following are examples of these types of space:
– Auditoria
– Gyms
– Retail stores or malls
cxvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
– Cinemas
– Waiting rooms.
Where the assessed building does not have any areas deemed to be large with an unpredictable pattern of
occupancy, the criterion does not apply.
Category 1A and 1B carcinogens

Carcinogenic compounds detectable by the VOC emission testing requirements in Table 1 and Table 2 and that
are classified as category 1A or 1B carcinogens in Annex VI to Regulation (EC) No. 1272/2008 on classification,
labelling and packaging of substances and mixtures(72),which are listed as carcinogenic VOCs in Annex G.2 of
prEN 16516 (draft)(73).
Clinical areas
Competent individual- Wind tunnel modelling

An individual with one or more of the following qualifications and experience can be considered to be a
'competent individual' for the purpose of carrying out wind tunnel modelling:
– Holds a degree or equivalent qualification in a relevant engineering field (mechanical, chemical), physics,
mathematics, or meteorology, AND holds a membership to an appropriate professional body.
– Has a minimum of three years relevant experience.
Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding and experience of wind tunnel modelling
and factors affecting outdoor pollutant dispersion in relation to ventilation and the built environment.
Competent individual- Numerical modelling

An individual with one or more of the following qualifications and experience can be considered to be a
'competent individual' for the purpose of carrying out numerical modelling:
– Holds a degree or equivalent qualification in a relevant engineering field (mechanical, chemical), physics,
mathematics, meteorology, environmental sciences, environmental engineering or a related environmental
discipline, AND holds a membership to an appropriate professional body,
– Demonstrated ability to interpret environmental guidelines, policies, plans and legislative requirements.
Numerical Modelling
Numerical modelling is a computer-based stimulation method for modelling pollutant dispersion and air quality
in the outdoor environment. Various numerical models are commercially available which may be used to
investigate the location of ventilation intakes and exhausts. Such as those based on empirical methods and
Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD).
Occupied space
The following building areas, where relevant to the building type, can be excluded from the definition of occupied
spaces for the potential for natural ventilation criteria:
1. Ancillary building areas, e.g. WCs, corridors, stairwells, store rooms, plant rooms
2. Swimming or hydrotherapy pools
3. Catering and small staff kitchens
4. Washrooms or changing areas
Hea 02 Indoor air quality cxvii
5. Laboratory or other areas where strictly controlled environmental conditions are a functional
requirement of the space
6. Custody cells and holding areas in law courts
7. Operational, shop floors or ancillary areas in industrial buildings and retail buildings
8. Healthcare buildings: rooms or departments where control of ventilation is required for prevention of
cross infection or controlled environmental conditions including:
a. Operating theatres
b. Laser surgery unit
c. Operative imaging unit
d. Intensive treatment unit
e. Infectious diseases isolation unit
f. Wards housing immuno-compromised patients
g. Manufacturing pharmacy
h. Specialised imaging, X-ray and scanning unit
i. Pathology containment laboratories
j. Mortuary and dissection suite
k. Research laboratories and associated animal houses
l. Sterilising and disinfecting unit (SDU)
m. Emerging treatment technologies including gene therapy and stem cell units
n. Areas immediately adjacent to the above are excluded if it can be demonstrated that reverse air
flow would be likely with natural ventilation
o. Any other areas which require mechanical ventilation to satisfy the requirements of healthcare
Technical Memoranda
p. Any other areas that require mechanical ventilation due to specific operational-related processes.
Occupied spaces requiring local exhaust ventilation, e.g. laboratories, workshops and food technology rooms,
must still demonstrate that they meet the criteria for potential for natural ventilation (unless listed as an
exempted area in this definition).
Openable window area

The openable window area is defined as the geometric free ventilation area created when a ventilation opening,
e.g. window, is open to its normal operational fully designed extent for ventilation purposes (i.e. this excludes
open areas created when reversible windows are opened for cleaning etc.). It is not the glazed area of a façade
or the glazed area of the part of the window that is openable (unless it opens fully).
R-Value
Sum of all Ri values. Ri is the ratio Ci or LCIi, where Ci is the mass concentration of the individual VOC i. in the air of
the reference room, and LCIi is the LCI value of VOC i. The LCI value is the ‘Lowest Concentration of Interest’, which
is the substance-specific value for health-related evaluation of the emission from construction products as
agreed by the EU-LCI Working Group (https://ec.europa.eu/growth/sectors/construction/eu-lci_en).
Relevant standards (ventilation)

Education buildings: Building Bulletin 101 Ventilation of School Buildings, April 2014. Offices spaces: Top of the
range recommended in the British Council for Offices Guide to Best Practice in the Specification of Offices(74), i.e.
12 litres per second per person. Clinical areas with controlled environmental conditions: HTM 03-01 Specialised
ventilation for healthcare premises(75) (England, Wales and Northern Ireland) SHTM 03-01 Ventilation for
healthcare premises Part A: Design and Validation(76) (Scotland) Relevant standards are not listed for all areas or
building types as the provision of fresh air is adequately covered in Approved Document Part F Ventilation (and
the standards referenced therein).
cxviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Sources of external pollution

This includes but is not limited to the following:
1. Highways and the main access roads on the assessed site

2. Car parks, delivery and vehicle waiting bays
3. Other building exhausts, including from building services plant industrial or agricultural processes
Common pollutants discharged from these sources are covered by the UK Air Quality Strategy and include:
benzene, 1,3-butadiene, carbon monoxide, lead, nitrogen dioxide, ozone, particles (PM10, PM2.5), polycyclic
aromatic hydrocarbons and sulphur dioxide and those from all types of industrial processes covered by the
Health and Safety Executive (HSE).
Service and access roads with restricted and infrequent access (for example roads used only for waste collection)
are unlikely to represent a significant source of external pollution. These roads can therefore be excluded from
the criteria of this issue. This does not include vehicle pick-up, drop-off or waiting bays.
Total semi-volatile organic compound (TSVOC)

Sum of the concentrations of identified and unidentified volatile organic compounds eluting between n-
hexadecane (excluded) and n-docosane (included) on a gas chromatographic column.
Total volatile organic compound (TVOC)

Sum of the concentrations of identified and unidentified volatile organic compounds eluting between and
including n-hexane and n-hexadecane on a gas chromatographic column.
Wind tunnel modelling

Wind tunnel modelling is a versatile physical technique which allows a large number of variables (for example
building design, intake and exhaust positions, local pollutant sources, wind speed and direction), to be
investigated for complex urban areas. In particular, wind tunnel modelling provides reliable and detailed data,
both visual and quantitative, on outdoor pollution distribution. This enables effective sitting of intakes and
exhausts for both mechanically and naturally ventilated buildings.
Post construction Indoor air quality and measurement

The measurement of formaldehyde and TVOC must be made in accordance with the relevant standards (as listed
in the criteria). ISO 16000-2 (77) and ISO 16000-5 provide guidance on sampling strategies for formaldehyde and
VOCs, respectively. Sampling should be performed in rooms that will be occupied for long periods of time such as
bedrooms, living rooms, classrooms, offices, etc. A representative number of rooms should be sampled, rather
than every room in the building. For example, in an office building, sampling of one cellular or single occupancy
office should suffice to assess the indoor air quality for that type of habitable space in the building (assuming the
other cellular offices have the same materials specification and ventilation strategy). In larger rooms, such as open-
plan office areas, additional sampling locations may be required in order to understand the homogeneity of the
indoor environment.
Uncertainties in sampling and analysis are inevitable and unavoidable, therefore it is recommended that replicate
samples are taken at each sampling location (ideally a minimum of three samples for each measurement
parameter). Before sampling, naturally ventilated rooms should be intensively ventilated for 15 minutes and then
outer doors and windows closed for at least 8 hours (e.g. overnight) before sampling begins with the room still
closed off. For mechanically ventilated rooms, the ventilation system should be running under standard operating
Hea 02 Indoor air quality cxix
conditions for at least for 3 hours before sampling begins. Sampling locations should be at least 1m to 2m from a
wall and at a height of between 1m to 1.5m.
This information is provided to assist project teams and BREEAM Assessors on the appropriate scope of post
construction indoor air quality measurement, and, as such, is intended as guidance only and not a compliance
requirement. The sampling strategy should be determined based on the advice of the appropriate person
appointed to conduct the testing.
cxx SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
2 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable

Aim
To recognise and encourage a healthy internal environment in laboratory areas through the safe containment and
removal of pollutants.
Value
– Reduced health and safety risks to
occupants within laboratories
– Managing the external discharge of
pollutants and to minimise the associated
health and wellbeing impacts
– Helping to create a comfortable and safe
laboratory workspace
Context
Laboratory spaces are more hazardous and contain higher risks than average workplaces. It is therefore essential
that the necessary measures are in place to ensure the health, safety and wellbeing of laboratory occupants and
users. Due to the nature of work carried out in laboratory spaces, internal pollution is a key risk for building
Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories cxxi
occupants which is normally best managed through the installation of appropriate building services solutions.
Through the appropriate design and configuration of laboratory containment devices and flue or stack systems,
the potential for hazardous concentrations of substances being released into the internal environment can be
managed. Laboratories vary considerably in the type of pollution or contamination risks that they create and this
often changes over time. As a result, carrying out an objective risk assessment allows the identification of potential
hazardous, and enables the planning and implementation of the appropriate measures to control these risks and
protect building users.
Assessment scope
Fully fitted Simple Shell and core Shell only

building
Applicable assessment criteria All Not applicable Not Not
applicable applicable

None
None
cxxii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Assessment criteria
– Laboratory containment devices and containment areas (one credit)

– Fume dispersion and dilution (one credit - all building types except preschools, schools and sixth form colleges)
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
One credit - Laboratory containment devices and containment areas

1 An objective risk assessment of the proposed laboratory facilities has been carried out prior to completion of
the Developed Design (RIBA Stage 3 or equivalent) (See Methodology below).
2 Where containment devices such as fume cupboards are specified their design, manufacture and installation
meet best practice safety and performance requirements and objectives (See Methodology below).
3 Where containment level 1, 2, 3 and 4 laboratory facilities are specified they must meet the best practice safety
and performance criteria and objectives (See Methodology below).
One credit - Fume dispersion and dilution

For all building types except preschool, schools and sixth form colleges
4 Modelling of the behaviour of the potentially contaminated plume released from laboratory stacks is
performed (See Methodology below) to inform the design of flue and stack systems for the release of
discharges from containment device exhausts.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Risk assessment
The risk assessment must consider the proposed laboratory systems and should be carried out to ensure potential
risks are considered in the design of the laboratory. The risk assessment must inform the selection of an
appropriate performance band for containment devices that recognises both safety and sustainability objectives.
A method for conducting an objective based risk assessment is to use the Health and Safety Executive five step
method of risk assessment and its issued policy template (www.hse.gov.uk).
Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories cxxiii
Containment devices
The following standards, where appropriate, should be considered as part of the design, manufacture and
installation of containment devices;
– General purpose fume cupboards

– BS EN 14175-1:2003 Fume cupboards- Part 1: Vocabulary(78)
– BS EN 14175-2:2003 Fume cupboards- Part 2: Safety and performance requirements(79)
– BS EN 14175-3:2003 Fume cupboards- Part 4: On-site test methods(80)
– DD CEN/TS 14175-5:2006 Fume cupboards- Part 5: Recommendations for installation and maintenance
(81)
– BS EN 14175-6:2006 Fume cupboards- Part 6: Variable air volume fume cupboards(82)
– BS EN 14175-7:2012 Fume cupboards- Part 7: Fume cupboards for high heat and acidic load (83)
– DIN 25466:2012 Fume hoods for radioactive materials- Rules for construction and tests(84)
Fume cupboard performance should be defined by Containment Factors or Protection Factors (as described in the
BS EN 14175 series of standards) rather than face velocities.
– Recirculatory filtration fume cupboards

– BS 7989:2001 Specification for recirculatory filtration fume cupboards(85)
– Microbiological safety cabinets
– BS EN 12469:2000 Biotechnology - Performance criteria for microbiological safety cabinets(86)
– BS 5726:2005 Microbiological safety cabinets - Information to be supplied by the purchaser to the vendor
and in the installer, and siting and use of cabinets- Recommendations and guidance(87)
– Clean air hoods, glove boxes, isolators and mini-environments
– BS EN ISO 14644-7:2004 Cleanrooms and associated controlled environments- Part 7: Separative devices
(Clean air hoods, gloveboxes, isolators and mini-environments)(88)
– Guidelines for Gloveboxes, American Glovebox Society, 2007 (89)
– Articulated exhaust arms
– PD CEN/TR 16589:2013 Laboratory installations - capture devices with articulated extract arm(90)
– Schools, sixth form colleges and further education with laboratories and fume cupboards for subjects up to and
including A-level (or equivalent)
– CLEAPSS (Consortium of Local Education Authorities for the Provision of Science Services) G9 Fume
cupboards in Schools(91)
Containment level 1, 2, 3 and 4 laboratory facilities

The following standards, where appropriate, should be considered as part of the specification on containment
level 1, 2, 3 and 4 laboratory facilities:
– BS EN 12128:1998 Biotechnology- Laboratories for research, development and analysis - containment levels of
microbiology laboratories, areas of risk, localities and physical safety requirements.(92)
– The management, design and operation of microbiological containment laboratories, Health and Safety
Executive, 2001 (93)
– The Genetically Modified Organisms (Contained Use) Regulations 2014- Guidance on Regulations (L29), Health &
Safety Executive, 2014 (94)
– Biological agents: Managing the risks in laboratories and healthcare premises, Health & Safety Executive, 2005
(95)
– Draft The Biological Agents and Genetically Modified Organisms (Contained Use) Regulations 2010- Biosafety
Guidelines, Health & Safety Executive, 2009 (96)
Fume dispersion and dilution

An objective evaluation of the potential health or nuisance effects of the dispersion and dilution of fume from
laboratories should be performed using a process such as:
1. Evaluate internal exhaust system dilution effects (through to the point of stack discharge).
2. Model the dilution or dispersion performance of the plume generated from the point of stack discharge.
cxxiv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
3. Consider the concentrations of toxic or nuisance fume impacting receptor locations (ventilation intakes,
opening windows, pedestrian areas, and public or private spaces).
4. Perform feedback iterations if the analysis suggests unacceptable conditions at any stage.
Appropriate levels of dilution from point of discharge to receptor locations for chemicals being used in
containment devices need to be determined. A number of techniques are available with one example being
described in: RWDI Technotes Issue No.17 - A dilution criterion for laboratory fume hood exhaust stacks, E Wong
and J Alberico (97). Consideration should also be given to potential nuisance caused by fume discharges in
accordance with the Environment Agency's Additional guidance for H4 Odour Management- How to comply with
your environmental permit, 2011 (98).
Modelling of behaviour of the potentially contaminated plume released from laboratory stacks can be achieved by
one of the following approaches;
– Calculation, e.g. ASHRAE Gaussian plume dispersion, dilution model (ASHRAE 1999 Fundamentals Handbook
Chapter 15 and ASHRAE 2003 HVAC Applications Chapter 44
– Low-speed wind tunnel study
– Computational fluid dynamics carried out by a competent individual
Evidence
Criteria Interim design stage Final post construction stage

Definitions
Computational fluid dynamics competent individual

An individual with one or more of the following qualifications and experience can be considered to be 'suitably
qualified' for the purposes of carrying out computational fluid dynamics modelling:
– Holds a degree, PhD or equivalent qualification in, for example, a relevant engineering field (mechanical,
chemical etc.), physics, mathematics, meteorology environmental sciences, environmental engineering or a
related environmental discipline and membership of an appropriate professional body.
– Holds a degree, PhD or equivalent qualification in, for example, a relevant engineering field (mechanical,
chemical etc.), physics, mathematics, meteorology environmental sciences, environmental engineering or a
related environmental discipline and membership of an appropriate professional body.
Fume cupboard or safety cabinet

Scientific equipment designed to limit a person's exposure to hazardous fumes or biological material. Air is
drawn through the enclosure of the cupboard conducting the contaminated air away from the experimental
area and those using the equipment.
Laboratory
A laboratory is an area of a building in which activities using potentially hazardous materials (chemical, biological,
pathogenic, radioactive, physical) or processes requiring clean environments are undertaken in a combination of
Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories cxxv
primary containment (fume cupboards, microbiological safety cabinets, isolaters, other devices) and secondary
containment (the envelope of the lab) using mechanical ventilation.
Risk assessment
For the purpose of the relevant laboratory criteria in this issue, a risk assessment is a systematic consideration of
any activity in which there is a hazard, followed by decisions on the substances, equipment and procedures used
and on the restrictions and precautions needed to make the risk acceptably low.
BS EN 14175 Fume cupboard discharge velocity: Part 2 states that the discharge velocity from fume cupboard
extracts should be at least 7m/s but that a figure of 10m/s is preferable to ensure that the discharge will not be
trapped in the aerodynamic wake of the stack. Higher discharge velocities may be required, especially in windy
locations, but higher rates may cause noise problems.
cxxvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Hea 04 Thermal comfort
3 3 2 Not applicable
Fully fitted Simple building Shell & core Shell only No Minimum standards
Aim
To ensure the building is capable of providing an appropriate level of thermal comfort.
Value
– Reduce the risk to occupier comfort, health
and wellbeing from extreme or unacceptable
winter and summer indoor temperatures.
– Provides future proofing of the building to
maximise its ability to provide adequate
thermal comfort for projected climate
change scenarios
– Reduces the impact on costs and the
environment through wasted heat, or from
the specification of complex and costly
systems such as air-conditioning.
Context
Research has shown that extreme temperatures are associated with an increased risk of illness, and have an
immediate effect on health and wellbeing. It is also recognised that measures taken to improve energy efficiency,
such as increased air tightness, thermal insulation levels etc. have the potential to result in more instances of
overheating in summer. With a changing climate, both under and overheating are an increasing problem in the
Hea 04 Thermal comfort cxxvii
buildings. Effective temperature regulation is therefore an integral part of ensuring a healthy and comfortable
internal environment. Achieving thermal comfort is dependent on the building being designed to allow for
seasonal changes and occupier preferences. However it is also important to consider future temperatures which
are expected throughout the lifetime of the building, so as to ensure future thermal comfort. The use of robust
thermal modelling supports an energy efficient design while also ensuring environmental comfort in-use. Designing
the building with thermal zones and controls ensures building user comfort by enabling a level of occupant control.
Modelling with consideration of a range of projected climate change environment allows future-proofing of the
building for projected climate conditions. .
Assessment scope

Applicable assessment criteria All All 1–9 Not applicable
Assessment type specific notes None see ref 1.0 see ref 1.1 and 1.2 None

1.0 Thermal Modelling dynamic thermal modelling is not a requirement to achieve the credits but may
be preferable as it can provide more accurate analysis results. Note that assessment criterion 2
already clarifies use of an alternative less complex means of modelling, which must be in
accordance with CIBSE AM11.
1.1 Thermal Modelling thermal modelling assumptions must be reasonable and represent typical use
patterns and loads given the parameters and function of the building. Note that thermal modelling
may need to be completed on the basis of a typical notional layout.
1.2 Thermal Modelling adaptability thermal model assumptions must be reasonable and represent
typical use patterns and loads given the parameters and function of the building. Note that thermal
modelling may need to be completed on the basis of a typical notional layout.
2.0 Industrial this issue is not applicable to industrial units without office space and only an operational
or storage area.
cxxviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Assessment criteria
– Thermal modelling (one credit)

– Design for future thermal comfort (one credit)
– Thermal zoning and controls (one credit)
One credit - Thermal modelling

1 Thermal modelling has been carried out using software in accordance with CIBSE AM11 (99) Building Energy
and Environmental Modelling.
2 The software used to carry out the simulation at the detailed design stage provides full dynamic thermal
analysis. For smaller and more basic building designs with less complex heating or cooling systems, an
alternative less complex means of analysis may be appropriate (such methodologies must still be in
accordance with CIBSE AM11).
3 The modelling demonstrates that:
3.a: For air-conditioned buildings, summer and winter operative temperature ranges in occupied spaces are in
accordance with the criteria set out in CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design(100), Table 1.5; or other
appropriate industry standard (where this sets a higher or more appropriate requirement or level for the
building type).
3.b: For naturally ventilated or free running buildings:
3.b.i Winter operative temperature ranges in occupied spaces are in accordance with the criteria set out
in CIBSE Guide A Environmental design, Table 1.5. Or other appropriate industry standard (where this
sets a higher or more appropriate requirement or level for the building type).
3.b.ii The building is designed to limit the risk of overheating, in accordance with the adaptive comfort
methodology outlined in CIBSE TM52: The limits of thermal comfort: avoiding overheating in
European buildings(101).
3.c: For multi-residential accommodation or supported living facilities:
3.c.i Winter operative temperature ranges in occupied spaces are in accordance with the criteria set out
in CIBSE Guide A Environmental design, Table 1.5. Or other appropriate industry standard (where this
sets a higher or more appropriate requirement or level for the building type).
3.c.ii The building is designed to limit the risk of overheating, in accordance with CIBSE TM59: Design
methodology for the assessment of overheating risk in homes(102).
4 For air-conditioned buildings, the PMV (predicted mean vote) and PPD (predicted percentage of dissatisfied)
indices based on the above modelling are reported via the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool.
One credit - Design for future thermal comfort

5 Criteria 4 above to 4 are achieved.
Hea 04 Thermal comfort cxxix
6 The thermal modelling demonstrates that the relevant requirements set out in criterion 3 on the previous page
are achieved for a projected climate change environment (see Definitions on page cxxxi).
7 Where criterion 6 aboveis not met, the project team demonstrates how the building has been adapted, or
designed to be easily adapted in future using passive design solutions in order to subsequently meet the
requirements under criterion 6 above
8 For air-conditioned buildings, the PMV and PPD indices based on the above modelling are reported via the
BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool.
One credit - Thermal zoning and controls

9 Criteria 1 on the previous page to 4 on the previous page are achieved.
10 The thermal modelling analysis (criteria1 on the previous page to 4 on the previous page) has informed the
temperature control strategy for the building and its users.
11 The strategy for proposed heating or cooling systems demonstrates that it has addressed the following:
11.a:Zones within the building, and how the building services could efficiently and appropriately heat or cool
these areas. For example consider the different requirements for the central core of a building compared
with the external perimeter adjacent to the windows.
11.b:The degree of occupant control required for these zones. This is based on discussions with the end user
(or alternatively building type or use specific design guidance, case studies, feedback) and considers:
11.b.iUser knowledge of building services
11.b.iiOccupancy type, patterns and room functions (and therefore appropriate level of control required)
11.b.iiiHow the user is likely to operate or interact with the systems, e.g. are they likely to open windows,
access thermostatic radiator valves (TRV) on radiators, change air-conditioning settings etc.
11.b.ivThe user expectations (this may differ in the summer and winter) and degree of individual control (i.e.
obtaining the balance between occupant preferences, for example some occupants like fresh air
and others dislike draughts).
11.c:How the proposed systems will interact with each other (where there is more than one system) and how
this may affect the thermal comfort of the building occupants.
11.d:The need or otherwise for an accessible building user actuated manual override for any automatic
systems.
Compliance notes
Compliance notes
cxxx SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Methodology
Thermal comfort strategies
Thermal comfort strategy- occupancy patterns

Where the number of building occupants is unknown, e.g. speculative developments (or shell and core), the default
occupancy rates given in CIBSE Guide A can be used to determine a default number of users. Where the typical use
patterns are also unknown, : Tra 01 Public transport accessibility can be used to determine the typical opening
hours of different building types. The design team need to justify or validate the occupancy number and use
patterns applied in the thermal model.
Thermal comfort strategy - occupant control

In education and prison building types, occupant control is meant for staff use only.
Thermal comfort strategy for less complex heating or cooling systems

For buildings with less complex heating or cooling systems the thermal comfort strategy need only comply with
criteria 11.a and criteria 11.b on the previous page.
Compliance can be demonstrated where zoning allows separate occupant control (within the occupied space) of
each perimeter area (i.e. within 7m of each external wall) and the central zone (i.e. over 7m from the external walls).
For example, adequate TRVs placed in zones around the building perimeter, and the provision of local occupant
controls to internal areas, such as fan coil units.
The distance requirement for smaller buildings is approximate; however, the assessor must use sound judgment
considering the aims of this issue, before accepting solutions that do not strictly meet the above criteria.
Examples of potentially compliant heating control measures can be found in Technology Guide CTG065 Heating
control(103).
Evidence
10, 11, 12 Thermal comfort study Refer to generic evidence requirement
above
Hea 04 Thermal comfort cxxxi
Definitions
ClassCool
A tool developed by the Department for Children, Schools and Families (DCSF, formerly DfES (Department for
Education and Skills)) which provides a simplified method of assessing the extent of classroom overheating.
ClassCool may not be appropriate for other spaces, such as libraries and halls, and other means of assessing
overheating will be required, www.gov.uk.
Clinical areas
Free running buildings
– Time period: 2050s

– Emissions scenario: Medium (A1B)
Mechanically ventilated or mixed mode buildings
– Time period: 2030s

– Emissions scenario: Medium (A1B).
The above weather files represent the minimum requirements to perform thermal modelling under a climate
change scenario and subsequently demonstrate compliance. Where design teams feel that added consideration
of building occupant risk or sensitivity to overheating is necessary, weather files can be used that exceed the
minimum requirements outlined above. The time periods indicated above have been selected to represent the
building services life cycle likely to be present in each building services strategy type. A shorter time period is
chosen for mechanically ventilated or mixed mode building types due to consideration of mechanical servicing
equipment life span (before major upgrade or replacement is required), and to avoid over-specification of plant
which could lead to inefficient operation.
Occupied space
However for the purpose of this issue, the definition excludes the following:
1. atria or concourses
2. entrance halls or reception areas
3. ancillary space, e.g. circulation areas, storerooms and plant rooms.
Patient areas
Passive design
Passive design uses layout, fabric and form to reduce or remove mechanical cooling, heating, ventilation and
lighting demand. Examples of passive design include:
– optimising spatial planning and orientation to control solar gains and maximise daylighting,
– manipulating the building form and fabric to facilitate natural ventilation strategies and
cxxxii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
– making effective use of thermal mass to help reduce peak internal temperatures.
Predicted mean vote (PMV)

The PMV is an index that predicts the mean votes of a large group of persons on the seven-point thermal
sensation scale based on the heat balance of the human body. Thermal balance is obtained when the internal
heat production in the body is equal to the loss of heat to the environment.
Predicted percentage dissatisfied (PPD)

The PPD is an index that establishes a quantitative prediction of the percentage of thermally dissatisfied people
who feel too cool or too warm. For the purposes of ISO 7730, thermally dissatisfied people are those who will
feel hot, warm, cool or cold.
Projected climate change environment

Dynamic thermal simulation software packages provide the facility for building designs to be assessed under
external climatic conditions specific to geographic location. Industry standard weather data for the UK is available
in the form of Test Reference Years (TRYs) and Design Summer Years (DSYs) provided by CIBSE. This weather
data enables thermal analysis of building designs under current climatic conditions, yet no account is taken of the
projected variations in weather data that will occur during the building's life cycle as a result of climate change.
The following probabilistic DSY weather data files should be used to establish the projected climate change
environment against which the design is evaluated:
Separate occupant control

Responsive heating or cooling controls for a particular area or zone of the building that can be accessed and
operated by the individuals occupying that area or zone. Such controls will be located within, or within the vicinity
of, the zone or area they control.
Thermal comfort
In British Standard BS EN ISO 7730:2005: Ergonomics of the thermal environment. Analytical determination and
interpretation of thermal comfort (104), thermal comfort is defined using the calculation of PMV and PPD indices
and local thermal comfort criteria. It is also defined as ‘that condition of mind which expresses satisfaction with
the thermal environment.’ The term ‘thermal comfort’ describes a person’s psychological state of mind and is
usually referred to in terms of whether someone is feeling too hot or too cold. Thermal comfort is difficult to
define because it needs to account for a range of environmental and personal factors in order to establish what
makes people feel comfortable. HSE considers 80% of occupants as a reasonable limit for the minimum number
of people who should be thermally comfortable in an environment. The purpose of this issue is to encourage
appropriate and robust consideration of thermal comfort issues, and specification of appropriate occupant
controls to ensure both maximum flexibility of the space and thermal comfort for the majority of building
occupants.
Thermal dynamic analysis

Thermal comfort analysis tools can be subdivided into a number of methods of increasing complexity. The most
complex of these and the one that provides greatest confidence in results is the full dynamic model. This type of
model enables annual heating or cooling loads, overheating risks and control strategies to be assessed.
Hea 04 Thermal comfort cxxxiii
CIBSE Guide A and BS EN ISO 7730:2005

The assessment criteria for this issue require compliance with the operative room temperature ranges set out in
CIBSE Guide A, Table 1.5. This table includes recommended summer and winter comfort criteria (temperature
ranges) for a number of specific building applications.
The operative room temperature ranges provided in CIBSE Guide A have been derived in accordance with the heat
balance model for thermal comfort (PMV and PPD) as detailed in BS EN ISO7730.
The CIBSE Guide A operative temperature ranges correspond to a PMV of ±0.25 which sits between the Category
A and Category B requirements listed in Annex A, Table A.1 of EN ISO 7730. Compliance with the CIBSE Guide A
criteria will therefore effectively also demonstrate compliance with the Category B requirements set out in EN ISO
7730.
Healthcare building types

The appropriate industry standard for healthcare is Health Technical Memorandum 03-01 Specialised ventilation
for healthcare premises(105). Thermal comfort levels in patient and clinical areas must be in accordance with the
temperature ranges set out in HTM 03-01, Appendix 2. Furthermore, internal summer temperatures must not
exceed 28º C dry bulb for more than 50 hours per year (as defined in HTM 03-01, paragraph 2.15). Other occupied
spaces not covered in HTM03-01 Appendix 2 should be in accordance with CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design.
Education building types (Schools only)

An appropriate industry standard for schools is Building Bulletin 101, Ventilation of school buildings (April 2014)
(106). For schools with a straightforward servicing strategy, ClassCool is considered a suitable alternative to an
AM11 full dynamic model.
Appropriate industry standards

BREEAM has not attempted to list all appropriate industry standards. Any recognised collaborative industry or
sector best practice standard or guidance that sets thermal performance levels, in terms of thermal comfort and
design temperature can be considered an appropriate industry standard for the purposes of this BREEAM issue.
CIBSE Guide A (Table 1.5) includes recommended summer and winter comfort.
Projected climate change weather data

A range of alternative probabilistic weather files produced in accordance with the UK climate impacts programme
(UKCIP) 2009 projections have been produced to be compatible with simulation software packages. These
weather files provide the opportunity to evaluate the impact of varying climate change scenarios building design
performance throughout its life cycle. Projected climate change weather files are currently available in TRYs and
DSYs and according to three projected time periods; 2030s, 2050s and 2080s, and for each period, two
'emissions scenarios' are available; Medium Emissions (A1B) and High Emissions (A1F1).
The PROMETHEUS project at Exeter University has produced a number of future weather files specific to different
locations across the UK, created using the UKCP09 weather generator. Weather files produced under the
PROMETHEUS project are available at emps.exeter.ac.uk.
cxxxiv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Hea 05 Acoustic performance
up to 4 up to 4 up to 4 up to 4

Aim
To ensure the building is capable of providing an appropriate acoustic environment to provide comfort for
building users.
Value
– Minimises disturbances to building
occupants from noise transition between
spaces
– Enhances productivity by providing
appropriate acoustic environment for the
different functions of various buildings and
spaces.
Context
Noise within buildings can come various sources, including building systems, occupants, equipment and external
sources. Excessive noise can have a range of adverse effects on building users including inconvenience and
Hea 05 Acoustic performance cxxxv
annoyance, loss of concentration, decreased productivity and sleep disturbance. Therefore, the management of
noise within a building is important to maximise occupant comfort, occupant efficiency to provide privacy. As a
result, building acoustics are an important consideration in the design, operation and construction of buildings.
Building acoustics should allow rooms to be used as intended, without compromising sound sensitive spaces or
activities. Designing to building type specific acoustic performance standards for sound insulation, indoor ambient
noise levels and reverberation times, supports acoustic comfort for building occupants.
Assessment scope
Fully Simple Shell and core Shell only

fitted building
Applicable assessment All All 1.b only, or 2 1.b only, or 2
criteria
Assessment type None None Criterion 3 for multi- Criterion 3 for multi-
specific notes residential residential
see ref 1.0 see ref 1.0

1.0 Alternative means of compliance
The basic built form has a large impact on the acoustic performance of the building and would be
outside the control of the tenant. A suitably qualified acoustician (SQA) must carry out a quantifiable
assessment of the specification of the build form, construction and any external factors likely to
affect the indoor ambient noise levels. The SQA must then confirm the developer's works will enable
a future tenant utilising a typical fit-out and specification to meet the levels required to
demonstrate compliance.
None None
cxxxvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Assessment criteria
– Acoustic performance (up to three credits for all building types, except Multi-residential which has four credits
available)
– Acoustic performance for Multi-residential (Up to four credits for Multi-residential only)
The following is required to demonstrate compliance:
Up to three credits - Acoustic performance

For all building except Multi-residential, which has four credits available below.
1 The building meets the appropriate acoustic performance standards and testing requirements defined in the
relevant table below. These tables define criteria for the acoustic principles of:
1.a: Sound insulation
1.b: Indoor ambient noise level
1.c: Reverberation times.
OR
2 A suitably qualified acoustician (SQA) is appointed to define a bespoke set of performance requirements for all
function areas in the building. The bespoke performance requirements use the three acoustic principles
defined in criterion Hea 05 Acoustic performance: Criterion 1 above, setting out the performance
requirements for each and the testing regime required.
Table 23 BREEAM acoustic criteria for education buildings

Education buildings (three credits)
First credit - Sound insulation
Criteria Achieve the performance standards set out in Section 1 of Building bulletin 93: Acoustic
design of schools: performance standards, February2015 (107) (BB93) relating to
airborne sound insulation between spaces and impact sound insulation of floors.
Testing A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test
requirement body in accordance with the BB93 requirements and the Association of Noise
Consultants (ANC) Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools(108).
Second credit - Internal indoor ambient noise levels
Criteria Achieve the indoor ambient noise level standards set out within Section 1 of BB93 for all
room types.
Testing A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in
requirement accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools.
Notes For heavy weight roofs, or parts of the roof that are heavyweight, with a mass per unit
area greater than 150kg/m²(including those with sedum planting) that do not have any
glazing or rooflights, calculations are not required, as such the credit can be awarded on
a default basis of compliance.
Hea 05 Acoustic performance cxxxvii
Education buildings (three credits)

Third credit - Reverberation
Criteria Room acoustics (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission
index (STI)):
Teaching and study spaces achieve the requirements relating to reverberation time for
teaching and study spaces set out within Section 1 of BB93.
Open plan teaching spacesachieve the performance requirements relating to
reverberation time and STI set out within Section 1 of BB93 .
Corridor and stairwells for those that give direct access to teaching and study spaces,
achieve the performance requirements relating to sound absorption.
Testing Teaching and study spaces:
requirement A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in
accordance with the requirements of BB93 and ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic
testing of Schools.
Open plan teaching spaces:
A programme of acoustic measurements of reverberation time is carried out within
open plan teaching spaces. The measurement is carried out by a compliant test body in
accordance with the requirements of BB93 and ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic
testing of schools. STI testing is not required. To demonstrate compliance the SQA shall
undertake measurements of reverberation times to compare against the STI model. The
SQA should provide a report confirming that the surface finishes and distribution of
sound absorption within the completed space is in line with the design intent
implemented within the STI model. Where significant changes or differences are
observed, the SQA shall re-model. Where significant changes or differences are
observed, the SQA shall re-model the space accordingly to demonstrate that the STI
measurement is met by the completed spaces.
Corridors and stairwells:
Installation of a specification compliant with the BB93 criteria demonstrates compliance.
A site inspection by the developer or SQA is required to confirm that a compliant
specification has been installed.
Table 24 BREEAM acoustic criteria for healthcare buildings

Healthcare buildings (three credits)
Criteria Achieve the airborne sound insulation performance standards set out in Section 2 of
HTM 08-01: Acoustics, 2013 (109)determined according to the privacy requirements
using both Table 3 and Table 4 from HTM 08-01: Acoustics. The weighted standardised
impact sound pressure level (L’nT,w) must not exceed 65dB for floors over noise-
sensitive rooms, following the guidance in HTM 08-01: Acoustics.For assessments in
Scotland, see also Country specific guidance on page cxliii.
requirement body in accordance with the requirements of Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics. For
assessments in Scotland, see also Country specific guidance on page cxliii
Second credits - Internal indoor ambient noise levels
Criteria The indoor ambient noise requirements for noise intrusion from external sources in
Table 1 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics, 2013 are not exceeded. The values for internal noise
from mechanical and electrical services in Table 2 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics are not
exceeded. For assessments in Scotland, see also Country specific guidance on page cxliii.
requirement accordance with the Section 7 of HTM 08-01:Acoustics.. For assessments in Scotland,
see also Country specific guidance on page cxliii.
Criteria Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation and sound absorption):
Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption set out in Section 2 of HTM 08-
01: Acoustics. For assessments in Scotland, see also Country specific guidance on
cxxxviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Healthcare buildings (three credits)

page cxliii.
Testing Installation of a specification compliant with the HTM08-01 criteria demonstrates
Requirement compliance. A site inspection by the developer or SQA is required to confirm that a
compliant specification has been installed.
Table 25 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Office buildings

Office buildings (three credits)
Criteria The sound insulation between rooms and other occupied areas complies with the
performance criteria given in Section 7 of BS 8233:2014 (110).
requirement body in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in
Methodology section of this BREEAM issue.
Notes If testing is to be carried out where the office is not yet furnished, then section 7.5 of BS
8233:2014 should be referred to when determining the performance criteria. Where
the office is to be furnished at the time testing is carried out, then refer to section 7.7.6
of BS 8233:2014 for the relevant performance criteria.
Criteria Achieve indoor ambient noise levels that comply with the design ranges given in Section
7 of BS 8233:2014.
requirement accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in
Methodology on page cxl.
Criteria Acoustic environment (control of reverberation and sound absorption):
Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption and reverberation times, where
applicable, set out in Section 7 of BS 8233:2014.
Requirement accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in
Methodology on page cxl. For spaces where the acoustic environment is controlled
through the use of defined amounts of sound absorption, installation of a specification
compliant with the BS 8233:2014 criteria demonstrates compliance. A site inspection by
the developer or SQA is required to confirm that a compliant specification has been
installed.
Table 26 BREEAM acoustic criteria for law court buildings

Law court buildings (three credits)
Criteria The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas
complies with the performance targets given in Section 28 of Court Service Design Guide
(CSDG), HMCS, 2010 (111).
Testing A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body
requirement in accordance with the requirements of Section 28 of the CSDG and ‘Calculation
Procedures’ where applicable. For assessments in Scotland, see also Country specific
guidance on page cxliii.
Criteria Achieve indoor ambient noise levels that comply with the requirements of Section 28 of
the CSDG. For assessments in Scotland, see also Country specific guidance on page cxliii.
requirement accordance with Section 28 of the CSDG. For assessments in Scotland, see also Country
specific guidance on page cxliii.
Criteria Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation and sound absorption):
Hea 05 Acoustic performance cxxxix
Law court buildings (three credits)

Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption and reverberation times, where
applicable, set out in Section 28 of the CSDG. For assessments in Scotland, see also
Country specific guidance on page cxliii.
requirement accordance with Section 28 of the CSDG and ‘Calculation Procedures’ where applicable.
For assessments in Scotland, see also Country specific guidance on page cxliii.
Table 27 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and Other building types
Industrial, Retail, Prisons and Other building types (two credits)
First credit – Sound insulation
All room functions
Criteria The sound insulation between rooms and other occupied areas complies with the
performance criteria given in Section 7 of BS 8233:2014. Alternatively, propose
performance standard based on demonstrably best practice.
requirement in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the
Methodology on the next page section of this BREEAM issue.
Rooms with Educational space (teaching and lecture spaces) refer to Table 23 on page cxxxvi
specific functions Medical treatment rooms refer to Table 24 on page cxxxvii
Second credit – Internal indoor ambient noise levels
Criteria Achieve indoor ambient noise levels that comply with the design ranges given in Section
7 of BS 8233:2014. .
Methodology on the next page section of this BREEAM Issue.
Rooms with Education space (teaching and learning spaces) refer to Table 23 on page cxxxvi
.
Third credit- Acoustic environment (control of reverberation and sound absorption)
Criteria Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption and reverberation times, where
applicable, set out in Section 7 of BS 8233:2014
Methodology on the next page section of this BREEAM issue. For spaces where the
acoustic environment is controlled through use of defined amounts of sound
absorption, installation of a specification compliant with the BS 8233:2014 criteria
demonstrates compliance. A site inspection by the developer or SQA is required to
confirm that a compliant specification has been installed.
Rooms with Educational space (teaching and learning spaces) refer to Table 23 on page cxxxvi
Up to four credits - Acoustic performance for Multi-residential

3 Where criterion 1 on page cxxxvi has been met.
Table 28 BREEAM acoustic criteria for Multi-residential buildings

Multi-residential (Up to four credits)
First & second credit- Sound insulation
Criteria One credit
Airborne sound insulation values are at least 3dB higher and impact sound insulation
values are at least 3dB lower than the performance standards in the relevant building
regulations or standards.
Two credits
cxl SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Multi-residential (Up to four credits)

Airborne sound insulation values are at least 5dB higher and impact sound insulation
values are at least 5dB lower than the performance standards in the relevant building
regulations or standards.
Testing A programme of pre-completion testing is carried out by a compliant test body based
requirement on the normal programme of testing described in the relevant building regulations or
standards for every group or sub-group of dwellings (houses, flats or rooms for
residential purposes) this must demonstrate that the performance standards detailed
within this table are achieved.
Third credit- internal indoor ambient noise levels
Criteria Achieve indoor ambient noise levels that comply with the design ranges given in Section 7
of BS 8233:2014
requirement in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in
Methodology below.
Fourth credit- Acoustic environment (control of reverberation and sound absorption)
Criteria Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption and within the common spaces
of the building described in the relevant building regulations or building standards
national guidance
Testing Installation of a specification compliant with the relevant building described in the
requirement relevant building regulations or building standards national guidance demonstrates
compliance. A site inspection by the developer or SQA is required to confirm that a
compliant specification has been installed.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Testing, measurement and calculation procedures

Where specific guidance on number of testing locations, measurement methods and calculation is not stated in the
criteria tables above for the relevant building type, or within the relevant standard or guidance referenced, the
following procedures can be followed by the acoustician when measuring or calculating the levels required to
demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue.
Measurements of sound insulation (airborne and impact) should be made in accordance with the relevant part of
BS EN ISO 16283 (112), or the successor to these standards. Measurements should be conducted between one in
four pairs of adjacent rooms (or teaching spaces) of each room type or performance requirements category and
construction type. For measurements of reverberation time, the relevant principles of BS EN ISO 354:2003 (113)
should be used and the guidance provided in BS EN ISO 140-7:1998 (114) should be followed in respect of the
number of source and microphone positions, and decay measurements. For measurements of ambient noise,
when no specific guidance is available, the following procedures should be used:
1. Noise from both internal sources (e.g. mechanical ventilation systems, plant noise, noise-making systems)
and external sources (e.g. traffic noise transmitted via the building façade) should be included. Also, where
windows are openable as part of the ventilation strategy, these should be assumed to be open for the
purposes of calculations and measurements. If openable windows are present but do not form part of
the background or permanent ventilation strategy, then these should be assumed to be closed for the
purposes of calculations and measurements.
Hea 05 Acoustic performance cxli
2. Noise from occupants and office equipment (e.g. computers) should not be included in the measurements.
3. Unless otherwise stated in the referenced document, a rate of testing of at least one in ten rooms or
spaces of each performance level shall be subject to on-site performance testing.
4. Measurements should be made in at least four rooms in which noise levels can be expected to be greatest
either because they are on the noisiest façade or because they are on a naturally ventilated façade.
5. Where different ventilation strategies are used, measurements should be conducted in rooms utilising
each strategy. Otherwise, measurements should be made in rooms on the noisiest façade.
6. T in LAeq,T is taken as the duration of the normal working day (typically 8 hours between 09.00 and 17.00).
7. Measurements need not be made over a period of 8 hours if a shorter measurement period would be
suitably representative. . In this case, measurements should be made when external noise levels are
representative of normal conditions throughout the day.
8. Measurement periods less than 30 minutes may give representative values for indoor ambient noise levels
and may be utilised where this is the case. However measurement periods shorter than 5 minutes should
not be used.
9. Measurements should be taken in a minimum of three locations in rooms at a height of 1.2m above the
floor level and at least 1m away from any surface.
10. The measured level of ambient noise should be used to determine compliance with the criteria for
acoustically sensitive rooms. If at the time of acoustic commissioning it is not possible to measure ambient
noise levels in the absence of construction or other extraneous noise sources that will not be present when
the building is complete, then, for mechanical services the lower level of 35 dB, LAeq or the lowest design
limit for the acoustically sensitive space should be used.
The above is intended as guidance for undertaking acoustic testing or measurement to demonstrate compliance
with the performance requirements in BREEAM. If the acoustician has felt it necessary to deviate from the above
procedures, they should provide a reason for doing so and confirm that the alternative procedures are adequate
for demonstrating that the building meets the acoustic performance requirements.
It is not acceptable to undertake a shorter test programme due to site readiness on the day of testing. If this issue
arises additional testing should be scheduled. It may be that testing at less than the typical regime identified would
be acceptable in some instances, for example in small healthcare facilities. Where this is the case, clear reasoning
must be provided by the compliant test body prior to awarding the credits.
Multi-residential and other residential institutions

Multi-residential and other residential institutions often contain a mixture of non-residential areas such as offices,
small retail outlets, meeting rooms etc. and residential areas, e.g. self-contained dwellings or rooms for residential
purposes. Where less than 5% of the assessed building's floor area is ‘non-residential’, these areas do not need to
be assessed, only residential spaces are assessed against the residential criteria in Table 28 on page cxxxix. Where
more than 5% of the assessed building's floor area includes areas other than for residential purposes, the 'non-
residential' areas must meet the relevant criteria for their function for sound insulation and acoustic environment, as
set out in the criteria for Table 27 on page cxxxix for 'other buildings' as well as the self-contained dwellings or
rooms for residential purposes. Only include occupied spaces (as defined in BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort)
covered by the Other buildings criteria in the calculation for the percentage of ‘non- residential’ floor area.
Remedial works
Where a programme of pre-completion testing identifies that spaces do not meet the standards, remedial works
must be carried out. The remedial works should occur prior to handover and occupation and the spaces re-tested
to ensure compliance. Remedial works must be carried out to all affected and potentially affected areas, including
rooms or spaces of a similar construction and performance requirement that were previously untested. The test
report, or covering correspondence, should include a clear statement that the testing is in accordance with the
required standard (where specified) or the BREEAM criteria and include the relevant pass or fail criteria.
cxlii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Evidence

Definitions
Compliant test body

A compliant test body is defined as :
1. Organisations having United Kingdom Accreditation Scheme (UKAS) accreditation to the appropriate
scope (for, e.g. to BS EN ISO/IEC 17025), or who are accredited by a member of the International
Accreditation Forum (IAF - www.iaf.nu) to the appropriate scope OR
2. Organisations or individuals registered with the ANC Registration Scheme OR
3. Companies or individuals that have been declared competent by an organisation who can provide
evidence that they follow the relevant principles of BS EN ISO/IEC 17024 (Conformity assessment -
General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons)(115) in relation to BREEAM
requirements.
Groups and sub-groups

As defined in the Building Regulations for England and Wales Approved Document E: Resistance to the Passage
of sound, section 1 (paragraphs 1.11 – 1.17). For example, flats and study bedrooms are usually considered as
two separate groups, and if there are significant differences in construction type then the groups will need to be
broken down into sub-groups. In addition to this, where there are steps or staggers greater than 300mm
between dwellings, dwellings without steps or staggers should be treated as a different sub-group to those
with steps or staggers. This is because the presence of steps or staggers is likely to improve performance.
Habitable rooms
For the purpose of this issue, habitable rooms include any room where individuals will sit or lie down and require a
reasonably quiet environmental to concentrate or rest. Such rooms are bedrooms, living rooms, dining rooms,
studies as well as kitchen-dining and kitchen-living rooms.
Multiple occupancy offices

Office space that is not cellular in nature, i.e. it is open plan, and designed to accommodate more than two desk
spaces or workstations.
Occupied spaces
user. Please note that for this issue, there is a specific, unrelated, definition of 'unoccupied' with reference to
acoustic testing and measurement.
Hea 05 Acoustic performance cxliii
Suitably qualified acoustician (SQA)

An individual achieving all the following items can be considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of a
BREEAM assessment:
1. Has a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such experience must clearly
demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting acoustics in relation to construction and the
built environment; including, acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for suitable
acoustic performance levels and mitigation measures.
2. An individual who holds a recognised acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate
professional body. The primary professional body for acoustics in the UK is the Institute of Acoustics.
Where an SQA is verifying the acoustic measurements or calculations carried out by another acoustician who
does not meet the SQA requirements, they must, as a minimum, have read and reviewed the report and confirm
in writing that they have found it to:
1. Represent sound industry practice

2. Be appropriate given the building being assessed and scope of works proposed
3. Avoid invalid, biased and exaggerated recommendations.
Additionally, written confirmation from the third-party verifier that they comply with the definition of an SQA is
required.
Law Court buildings

The CSDG, HMCS, 2010 has been withdrawn and has not been replaced. However, CSDG is still considered to
represent best practice standards and should be applied. Alternative equivalent standards can be used where
necessary provided justification is given.
Country specific guidance

The following standards or building regulations etc. are relevant for the assessment of the issue:
England
For multi-residential assessments, where the criteria refer to the performance standards in building regulations, in
England, this is referring to Approved Document E 2003 edition, with amendments 2004,2013 and 2015 –
Resistance to the passage of sound.
Northern Ireland
Northern Ireland, this is referring to - DOE Technical Booklet G - Sound 2012
Scotland
For healthcare buildings, where the criteria refer to the use of HTM08-01, assessments in Scotland should use
SHTM08-01 (116).
For Law Courts buildings, where the criteria refer to the use of Section 28 of CSDG, HMCS, 2010-assessments in
Scotland should refer to ETS-01 Courtroom technology and spatial requirements design guide 2011 (117) and ETS-
03 Estates technical standard environmental performance, design guide 2011 (118).
Scotland, this is referring to Technical Handbook 2016- Domestic: Section 5. Noise .
Wales
cxliv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Wales, this is referring to Approved Document E 2003 edition, with amendments 2004 and 2010 – Resistance to
the passage of sound.
Noise rating (NR) curves

Noise assessments based on NR curves are often used by building services consultants to predict internal noise
levels due to mechanical ventilation systems. However, the BREEAM requirement uses the indoor ambient noise
level, LAeq,T which includes external noise transmitted via the façade as well as internal noise such as that from
mechanical ventilation systems. In the absence of strong low frequency noise, LAeq,T can be estimated from the NR
value using the following formula: LAeq,T≈ NR + 6 dB. Therefore, if the NR value is known, but not the sound pressure
levels in the individual frequency bands, an estimate for the indoor ambient noise level LAeq,T can still be determined
from the NR value for the building services noise. The LAeq,T for the external noise transmitted via the façade must
then be combined with the LAeq,T for the building services.
Hea 06 Security cxlv
Hea 06 Security
1 1 1 1

Aim
To encourage the planning and implementation of effective measures that provide an appropriate level of security
to the building and site.
Value
– Encourages the development and
implementation of security measures specific
to the project
– Improves the understanding of security risks
to enable more considered specification of
additional measures
– Reduces the risk of crime relating to both
people and property
– Improves the health and wellbeing of the
occupiers by limiting stress from the fear of
crime.
Context
Feelings of safety and security are essential to successful, sustainable communities. Freedom from crime and the
fear of crime has a major impact on quality of life, and therefore effects the wellbeing and productivity of building
cxlvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
occupants.
Security risks are dependent on the context of a building and, as a result, need to be specifically determined based
on a number of variables including function and location. In addition to this, security risks are not static and can
change over time. Therefore consultation with the appropriate professionals is essential in determining the
necessary security measures for any development.
Through consultation with a Suitably Qualified Security Specialist (SQSS), site-specific recommendations can be
made to improve the security of the site. This creates a safer and more secure environment that reduces the fear of
and risk of crime. This supports the physical and mental wellbeing of building users, and the protection of property
and business.
Assessment scope

Applicable assessment criteria All All All All
Assessment type specific notes None None see ref 1.0 see ref 1.0

1.0 Speculative project if the SQSS is unable to make complete recommendations due to the
speculative nature of the assessment, then the credit may still be available. The SQSS must confirm
that they have addressed all parts of the project where it is feasible to do so, based on the
information available to them at the time of assessment. In relation to the influence of the occupiers
on security, the SQSS shall clearly document their assumptions in the SNA.
2.0 Prison buildings- In the case of an assessment of a prison building or development, the security
criteria apply only to publicly accessible buildings and car parking areas outside of the secure
perimeter zone (but still on the wider prison site). This could include visitor reception or waiting
buildings, facilities or estates offices and storage and visitor or staff parking. Security relating to
secure prison buildings and their related site layout falls outside of the scope of BREEAM.
Hea 06 Security cxlvii
Hea 06 Security
Assessment criteria
This issue has one part:
– Security of site and building (one credit)
The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:
One credit - Security of site and building

1 A Suitably Qualified Security Specialist (SQSS) conducts an evidence based Security Needs Assessment (SNA)
during or prior to Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent). The purpose of the SNA will be to identify
attributes of the proposal, site and surroundings which may influence the approach to security for the
development..
2 The SQSS develops a set of security controls for incorporation in to the proposals. Those controls shall directly
relate to the threats and assets identified in the preceding SNA.
3 The recommendations shall be incorporated into proposals and implemented in the as-built development.
Any deviation from those recommendations shall be justified and agreed with the SQSS.

4 A compliant risk based security rating scheme has been used. The performance against the scheme has been
confirmed by independent assessment and verification.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Timing of consultation
Where an SQSS was consulted at a later stage than RIBA stage 2, this credit may still be achievable. Provided all other
compliance requirements are met, the credit can still be awarded where the SQSS confirms that the implementation
of security measures have not been restricted, impaired or are not possible as a result of their later involvement (i.e.
everything that would or could have been recommended can still be implemented).
Scope of security controls

The scope of the recommended security controls may consider the following:
cxlviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
– Design and layout (e.g. crime prevention through environmental design)

– Physical security (e.g. tested and certified security products)
– Technological security (e.g. automatic access control systems, CCTV)
Evidence

Definitions
Architectural Liaison Officer (ALO)

An ALO is the same as the Crime Prevention Design Advisor and is the title given to the same role in some police
forces. www.securedbydesign.com
Counter Terrorism Security Advisor (CTSA)

CTSA's receive specialist training allowing them to identify and assess sites within their police force area that are
deemed critical and may be vulnerable to terrorist or extremist attack. They then devise appropriate security
plans to minimise impact on that site and the surrounding community. They also have responsibility for the
protection afforded to crowded places (areas which by virtue of their crowd density may be liable to terrorist
attack).
Crime Prevention Design Advisor (CPDA)

A CPDA is a specialist crime prevention officer, trained at the Home Office Crime Reduction College, who deals
with crime risk and designing out crime advice for the built environment. In addition to physical security measures
the officer will consider defensible space, access, crime and movement generators all of which can contribute to
a reduction in crime and disorder. www.securedbydesign.com
In most cases it is likely that an assessment carried out in accordance with the relevant Secured by Design (SBD)
design guides (relevant to the building or development type) will cover the items listed above. Wherever possible,
duplication should be avoided and so where existing schemes such as SBD cover the required information there
would be no need for a separate report to be created specifically for the purpose of the BREEAM assessment. In
all instances the assessor should review the evidence supplied, and ensure that the points listed have been
covered.
Dedicated cycle lanes

Marked-out and clearly signed routes to accommodate building users arriving on and travelling through the
assessed site on a bicycle. Cycle lanes should be fit for purpose and the following publications offer guidance on
how to appropriately size, design and construct cycle lanes:
Hea 06 Security cxlix
1. Local Transport Note 2/08 Cycle Infrastructure Design, Department of Transport, 2008.
2. The National Cycle Network Guidelines and Practical Details – issue 2, Sustrans and the relevant parts of
Appendix VI NCN Design and Construction Checklist.
Dedicated pedestrian crossing

Dedicated infrastructure or road markings and signage or instructions that enables a pedestrian to safely cross a
vehicle carriageway on the assessed site and continue their journey to or from the building. Such a crossing must
be fit for purpose, in that it will be appropriate for the width of the road, level of traffic and pedestrian use
specific to the site. It will also act to alert drivers of vehicles using the carriageway to the potential presence of
pedestrians in the carriageway, by ensuring they can be clearly seen and requiring the driver of the vehicle to give
way to the pedestrian.
External site areas

Areas external to the assessed building, but within the development’s site boundary, which contain vehicle or
pedestrian access roads and pathways to the building, parking, unloading and drop-off areas.
Peer review
A process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or current full members maintain a
standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure compliance with a code of conduct and professional
ethics.
SABRE
SABRE is a security assessment and certification scheme for buildings and built infrastructure assets. The scheme
provides facility owners, occupiers and interested parties with:
1. an independently assessed security risk management rating for a facility (SABRE Assurance Rating); and
2. the ability to measure, compare and evaluate the security performance of a facility against a range of
credible security threats.
SABRE has a star based rating system, with ratings subject to certain minimum criteria and the achievement of
issues. The scheme offers:
– Recognition of good practice

– A credible security label for buildings & infrastructure
– Demand for secure buildings
– Quantifiable reduction in security risks
– Better informed security investment decisions
– Improved value for money
Secured by Design (SBD)

SBD is a crime prevention initiative operated by the police services of the United Kingdom, which aims to utilise
design principles and products in the built environment that reduce the risk of crime by combining minimum
standards of physical security and proven principles of natural surveillance and defensible space. SBD is
administered by Police Crime Prevention Initiatives (PCPI) which is owned by the London Mayor's Office for
Policing Crime Prevention Initiatives (MOPAC) on behalf of the UK police service, and has the support of the
National Police Chiefs Council and Police Scotland.
Security needs assessment (SNA)

The project and site-specific assessment of security needs, including:
1. A visual audit of the site and surroundings, identifying environmental cues and features pertinent to the
security of the proposed development.
cl SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
2. Formal consultation with relevant stakeholders, including the local ALO, CPDA and CTSA (as applicable), in
order to obtain a summary of crime and disorder issues in the immediate vicinity of the proposed
development.
3. Identify risks specific to the proposed, likely or potential use of the buildings.
4. Identify risks specific to the proposed, likely or potential user groups of the buildings.
5. Identify any detrimental effects the development may have on the existing community.
The purpose of the assessment is to inform stakeholder decision-making and allow the identification and
evaluation of security recommendations and solutions.
The Safer Parking Scheme

An initiative of the Association of Chief Police Officers aimed at reducing crime and the fear of crime in parking
facilities. Safer parking status, Park Mark®, is awarded to parking facilities that have met the criteria of a risk
assessment conducted by the Police. The scheme is managed by the British Parking Association (BPA) and
supported by the Home Office and Scottish Executive.
Suitably qualified security specialist (SQSS)

An individual achieving 1–3 or 4 of the following can be considered to be suitably qualified for the purposes of
compliance with BREEAM:
1. Minimum of three years experience in a relevant security profession (in the last five years). This experience
must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting security in relation to
construction and the built environment, relevant to the type and scale of the project being undertaken.
2. Holds a qualification relevant to security.
3. Maintains a full membership to a relevant professional body, institute or certification scheme that has a
professional code of conduct, to which member adhere.
4. A specialist registered with a BREEAM recognised third party licensing or registration scheme for security
specialists.
Suitable security rating system

A security assessment method for buildings, led by an independent assessor, which grades security
performance against a defined standard at design, shell and core and post construction stages. Through
certification the system shall recognise and reward:
– Adoption of industry best practice, tools and standards,

– A systematic and risk based approach to security,
– An appropriate and proportionate response to security needs,
– Innovation in security risk assessment
– Engagement of competent persons for the process of identifying security needs, security planning, design
and the implementation of security controls.
An SQSS may be any practising security professional (e.g. a private security consultant or advisor, an ALO, CPDA,
CTSA, or an individual associated with the client team), however they must demonstrate they hold the experience,
qualifications and memberships required by the SQSS criteria. When appointing the SQSS, consideration should be
given to the appropriateness of the individual to carry out the task assigned. The SQSS should be able to
demonstrate they have experience dealing with similar projects with equal security levels and similar risks.
The following are currently recognised as a third party licensing or registration scheme for an SQSS
SABRE
Any licensing or registration scheme for security specialists that wishes to apply to be recognised by BREEAM
should contact BRE Global.
Hea 06 Security cli
The following is a list of existing schemes that may support the SQSS when developing the recommendations or
solutions addressing the issues raised in the SNA (criteria 1 and 2 on page cxlvii)
– Secured by Design, Design Guides (relevant to the building or development type)

– Safer Parking Scheme*
– SABRE
*The Safer Parking Scheme is only applicable to schemes where the primary function of the site is for parking of
vehicles, or to parking areas serving the prevailing site uses.
Useful references
The Metric Handbook(119) contains details of typical delivery or freight vehicle sizes and turning circles.
In addition to the SBD Schools guidance, Managing School Facilities, Guide 4 Improving Security in Schools, published
by the Department for Education and Employment (1996)(120), offers guidance on how to improve the security of
school premises.
clii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Hea 07 Safe and healthy surroundings
2 2 2 2
Aim
To encourage the provision of safe access around the site and outdoor space that enhances the wellbeing of
building users. .
Value
– Ensures safe access to and safe movement
around the site
– Facilitates the activities that can have physical,
mental and social benefits for occupants
aiding staff retention.
– Adds to the desirability of the building
helping to increase its value and appeal to
occupants and neighbours
Context
The external environment of a building plays an important role in the health and wellbeing of building users, and the
overall appeal of the building. Safe access to the building, and safe movement around the site are important
Hea 07 Safe and healthy surroundings cliii
considerations to ensure the health, safety and general wellbeing of the building and site users.
The provision of green recreational space provides numerous benefits to building occupants, and the building’s
value. It brings an element of biophilia to a building by supporting human interaction with the natural environment.
Further to this, green recreational space can promote healthy lifestyles by promoting exercise and reducing stress
levels. As a result it is increasingly acknowledged within Corporate Social Responsibility. Government policy also
recognises the benefits of green recreational space to the health and wellbeing of people, but also the indirect
benefits such as alleviating flood risk. Furthermore the health benefits of recreational space are beginning to be
recognised by organisations such as the NHS. Including such a space in development increases the desirability of the
building, thus improving its value.
Assessment scope


None
None
cliv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Assessment criteria
– Safe access (one credit)

– Outside space (one credit)
One credit - Safe access

Where external site areas form part of the assessed development the following apply:
1 Dedicated and safe cycle paths are provided from the site entrance to any cycle storage, and connect to off-
site cycle paths where applicable.
2 Dedicated and safe footpaths are provided on and around the site providing suitable links for the following:
2.a: The site entrance to the building entrance,
2.b: Car parks (where present) to the building entrance
2.c: The building to outdoor space, and
2.d: Connecting to off-site paths where applicable.
3 Pedestrian drop off areas are designed off of, or adjoining to, the access road and should provide direct
access to other footpaths.
Where vehicle delivery access and drop-off areas form part of the assessed development, the following apply:
4 Delivery areas are not accessed through general parking areas and do not cross or share the following:
4.a: pedestrian and cyclist paths
4.b: outside amenity areas accessible to building users and general public.
5 There is a dedicated parking or waiting area for goods vehicles with appropriate separation from the
manoeuvring area and staff and visitor car parking.
6 Parking and turning areas are designed for simple manoeuvring according to the type of delivery vehicle likely
to access the site, thus avoiding the need for repeated shunting.
One credit - Outside space

7 There is an outside space providing building users with an external amenity area.
Compliance notes
Hea 07 Safe and healthy surroundings clv
Methodology
None.
Evidence

Definitions
Dedicated and safe cycle lanes

assessed site on a bicycle. They must also have the following features:
1. Adequate external lighting in accordance with BS 5489-1:2013 (121) Lighting of roads and public
amenity areas.
2. Appropriate sized, designed and constructed. The following publications offer guidance on how to
demonstrate this:
a. Local Transport Note 2/08 Cycle Infrastructure Design, Department of Transport, 2008.
b. The National Cycle Network Guidelines and Practical Details – issue 2, Sustrans and the relevant parts
of Appendix VI NCN Design and Construction Checklist.
Dedicated and safe foot paths

assessed site on foot. They must also have the following features:
1. Dedicated pedestrian crossing points are provided where needed to allow pedestrians to cross vehicle
access routes
2. Appropriate traffic calming measures are in place to slow traffic at any crossing points
3. Developments with high numbers of visitors provide signposting to other local amenities and public
transport nodes off-site (where existing)
4. Adequate external lighting in accordance with BS 5489-1:2013 Lighting of roads and public amenity
areas.
Dedicated pedestrian crossing

Dedicated infrastructure or road markings and signage or instructions that enables a pedestrian to safely cross a
vehicle carriageway on the assessed site and continue their journey to or from the building. Such a crossing must
be fit for purpose, in that it will be appropriate for the width of the road, level of traffic and pedestrian use
specific to the site. It will also act to alert drivers of vehicles using the carriageway to the potential presence of
clvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
pedestrians in the carriageway, by ensuring they can be clearly seen and requiring the driver of the vehicle to give
way to the pedestrian.
External site areas

Areas external to the assessed building, but within the development’s site boundary, which contain vehicle or
pedestrian access roads and pathways to the building, parking, unloading and drop-off areas.
Outside space
The space is of an appropriate size to provide enough amenity for the predicted number of building users during
coffee or lunch breaks to gather, socialise, relax and connect with the natural environment. The space is
predominantly intended for building staff, but can be used by other building users where relevant and beneficial
to the building users. The outside space must:
– be an outdoor landscaped area, for example a garden, balcony or terrace. The majority of the space should be
open to the sky,
– have appropriate seating areas and be non-smoking,
– be located to ensure it is accessible to all building users and avoids areas that will have disturbances from
sources of noise (e.g. building services, car parks, busy roads, delivery areas, etc.).
Applicability of issue
The safe access criteria apply only to developments that have areas external to the assessed building and within the
boundary of the assessed development (regardless or not of whether that external area is or will be the
responsibility of the future building occupant). This includes external parking areas. If the assessed building does
not have any external areas and access to the building is direct from the public highway or footpath, then the
criteria concerning safe access are not applicable and the credit can be awarded by default.
Where the assessed building has no external areas but does have a covered parking facility, and cyclists/
pedestrians/ delivery vehicles access the building via this area, then the relevant safe access criteria apply and this
area must be assessed against those criteria.
Where it is not practical to provide dedicated footpaths from each parking space within a car park, it is expected
that design teams take every practical measure to ensure the safety of pedestrians. In general terms, as a minimum,
a safe pedestrian route should be provided from the pedestrian exit of the car park to the building entrance. For
larger car parks it would be beneficial to provide footpaths at regular intervals across it, to aid safe access from the
car to the building entrance and the design team should demonstrate that they have achieved this as far as is
practical.
Criteria 4 on page cliv and 5 on page cliv (delivery access through general parking areas) can be relaxed for smaller
sites if it can be confirmed that the building is of an operational type and size which is likely to mean all deliveries to
the building will be made by small vans and not heavy goods vehicles. Where dedicated delivery access and drop-
off areas do not form part of the assessed development, this criteria and criteria 7 on page cliv are not applicable.
The outdoor space criteria apply to all assessments. Where it is not possible to provide outdoor space, due to
statutory requirements, or other issues outside of the control of the developer, then this criterion will be filtered
out.
Where both the safe access and outside space criteria are deemed not applicable to the project (in accordance
with the above, the issue will be filtered out.
Hea 07 Safe and healthy surroundings clvii
Useful references
The Metric Handbook(122) contains details of typical delivery or freight vehicle sizes and turning circles.
clviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Energy
16% 14.5% 14.5% 9.5%
Summary
This category encourages the specification and design of energy efficient building solutions, systems and
equipment that support the sustainable use and management of energy during the building’s operation. Issues in
this section assess measures to improve the inherent energy efficiency of the building, encourage the reduction of
carbon emissions and support efficient management throughout the operational phase of the building’s life.
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions
min standards 13 credits
– Encourage the design of energy efficient buildings with energy performance above national building
regulations.
– Encourage the accurate modelling of operational energy consumption.
Ene 02 Energy monitoring min standards 2 credits
– Measure accurately the energy consumption of the building by end use, to help identify and reduce high energy
demands where possible.
Ene 03 External lighting 1 credit
– Reduce the building's energy consumption through the specification of energy efficient external lighting.
Ene 04 Low carbon design 3 credits
– Reduce the building's energy consumption through the adoption of passive design solutions, free cooling and
low or zero carbon (LZC) energy sources.
Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage 2 credits
– Reduce the building's operational greenhouse gas emissions (CO2 eq.) through the design, installation and
commissioning of energy efficient refrigeration systems.
Ene 06 Energy efficient transport systems 3 credits
– Reduce the building's energy consumption by specifying the optimum number and size of energy efficient
transport systems.
Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems 5 credits
– Reduce the building's operational greenhouse gas emissions (CO2 eq.) by specifying best practice energy
efficient laboratory equipment.
Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment 2 credits
– Demonstrate a meaningful reduction in the total unregulated energy demand of the building by using energy
efficient equipment.
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions clix
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and

carbon emissions
13 13 13 9
Aim
To minimise operational energy demand, primary energy consumption and CO2 emissions.
Value
– Reduce operational energy consumption
and associated carbon emissions
– Promote energy performance beyond
regulatory requirements including
recognition of net zero carbon solutions in
line with WGBC policy
– Encourage consideration of operational
aspects in determining optimal energy
strategy
– Provides a route to verification of building
performance post occupation
– Help in reducing the performance gap
between predicted and actual performance
Context
Emissions from buildings account for 37% of total UK greenhouse gas emissions. These are made up of 45%
direct emissions due to the burning of fossil fuels for heat, and 55% indirect emissions related to electricity use
(123). Factors such as the thermal insulation, air permeability, shading and glazing areas should be carefully
considered early as they can be used to reduce heating, cooling and lighting demands. Systems efficiency and
carbon intensity of the selected energy source are also important and all are included in the BREEAM assessment.
clx SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Detailed and accurate energy modelling can take into account factors like occupancy, weather scenarios and
management of building services as well as any contributions from renewable and low carbon technologies. More
detailed modelling helps the design teams predict the expected energy performance and take appropriate
actions to reduce the performance gap where they are involved post occupation. Actual usage patterns are
changing over time and it is possible that predicted energy consumption will not be that close to the actual energy
consumption. However, with the use of accurate modelling any areas of difference can be identified and
appropriate actions can be taken to optimise energy performance.
Assessment scope
Fully Simple building Shell and core Shell only

fitted
Applicable assessment All All All 1
criteria
Assessment type specific None See ref. 1.0 (for criteria 2–5 See ref. 1.1 and See ref.
notes only) 1.2 1.3

1.0 Depending on the building type, the assessor should use their discretion to define the best
approach to undertake additional energy modelling for generating predicted energy consumption
targets by end use.
1.1 For the energy modelling, if the building services efficiencies and performance specifications are
not known (i.e. they are not within the remit of the shell and core developer and will be provided as
part of the fit-out works), services complying with the minimum energy efficiency standards or
backstop levels required by the relevant national building regulations should be used.
1.2 For the energy modelling, the design team can use the performance specifications confirmed
within a green fit-out agreement that is contractually required from the tenants in their fit-out
works. This rule applies only to those areas of the building that the scope of the green fit-out
agreement covers. Speculative areas of the assessed building not fitted out or covered by the
scope of such an agreement must follow the note 1.1.
1.3 Calculate an Energy Performance Ratio just for the building’s heating and cooling energy demand
only (EPR ED). Compare the EPR ED achieved with the EPR NCbenchmark scale and award the
corresponding number of BREEAM credits.
None
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions clxi
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and

carbon emissions
Assessment criteria
Up to nine credits - Energy performance

1 Calculate an Energy Performance Ratio for New Constructions (EPR NC). Compare the EPR NC achieved with the
benchmarks in Table 29 below and award the corresponding number of BREEAM credits.
Table 29 Ene 01 EPR NC benchmark scale

Minimum standards
BREEAM EPR NC Rating Minimum requirements
credits
1 0.1 Requires a performance improvement progressively
2 0.2 better than the relevant national building regulations
compliant standard (see Energy performance on the
3 0.3 next page).
4 0.4 Excellent Requires 4 credits to be achieved (equivalent to an
5 0.5 EPR of at least 0.4).
6 0.6 Outstanding Requires 6 credits to be achieved (equivalent to an
7 0.7 EPR of at least 0.6).
8 0.8
9 0.9 AND zero net
regulated CO2
emissions*.
*Zero net regulated CO2 emissions are only required to achieve the maximum number of credits (9). There is no
additional CO2 minimum requirement for any BREEAM rating.
A description of how the EPR NC is calculated from a building's modelled operational energy performance, primary
energy consumption and CO2 emissions is provided in Energy performance on the next page.
Four credits - Prediction of operational energy consumption
Prerequisite
2 Achieve Man 01 Project brief and design: Criterion 5 on page xlviii for the design team to hold a preliminary
design workshop focusing on the design for operational energy performance.
Four credits – Energy modelling and reporting

3 Undertake additional energy modelling during the design and post construction stage to generate predicted
operational energy consumption figures (see Prediction of operational energy consumption on page clxv).
4 Report predicted energy consumption targets by end use, design assumptions and input data (with
justifications).
5 Carry out a risk assessment to highlight any significant design, technical, and process risks that should be
monitored and managed throughout the construction and commissioning process.
clxii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Up to two credits - Beyond zero net regulated carbon

6 The building achieves an EPR NC≥ 0.9 and zero net regulated CO2 emissions (see Definitions on page clxvii).
7 Energy generation from on-site and near-site LZC sources is sufficient to offset carbon emissions from
regulated energy use plus a percentage of emissions from unregulated energy use.
8 Award the exemplary credits based on the percentage of additional emissions from unregulated energy that
are offset by LZC sources (see Table 30 below).
Three credits - Carbon negative

9 The building is deemed carbon negative where > 100% (see Table 30 below) of carbon emissions from
unregulated (and regulated) energy use are offset by energy generated from on-site and near-site LZC
sources (see Definitions on page clxvii).
Table 30 Exemplary performance credits

Exemplary performance credits Equivalent % criteria
1 10%
2 50%
3 > 100%
Two credits – Verification stage

10 Achieve two credits in Ene 02 Energy monitoring on page clxxiii.
11 The client commits to the verification stage and to report on the actual energy consumption compared with
the targets set in criterion 4 on the previous page.
12 The energy modelling (criterion 3 on the previous page) is:
12.a:Submitted to BRE and
12.b:Retained by the building owner.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Energy performance
The methodology for the EPR NC calculation considers three metrics of modelled building performance when
determining the number of credits achieved for this issue. The three metrics are:
1. The building’s heating and cooling energy demand

2. The building's primary energy consumption
3. The total resulting CO2 emissions.
These three metrics for the actual modelled building performance are compared against the relevant national
building regulations compliant standard (i.e. a baseline) and each is expressed as a percentage improvement. The
percentage improvements are then compared against modelled building stock and translated into a ratio of
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions clxiii
performance for each metric. These ratios are then weighted for each metric and added together to determine
the overall Energy Performance Ratio (EPR NC).
The calculation is determined using the following performance data from annual energy modelling of the building’s
specified or designed regulated fixed building services and fabric, as undertaken by an accredited energy assessor
using approved building energy calculation software:
1. Building floor area ( m²)

2. Notional building heating and cooling energy demand (mJ/m²)
3. Actual building heating and cooling energy demand (mJ/m²)
4. Notional building primary energy consumption (kWh/m²)
5. Actual building primary energy consumption (kWh/m²)
6. Target Emission Rate (TER) (kg CO2/m²)
7. Building Emission Rate (BER) (kg CO2/m²).
The necessary energy modelling data required to determine building performance is sourced from National
Calculation Method compliant energy modelling software, used by the design team to demonstrate building
regulation compliance. This data are then entered into the BREEAM Ene 01 calculator to determine the EPR NC and
number of credits achieved. The Ene 01 calculator is within the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool, in
the Assessment issue scoring tab, Energy section.
The four countries of the UK have their own building regulations for energy and while they use the same
methodology and approved calculation software, each have different definitions of the notional building and set
different requirements for regulatory compliance, i.e. baseline performance. This is accounted for in the BREEAM NC
2018 Ene 01 methodology through the ‘translator curves’ defined for each country. Therefore, the EPR NC and the
BREEAM credits are determined by comparing the assessed buildings modelled operational energy performance
relative to the regulatory baseline for the country in which the building is located.
The following lists the building regulations used to define each country’s BREEAM ‘translator curve’ to benchmark
building energy performance relative to a regulatory baseline and award credits.
Scotland
Technical Handbook 2016 Non-Domestic - Energy.
Northern Ireland
Technical Booklet F2 2012 Conservation of fuel and power in buildings other than dwellings.
England
Approved Document Part L2A 2010 Conservation of fuel and power in new buildings other than dwellings, 2013
edition with 2016 amendments - for use in England.
Wales
Approved Document Part L2A 2010 Conservation of fuel and power, New buildings other than dwellings, 2014
edition incorporating 2016 amendments - for use in Wales.
The relevant building regulations for Scotland are the Technical Handbook 2016 Non-Domestic, Section 6 Energy.
The relevant building regulations for Northern Ireland are the Technical Booklet F2 2012 Conservation of fuel and
power in buildings other than dwellings.
The relevant building regulations for England are Approved Document Part L2A 2010 Conservation of fuel and
power in new buildings other than dwellings, 2013 edition with 2016 amendments - for use in England.
The relevant building regulations for Wales are Approved Document Part L2A 2010 Conservation of fuel and
power, New buildings other than dwellings, 2014 edition incorporating 2016 amendments - for use in Wales.
The methodology is described in greater detail in Guidance Note provided on the BREEAM website.
Building regulations classifications for multi-residential buildings

Multi-residential buildings that can be assessed under BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 will be classified under
either the non-dwelling version of the relevant building regulations or a combination of the non-dwelling and
dwelling of the building regulations. For England, Wales and Northern Ireland, areas classified under their relevant
clxiv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
building regulations documents, Approved Documents (AD) Part L2A and the NI Technical Handbook F2, are
classed as ‘buildings other than dwellings’. However this does also include ‘rooms for residential purposes’ (see
below). Areas classified as Part L1A or Technical Handbook F1 are ‘self-contained dwellings’. The Part L/Technical
Handbook F classification impacts this BREEAM issue in that areas classified as Part L2A/F2 must be assessed using
SBEM and areas classified as Part L1A/F1 must be assessed using SAP. For Scotland, see the General section and
Appendix A of the Technical Handbook Non-Domestic for definitions of domestic and non-domestic buildings.
For Wales, areas classified under the relevant building regulations documents, Approved Documents (AD) Part
L2A, are classed as ‘buildings other than dwellings’. However this does also include ‘rooms for residential purposes’
(see below). Areas classified as Part L1A are ‘self-contained dwellings’. The Part L classification impacts this BREEAM
issue in that areas classified as Part L2A must be assessed using SBEM and areas classified as Part L1A must be
assessed using SAP.
For Northern Ireland, areas classified under their relevant building regulations documents, the Technical Booklet F2,
are classed as ‘buildings other than dwellings’. However this does also include ‘rooms for residential purposes’ (see
below). Areas classified as Technical Booklet F1 are ‘self-contained dwellings’. The Technical Booklet F classification
impacts this BREEAM issue in that areas classified as Part F2 must be assessed using SBEM and areas classified as
Part F1 must be assessed using SAP.
For England, areas classified under the relevant building regulations documents, Approved Documents (AD) Part
L2A, are classed as ‘buildings other than dwellings’. However this does also include ‘rooms for residential purposes’
(see below). Areas classified as Part L1A are ‘self-contained dwellings’. The Part L classification impacts this BREEAM
issue in that areas classified as Part L2A must be assessed using SBEM and areas classified as Part L1A must be
assessed using SAP.
Room for residential purposes

The building regulations for Wales, Northern Ireland and England give the following definition:
Room for residential purposes means a room, or suite of rooms, which is not a dwelling-house or a flat and which is
used by one or more persons to live and sleep and includes a room in a hostel, a hotel, a boarding house, a hall of
residence or a residential home but does not include a room in a hospital, or other similar establishment, used for
patient accommodation.
Guidance for assessing Ene 01 performance in buildings that contain residential

areas
Guidance for assessing performance where the building has been modelled using SAP only
The relevant data must be sourced from the SAP data sheet from the approved software (provided by the
Accredited energy assessor). This data must first be entered in to the 'Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-
Residential Buildings Using SAP'. The calculator converts the data into the outputs outlined in Energy performance
on page clxii. Once converted by the Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator, the outputs should be entered into
BREEAM’s Ene 01 Calculator in the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and Reporting tool. This calculator will then confirm
the Energy Performance Ratio (EPR NC) and number of BREEAM credits achieved.
The Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings Using SAP describes in detail what data to
source from the SAP data sheets.
Guidance for assessing performance where the building has been modelled using SAP and SBEM
Where the building has been classified under both the non-dwelling and the dwelling regulations, because it
contains both residential and non-residential areas, two sets of energy performance data will be required: one set
from SBEM for the non-domestic areas; and one from SAP for the self-contained dwellings.
The relevant SAP data must first be entered into the 'Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential
Buildings Using SAP'. This calculator converts the data into the outputs outlined in Energy performance on page clxii.
This converted SAP data along with the relevant outputs from SBEM must then be added to BREEAM’s Ene 01
Calculator in the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and Reporting Tool. This calculator will then confirm the Energy
Performance Ratio (EPR NC) and number of BREEAM credits achieved.
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions clxv
Where both SBEM and SAP outputs are used, the total credits achieved are determined by area weighting the
credits achieved for the domestic and non-domestic parts of the building. The area weighted totals are then
added together and rounded down to the nearest whole credit. The same method of area weighting is applied to
the percentage improvement on the building's Target Emission Rate. The area weighted credits and percentage
improvement are the totals used to determine compliance with BREEAM’s Ene 01 minimum standards.
Guidance for assessing performance where the building has new build and
refurbished areas
As part of the bespoke criteria development for Ene 01 issue, we allow the new-build to be assessed against the
New Construction scheme and the refurbishment against the Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme. The tool
performs an area-weighted average score.
Renewable and low carbon installations

Any low or zero carbon technologies installed in the assessed building can be used to offset emissions arising from
regulated and, in the case of exemplary credits, unregulated energy consumption. The LZC technology can be
installed on-site or near site where a private wire arrangement is in place (see Definitions on page clxvii).
Extensions to existing buildings

If assessing a new extension to an existing building, the energy modelling must be based on the building fabric of
the new extension and the building services plant installed that will service the new extension (either existing or new).
The energy modelling does not have to consider the existing building fabric where this will not form part of the
scope of the BREEAM assessment. Nor does it have to consider existing building services where they are not
supplying services (heating, cooling or ventilation) to the new extension being assessed.
Building assessed as part of a larger development

If the assessed building is part of a larger development and there are existing or new LZC sources which serve other
buildings, then the amount of LZC energy generation should be allocated to buildings based on their energy
consumption. However, LZC energy generation from existing LZC sources that has already been allocated to show
compliance with buildings regulations must be excluded from consideration to avoid double counting.
Prediction of operational energy consumption

The Energy Prediction and Verification Guidance defines a methodology to use for design stage energy modelling
and subsequent in-use validation in order to obtain the Ene 01 credits. The aim of the methodology is to incentivise
better understanding of energy modelling techniques and reward more accurate predictions of energy use at early
stages to support better design and construction of new buildings.
The energy modeller must model several scenarios creating a range of predicted consumptions, informed by a risk
assessment of the building energy uses.
These scenarios will consider:
– Weather
– Operating hours for systems
– Occupancy hours
– Management factors
The intention is to provide consistency with existing industry standard guidance where possible. Wherever
appropriate, the BREEAM methodology refers to existing documents for compatibility with current industry
standard methodologies. For more information please refer to the 'Energy Prediction and Verification' document
provided on the BREEAM website.
clxvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Estimating unregulated energy demand for building systems or processes

At present there is no standard or national calculation methodology for modelling unregulated energy demands in
a building. To demonstrate compliance with the ‘exemplary level criteria’ the building’s modelled operational
‘regulated’ energy consumption may be used as a proxy for its unregulated energy demand, i.e. unregulated
energy equals 100% of regulated energy. While not accurate, this approach enables BREEAM to assess and award
credits for buildings that meet a proportion of its unregulated energy demand via on-site or near-site renewable
energy sources. Where unregulated energy demand for the building can be accurately predicted, then this data can
be used to determine the percentage of unregulated energy demand met via renewable energy sources.
Unregulated energy demand can be estimated on the basis of metered data from a similar or the same building
type with the same unregulated system or process loads or by using the methodology described in CIBSE TM54:
2013, 'Evaluating Operational Energy Performance of Buildings at the Design Stage, 2013 ' (124). Where additional
energy modelling has been carried out (criterion 3 on page clxi), the output of this modelling should be used to
estimate the unregulated energy demand.
Verification stage
Where the exemplary credits are achieved and the verification stage will be followed, the building owner will need
to:
– report energy consumption for the first 12 months of normal occupancy for all relevant end uses
– report energy consumption for the first 12 months, broken down into monthly intervals, for all relevant end uses
(see Man 05 Aftercare on page lxxxii)
– compare reported energy consumption figures with targets set in criterion 4 on page clxi
– identify causes of discrepancies and the remediation actions required.
More information on the Verification stage is provided in Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction
2018scheme version on page 25.
Evidence

2–12 One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential
1 A copy of the building regulations output As per interim design stage, but with the
document from the approved software. output documents from the approved
The output documents must be based software reflecting performance at the
on the design stage of analysis. as-built stage of analysis. This must
A copy of the building regulations output account for any changes to the
document from the design stage SAP specification during construction and the
calculations (where relevant for multi- measured air leakage rate, ductwork
residential buildings). leakage and fan performances (as
required by building regulations).
2 Workshop minutes, agreed outcomes. As per interim design stage.
3–5 Predicted energy consumption values, As per interim design stage.
design assumptions, input data and risk Where changes to design assumptions
assessments reported as detailed in the and input data have occurred at post-
'Energy Prediction and Verification' construction stage, the energy modelling
document. Confirmation of energy should be re-run to take into account
modeller’s qualifications and experience. those changes.
6–9 As above, plus evidence confirming: As required above and as per interim
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions clxvii

1. The total carbon neutral energy design stage.
generation (kWh/yr)
2. The source of the carbon neutral
energy
3. Calculated estimate of energy
consumption from unregulated
systems or process (kWh/yr)
(only required if confirming zero
regulated carbon or carbon
negative exemplary credits)
4. Calculated estimate of exported
energy surplus (only required if
confirming carbon negative
status).
10–12 The client’s commitment to proceed to As per interim design stage.
the verification stage and report the
energy consumption.
Definitions
Accredited energy assessor

A person registered with an accredited energy assessment scheme provider. The scheme provider will be
licensed by the relevant government department to accredit competent persons in the energy assessment of
non-domestic or domestic buildings for the purposes of demonstrating compliance with the building
regulations in the country of origin. The energy assessor should be appropriately accredited for the building
being assessed. For a full list of approved accreditation schemes or organisations for energy assessors and links
to registers of accredited energy assessors visit: www.ndepcregister.com (non-domestic),
www.epcregister.com (domestic)
www.scotland.gov.uk/www.epbniregisternd.com (non-domestic), www.epbniregister.com (domestic)
1. Wales: https://www.ndepcregister.com (non-domestic), www.epcregister.com (domestic)

2. Scotland: www.gov.scot
3. Northern Ireland: www.epbniregisternd.com (non-domestic), www.epbniregister.com (domestic)
4. England: www.ndepcregister.com (non-domestic), www.epcregister.com (domestic)
Only individuals that appear on the DCLG register for England and Wales, the Department of Finance register for
Northern Ireland and the Scottish Government register are qualified as accredited energy assessors.
Approved building energy calculation software

Software approved for the purpose of demonstrating compliance with the energy efficiency and carbon
emission requirements of the building regulations (and in turn compliance with the EPBD recast 2012. The
definition includes the SBEM and its interface iSBEM, as well as third-party software approved by the relevant
government department. A list of approved software for non-domestic buildings for Wales is provided here:
www.ncm.bre.co.uk
A list of approved software for non-domestic buildings for Scotland is provided here: www.scotland.gov.uk
clxviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
A list of approved software for non-domestic buildings for Northern Ireland is provided here:
www.ncm.bre.co.uk/
A list of approved software for non-domestic buildings for England is provided here: www.ncm.bre.co.uk
A list of approved software for non-domestic buildings is as follows:
2. Wales, Northern Ireland and England: www.ncm.bre.co.uk/
Approved building energy calculation software will provide the data required for calculating the EPR NC and
BREEAM Ene 01 credits. Please note that for dwellings (where relevant to the assessment of multi-residential
buildings), the government’s SAP may be used. The current version is SAP 2012 version 9.92 (October 2013).
Backstop levels
Backstop levels are identified as minimum energy efficiencies in the guidance to the standards on building
services in Section 6 of the Technical Handbook for Scotland.
Building Emission Rate (BER)

The building CO2 emission rate expressed as carbon dioxide emissions per square metre per year (kg
CO2/m²/year). The BER is calculated in accordance with the National Calculation Methodology (NCM) and the
Simplified Buildings Energy Model (SBEM).
Building regulations
Building regulations set standards for the design and construction of buildings to ensure the safety and health of
people in or about those buildings. They also include requirements to ensure that fuel and power is conserved
and facilities are provided for people, including those with disabilities, to access and move around inside
buildings. In Scotland, they also aim to secure the welfare and convenience of persons in or about buildings and
to further the achievement of sustainable development. See Energy performance on page clxii for details of the
relevant documents for each country.
Carbon negative building

A building or site that generates, surplus to its own energy demand, an excess of renewable or carbon neutral
energy and exports that surplus via the national grid to meet other, off-site energy demands, i.e. the building is a
net exporter of zero carbon energy. Surplus in this respect means the building or site generates more energy via
renewable or carbon neutral sources that it needs to meet its own regulated and unregulated energy needs. Any
surplus must be exported through the national grid. This definition of carbon negative focuses only on energy
and carbon dioxide emissions resulting from the operational stage of the building life cycle (as this is the stated
aim of this assessment issue). It does not take into account the embodied carbon, in terms of carbon fixing or
emissions resulting from the manufacture or disposal of building materials and components (these impacts or
benefits are dealt with in Mat 01 Environmental impacts from construction products - Building life cycle
assessment on page 287).
Carbon neutral
Carbon neutral means that, through a transparent process of calculating building operational emissions,
reducing those emissions and offsetting residual emissions, net carbon emissions equal zero. This includes
carbon emissions from both regulated and unregulated energy consuming plant and systems.
Controlled service or fitting

The building regulations for England (125) define this as a service or fitting in relation to which the building
regulations imposes a requirement.
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions clxix
The building regulations for energy performance of buildings define this as a service or fitting in relation to which
the building regulations imposes a requirement.
Dwelling Emission Rate (DER)

The DER is the estimated carbon dioxide emissions per square metre per year (kg CO2/yr) for the dwelling as
designed. It accounts for energy used in heating, fixed cooling, hot water and lighting. It is the equivalent of the
BER for dwellings.
Dynamic simulation model (DSM)

A software tool that models energy inputs and outputs for different types of buildings over time. In certain
situations, SBEM will not be sophisticated enough to provide an accurate assessment of a building’s energy
efficiency. In these cases government-approved proprietary dynamic simulation models may be used.
Energy demand
The building energy provided for end uses in the building such as space heating, hot water, space cooling,
lighting, fan power and pump power. Energy demands are the same as room loads. One of the outputs from the
building regulations output document is for heating and cooling energy demand only, not for any other building
energy uses. Heating and cooling energy demands are influenced by factors including building fabric heat loss, air
permeability, glazing and shading.
Energy Performance Ratio for New Constructions (EPR NC)

A metric that is unique to BREEAM and calculated by the BREEAM Ene 01 Calculator within the BREEAM
Assessment Scoring and Reporting tool, using modelled outputs from the approved building energy calculation
software. It is a ratio that defines the performance of a BREEAM-assessed building in terms of its regulated
operational heating and cooling energy demand, primary energy consumption and CO2 emissions. This measure
of performance is used to determine the number of Ene 01 credits a building achieves in the BREEAM
assessment.
A description of how the EPR NC is defined and calculated is summarised in Energy performance on page clxii and
outlined in greater detail in Guidance Note 12.
Fixed building service

The building regulations for energy performance of buildings define this as any part of, or any controls
associated with:
1. Fixed internal or external lighting systems but does not include emergency escape lighting or specialist
process lighting; or
2. Fixed systems for heating, hot water service, air-conditioning or mechanical ventilation.
Green fit-out agreement

A formal contractually binding agreement between a building developer or owner and their tenants. As such, a
green fit-out agreement (or ‘green’ clauses or sections in a lease agreement) can be used as evidence
demonstrating compliance with the relevant BREEAM issue criteria at the interim design and final post-
construction stages of assessment. The agreement should make specific reference to the specification
requirements or levels claimed, and as defined by BREEAM in this technical manual, where credits are awarded.
BREEAM aims to encourage a mutually beneficial relationship between the shell and core developer or owner of a
building and its future tenants so that the fully fitted operational building achieves performance against the
highest possible environmental standards. In order to achieve this, BREEAM encourages and rewards the use of
formal legally binding green fit-out agreements between a developer or owner and their tenant. Where a legally
clxx SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
binding green fit-out agreement is provided as evidence and it commits the tenant’s fit-out to meet the criteria
of this BREEAM issue, credits are available to be awarded.
Minimum energy efficiency standards

Minimum energy efficiency standards are the minimum acceptable values for each type of service required by the
building regulations for Wales, Northern Ireland and England, as set out in the Non-Domestic Building Services
Compliance Guide. They are called 'minimum acceptable standards' in the Technical Booklet F2 for Northern
Ireland. They are called 'Limiting services efficiencies' in Part L2A for England.
Low or zero carbon (LZC) technologies

A low or zero carbon technology provides a source of energy generation from renewable energy sources or
from a low carbon source such as combined heat and power (CHP) or ground source heat pumps (GSHP).
National Calculation Method (NCM)

The NCM enables quantification of building operational energy consumption and CO2 emissions resulting from
regulated building services, systems and fabric performance. The NCM is the methodology used for
demonstrating compliance with the European Union Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD) 2012
(recast). Building energy modelling compliant with the NCM can be carried out using approved software. The full
details are described in the NCM Modelling Guide for the relevant country:
1. Scotland: NCM Modelling Guide (2015)(126)www.gov.scot/

2. Northern Ireland: NCM Modelling Guide (2010) (127), www.ncm.bre.co.uk
3. England: NCM Modelling Guide (2013), www.ncm.bre.co.uk.
Use whichever building regulations are relevant for the assessed building
The full details are described in the 2013 Wales NCM Modelling Guide, www.2013ncm.bre.co.uk.
The full details are described in the National Calculation Methodology (NCM) Modelling Guide for Scotland
(2010), www.gov.scot
The full details are described in the NCM Modelling Guide (2010) (128), www.ncm.bre.co.uk.
The full details are described in the NCM Modelling Guide (2013), www.ncm.bre.co.uk.
Near-site LZC
A LZC source of energy generation located near to the site of the assessed building. The source is most likely to
be providing energy for all or part of a local community of buildings, including the assessed building, e.g.
decentralised energy generation linked to a community heat network or renewable electricity sources connected
via a private wire arrangement.
Notional building
A hypothetical building of the same size, shape, orientation and shading as the actual building, with the same
activities, zoning and system types and exposed to the same weather data, but with pre-defined specified
properties for the building fabric, fittings and services. The notional building is concurrent with the national
building regulations for Wales 2014, Northern Ireland 2012 and England 2013.For Scotland 2013, the ‘notional’
building is generated based upon a building designed to meet the 2002 standards and a percentage
improvement is applied to define the compliant building target carbon dioxide emission rate (TER).
On-site LZC
A LZC source of energy generation which is located on the same site as the assessed building.
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions clxxi
Primary energy
Energy from fossil fuel and renewable sources that has not undergone any conversion or transformation
process.
Primary energy consumption

This measures the primary energy content of delivered fuel or other energy sources. It takes account of the
energy associated with fuel production, energy transformation (e.g., electricity generation) and distribution
processes, including losses, in addition to the inherent energy content of the fuel or energy source.
Private wire arrangement

In the context of BREEAM for low or zero carbon technology installations, a private wire arrangement is where any
electricity generated on or in the vicinity of the site is fed directly to the building being assessed, by dedicated
power supplies. If electricity is generated which is surplus to the instantaneous demand of the building, this
electricity may be fed back to the national grid. The carbon benefit associated with any electricity fed into the grid
in this manner can only be allocated against an individual installation or building. In cases where a building is
supplied by a communal installation, no carbon benefit can be allocated to buildings which are not connected to
the communal installation.
Regulated energy
Building energy consumption resulting from the specification of a controlled, fixed building services and fittings,
including space heating and cooling, hot water, ventilation and lighting.
Standard Assessment Procedure (SAP) for Energy Rating of Dwellings

The government’s approved methodology for assessing the energy performance of new dwellings. The current
version is SAP 2012 version 9.92. The procedure accounts for energy used in:
– Space heating and cooling

– Hot water
– Fixed lighting
– Mechanical ventilation.
The Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM)

SBEM is software developed for DCLG by BRE. SBEM is a computer program that provides an analysis of a
building’s energy consumption. It calculates monthly energy use and carbon dioxide emissions of a building
(excluding dwellings) based on a description of the building geometry, construction, use and HVAC and lighting
equipment. SBEM is accompanied by a basic user interface, iSBEM. There also exists alternative approved
software ‘front-end’ interfaces for SBEM.
Target Emission Rate (TER)

The target emission rate is the minimum energy performance requirement (required by building regulations) for
a new non-domestic building (kgCO2/yr). The TER is calculated in accordance with NCM and SBEM. For dwellings,
the TER is calculated using the SAP methodology according to the requirements defined in the building
regulations for dwellings. The TER is expressed in terms of the mass of CO2 emitted per year per square metre of
total useful floor area of the building (kgCO2/yr).
Unregulated energy
Building energy consumption resulting from a system or process that is not ‘controlled’, i.e. energy consumption
from systems in the building on which the Building Regulations do not impose a requirement. For example, this
may include energy consumption from systems integral to the building and its operation, e.g. lifts, escalators,
clxxii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
refrigeration systems and ducted fume cupboards; or energy consumption from operational-related
equipment, e.g. computers, servers, printers, photocopiers, laptops, mobile fume cupboards, cooking, audio-
visual equipment and other appliances.
Zero net regulated carbon emissions

The annual building net regulated CO2 emissions (kgCO2/yr) arising as a result of annual energy consumption
from fixed building services and of requirements imposed on such systems by the building regulations. Fixed
building services include space heating and cooling, domestic hot water, ventilation and lighting systems, also
referred to as controlled services and fittings. The building energy modelling can take account of contributions of
energy generated from on-site and near-site renewable and low carbon installations when aiming to achieve a
zero regulated carbon status. Energy generated and supplied from off-site renewable and low carbon
installations cannot be used to meet this definition.
None.
Ene 02 Energy monitoring clxxiii
Ene 02 Energy monitoring

Minimum standards
Aim
To encourage the installation of energy sub-metering that facilitates the monitoring of operational energy
consumption. To enable managers and consultants post-handover to compare actual performance with targets in
order to inform ongoing management and help in reducing the performance gap.
Value
– Allows managers and occupants to
monitor operational energy consumption by
fuel and by end-use categories to identify
poor performance and changes in
consumption patterns
– Allows owners, managers and occupiers to
take steps to minimise the performance gap
between predicted and actual energy
consumption
– Allows the management of energy costs and
identification of areas of inefficient operation,
system deficiencies and building
management issues
– Allows comparison between the
performance of new and existing building
properties.
Context
‘You can’t manage what you do not measure’ - Through detailed energy metering and monitoring, owners and
facilities managers are able to understand how their building is performing in greater detail and take steps to
clxxiv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
improve deficiencies. Poor energy monitoring and management is the biggest single contributor to higher than
expected energy use in operational buildings and can present major opportunities to reduce energy consumption.
Appropriate actions such as changing practices and procedures, cutting wastage and managing energy use can
reduce operating costs, energy consumption and carbon emissions. Appropriate strategies for metering can also
ensure the building owner is better informed of the usage figures for the building to optimise energy supply
contracts and renegotiate new ones(129) as well as managing facilities management contractors and comparing
performance across a property portfolio.
Assessment scope
Fully Simple Shell and core Shell

fitted building only
Applicable assessment All All All None
criteria
Assessment type specific None See ref. 1.0 See ref. 1.1 (for criteria 4 and 5 None
notes only)
The first credit is applicable to all building types. The second credit is not applicable to preschools, primary schools,
law courts, prisons and multi-residential buildings.

1.0 Depending on the building type, the assessor should use their discretion to identify which end-use
categories (where present) should be sub-metered.
1.1 Sub-metering of high energy load and tenancy areas credit
Criteria 4 and 5 on page clxxvii
Meters must be installed on the energy supply to each separate tenanted unit or floor plate within
the assessed development.
2.0 Buildings situated on campus developments
The systems must be monitored using either an appropriate energy monitoring and management
system or another automated control system, e.g. outstations linked to a central computer, for
monitoring energy consumption. The criteria only apply to the assessed building. Where energy
services are supplied from an existing building on the campus, they shall be metered by fuel at the
entry points to the assessed building. Provision of a pulsed or other open protocol communication
output is not sufficient to award the credit for these building types.
2.1 Small tenanted office, industrial or retail units
A single meter per unit for electricity and another for heating is sufficient to achieve this credit.
Individual areas within each unit do not need to be sub-metered. For the purpose of this BREEAM
issue, a small unit is defined as less than 200m².
2.2 Large office, industrial or retail units
For a development consisting of one or more larger units (i.e. greater than 200m²), sufficient sub-
metering to allow for monitoring of the relevant function areas or departments within the unit
must be specified, in addition to metering of the unit as a whole.
2.3 Healthcare
Large-scale medical equipment or systems can be excluded (although it is recommended that sub-
metering is considered in such instances).
2.4 Multi-residential accommodation or residential institutions
Ene 02 Energy monitoring clxxv
An electric heating system can be combined with lighting and small power, as long as sub-metering
is provided for each floor plate or other appropriate sub-division.
2.5 Self-contained dwellings with individual utility meters
If self-contained dwellings covered by the assessment have their own individual energy supply and
utility meter (e.g. gas or electricity), this supply can be excluded from the scope of this issue. All
shared energy supplies and communal areas are still included in the assessment. For example, if
self-contained flats in an assisted living development have individual gas supplies with their own
utility meter, this supply will be excluded from the assessment. However, the lighting and small
power comes from a shared distribution board on each floor, in which case this shared supply will
need to be sub-metered in accordance with the criteria.
2.6 Office buildings relevant function areas or departments
Criteria 4.a.i and 4.b.ii on page clxxvii.
1. Office areas (metering by floor plate)
2. Catering
2.7 Retail buildings relevant function areas or department
1. Sales area
2. Storage and warehouse
3. Cold storage
4. Offices
5. Catering
6. Tenant units
2.8 Industrial units relevant function areas or departments
1. Office areas
2. Operational area
3. Ancillary areas (e.g. canteens etc.)
2.9 Hotel buildings relevant function areas or departments
1. Office areas
2. Catering (e.g. kitchen, restaurant)
3. Conference suites
4. Swimming pool or leisure facilities
5. Hotel bedrooms metered per floor, core, floor plate in a strategy that would provide a
benefit to the facilities management.
It is acceptable for the electric heating system to be combined with lighting and small power for
metering purposes, as long as sub-metering is provided for each floor, core or floor plate. The
benefit to the facilities management can be measured by carrying out a comparison with similar
building areas where it would be possible to identify any unusual or excessive energy consumption.
2.10 Education buildings relevant function areas or departments
1. Kitchens (excluding small staff kitchens and food technology rooms)
2. Computer suites
3. Workshops
4. Lecture halls
5. Conference rooms
6. Drama studios
7. Swimming pools
8. Sports halls
9. Process areas
10. Laboratories
11. High containment suites within laboratories
12. Controlled environment chambers
13. Animal accommodation areas
14. Data centres
15. IT work and study rooms, including IT-equipped library space and any space with provision
of more than one computer terminal per 5m².
clxxvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Individual sub-metering of standard classrooms or seminar rooms is not required.

2.11 Hospitals and other healthcare facilities relevant function areas or departments
1. Operating departments
2. Imaging departments
3. Radiotherapy departments
4. Pathology departments
5. Dialysis departments
6. Medical physics facilities
7. Mortuary and post mortem departments
8. Rehabilitation when including hydrotherapy pools
9. Central sterile supplies departments (or equivalent)
10. Process areas, e.g. commercial-scale kitchens and laundries
11. IT rooms
12. Pharmacy departments
13. Laboratories
14. Tenancy areas (e.g. catering, retail, laundry)
In small healthcare buildings (< 999m²) with no high energy load areas (as defined above), a single
meter per floor plate is sufficient to achieve this credit. Individual areas within each floor plate do
not need to be sub-metered.
2.12 Other buildings
Other types of single occupant buildings should use the above lists of function areas as a guide to
the level of sub-metering provision required to comply. The above should consider that the aim of
the credit is to encourage the installation of energy sub-metering that facilitates the monitoring of
in-use energy consumption (in this case by area).
Ene 02 Energy monitoring clxxvii
Assessment criteria
One credit - Sub-metering of end use categories

1 Install energy metering systems so that at least 90% of the estimated annual energy consumption of each fuel
is assigned to the end-use categories (see Methodology on the next page).
2 Meter the energy consumption in buildings according to the total useful floor area:
2.a: If the area is greater than 1,000m², by end-use category with an appropriate energy monitoring and
management system.
2.b: If the area is less than 1,000m², use either:
2.b.i an energy monitoring and management system or
2.b.ii separate accessible energy sub-meters with pulsed or other open protocol communication
outputs, for future connection to an energy monitoring and management system (see Definitions
on page clxxix).
3 Building users can identify the energy consuming end uses, for example through labelling or data outputs.
One credit - Sub-metering of high energy load and tenancy areas

4 Monitor a significant majority of the energy supply with:
4.a: An accessible energy monitoring and management system for:
4.a.i tenanted areas or
4.a.ii relevant function areas or departments in single occupancy buildings.
OR
4.b: Separate accessible energy sub-meters with pulsed or other open protocol communication outputs for
future connection to an energy monitoring and management system for:
4.b.i tenanted areas or
4.b.ii relevant function areas or departments in single occupancy buildings.
5 Sub-meter per floor plate in large single occupancy or single tenancy buildings with one homogeneous
function, for example hotel bedrooms, offices.
Compliance notes
clxxviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Methodology
Metering strategy
Detailed guidance on how to develop an appropriate metering strategy for the energy criteria of a new building is
available in CIBSE TM39 Building energy metering (130) .
Estimating the annual energy consumption of each end use

Where the total consumption of any single end use category (or a combination of end use categories added
together) is estimated to account for less than 10% of the annual energy consumption for a given fuel type, it is not
necessary for this end use to be sub-metered. In this instance, the design team should demonstrate that the
respective end use is expected to account for less than 10% of the annual energy consumption for the fuel type.
Where a given end use will clearly account for less than 10% of the total annual energy consumption for the fuel
type in question, a simple hand calculation or use of benchmark data to demonstrate this is acceptable.
Estimating the total annual energy consumption

Where it is unclear whether an end use would account for 10% of the annual energy consumption for a given fuel
type or not, more detailed calculations should be provided. The total annual energy consumption should be
estimated using a method that estimates actual energy consumption. The energy consumption for each end use
may be estimated by using methods described in CIBSE TM54: Evaluating operational energy performance of
buildings at the design stage(131), using actual operational inputs (rather than those used for building regulations
calculations). The weather data used should be the average current weather data for the local area. The data on
water consumption from the Wat 01 Water consumption on page cclx issue may be used as inputs for evaluating
the energy use of domestic hot water.
Combining end-use categories for metering purposes
Lighting and small power

Due to traditional distribution methods, it can be difficult to sub-meter separately and cost-effectively lighting and
small power. Lighting and small power can be combined for metering purposes, as long as sub-metering is
provided for each floor plate.
Heating and hot water

Space heating and domestic hot water may be combined with a single heat or gas meter per tenanted area or
function area or department. This is acceptable where a common plant provides more than one building service
(e.g. a boiler provides both hot water and space heating, or a reversible heat pump provides space heating and
space cooling) and it is impractical to meter end uses separately.
Modular boiler systems

Modular boiler systems can be monitored as a whole.
Small function areas or departments

For a building consisting of a number of small function areas or departments, sub-metering the heating, hot water
and combined electricity energy uses is sufficient to achieve this credit. Individual electricity energy uses within each
unit do not need to be sub-metered. For the purpose of this BREEAM issue, a small function area or department is
defined as less than 200m².
Ene 02 Energy monitoring clxxix

If assessing a new extension to an existing building , the criteria only apply to the new extension. In this case, energy
services supplying energy to the end use categories from the existing building shall, as a minimum, be metered by
fuel at the entry points to the extension. However, the best practice approach would usually be to ensure that the
energy metering covers the entire building.
Evidence

Definitions
Accessible meters
Energy meters located in an area of the building that allows for easy access to facilitate regular monitoring and
readings by the building occupant or facilities manager. Typically this will be the plant room, main distribution
room or control room (where a building energy management system (BEMS) is installed).
Common areas
Developments that have several tenant units, particularly large retail developments, may also share common
facilities and access that is not owned or controlled by any one individual tenant, but used by all. Common areas
are typically managed and maintained by the development’s owner, i.e. landlord or their managing agent.
Examples of common areas include an atrium, stairwells, main entrance foyers or reception and external areas,
e.g. parking.
End-use categories
End-use categories include:
1. Space heating
2. Domestic hot water heating
3. Humidification*
4. Cooling*
5. Ventilation, i.e. fans (major)*
6. Pumps
7. Lighting
8. Small power
9. Renewable or low carbon systems (separately)
10. Controls
11. Other major energy consuming systems or plant, where appropriate. Depending on the building type,
this might include for example: plant used for swimming or hydrotherapy pools; other sports and leisure
facilities; kitchen plant or catering equipment; office equipment; cold storage plant; laboratory plant;
sterile services equipment; transport systems (e.g. lifts and escalators); drama studios and theatres with
clxxx SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
large lighting rigs; telecommunications; dedicated computer room or suite; server rooms; dealing
rooms; covered car parks; ovens or furnaces; and floodlighting. See also CIBSE TM39: Building energy
metering for further information.
The systems succeeded by * must not be present where a BREEAM New Construction Simple Building
assessment is being carried out.
Energy monitoring and management system

Examples include automatic meter reading systems and building energy management systems (BEMS).
Automatic monitoring and targeting) is an example of a management tool that includes automatic meter
reading and data management.
Energy supply
All types of energy supplied to a building area (function area, department, tenancy or unit) within the boundary of
the assessed development. These types of energy include electricity, gas, heat or other forms of energy or fuel
that are consumed in each relevant area.
Energy meters
Energy meters measure the amount of energy used on a circuit where energy is flowing. Primary meters measure
the main incoming energy and are used for billing by the utility supplier. They include the principal smart and
advanced utility meters to a site for electricity and gas.
Sub-meters are the second tier including heat and steam meters and secondary meters installed to measure
consumption by specific items of plant or equipment, or to discrete physical areas, e.g. individual buildings, floors
in a multi-storey building, tenanted areas, function areas.
Major fans
Major fans typically include fans in air handling units. Where multiple fans are within an air handling unit, they can
be metered as one unit. Small fans such as individual extract fans for single rooms, such as kitchen, bathroom and
toilet areas, are not required to be included where they only account for a small proportion of the total annual
energy use.
Modular boiler systems

A modular boiler system consists of a series of boilers that are linked together to meet a variety of heating
demands. They are generally composed of several identical boiler units, sometimes stacked, although a mix of
condensing and conventional boilers could be used. They operate in increments of capacity, each at around their
full capacity and their peak efficiency, so that the overall part load efficiency is greater than it would be for a single
boiler.
Significant majority
A significant majority of the energy supply to the tenanted areas or departments covers most of the energy uses
but does not have to include very small ones. As a guide, energy uses that cumulatively make up less than 10% of
the energy supply for that area may be excluded.
Sub-meter outputs
Examples include pulsed outputs and other open protocol communication outputs, such as Modbus.
Ene 02 Energy monitoring clxxxi
Building regulations requirements

The building regulations for energy use in all four countries of the UK require energy meters to be provided to allow
the use of fuel and power consumption to be monitored. The building regulations of Wales, Northern Ireland and
England also require energy meters to be provided that enable at least 90% of the estimated annual energy
consumption of each fuel to be assigned to the various end-use categories (heating, lighting etc.) with separate
monitoring of any renewable systems. Buildings with a total floor area greater than 1,000m²are also required to
have automatic meter reading and data collection facilities. This has to be considered for larger buildings in
Scotland. The Scotland building regulations recommend that solid mineral fuel or biomass use is recorded, where
applicable, and they require separate monitoring of low carbon equipment, including combined heat and power
installations. The metering provisions are required to be designed to facilitate the benchmarking of energy
performance as set out in CIBSE TM46 Energy benchmarks(132).
clxxxii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Ene 03 External lighting
1 1 1 1
Aim
To reduce energy consumption through the specification of energy efficient light fittings for external areas of the
development.
Value
– Reduce the energy consumption,
associated with external light fittings left on
during the day and when no one is present,
thereby reducing CO2 emissions and
operating costs.
– Reduce the dependence on external lighting
for safety and comfort
Context
External lighting is often necessary to provide a sense of security at night, clear, safe and attractive access to people
and contribute to the regeneration of urban areas(133). External light fittings can often result in relatively high
energy usage as a result of poor specification of fittings and controls as well as inadequate maintenance. External
Ene 03 External lighting clxxxiii
lighting fittings with the highest luminous efficacy and their efficient utilisation can reduce the energy consumption
and associated costs attributed to essential external lighting while providing a pleasant and safe environment.
Assessment scope


None
2.0 Prisons and other secured buildings
The criteria apply only to general external lighting, e.g. way-finding, car parking, decorative, signage,
landscape, storage areas etc. Lighting specified for specific security purposes within secured
buildings, such as prisons, can be excluded from the assessment of this issue.
clxxxiv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Assessment criteria
One credit
1 No external lighting (which includes lighting on the building, at entrances and signs).
OR
2 External light fittings within the construction zone with:
2.a: Average initial luminous efficacy of no less than 70 luminaire lumens per circuit Watt.
2.b: Automatic control to prevent operation during daylight hours.
2.c: Presence detection in areas of intermittent pedestrian traffic.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Average initial luminous efficacy of the external light fittings

The individual luminous fluxes of all luminaires within the construction zone are summed (in lumens), then divided by
the total circuit Watts for all the luminaires.
For lamps other than LED lamps, the luminous flux of a luminaire using those lamps can be determined by
multiplying the sum of the luminous fluxes produced by all the lamps in the luminaire by the light output ratio of the
luminaire (as confirmed by the luminaire manufacturer).
LED lamps are typically integral to the luminaire (LED luminaires). As such, the manufacturers' literature will
encompass both lamp and luminaire as a whole.
Single building assessments on larger developments or campuses and

extensions to existing buildings
If the assessed building is part of a larger development containing common areas and other buildings, or is a new
extension to an existing building, the external lighting criteria apply only to external new and existing lighting within
the construction zone of the assessed building.
Ene 03 External lighting clxxxv
Different types of external lighting and exceptions to the criteria
Temporary lighting, decorative lighting and floodlighting

Temporary lighting such as theatrical, stage or local display installations can be excluded from the assessment of
this issue. Decorative lighting and floodlighting must however be assessed for this issue.
Emergency lighting
Emergency light fittings, including security lighting, that are also used for normal operation are assessed for this
issue. Non-maintained lighting which only activates in an emergency can be excluded from the assessment of this
issue.
Evidence
Criteria Interim design stage Interim post-construction stage

Definitions
Areas of intermittent pedestrian traffic

An area can be considered of intermittent pedestrian traffic where someone is in or approaching the space less
than two thirds of the time during the period when the lighting, without presence detection, would be switched
on.
Automatic control
An automatic external lighting control system prevents operation during daylight hours through either a time
switch or a daylight sensor (a manually switched lighting circuit with daylight sensor or time switch override is also
acceptable). In addition to the above, the system should provide presence detection in areas of intermittent
traffic. For external lighting not fitted with presence detectors, time switches must provide automatic switch off
of lighting after a specified curfew hour, except in cases where there is a specific requirement for lighting to be
left on all night.
Construction zone
For the purpose of this issue, the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the
BREEAM-assessed building and its external site areas, i.e. the scope of the new works.
Daylight sensor
A type of sensor that detects daylight and switches lighting on at dusk and off at dawn.
clxxxvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Luminous efficacy in luminaire lumens per circuit Watt

The ratio between the luminous flux produced by an entire luminaire (light fitting) (in lumens) and the total power
consumed by the lamps and the control gear contained within the luminaire (Watts).
Presence detector
A sensor that can turn lighting on when a presence is detected in the scanned area, and off after a pre-set time
when no presence is detected. Presence detectors must be compatible with the lamp type used as very frequent
switching can reduce the life of some lamp types.
Time switch
A switch with an inbuilt clock which will allow lighting to be switched on and off at programmed times.
None.
Ene 04 Low carbon design clxxxvii
Ene 04 Low carbon design
3 3 3 3
Aim
To encourage the adoption of design measures, which reduce building energy consumption and associated
carbon emissions and minimise reliance on active building services systems.
Value
– Maximise the financial and environmental
benefits of adopting passive and other low
carbon solutions throughout the design
process
– Encourage the use of free heating and
cooling strategies, to reduce the building’s
energy demands and eliminate or reduce the
use of active cooling
– Ensure that the most appropriate low or zero
carbon technologies (LZC) are adopted for
the project
– Promote innovation to deliver practical and
cost effective low carbon building design.
Context
Factors such as the building massing, layout, orientation, fabric design, daylighting provision, ventilation strategies
and thermal mass will significantly affect the heat gains and losses in a building. Air-conditioning is a high energy
user and can conflict with more biophilic approaches to health and wellbeing. It should be avoided or minimised
where possible as its adoption will typically increase operational energy costs by around 50% to the running costs
of the building (134). The range of low and zero carbon technologies that supply electricity and heat is growing
clxxxviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
rapidly and capital and operating costs are decreasing with economies of scale. This is often making them a cost
effective solution achieving a reduction in operational CO2 emissions.
Assessment scope

Assessment type specific notes None See ref. 1.0 and 1.1 None See ref. 1.2–1.4

1.0 Microgeneration technologies
On-site LZC technologies are only acceptable where the proposed solution can be classified as a
microgeneration technology. The requirements for classification as a microgeneration technology
are described in Ene 04 Low carbon design �Methodology on page cxc.
1.1 Low zero carbon feasibility study
Criteria 9–12
A simplified version of a LZC feasibility study will be acceptable when assessing a Simple building.
Items 9 and 10 listed in CN1.3 are not applicable.
1.2 Passive design analysis
Criteria 1–5
The first criterion of Ene 04 Low carbon design on page clxxxix is not applicable to Shell Only
assessments. However, to achieve the Ene 04 Passive design analysis credit, compliance with Ene
04 Low carbon design on page clxxxix, criteria 1, 2 and 3bii must be demonstrated.
1.3 Free cooling
Criteria 5–8
Only free cooling options 1 to 3 listed in compliance note CN1.1 are applicable.
1.4 Low zero carbon feasibility study
Criterion 9: The LZC feasibility study must be completed as part of the shell only design, based on
the expected building use and loads specified in the design brief, or where these are not specified,
for likely scenarios.
Criterion 12: The built form should allow for the future installation of the most cost effective LZC
options.
2.0 Schools: information communication technology (ICT) classrooms
With respect to the free cooling credit, it is possible for ICT classrooms to be designed to avoid the
use of active cooling. Hence, they are not exempt from the requirements of this issue. If active
cooling is used to treat these spaces, it would not be possible to achieve the free cooling credit
within this BREEAM issue.
Ene 04 Low carbon design clxxxix
Assessment criteria
– Passive design (2 credits)

– Low or zero carbon technologies (1 credit).
Two credits - Passive design
One credit - Passive design analysis

1 Achieve the first credit Hea 04 Thermal comfort �One credit - Thermal modelling on page cxxviii to
demonstrate that the building design delivers appropriate thermal comfort levels in occupied spaces.
2 The project team analyses the proposed building design and development during Concept Design stage (RIBA
Stage 2 or equivalent) to identify opportunities for the implementation of passive design measures (see
Passive design analysis on the next page).
3 Implement passive design measures to reduce the total heating, cooling, mechanical ventilation, lighting loads
and energy consumption in line with the passive design analysis findings.
4 Quantify the reduced total energy demand and carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions resulting from the passive
design measures.
One credit - Free cooling

5 Achieve the passive design analysis credit.
6 Include a free cooling analysis (see Free cooling analysis on the next page) in the passive design analysis carried
out under criterion 2.
7 Identify opportunities for the implementation of free cooling solutions.
8 The building is naturally ventilated or uses any combination of the free cooling strategies listed in Free cooling
analysis on the next page.
One credit - Low and zero carbon technologies
One credit - Low zero carbon feasibility study

9 An energy specialist (see Definitions on page cxciv) completes a feasibility study (see Low and zero carbon
feasibility study on page cxci) by the end of the Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent).
10 Establish the most appropriate recognised local (on site or near site) low or zero carbon (LZC) energy sources
for the building or development, (see Scope of LZC systems and how they are assessed on page cxci), based
on the feasibility study.
11 Specify local LZC technologies for the building or development in line with the feasibility study
recommendations.
12 Quantify the reduced regulated carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions resulting from the feasibility study.
cxc SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Compliance notes
Methodology
Passive design analysis

As a minimum, the passive design analysis should cover:
1. Site location
2. Site weather
3. Microclimate
4. Building layout Low and zero carbon feasibility study on the facing page
5. Building orientation
6. Building form
7. Building fabric
8. Thermal mass or other fabric thermal storage
9. Building occupancy type
10. Daylighting strategy
11. Ventilation strategy
12. Adaptation to climate change.
Any savings resulting from the incorporation of passive design measures should be demonstrated by comparing
the energy demand or CO2 emissions for the building with and without the proposed passive design measures
adopted, as identified in the passive design analysis.
To enable a baseline for comparison to be established, a ‘standard building’ should be modelled with fabric
performance equivalent to that of the local building regulations notional building (or for Scotland, an equivalent
compliant building) and without the passive design measures (where feasible, i.e. building orientation is likely to be
fixed). The glazing areas should remain the same in both models.
With the exception of any changes to account for passive design measures and fabric performance, this ‘standard
building’ should be modelled as equivalent to the actual building.
Any savings in energy demand or CO2 emissions should then be calculated by comparing the respective Building
Emission Rate (BER) outputs from two building models representing the ‘proposed building’ specification (fixed at a
point as agreed by the project team and assessor), and the ‘standard building’ specification.
These calculations should be carried out by a building services engineer who is a member of the Chartered Institute
of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) or by an accredited energy assessor (see Definitions on page cxciv).
Free cooling analysis

The free cooling analysis should demonstrate consideration of the following technologies:
1. Night time cooling (which could include the use of a high exposed thermal mass)
2. Ground coupled air cooling
3. Displacement ventilation (not linked to any active cooling system)
4. Ground water cooling
5. Surface water cooling
6. Evaporative cooling, direct or indirect
7. Desiccant dehumidification and evaporative cooling, using waste heat
8. Absorption cooling, using waste heat.
Ene 04 Low carbon design cxci
The free cooling should apply to all occupied spaces in the building. Small IT rooms and lift motor rooms are
excluded.
It should be demonstrated that the free cooling can meet the building's cooling demand. The calculation methods
should take into account the passive design measures included in the analysis and should be carried out by a
building services engineer who is a member of the Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) or by an
accredited energy assessor. Where the free cooling approaches chosen cannot be adequately modelled by these
methods, the use of any alternative methods should be justified by the building services engineer or accredited
energy assessor, demonstrating that these methods are appropriate.
Low and zero carbon feasibility study

The low zero carbon feasibility study should cover as a minimum:
1. Energy generated from LZC energy source per year

2. Carbon dioxide savings from LZC energy source per year
3. Life cycle cost of the potential specification, accounting for payback
4. Local planning criteria, including land use and noise
5. Feasibility of exporting heat or electricity from the system
6. Any available grants
7. All technologies appropriate to the site and energy demand of the development.
8. Reasons for excluding other technologies
9. If appropriate:
a. The building is connected to an existing local community CHP system or
b. the building is connected to an existing source of waste heat or power OR
c. a building or site CHP system is specified with the potential to export excess heat or power via a local
community energy scheme or
d. a source of waste heat or power is specified with the potential to export excess heat or power via a local
community energy scheme.
10. Energy storage.
The reduction in regulated carbon dioxide (CO2) emissions can be demonstrated by comparing regulated carbon
dioxide (CO2) emissions with LZC technologies to the actual building regulated emissions without LZCs. When the
CO2 savings are compared for different technologies, they may be estimated separately from the building energy
model where appropriate, e.g. by using manufacturers' data, simple hand calculations or spreadsheets. For the
specified technologies, any CO2 savings are estimated using dynamic simulation modelling. The energy supply used
for the base case is mains gas and grid electricity. If mains gas is not available on site, then oil may be used instead.
The base case includes any passive design or free cooling measures adopted for the first two credits. The actual
building energy demands are calculated as for the passive design analysis. The carbon dioxide emissions factors
used for the building regulations calculations are then applied.
Scope of LZC systems and how they are assessed
Recognised local LZC technologies

Technologies eligible to contribute to achieving the criteria must produce energy from renewable sources and
meet all other ancillary requirements as defined by Directive 2009/28/EC.
The following requirements must also be met:
1. There must be a direct supply of energy produced to the building under assessment.
2. Technologies under 50kWe or 45kWth must be certified by a Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS),
or equivalent, and installed by MCS (or equivalent) certified installers.
3. Combined heat and power (CHP) schemes above 50kWe must be certified under the CHPQA standard.
CHP schemes fuelled by mains gas are eligible to contribute to performance against this issue.
4. Heat pumps can only be considered as a renewable technology when used in heating mode. Refer to
Annex VI of Directive 2009/28/EC for more detail on accounting for energy from heat pumps.
5. Where MCS or CHPQA certification is not available, the design team must investigate the availability of
alternative accreditation schemes in line with the Directives listed above, or an equivalent country or
cxcii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
regional directive or standard. Where an accreditation scheme exists, it should be used for the purpose of
verifying compliance of the specified LZC technology. If no accreditation scheme exists in the country, the
design team must demonstrate they have investigated the competence of the installer selected and are
confident that they have the skill and competence to install the LZC technology appropriately.
Novel LZC technology not listed

Other systems may be acceptable as part of a LZC strategy under this issue but are not currently included as LZC
technologies in any of the approved building energy calculation software packages. Acceptability will be
dependent on the nature of the system proposed and the carbon benefits achieved. The BREEAM Assessor must
confirm acceptability with BRE before an assessment is submitted. The calculation procedure for the new LZC
technology should be submitted for consideration as a 'novel technology' to be included in the 'SBEM-Q' innovation
process (see Additional information on page cxcv).
The novel technology would only be acceptable for the LZC credit if EITHER:
1. It is already demonstrably modelled in one of the approved dynamic simulation compliance tools;
2. The calculation procedure has been accepted by the SBEM-Q process and integrated into the SBEM tool;
OR
3. It has been applied for and is in the process of being accepted for SBEM-Q.
For one-off LZC technology designs, where it is not viable to obtain SBEM-Q approval, an application for a BREEAM
approved innovation credit can be submitted to BRE.
LZC technology already available on site

For developments where there is an existing LZC energy source that can supply a compliant percentage of energy
to the assessed building, a feasibility study will still have to be carried out to demonstrate that the existing
technology is the most appropriate for the assessed building or development. The study should seek to identify
any other options to supply a higher proportion of the building's energy demand in addition to that supplied by
the existing source. In order to be compliant, the LZC energy source must continue to provide low carbon energy to
existing buildings and provide additional low carbon energy to the new building.
Waste heat from a building- related operational process

Waste heat from an operational process that takes place within the assessed building (or on the assessed site) can
be considered as ‘low carbon’ for the purpose of this BREEAM issue. This is on the condition that the generation of
the heat from the process is integral to the assessed building. Examples of operational processes and functions
include manufacturing processes, high temperature oven or kiln, compressors serving process plant, micro-
brewery, crematorium, testing and commissioning boilers for training or manufacture, and data centres. It does
not include waste heat from IT or server rooms, which could be used as part of conventional heat recovery
measures.
Community and near-site schemes

This BREEAM issue seeks to encourage the installation of on-site and near-site LZC technologies. ‘Local’ does not
have to mean on site; community schemes (near site) can be used as a means of demonstrating compliance.
Waste heat from incineration

Waste heat from an incineration plant can only be considered as low carbon for the purpose of this BREEAM issue
under the following circumstances:
1. All other LZC technologies have been considered and discounted in the feasibility study and; EITHER
2. The local authority or region in which the incineration plant is located is demonstrably meeting its annual
waste reuse and recycling targets and waste management policies; OR
3. There is a near or on-site facility connected to the building, via a private wire arrangement, which is
demonstrably removing reusable and recyclable waste material prior to incineration.
Ene 04 Low carbon design cxciii
Biofuels
First generation biofuels

BREEAM does not recognise or reward building systems fuelled by first generation biofuels manufactured from
feedstocks, e.g. biofuels manufactured from sugars, seeds, grain, animal fats etc. where these are grown or
farmed for the purposes of biofuel production. This is due to the current uncertainty over their impact on
biodiversity, global food production and greenhouse gas savings, plus the ease of inter-changeability between
fossil fuels. BREEAM may recognise systems using second generation biofuels (see Definitions on the next page) or
biofuels manufactured from biodegradable waste materials, e.g. biogas, waste vegetable oil or locally and
sustainably sourced solid biofuels, e.g. woodchip, wood pellets, where these are not interchangeable with fossil
fuels or first generation biofuels.
Second generation biofuels and biofuels from waste streams

BREEAM recognises that biofuels produced from biomass which is a byproduct of other processes may provide a
more sustainable alternative to fossil fuels. Typically, these use waste feedstock consisting of residual non-food
parts of current food crops, industry waste such as woodchips, other waste vegetable matter and waste fish oil
from sustainable fish stocks to produce biofuel. Such biofuels will, in principle be recognised by BREEAM for the
purposes of defining low or zero carbon technologies. However due to the emerging nature of such technologies,
full details would be required for review by BRE Global prior to confirmation of acceptability, including the following:
1. Type, provenance and sustainability of the biomass feedstock

2. Avoidance or minimisation of fossil fuel use in extracting the biofuel
3. Minimising fossil fuel use in transporting the biomass or biofuel
4. Presence of a supply agreement and a robust supply chain
5. Compatibility of the biofuel with the specified boiler or plant and manufacturer’s warranty issues
The use of other recycled or waste-derived biofuels such as waste oil from catering may also be recognised by
BREEAM subject to the above criteria. For smaller scale applications, the assessor will also need to demonstrate that
the biofuel is locally sourced. BREEAM does not qualify the term ‘locally sourced’ or specify a minimum supply
contract. However the assessor must determine and demonstrate that these are reasonable for the particular
application.
Evidence

4 Results from a dynamic simulation model As per interim design stage.
demonstrating the reduced energy
demand and CO2 emissions from the
specified passive design measures.
8 Results from a dynamic simulation model As per interim design stage.
and other used methods demonstrating
that the free cooling strategy can meet
the building's cooling demand.
12 Results from a dynamic simulation model As per interim design stage
demonstrating reductions in CO2
emissions from the specified low zero
carbon technology.
cxciv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Definitions
Accredited energy assessor
A person registered with an accredited energy assessment scheme provider. The scheme provider will be
licensed by the relevant government department to accredit competent persons in the energy assessment of
non-domestic or domestic buildings for the purposes of demonstrating compliance with the building
regulations in the country of origin. The energy assessor should be appropriately accredited for the building
being assessed. For a full list of approved accreditation schemes or organisations for energy assessors and links
to registers of accredited energy assessors visit: www.ndepcregister.com (non-domestic),
www.epcregister.com (domestic)
www.scotland.gov.uk/www.epbniregisternd.com (non-domestic), www.epbniregister.com (domestic)
1. Wales: https://www.ndepcregister.com (non-domestic), www.epcregister.com (domestic)

3. Northern Ireland: www.epbniregisternd.com (non-domestic), www.epbniregister.com (domestic)
4. England: www.ndepcregister.com (non-domestic), www.epcregister.com (domestic)
Only individuals that appear on the DCLG register for England and Wales, the Department of Finance register for
Northern Ireland and the Scottish Government register are qualified as accredited energy assessors.

www.ncm.bre.co.uk
www.ncm.bre.co.uk/
Energy specialist
An individual who has acquired substantial expertise or a recognised qualification for undertaking assessments,
designs and installations of low or zero carbon solutions in the commercial buildings sector and is not
professionally connected to a single low or zero carbon technology or manufacturer.
First and second generation biofuels

First generation biofuels are fuels made from sugar, starch, vegetable oil, or animal fats using conventional
technology. Second generation biofuels are fuels from lignocellulosic biomass feedstock using advanced
technical processes(135). Common first-generation biofuels include vegetable oil, biodiesel and bioalcohols.
Ene 04 Low carbon design cxcv
Free cooling
The ability of the building to provide cooling to the internal occupied areas without the need to rely on energy
consuming mechanical cooling. Free cooling is an enhanced passive design method that requires engineering
design and modelling to demonstrate its effectiveness. Other similar methods include enhanced passive
ventilation and enhanced daylighting.
Microgeneration Certification Scheme (MCS)

The MCS is an independent scheme that certifies microgeneration products and installers in accordance with
consistent standards. It is designed to evaluate microgeneration products and installers against robust criteria,
and provides consumers with an independent indication of the reliability of products, assurance that the
installation will be carried out to the appropriate standard and a route for complaints should there be any issues.
The MCS is a United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) accredited certification scheme covering all
microgeneration products and services. It has support from the Department of Energy and Climate Change
(DECC), industry and non-governmental groups as a prime method for making a substantial contribution to
cutting the UK’s dependency on fossil fuels and carbon dioxide emissions.
Near-site LZC
A LZC source of energy generation located near to the site of the assessed building. The source is most likely to
be providing energy for all or part of a local community of buildings, including the assessed building, e.g.
decentralised energy generation linked to a community heat network or renewable electricity sources connected
via a private wire arrangement.
On-site LZC
A LZC source of energy generation which is located on the same site as the assessed building.
Payback period
The period of time needed for a financial return on an investment to equal the sum of the original investment.
Free cooling aim

The aim of the free cooling credit is to remove the need for active cooling throughout the building. The
implementation of free cooling technologies results in the reduction of energy consumption associated with the
building's cooling. It can also make the building much simpler to operate and maintain than one with active cooling.
Novel low and zero carbon (LZC) technologies - SBEM-Q

In order to deal with the integration of new technologies into SBEM, a new procedure has been established which
mirrors the SAP Appendix Q approach to some extent. Appendix Q provides a means whereby validated individual
branded product performance information can be accessed and used as an adjunct to the SAP calculation. A
product’s performance information is determined by testing against a specification that has been agreed by
DECC’s NCM contractor, the relevant manufacturers and industry sector representatives. Product data are listed in
the SAP Appendix Q database (at:www.ncm-pcdb.org.uk/sap). By following the ‘Innovation' path from that
website, manufacturers can apply for novel LZC technologies to be validated under the so-called ‘SBEM-Q’
procedure and then integrated as part of an amendment to the SBEM calculation.
cxcvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
LZC feasibility study in building regulations

The EPBD (recast) 2012 (Directive 2010/31/EU), requires that all member states have a methodology for
calculating the energy performance of buildings and that the feasibility of high efficiency alternative systems is
considered before construction starts, including energy from renewable sources, cogeneration, district heating
and cooling and heat pumps (Article 6). This requirement has been included in the building regulations for England
(amendment Regulation 25A, 2013), Scotland (June 2016) and Wales (Regulation 25A 2014). The LZC feasibility
study in BREEAM is intended to encourage the study to be done early in the project, not just before construction
starts, so that the most appropriate solutions can be adopted. Also, this credit does not permit technologies that
are not best practice or sustainable or cannot be modelled with a robust method.
Passive design aim

Unlike Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions on page clxi (which is focused on demonstrable and
robust performance improvement), Ene 04 - Low carbon design aims to encourage project teams to consider a
particular design approach. The passive design analysis credit is intended to encourage project teams to
proactively consider the ways in which the building could benefit from, and adopt passive design measures (such as
those listed in Passive design analysis on page cxc)
Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage cxcvii
Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage
2 Not applicable 2 Not applicable

No Minimum standard
Aim
To encourage the installation of energy efficient refrigeration systems, in order to reduce operational greenhouse
gas emissions resulting from the system's energy use.
Value
– Promote the design installation of energy
efficient refrigeration system, controls and
components in accordance with best practice
industry standards
– Ensure that the commissioning of the
refrigeration plant is properly planned and
will result in the system performing as
designed, therefore promoting an optimal
performance.
– Encourage the installation of refrigeration
systems that demonstrate savings in indirect
greenhouse gas emissions.
Context
About 15% of the world’s electricity is used to drive refrigerating and air-conditioning systems(136). Therefore,
refrigeration accounts for significant energy consumption in certain sectors, such as retail and industrial. Improving
the efficiency of the refrigeration plant can result in less waste of valuable energy resources and less impact to
cxcviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
global warming, less likelihood of breakdown and significant running cost savings. Through proper operation,
maintenance and re-commissioning, cost savings of up to 50% and improved reliability can be achieved (137).
Assessment scope

Applicable assessment criteria All None All None
Assessment type specific notes None None See ref. 1.0 None

1.0 Where cold storage systems are specified or installed, all assessment criteria relevant to the
building type and function apply.
None
Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage cxcix
Assessment criteria
One credit - Refrigeration energy consumption

1 Design, install and commission the refrigeration system:
1.a: In accordance with the Code of Conduct for carbon reduction in the refrigeration retail sector (138) (see
Additional information on page cci) and BS EN 378-2:2016 (139) .
1.b: Using robust and tested refrigeration systems or components included on the Enhanced Capital
Allowance (ECA) Energy Technology Product List (ETPL)(140) or an equivalent list (see Components on the
ECA Energy Technology Product List on the next page for a list of components).
2 Commission the refrigeration plant in compliance with the commissioning criteria in BREEAM issue Man 04
Commissioning and handover on page lxxi.
One credit - Indirect greenhouse gas emissions

3 Achieve criteria 1 and 2.
4 Demonstrate a saving in indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO2 eq.) from the installed refrigeration system
over the course of its operational life.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Scope of Ene 05 issue

This issue is applicable only in instances where commercial or industrial sized refrigeration and storage systems are
specified, for example:
1. Storage and refrigeration of food in supermarkets

2. Cold storage facilities in industrial, laboratory, healthcare and other buildings.
The criteria do not apply to:
1. Domestic scale refrigeration or

2. Refrigeration for kitchen and catering facilities where these are self-contained units not connected to
building cooling systems.
These types of installation are covered within BREEAM issue Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment on page ccxv. If the
building contains no refrigeration systems or only refrigeration systems that are standalone, i.e. are not integral to
cc SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
the building and served by the building services, this issue is not applicable to the assessment. The scope of this
issue covers freezer or cold storage rooms which are integral to the building and served by the building’s own
refrigeration systems.
Calculating indirect greenhouse gas emissions (eq.)

The indirect emissions must be calculated in accordance with the procedures in BS EN 378-1:2016 (141)-
Refrigerating system and heat pumps safety and environmental requirements, Annex B. Further detail on applying
this method to calculate the indirect emissions are available in the Guideline methods of calculating Total Equivalent
Warming Impact (TEWI(142)) published by the British Refrigeration Association (BRA).
Calculations must be carried out by an appropriately qualified professional (e.g. a building services engineer),
including calculations to justify for assumptions and methodologies for savings in indirect greenhouse emissions.
The Carbon Trust Refrigeration Road Map

The Carbon Trust Refrigeration Road Map (143) introduces the main energy saving opportunities for refrigeration
use in the retail sector and defines a ‘baseline supermarket’. The savings in indirect greenhouse gas emissions can
be demonstrated through specification of technologies described in CO2 emissions saving options available when
designing a new store or retail concept that delivers savings in comparison with the 'baseline' building.
Many of the technologies outlined in the Road Map are appropriate to non-food applications and therefore to
non-retail building types that specify or install cold storage refrigeration systems. If the ‘baseline supermarket’ does
not provide an appropriate benchmark for achieving the second credit, the design team can still comply with the
criteria by demonstrating a reduction in indirect greenhouse gas emissions (CO2 eq.) against an alternative baseline.
The design team must confirm details of the alternative baseline system used, and demonstrate that it is based on
a typical installation or technology for that building type. The systems being compared must have the same duty
and service conditions and include the relevant consumption from the refrigeration system's ancillary equipment.
Components on the ECA Energy Technology Product List

Where specified as part of the refrigeration system, products used for the following components must be listed
on the ECA Energy Technology Product List (or equivalent list):
1. Air-cooled condensing units

2. Automatic air purgers
3. Cellar cooling equipment
4. Commercial service cabinets (cold food storage)
5. Curtains, blinds, sliding doors and covers for refrigerated display cabinets
6. Evaporative condensers
7. Forced air pre-coolers
8. Refrigerated display cabinets
9. Refrigeration compressors
10. Refrigeration system controls.

If assessing a new extension to an existing building and there is cold storage plant in the existing building that will
serve the new extension, then this plant must meet the criteria in order to achieve any available credits.
Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage cci
Evidence

2 Refer to generic evidence requirement Refrigeration plant commissioning
above. record.
Definitions
ECA Energy Technology Product List (ETPL)

The ETPL is part of the government's Enhanced Capital Allowance Scheme, a key part of the government’s
programme to manage climate change. The scheme provides a tax incentive to encourage investment in low
carbon energy saving equipment that meets published energy efficiency criteria. The Energy Technology List (ETL)
details the criteria for each type of technology, and lists those products in each category that meet them:
etl.beis.gov.uk
Indirect operational greenhouse gas emissions

These are the indirect greenhouse gas emissions that result from the production of energy used to power the
refrigeration system's, cooling plant. This includes the emissions from the production of grid electricity or an on-
site source of energy generation, e.g. gas CHP. In the case of refrigeration systems, the term ‘direct greenhouse
gas emissions’ is also used; this refers to the emissions that occur as a direct result of leakage of refrigerant from
the system.
The impacts of direct greenhouse gas emissions from refrigeration systems are dealt with in the BREEAM issue
Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants on page 382. Therefore, only indirect emissions resulting from the energy
consumption of the system are covered in this issue.
Code of conduct for carbon reduction in the retail refrigeration sector

The code of conduct has been developed by the Carbon Trust, in partnership with the Institute of Refrigeration and
the British Refrigeration Association (BRA). The code is intended to compliment the Carbon Trust Refrigeration
Road Map.
ccii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Ene 06 Energy efficient transport systems

No Minimum standard
Aim
To encourage the specification of energy efficient transport systems within buildings.
Value
– Ensure that transport types and
arrangement systems are best suited to
usage patterns and demand
– Promote the use of energy efficient features,
in line with best industry practice guidelines
– Maximise the use benefit and satisfaction
with transport systems
Context
Although issues such as safety, space restrictions and users’ comfort are prioritised by lift and escalators
manufacturers, energy efficiency of transport systems has been a increasing concern in the last decades. An
increase in lift and escalators provision is expected in the near future due to the need for convenience and comfort,
the growing ageing population and the urbanisation effect. The energy consumption of lifts and escalators is
estimated between 3 to 5 % of the overall consumption of a building (144) . The design and specification of energy
Ene 06 Energy efficient transport systems cciii
efficient transport technologies has become one of the key interests of manufacturers, that drives competition on
the market and helps customers save energy and operational costs.
Assessment scope

Applicable assessment criteria All 1–3 All None

None
None
cciv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Assessment criteria
One credit - Energy consumption

1 For specified lifts, escalators or moving walks (transport types):
1.a: Analyse the transport demand and usage patterns for the building to determine the optimum number
and size of lifts, escalators or moving walks.
1.b: Calculate the energy consumption in accordance with BS EN ISO 25745 Part 2 (145) or Part 3 (146) for one
of the following:
1.b.i At least two types of system for each transport type required; OR
1.b.ii An arrangement of systems for example for lift systems, hydraulic, traction, machine room-less lift
(MRL); OR
1.b.iii A system strategy that is ‘fit for purpose’.
1.c: Consider the use of regenerative drives, subject to the requirements in Regenerative drives on the facing
page.
1.d: Specify the transport system with the lowest energy consumption.
Up to two credits - Energy efficient features

2 Achieve criterion 1.
One credit - Lifts

3 Specify the following three energy efficient features for each lift:
3.a: A standby condition for off-peak periods.
3.b: The lift car lighting and display lighting provides an average luminous efficacy across all fittings in the car of
> 70 luminaire lumens per circuit Watt.
3.c: Use of a drive controller capable of variable speed, variable-voltage, and variable-frequency (VVVF)
control of the drive motor.
4 Specify regenerative drives where their use is demonstrated to save energy.
One credit - Escalators or moving walks

5 Specify at least one of the following for each escalator or moving walk:
5.a: A load-sensing device that synchronises motor output to passenger demand through a variable speed
drive; OR
5.b: A passenger-sensing device for automated operation (auto walk), so the escalator operates in auto start
mode when there is no passenger demand.
Ene 06 Energy efficient transport systems ccv
Compliance notes
Methodology
Scope of Ene 06 issue

The criteria relating to lifts do not apply to lifting platforms, wheelchair platform stairlifts or other similar facilities to
aid persons with impaired mobility. However, any lifting device with a rated speed greater than 0.15m/s must be
assessed, inclusive of goods, vehicle and passenger lifts. An excluded transport type that demonstrates
compliance with the BREEAM criteria would be considered best practice for an energy efficient system (despite not
being required for the purpose of awarding the available credits).
Transport analysis
The transport analysis can be in the form of a written statement justifying the lift selection for the following
conditions: where a single lift is provided in a low rise building for the purpose of providing disabled access only; or
where a goods lift is selected based on the size of the goods it is intended to carry.
Regenerative drives
A regenerative drive should only be considered where it produces an energy saving greater than the additional
standby energy used to support the drives. Regenerative drives will typically be appropriate for lifts with high travel
and high intensity use.
Building has no lifts, escalators or moving walks or has only one of the
transport systems
This issue will not be assessed where a building contains no lifts, escalators or moving walks. Where only either lifts,
escalators or moving walks are present, only one credit is available for the Energy efficient features credit. Where
both lifts and escalators or moving walks are present, then two credits are available.

If assessing a new extension to an existing building, lifts present in the existing building fall outside the Ene 06 scope
and do not need to be assessed. The above applies only where the lifts are not being renewed or undergoing a
major refurbishment.
Evidence

requirements on page 38 can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria
ccvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Definitions
Auto start condition - escalators and moving walks

A condition when the escalator or moving walk is stationary and powered up and ready to start initiated
bypassenger detection (from BS EN ISO 25745-3:2015).
Idle condition
A condition when a lift is stationary at a floor following a run before the standby mode is entered (from BS EN ISO
25745-1: 2012).
Lift car lighting

The level of lift car lighting is determined by the relevant standards. For example,BS EN 81-20:2014 (147) requires
at least 100 lux on the control devices and at 1 m above the floor at any point not less than 100 mm from any
wall.
Machine room-less lift (MRL)

All equipment is contained in the lift well, not in a separate machine room.
Standby condition - lifts

A condition when a lift is stationary at a floor and may have reduced the power consumption to a lower level set
for that particular lift (from BS EN ISO 25745-1: 2012 (148)). For example the power side of the lift controller and
other operating equipment such as lift car lighting, user displays and ventilation fans switch off when the lift has
been idle for a prescribed length of time. The period between when a lift was last used and when a standby
condition is entered is defined in BS EN ISO 25745-1 as 5 minutes.
BS EN ISO 25745 - Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving

walks
BS EN ISO 25745 consists of three parts, under the general title Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving
walks:
– Part 1: Energy measurement and verification

– Part 2: Energy calculation and classification for lifts (elevators)
– Part 3: Energy calculation and classification for escalators and moving walks.
In Part 1, it has been estimated that approximately 5% of a building’s total energy consumption can be attributed
to the operation of lifts and a large proportion of this can be attributed to standby mode in many situations. BS EN
ISO 25745 Parts 2 and 3 have been prepared in response to the rapidly increasing need to ensure and to support
the efficient and effective use of energy, providing:
1. A method to estimate energy consumption on a daily and an annual basis for lifts, escalators and moving
walks.
2. A method for energy classification of new, existing or modernised lifts, escalators and moving walks.
Ene 06 Energy efficient transport systems ccvii
3. Guidelines for reducing energy consumption that can be used to support building environmental and
energy classification systems.
ccviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems
5 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable

No Minimum standard
Aim
To encourage laboratory areas that are designed to minimise their operational energy consumption and
associated CO2 emissions.
Value
– Encourage effective communication
between the client and the design team to
identify the occupant requirements and
performance criteria
– Reduced capital and operating costs as a
result of appropriate sizing and specification
of equipment and adoption of best practice
design principles
– Ensure that energy efficiency measures do
not affect the health and safety of the
occupants.
Context
Laboratory facilities are required to comply with regulations and other standards for safety and various
environmental conditions such temperature and air quality. Compared to an office building, the average laboratory
consumes ten times more energy per square feet, with some labs using as much as 100 times more energy(149).
Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems ccix
Therefore, energy efficient measures can result in significantly reduced energy costs and waste, improved systems
efficiency and long-term sustainability.
Assessment scope

Applicable assessment criteria All None None None
This issue is applicable only to further education, higher education, offices with research and development areas
and other buildings with research and development facilities that contain laboratory space and containment
devices or areas. This issue is not applicable for school buildings (primary and secondary level).

None
None
ccx SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Assessment criteria
– Prerequisite
– Design specification (1 credit)
– Best practice energy efficient measures (up to 4 credits) - building type dependent.
Prerequisite
1 Achieve Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories : Criterion 1 on page cxxii
One credit - Design specification

2 Engage with the client during the preparation of the initial project brief (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) to
determine occupant requirements and define laboratory performance criteria. Performance criteria will
include, but not be limited to:
2.a: Description of purpose
2.b: Occupant or process activities
2.c: Containment requirements and standards
2.d: Air change rate requirements
2.e: Ventilation system performance and efficiencies
2.f: Heating and cooling requirements
2.g: Interaction between systems
2.h: Flexibility and adaptability of laboratory facilities.
3 Size the services system equipment (including ventilation supply and extract) correctly (see Definitions on
page ccxiii).
4 Demonstrate the minimised energy demand of the laboratory facilities resulting from the achievement of the
defined design performance criteria.
Laboratory containment devices and containment areas (criteria only applicable to

buildings containing these facilities)
5 Specify fume cupboards and other containment devices in compliance with criteria 2 and 3 of issue Hea 03
Safe containment in laboratories on page cxx, as appropriate to the containment device specification.
6 For ducted fume cupboards specified:
6.a: Demonstrate that the average design air flow rate is no greater than 0.16m³/s per linear metre (internal
width) of fume cupboard workspace.
6.b: Measure the volume flow rate in the exhaust duct (at the boundary of the laboratory) to take account of
reductions in (inward) volume flow rate from fume cupboard leakage.
Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems ccxi
6.c: Demonstrate that a reduction in air flow does not compromise the defined performance criteria and
does not increase the health and safety risk to future building occupants.
Up to four credits - Best practice energy efficient measures

If the laboratory area accounts for at least 10% of the total building floor area (see Definitions on page ccxiii):
7 Achieve criteria 1 to 6 on the previous page (or criteria 1 to 5 on the previous page where there are no ducted
fume cupboards).
8 Design, specify and install laboratory plant and systems to promote energy efficiency. Demonstrate
compliance with items in Table 31 below (see 8.a and 8.b below for credits available).
8.a: Up to 2 credits: laboratory areas (see Definitions on page ccxiii) account for at least 10% (but less than
25%) of the total building floor area; OR
8.b: Up to 4 credits: laboratory areas account for 25% or more of the total building floor area.
9 Demonstrate by calculations or modelling that the chosen measures have a reasonably significant effect on the
total energy consumption of the laboratory, i.e. 2% reduction or greater.
10 Demonstrate that the energy efficient measures specified do not compromise the defined performance
criteria, and do not increase the health and safety risk to future building occupants.
Table 31 Best practice energy efficient measures in laboratories

Item description Credits 1
Fume cupboard volume flow rates (further reduction)
An average design air flow rate of < 0.12m³/s per linear metre (internal 0.5
width) of fume cupboard workspace
Grouping or isolation of high filtration or ventilation activities
Minimisation of room air change rates and overall facility ventilation flows 0.5
by grouping together or isolating activities and equipment with high
filtration or ventilation requirements.
Energy recovery - heat
Heat recovery from exhaust air (where there is no risk of cross- 0.5
contamination) or via refrigerant or water cooling systems.
Energy recovery - cooling
Cooling recovery via exhaust air heat exchangers (where there is no risk of 0.5
cross-contamination) or via refrigerant or water cooling systems.
Grouping of cooling loads
Grouping of cooling loads to enable supply efficiencies and thermal 0.5
transfer.
Free cooling
Specification of free cooling coils in chillers or dry air coolers related to 0.5
laboratory-specific activities.
Load responsiveness
Effective matching of supply with demand through modularity, variable 0.5
speed drives and pumps, and other mechanisms.
Clean rooms
Specification of particle monitoring systems, linked to airflow controls. 0.5
Diversity
Achievement of high levels of diversity in central plant sizing and laboratory 0.5
duct sizing, where compatible with safety.
Room air changes rates
Reducing air change rates by matching ventilation airflows to environmental 0.5
needs and demands of containment devices.
ccxii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Item description Credits 1

Fan power
Specification and achievement of best practice fan power figures (as shown 1
below) for all air handling units, laboratory extract systems, local extract
ventilation, containment area extracts (where applicable) and fume
cupboard extracts (where applicable).
Laboratory system Best practice specific fan
power
(W/(L/s)
General laboratory supply air handling unit (AHU) with heating and cooling 1.5
General laboratory extract systems 1.2
Laboratory local extract ventilation – ducted 1.0
Containment area extract, without high efficiency particulate absorption 1.5
(HEPA) filtration
Containment area extract, with HEPA filtration 2.5
Fume cupboard extract 1.5
Only whole credits can be awarded in BREEAM. Therefore to achieve a credit for items with partial credits, the
laboratory must comply with at least two of the items. In an instance where, for example, three and half credits
are achieved this would need to be rounded down to three credits.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Applicable standards
The laboratory criteria within issue Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories on page cxx and guidance within G9
Fume Cupboards in Schools (Building Bulletin 88 can be used for assessments in Northern Ireland) should be
followed. Where containment devices present in a school or sixth form college assessment are of a specialist
nature more typical of a commercial or research laboratory, BRE should be contacted for further guidance.
Evidence

Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems ccxiii
Definitions
Laboratory areas
Laboratory areas are defined as highly serviced (temperature, ventilation, humidity or containment controlled)
spaces where physical, biological or chemical processing or testing is carried out. Such areas will have inherently
high energy demands. In order to maintain controlled conditions to enable experiments and comply with health
and safety standards, typically laboratories:
1. Contain various exhaust and containment devices (such as fume cupboards and microbiological safety
cabinets)
2. Are heavily serviced to circulate air and to supply heating, cooling, humidity, and clean air
3. Often require 24-hour access and failsafe redundant backup systems and uninterrupted power supply
or emergency power to enable irreplaceable experiments.
Therefore, for the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, the definition of laboratory areas excludes any
laboratory support areas such as:
1. Write up or offices
2. Meeting rooms
3. Storage
4. Ancillary and other support areas with lower servicing requirements.
Teaching and other laboratories or workshops with a limited amount of fume cupboards or other containment
devices or no energy intensive process equipment specified are excluded, unless the design team can provide
evidence that their consumption is at least 50% higher than a typical office due to the laboratory process-related
activities. Benchmarks for general offices can be found in Table 1 in CIBSE TM46 (150) Energy benchmarks.
Typically, in buildings where 40% of the floor area is laboratory related, only 10% will actually constitute
laboratory areas as per the BREEAM definition. Different types of laboratories have different requirements for
heating, ventilation and air-conditioning, plug load equipment and access. This can lead to enormous variations in
energy and water requirements. The main types of laboratories include:
1. Wet laboratories - where chemicals, drugs or other material or biological matter are tested and analysed
requiring water, direct ventilation and specialised piped utilities. They typically include chemical science
laboratories. These laboratories require specially designed facilities.
2. Dry laboratories - contain dry stored materials, electronics, or large instruments with few piped services.
They typically include engineering or analytical laboratories that may require accurate temperature and
humidity control, dust control, and clean power.
3. Microbiological or clinical laboratories - often involve working with infectious agents. They typically
require higher levels of primary containment and multiple secondary barriers including specialised
ventilation systems to ensure directional air flow, air treatment systems to decontaminate or remove
agents from exhaust air, controlled access zones, airlocks as laboratory entrances, or separate buildings
or modules to isolate the laboratory.
4. In vivo laboratories - these require highly controlled environments for the care and maintenance of flora
and fauna. The facilities are complex, expensive to build and to operate. Tight environmental control over
the facility is required to avoid the introduction of contaminants or pathogens, prevent the possibility of
infectious outbreaks, and avoid the transmission of odours.
5. Teaching laboratories - unique to academic institutes, they require space for teaching equipment,
storage space for student belongings and less instrumentation than research labs.
6. Clean rooms - refers to a controlled environment (air quality, temperature and humidity) which prevent
contamination and the regulating of environmental conditions, to facilitate accurate research and
production needs. They are typically used in UK universities for nanotechnology, medical and
pharmaceutical research or studies and microelectronics applications.
ccxiv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Right-sizing
Right-sizing principles encourage the use of better estimates in equipment loads from which services equipment
is sized in comparison to traditional methods of estimates based on ‘rated’ data obtained from manufacturers’
literature or design assumptions from previous projects. This can result in construction cost savings in addition to
life cycle cost benefits, while taking account of the need for appropriate contingency.
Synergy with BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and

carbon emissions
This BREEAM issue has been developed to recognise improvements made to new laboratory areas or buildings
that are not currently fully recognised in the National Calculation Methodology, which is used to assess and award
credits in Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions on page clix .
Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment ccxv
Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment
2 2 Not applicable Not applicable

No Minimum standard
Aim
To encourage installation of energy efficient equipment to ensure optimum performance and energy savings in
operation.
Value
– Reduce unregulated energy consumption
loads based on the building’s usage and
occupants patterns
– Promote a better understanding of
unregulated energy consumption for the
significantly consuming systems, therefore
reducing the performance gap
Context
The current building regulations do not account for all energy uses in buildings and aim to address regulated
energy consumption. Unregulated sources of energy consumption such as swimming pools, server rooms,
commercial and domestic scale appliances, are rarely considered and modelled at the design stage. However, they
ccxvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
can have significant impact on the energy use. In an office building for instance, they typically account for more than
30% of the energy consumption(151). It is important to encourage solutions that result in unregulated energy
reduction, which is variable between different building types and ignored by current regulatory standards.
Assessment scope

Applicable assessment criteria All All None None
Assessment type specific notes None See ref. 1.0 None None
Domestic scale appliances (individual and communal facilities) on page ccxvii. item 5b is only applicable to multi-
residential assessments.

1.0 Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment: Criterion 1 on page ccxvii and 2: Ref A swimming are not
applicable. All other criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.
2.0 Healthcare
All medical equipment can be exempted from complying with the criteria.
Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment ccxvii
Assessment criteria
Two credits
1 Identify the building's unregulated energy consuming loads. Estimate their contribution to the total annual
unregulated energy consumption of the building, assuming a typical or standard specification.
2 Identify the systems or processes that use a significant proportion of the total annual unregulated energy
consumption of the building.
3 Demonstrate a meaningful reduction in the total annual unregulated energy consumption of the building.
Table 32 below lists some examples of significant contributors to unregulated energy consumption. If none of
the examples listed in the table will be specified in the assessed building, the design team should justify how a
meaningful reduction will be achieved.
Table 32 Examples of significant contributors to unregulated energy consumption, for a number of different
building types or functions, and the solutions deemed to comply.
Swimming pool
1. Specify automatic or semi-automatic pool covers, or ‘liquid’ pool covers with an automatic dosing
system to ALL pools, including spa pools and hot tubs.
2. The covers envelop the entire pool surface when fully extended.
3. Control the air temperature in the pool hall so that it is 1°C above the water temperature.
Laundry facilities with commercial-sized appliances
Demonstrate at least one of the following for commercial-sized appliances:
1. Specification of heat recovery from waste water
2. Use of greywater for part of the washing process. This may be recycled from the final rinse and used
for the next pre-wash.
3. The commercial or industrial sized machines is identified as eligible for the UK’s Enhanced Capital
Allowance Scheme for water (152).
Data centres
1. Design is in accordance with the ‘Best practices for the EU Code of Conduct on Data Centres’(153)
principles with the data centre achieving at least the ‘Expected minimum practice’ level (as defined in
the Code of Conduct).
2. Temperature set points are not less than 24°C, as measured at the inlet of the equipment in the rack.
IT-intensive operating areas
1. Specify a natural ventilation and cooling strategy as standard. Use forced ventilation only when the
internal temperature exceeds 20°C and active cooling only when the internal temperature exceeds
22°C.
2. Specify a mechanism to achieve automatic power-down of equipment when not in-use, including
overnight.
Domestic scale appliances (individual and communal facilities)
Any white goods, available to purchase from the developer, must c achieve the following ratings (or better)
under the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme:
1. Fridges, fridge-freezers: A+ rating
2. Washing machines: A++ rating
3. Dishwashers: A+ rating
ccxviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
4. Washer-dryers: A rating
5. Tumble dryers:
a. A rating OR
b. For Multi-residential assessments only, provide an adequate internal or external space capable of
holding drying lines as specified in the Drying lines section.
Healthcare
Carry out a life cycle costing analysis for at least two options in accordance with HTM07-02,Part B, Chapter 1
(154). Inform and specify large-scale equipment (where present, see Definitions on page ccxx) and sets of
electrical equipment (where numbering more than 50) based on the life cycle costing analysis.
Kitchen and catering facilities
Incorporate at least two-thirds of the energy efficiency measures outlined in the 'section summary' boxes of
each of the following sections of CIBSE Guide TM50 (155) (except as specified):
1. Section 8 - Drainage and kitchen waste removal
2. Section 9 - Energy controls - specifically controls relevant to appliances
3. Section 11 - Appliance specification - excluding fabrication or utensil specifications
4. Section 12 - Refrigeration
5. Section 13 - Warewashing: dishwashers and glasswashers
6. Section 14 - Cooking appliance selection
7. Section 15 - Water temperatures, taps, faucets and water saving controls.
Refrigeration (see Refrigeration equipment on the facing page) for kitchen and catering facilities should be
assessed here, not in Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage on page cxcvii.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Estimating annual unregulated energy consumption

A method should be used that estimates actual energy use, based on expected equipment loads and hours of
operation. The energy uses may be estimated by using simple hand calculations, benchmark data or by the
methods described in CIBSE TM54: Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage
(156).
Estimating a significant proportion of annual unregulated energy

consumption
This methodology is used to estimate which energy uses make up a significant proportion of the unregulated
energy uses and so detailed calculations are not required. The approach should focus on identifying the larger
energy uses that should be included and the small energy uses that can be excluded. As a guide, energy uses
making up at least 90% of the estimated total annual energy consumption should typically be included (this is a
statutory requirement in Wales, Northern Ireland and England – see Ene 02 Energy monitoring �Additional
information on page clxxxi).
A meaningful reduction in unregulated energy demand

BREEAM does not specify a level or percentage that defines a meaningful reduction in unregulated energy demand.
Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment ccxix
The project team must justify how they have determined or judged a meaningful reduction from the unregulated
energy demand and the assessor must be satisfied that this is an appropriate justification.
Domestic scale appliances
Drying lines
Domestic scale appliances (individual and communal facilities) requires the provision of an adequate internal or
external secure space with posts and footings, or fixings capable of holding:
1. For self-contained dwellings:

a. One to two bedrooms: 4m+ of drying line
b. Three or more bedrooms: 6m+ of drying line.
2. For individual bedrooms:
a. Two metres or more of drying line per bedroom for developments with up to 30 individual bedrooms;
plus
b. One metre of additional drying line for each bedroom over the 30 individual bedroom threshold.
This issue does not apply to multi-residential assessments of supported living facilities (for safety reasons, to
minimise ligature risk to particular residents). It is also not applicable to projects where occupancy is transient, such
as hotel- or hostel-type developments, but does apply to long term residential buildings.
Adequate internal space

A heated space with adequate, controlled ventilation, complying with the national building regulations relevant to
the location of the building (rooms that commonly meet these requirements are a bathroom or utility room);
OR
An unheated outbuilding, where calculations by an appropriate Member of the Chartered Institute of Building
Services Engineers (CIBSE) or an equivalent professional demonstrate that ventilation in the space is adequate to
allow drying in normal climatic conditions and to prevent condensation and mould growth. The fixing or fitting
needs to be a permanent feature of the room. Internal drying spaces in the following rooms do not comply:
1. Living rooms
2. Kitchens
3. Dining rooms
4. Main halls
5. Bedrooms.
Excluded building types

This criterion does not apply to multi-residential assessments of supported living facilities (for safety reasons, to
minimise ligature risk to particular residents). It is also not applicable to projects where occupancy is transient, such
as hotel or hostel type developments, but does apply to long term residential buildings.
Refrigeration equipment
Section 12 - Refrigeration and Kitchen and catering facilities on the previous page apply to the following
refrigeration equipment (where present):
1. Air-cooled condensing units

2. Cellar cooling
3. Commercial service cabinets
4. Curtains or blinds for refrigerated display cabinets
5. Refrigeration compressors
6. Refrigeration system controls
7. Refrigerated display cabinets.
ccxx SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Cold storage
The criteria do apply to commercial kitchen refrigeration but not to other commercial or industrial sized
refrigeration and storage systems. These systems are covered within the scope of Ene 05 Energy efficient cold
storage on page cxcvii and should be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue.
Lifts, escalators and moving walks

This issue does not apply to lifts, escalators and moving walkways. These systems are covered within the scope of
Ene 06 Energy efficient transport systems on page ccii and should be removed from the list of unregulated loads
with respect to this issue.
Laboratory systems
This issue does not apply to laboratory ducted fume cupboards. These systems are covered within the scope of
Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems on page ccviii and should be removed from the list of unregulated
loads with respect to this issue.
Reuse of equipment
Reuse of electrical equipment does not comply by default, as it may not be the most energy efficient option.
However, the credit could be awarded if either of the following criteria are demonstrated:
1. The existing electrical appliances meet the criteria for inclusion on the Enhanced Capital Allowance Scheme
Energy Technology Product List (157).
2. Reusing the old equipment would, over the course of its life, be a more energy efficient option than
specifying new equipment.
No specified systems contributing to the unregulated energy demand

Where there are no systems specified contributing to the unregulated energy load of the building, Ene 08 issue will
be filtered out.
Evidence

Definitions
Data centre
For the purpose of this BREEAM issue, the term ‘data centres’ includes all buildings, facilities and rooms which
contain enterprise servers, server communication equipment, cooling equipment and power equipment, and
may provide some form of data service (e.g. large-scale mission critical facilities all the way down to small server
rooms located in office buildings).
Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment ccxxi
Healthcare large-scale equipment

This includes commercial-scale catering and laundry equipment and all other equipment with connected electrical
loads in excess of 10kW rated input power.
IT-intensive areas
These include computer areas where more than one computer per 5m²is provided, e.g. training suites, design
studios, libraries’ IT areas and other areas with a high density of computing devices.
Regulated energy
Building energy consumption resulting from the specification of a controlled, fixed building services and fittings,
including space heating and cooling, hot water, ventilation and lighting.
Secure space
For self-contained dwellings this can be defined as an enclosed space only accessible to the residents of the
dwelling. For buildings with a communal drying space it is an enclosed space with a secure entrance, accessible to
the residents of the building only.
Unregulated energy
Building energy consumption resulting from a system or process that is not ‘controlled’, i.e. energy consumption
from systems in the building on which the building regulations do not impose a requirement. This may include
energy consumption from operational-related equipment, e.g. computers, servers, printers, laptops, mobile
fume cupboards, cooking, audio-visual equipment and other appliances etc.
Unlike the definition for Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions, for this issue, it does not include
energy consumption from systems integral to the building and its operation, e.g. commercial or industrial
refrigeration systems; lifts, escalators and other transport systems; and ducted fume cupboards; because they
are already assessed separately in issues Ene 05, Ene 06 and Ene 07 respectively.
White goods
Domestic appliances for example washing machines, fridges, freezers, fridge-freezers, tumble dryers, washer-
dryers.
Ventilation - Building regulations

See Domestic scale appliances (individual and communal facilities) item 5b
The following lists the building regulations relevant for the assessment of this issue specific to the country of the UK:
– Wales - Approved Document F Ventilation 2010 (England and Wales)

– Scotland - Technical Handbook 2016 - Domestic Section 3 Environment
– Northern Ireland - Technical Booklet K Ventilation 2012
– England - Approved Document F Ventilation 2010 edition (incorporating 2010 and 2013 amendments,
England and Wales).
ccxxii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Transport
10% 9 12 14.5
Summary
This category encourages provision of and improved access to local amenities and to sustainable means of
transport, i.e. public transport and other alternative transport solutions for building users. The aim is to reward
locations and solutions that support reductions in car journeys and, therefore, congestion andCO2 emissions over
the life of the building.
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Up to 5 credits
– Recognition for developments in proximity to good public transport networks, thereby helping to reduce
transport-related pollution and congestion.
Tra 02 Proximity to amenities Up to 2 credits
– Recognition of developments in close proximity of, and accessible to, local amenities which are likely to be
frequently required and used by building occupants.
Tra 03 Alternative modes of transport Up to 2 credits
– Provision of facilities to encourage travel using low carbon modes of transport and to minimise individual
journeys.
Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity Up to 2 credits
– Recognition of developments that limit car parking capacity.

Tra 05 Travel plan 1 credit
– To promote sustainable reductions in transport burdens by undertaking a site-specific travel assessment or

statement and developing a travel plan based on the needs of the particular site.
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility ccxxiii
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility
Up to 5 Up to 5 Up to 5 Up to 5

Aim
To reduce the impacts of transport-related pollution and congestion by promoting the provision and use of public
transport.
Value
– Promotes the use of public transport
– Promotes the provision of bus services
tailored to the use of the building
– Reduces building users’ carbon footprint and
associated negative environmental impacts,
improving local air quality and reducing local
congestion
Context
Transport accounts for around a quarter of UK greenhouse gas emissions, significantly affecting air quality at the
roadside(158). Public transport offers a route to addressing transport-related greenhouse gas emissions and will
contribute towards the UK’s long term goal of reducing greenhouse gas emissions by at least 80%, compared to
1990 levels by 2050. The emissions from trains and buses can be up to eight times lower than car travel(159).
ccxxiv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Furthermore we have all experienced poor access to public transport and traffic congestion, adding in some cases,
hours onto our travel times.
It is not only important to have capacity in our public transport, but also to ensure that the public transport is
accessible for all and operates at convenient times to meet our needs. The National Planning Policy Framework
places significant emphasis on sustainable transport options, stating that planning should “make the fullest
possible use of public transport, walking and cycling, and focus significant development in locations which are or
can be made sustainable”(160).
By reducing air pollution levels, the burden of disease from stroke, heart disease, lung cancer and both chronic and
acute respiratory diseases, including asthma, can be lessen.
Air pollution is estimated to cause 29,000 deaths each year and to reduce the life expectancy by 6 months on
overage in the UK, at a cost of £16 billion per year.
It also damages plants and animals, affecting biodiversity and crop yields(161).
While the role of strategic policies is key, the need to address this issues with careful planning and design remains
key to the creation of urban environments that are healthier and more pleasant to live.
Assessment scope

Applicable Assessment criteria All All All All

None
None
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility ccxxv
Assessment criteria
– Accessibility Index, (up to 5 credits - building type dependent)

– Dedicated bus service (1 credit)
One of the following is required to demonstrate compliance:
Up to five credits - Accessibility Index

1 Collate the following information to determine the public transport Accessibility Index (AI) of the assessed
building (see Table 33)
1.a: Distance (m) from the main building entrance to each compliant public transport node
1.b: Public transport type serving the compliant node, e.g. bus or rail;
1.c: Average number of services stopping per hour at each compliant node during the operating hours of the
building for a typical day, (see Table 34).
2 Use the BREEAM Tra01 calculator to calculate the AI and determine the BREEAM credits for the assessed
building.
Table 33 Credits available for each building type relating to the public transport AI score.
AI ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥ ≥
2 4 8 10 12 18
Building type BREEAM credits available
Offices, Industrial, Multi-residential, Other building transport 1 2 3 - - -
type 1
Preschool, School, Sixth Form 1 2 3 - - -
Retail, Law Court, Further Education College, Higher Education 1 2 3 3 4 5
type 1, Other building transport type 2
Higher Education type 2 1 2 3 4 5 -
Healthcare - Hospitals (Acute, Specialist, Teaching, Mental 1 2 3 3 4 5
health)
Healthcare - GP surgery, Health centre, Community hospital 1 2 3 4 5 -
Rural location sensitive buildings. Other building transport 1 2 - - - -
type 3
Prison site, MOD site 1 2 - - - -
Transport hub 1 2 3 3 3 4
Table 34 Default hours of operation by building type for a typical day

Building type Default hours
Commercial 08.00–19.00
Preschool, school, sixth form 07.30–10.00,15.00 - 17.30
college
ccxxvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Building type Default hours

Further & Higher Education 08.00–19.00
Healthcare 07.00–20.00 (encompassing visiting hours and the typical daytime shift
pattern)
Retail: Shopping centre 09.00–19.00
Retail: Supermarket 08.00–22.00
Retail: Service provider 08.00–18.00
Retail: Convenience store 07.00–22.00
Retail: DIY or retail park 08.00–20.00
Retail: shop 08.30–17.30
Multi-residential 08.00–19.00
accommodation
Court 08.00–19.00
Prison 07.00–20:00
(encompassing visiting hours and the typical daytime shift pattern)
Other Buildings 08.00–19.00
Or use any of the above hours, as appropriate to the building type.
24-hour-use building 07.00–20.00
OR
One credit - Dedicated bus service

This credit is only available if a development has not achieved any of the Accessibility Index credits due to the low
public transport AI of its location.
3 For buildings with a fixed shift pattern, where users will predominantly arrive or depart at set times, e.g.
schools, offices, retail, factories, prisons etc., the building occupier commits to providing a dedicated bus
service to and from the building at the beginning and end of each shift or day.
Compliance notes
Methodology
The methodology for calculating the AI uses Transport for London’s Public Transport Accessibility Level (PTAL)
method, itself based on a methodology developed in 1992 by the London Borough of Hammersmith and Fulham.
For a detailed description of the PTAL methodology see the 'Assessing transport connectivity in London'
document .
Calculating the average number of services

For the purpose of the calculation, the frequency of public transport is the average number of services per hour.
This is calculated by determining the number of stopping services at the node during the peak arrival and
departure times for the building or the building's typical day’s operating hours (see definition 'operating hours'),
divided by the number of hours within that period. For example: the average number of services for an assessment
of a building that operates between 08:00–19:00 hrs (11 hours) and is within proximity of a bus stop with 35
stopping services during this period is 3.2 (equivalent to an average service frequency of approximately 20
minutes).
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility ccxxvii
Multiple services
Services that operate from more than one node within proximity of the building, i.e. two separate bus stops served
by the same bus, must be considered only once - at the node in closest proximity to the building. Different services
at the same node can be considered as separate.
Bi-directional routes
Routes will be bi-directional; however for the purpose of calculating the index, consider only the direction with the
highest frequency (in accordance with the PTAL methodology).
Campus or campus-style developments - entrance to consider when

calculating the AI
The main entrance to the campus, e.g. further or higher education sites, can be used to determine the distance to a
compliant node, if 80% or more of the buildings are within 1000m of this entrance.
If the site has more than one main entrance, either entrance can be used for the calculation.
Where less than 80% of the buildings are within 1000m of the campus' main entrance, the assessed building’s main
entrance must be used to determine the distance to a compliant node. This aims to encourage the location of
public transport nodes inside or on the periphery of the campuses.
Buildings in Greater London

The Transport for London Planning Information Database allows users to search for a specific London location by
street name, coordinates or postcode and then calculate the Accessibility Index (AI) for that location. The Total AI is
confirmed for the Point of Interest (POI) within the summary report, which can be downloaded and used as
evidence of compliance for the assessed building. Go to: tfl.gov.uk
Dedicated bus services

The dedicated bus must provide transfer to the local population centre, public transport interchange or be a door-
to-door service. The service can be included in the public transport Accessibility Index calculation as a public
transport service, in which cases, the 'dedicated bus service' credit cannot be awarded and the distance from the
main building entrance to the transport node should be to the drop-off or pick-up point of the service.
Phased developments
New transport facilities provided at a later stage, as part of a large phased development, can be deemed to meet
the requirements on condition that:
A commitment has been made within the General Contract Specification or in the form of a Section 106
Agreement, to provide transport facilities within the shortest of the following periods:
1. The transport facilities will be available for use by the time 25% of all phases have been completed and are
ready for occupation. OR
2. The transport facilities will be available for use within 25% of the total build time for the phase in which the
assessed building forms a part, measured from the completion date of that phase.
Where the transport facilities will not be available for use within a period of five years from occupation of the
building, they cannot be considered for determining compliance with the BREEAM criteria.
ccxxviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Evidence

Table 33, 2 A completed copy of the Tra 01 As per interim design stage
calculator
Table 33, 2 Documentary evidence supporting the As per interim design stage
data used to complete the Calculator
tool.
For developments in Greater London
where a Public Transport Accessibility
Level (PTAL) report is provided, additional
evidence to demonstrate compliance
with criteria 1 and 2 is not required. The
assessor must be satisfied that the PTAL
report is current and accurately relates to
the assessed site.
Definitions
Accessibility index (AI)

An indicator of the accessibility and density of the public transport network at a point of interest (in the case of
BREEAM, a building). The index is influenced by the proximity and diversity of the public transport network and the
level or frequency of service at the accessible node. For example, a building that has a single public transport
node 500m from its main building entrance with one service stopping every 15 minutes, i.e. four services per
hour on average, will score an AI of approximately 1.90. Alternatively, the same node with one service every 15
minutes, but 300m from the building entrance will achieve an AI of 2.26. The same node with two services
stopping every 15 minutes will score an AI of 2.85. The greater the number of compliant nodes, services and
their proximity to the building, the higher the AI.
Additional building type classifications

Higher Education transport type 1: H.E. buildings located on a campus where less than 25% of students are
resident on the campus or within 1km radius from the campus’ main entrance.
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility ccxxix
Higher Education transport type 2: H.E. buildings located on a campus where 25% or more of the students are
Other Building transport type 1: A building predominantly occupied by staff or employees with occasional
business related visitors.
Other Building transport type 2: A building occupied by a number of core staff or employees with a larger
number of consistently frequent visitors or users (either resident or non-resident).
Other Building transport type 3: As type 2, but building types specifically required to be located rurally as a result
of its function, i.e. a building which would never be located within an urban area, e.g. a National Park visitor centre
(see definition of rural and rural location sensitive buildings location).
Compliant transport node

A compliant node includes any bus service with a stop within 650m and any railway station within 1000m of the
assessed building’s main entrance, measured via a safe pedestrian route (not ‘as the crow flies’). The service
stopping at each node must provide transport from, or onward travel to, either an urban centre, major transport
node or a community focal point, e.g. doctor’s surgery, library, school or village centre. Only local services should
be assessed and any national public transport services should be excluded from the analysis, unless such a service
can be said to provide a local commuter service.
Prisons and MOD sites: The distance requirement for a compliant node for buildings on these sites is 1000m for
both bus and rail.
Main building entrance

The main building entrance is the entrance to the assessed building which is directly connected to the main
building reception, circulation routes, lifts or stairs and is available to the majority of the building’s staff and
visitors on arrival. It is not the site entrance (unless the site entrance is also the building entrance, e.g. building with
a boundary on a public highway). For prison or MOD site assessments, the main entrance should be taken as the
gatehouse entrance.
Operating hours
BREEAM seeks to define the building’s accessibility to the public transport network for the period during which
the majority of building users will travel to and from the building. In most cases the normal operating hours of the
building can be used. Where shift patterns see the majority of building users (over 80%) arriving or leaving during
a certain period, for example an office building where the majority of office workers arrive between 8.00-10.00,
that period can be used as an alternative to the operating hours of the building. This accounts for some building
types that operate a 24 hour day and on a shift work basis. During what typically would be deemed unsociable
hours, and therefore periods where there is little if any public transport operating, such periods are not required
to be accounted for in the assessment of this issue. Where the assessed building operates on a 24-hour basis or
the operating hours are unknown at the time of assessment, then refer to and use the table of default operating
hours, which can be found in the additional information section of this issue.
BREEAM Tra 01 Calculator tool

A spreadsheet-based calculator used to determine the AI for the assessed building and the number of BREEAM
credits achieved.
Rural location
A rural location is defined in this context as a site clearly not within or on the boundary of a small, medium or large
urban cover. An urban cover will have a population of 3000 people or more, located within a tract of
continuously built-up urban land extending 20 hectares or more. Therefore, the definition of rural includes village
ccxxx SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
locations, green field sites or small urban centres with a population of less 3000 people within a tract of land no
greater than 20 hectares. Such locations will most likely be on a local bus route to larger urban areas or other local
towns and may have local shops and other facilities. This classification is based on the Department of Transport
National Travel Survey definition, which specifies urban areas based on the extent of urban development
indicated on Ordnance Survey maps.
Rural location sensitive buildings

This definition includes any of the building types (listed below) where there is a demonstrable social or economic
need from a rural population for the service and demand, which the new building is intended to meet; and
therefore locating the building at an alternative site which could have higher public transport accessibility levels,
i.e. within an urbanised area, is unfeasible. The following building types are examples of those that may fall into
this category.
1. Offices where providing services to the local community

2. Industrial where providing services to the local community
3. Retail where providing services to the local community
4. Preschool, primary and secondary school
5. GP surgery
Typical day
The typical day is that which represents the period when travel to and from the building by its users and visitors
will be at its highest. For most buildings this should be taken as a mid-week day. In choosing a typical day the
assessor should check that timetabled information for that day is, within reason, representative of the public
transport provision for the entire operating week (excluding Sundays).
None.
Tra 02 Proximity to amenities ccxxxi
Tra 02 Proximity to amenities

Aim
To reward a building location and design solutions that facilitate easy access to local services, in this way helping to
avoid unnecessary environmental, social and economic impacts of longer building user journeys.
Value
– Helps to reduce the need for travel,
reducing building users’ carbon footprint,
travelling time and costs
– Improves health and wellbeing by
encouraging use of more active means of
travel, reducing staff down time and costs to
society, i.e. sickness and health costs, etc
– Enhances the viability of local services and
amenities, which benefit both business and
community more generally
– Enhances attractiveness to tenants and
occupants, hence staff recruitment and
retention benefits, etc
– Promotes community cohesion,
engagement and sense of place
Context
The growing focus on out of edge of town developments in the commercial and retail sectors especially, is
increasing the dependency on private travel point. This fragments the provision of local services and amenities,
resulting in a significant increase in short distance travel, often by private transport.
ccxxxii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
New developments have the potential to enhance the viability of local services and amenities that benefit both
businesses and the wider community or society.
Assessment scope


None
None
Tra 02 Proximity to amenities ccxxxiii
Assessment criteria
Up to two credits
With reference to the criteria in Table 35 below:
1 All Building Groups (BG), apart from BG 6, are located within the stated proximity of at least two core (C)
amenities.
2 Meet the remaining number of amenities required using any other applicable or core amenities.
Table 35 Criteria and credits for different building groups

Building Groups
Criteria BG 1 BG 2 BG 3 BG 4 BG 5 BG 6
(Two credits
available)
No. of BREEAM credits 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
No. of amenities required 3 3 4 4 4 7 2
Proximity (metres) 500 500 500 500 500 1000 500
Appropriate food outlet C C C C C C ✔
Access to cash C C C C C C ✔
Access to an outdoor open space ✔ ✔ ✔ C C C ✔
(public or private, suitably sized and
accessible to building users)
Access to a recreation or leisure facility C C C ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
for fitness or sports
Publicly available postal facility ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Community facility ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Over the counter services associated ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
with a pharmacy
Public sector GP surgery or general ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
medical centre
Child care facility or school ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Key:
✔ - Amenity relevant to building group.
C - Core amenity for building group
Building Types:
BG 1: Offices, Retail, Industrial, Courts
BG 2: Preschool, Schools, Sixth Form
BG 3: Higher Education and Further Education
BG 4: Healthcare
BG 5: Multi-residential (two credits are available and each can be awarded independently of the other).
BG 6: Other Building types
This issue is not applicable to prison buildings and developments.
ccxxxiv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Compliance notes
Methodology
Campus or campus-style developments - entrance to consider

The main entrance to the campus, e.g. further or higher education sites, can be used to determine the distance to
amenities, if 80% or more of the buildings are within 1000m of this entrance.
If the site has more than one main entrance, either entrance can be used for the calculation.
Where less than 80% of the buildings are within 1000m of the campus' main entrance, the assessed building’s
main entrance must be used to determine the distance to a compliant node. This aims to encourage the location of
public transport nodes inside or on the periphery of the campuses.
Evidence

requirements on page 38 can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria
All Where the amenities do not currently As per interim design stage
exist but are due to be developed a letter
from the client or developer confirming:
1. The location and type of
amenities to be provided
2. The timescale for development
of the amenities.
Definitions
Accessible amenities
Amenities (as listed) that are accessible via safe pedestrian routes, e.g. pavements, paths and safe crossing
points or, where provided, dedicated pedestrian crossing points. The distance should not be measured in a
straight line, ‘as the crow flies’.
Appropriate food outlet

Access to a food supply that is affordable to the majority of the building users as well as being appropriate for
their day-to-day needs. For example, a small office building with a small shop selling sandwiches or snacks, or a
multi-residential building with a restaurant in the local area.
Tra 02 Proximity to amenities ccxxxv
Child care or school

To provide child support for potential building users. For example, a nursery, child minding facilities or a school
local to the development.
Community facility
An internal space that will facilitate community activities for the assessed building and its users. For example, for a
multi-residential building this could be a community hall or, for an office building, a public house.
Outdoor open space (public or private, suitably sized and accessible to building users)
A space that enables building users to take a break from internal building activities. For example, an office building
with space to sit outside for lunch. The space must be suitably sized for the building users associated with the
project and not form part of the public highway.
Recreation or leisure facility

A facility that allows building users to exercise and maintain a healthy lifestyle. For example, a local leisure centre,
tennis courts, an on-site gym or, for a school, a local playground.
None.
ccxxxvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Tra 03 Alternative modes of transport
Aim
To encourage the use of low carbon transport modes through the provision of facilities and support mechanisms.
Value
– Promotes improvement of the local cycling
network and of public transport accessibility
to the site
– Cost savings for building users, compared
with maintaining and running a traditionally
fuelled car
– Encourages active travel, improving people’s
health and wellbeing
– Improves local air quality by encouraging
clean travel and reducing reliance on
traditionally fuelled car and individuals’ car
journeys (i.e. electric cars, cycling etc.)
Context
Provision of alternative sustainable transport options can play a critical role in allowing people to travel around their
local area while reducing associated congestion, carbon emissions and improving air quality. The government is
encouraging alternative means of sustainable transport. The Cycling Delivery Plan and the provision of grants for
‘plug in cars’(162) are examples of this. Statistics published by the Department for Transport showed that 5% of
people were considering buying an electric car or van(163). We need to ensure that the infrastructure is there to
support people in making the move to alternative sustainable transport.
>
Tra 03 Alternative modes of transport ccxxxvii
Assessment scope

Assessment type specific notes None None See ref. 1.0 See ref. 1.0

1.0 Cycle storage and cyclists facilities credit (option 5)
The compliant number of cycle storage spaces must be provided as part of the base build.
Compliant cyclists' facilities (showers, changing areas etc.) can also be provided in shell and core
areas of the building as part of the base build. Alternatively, compliance can be demonstrated
where the shell and core building is designed to facilitate future installation of the compliant
number and type of cyclists' facilities by the tenant or owner-occupier through the provision of an
appropriately sized and dedicated space in the base building, including either the installation of the
appropriate services (for showers) or infrastructure to allow the future installation of the relevant
services, e.g. capped water supply, service or ventilation ducts, drainage etc.
2.0 Education (schools only)
In a preschool or primary school, shower provision is for staff only and set at a rate of one shower
for every 10 cycle storage spaces provided (subject to a minimum of one shower). For example, a
primary school designed to accommodate three classes per year requires a total of 15 compliant
cycle storage spaces, and therefore two showers for staff use.
2.1 Education (secondary schools only)
In a secondary school, for cyclists facilities, compliance for students can be based on the provision
of compliant lockers only. Students are not expected to have access to private showers in relation
to cyclists’ facilities.
For staff, the number of cyclists’ facilities is based on the total number of staff, as per the criteria.
2.2 Education (schools only)
In a preschool or primary school, shower provision is for staff only and set at a rate of one shower
for every 10 cycle storage spaces provided (subject to a minimum of one shower). For example, a
primary school designed to accommodate three classes per year requires a total of 15 compliant
cycle storage spaces, and therefore two showers for staff use.
2.3 Secure accommodation
For a secure accommodation unit, compliance should be based on visitors (not beds).
ccxxxviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
A
Assessment criteria
1 Implement one of the options in Table 36 below.
Table 36 Criteria and credits for alternative modes of transport

x Applicable building types Credits
1 All 2
1. During preparation of the brief, the design team consults with the local authority on the state of the
local cycling network and how the development could improve it;
2. Agree and implement one proposition chosen with the local authority. The proposition supported by
the development is additional to existing local plans and has a significant positive impact on the local
cycling network.
2 All 2
3. Negotiate with local bus companies an increase in the local service provision for the development;
4. Increase the existing AI by at least 1.00 (see Tra 01 Public transport accessibility).
3 All 2
5. Provide electric recharging stations for at least 3% of the total car parking capacity for the
development;
6. Demonstrate electric vehicles using charging points have lower CO₂emissions than petrol or diesel
counterparts.
4 All 2
7. Set up a car sharing group or facility to facilitate and encourage building users to car share;
8. Raise awareness of the sharing scheme with marketing and communication materials;
9. Provide priority spaces for car sharers for at least 5% of the total car parking capacity for the
development;
10. Locate priority parking spaces nearest the development entrance used by the sharing scheme
participants.
5a All (excluding sheltered, care homes, supported living 1
facilities and prison building types)
11. Install compliant cycle storage spaces to meet the minimum levels set out in Tra 03 Alternative modes
of transport: Criterion Table 37 on the facing page.
5b All (excluding sheltered housing, care homes and 1
supported living facilities, student residents, key
accommodation, transport hub and MOD residential and
prison building types)
12. Provide at least two compliant facilities for the building users, (including pupils where appropriate to
the building type) - see Definitions for the scope of each compliant facility:
a. Showers
b. Changing facilities
c. Lockers
d. Drying spaces.
5c Sheltered housing, case homes and supported living 1
facilities and prison building types only
Tra 03 Alternative modes of transport ccxxxix
Table 37 Cycle storage criteria for each building type

No. Unit of Notes
spaces measure
per unit
of
measure
Commercial
Offices, Industrial 1 10 staff None
Retail
Large retail 1 10 staff Use the maximum number of staff at any one
time or shift. Provide staff spaces in addition
to customer spaces. Separate spaces are
encouraged but not essential as long as there
1 20 public is a minimum of 10 customer cycle spaces.
car parking Any retail development with at least 50
spaces customer cycle storage spaces is compliant
regardless of the number of parking spaces.
The requirement for staff spaces would still
need to be fully met.
Small retail 10 Total Spaces are publicly accessible within proximity
of a main building entrance. Compliant
cyclists’ facilities are needed for staff only.
Education
Preschool or crèche 1 10 staff None
Primary school 5 Per form For example: a primary school designed for
or class in three classes per year provides a total of 15
year group compliant cycle storage spaces for the whole
school. If the number of forms or classes
varies between year groups, base the
calculation on the greatest number of classes
or forms.
Secondary schools and sixth 1 10 staff & FE and HE: student numbers account for both
form, further and higher pupils and under- and post-graduates, as well as PhD
education (FE and HE) students students and post-doctorates.
total Use the sliding scale of compliance to
determine the number of cycle spaces if there
are more than 200 building users.
Healthcare
All healthcare building types 1 10 staff Use the largest unit of measure for the
building type, e.g. use beds for a hospital, use
consulting rooms for a GP surgery. A
minimum of four compliant cycle storage
spaces is required.
Special healthcare building types, e.g.
1 2 chemotherapy outpatient centre or maternity
consulting ward - For such building types, given the
rooms OR nature of the building function, the cycle
10 beds storage spaces for ‘2 consulting rooms OR
10 beds’ (i.e. those intended for patients and
visitors), might be excluded, as it is unlikely that
patients and accompanying visitors would be
cycling to and from the centre.
Courts and Prisons
Prison establishment located 1 10 staff Only one credit available with the provision of
building two cyclist facilities.
ccxl SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Law court 1 10 None

building
occupants
(staff and
visitors)
Multi-residential
Student residences, key 1 10 staff A minimum of one compliant space is
worker accommodation required.
1 2 residents
Sheltered housing, care 1 10 staff
homes, supported living
facility
1 10
Visitors or
beds.
Other buildings
Type A (see Additional Use office buildings criteria.
building type classifications The unit of measure for visitors or beds does not apply to hotels.
Type B (see Additional building 1 10 staff
type classifications
1 10 visitors
or beds
Type C (see Additional 1 20 staff A single credit can be awarded where spaces
building type classifications for staff only are provided as well as the
appropriate compliant cyclists' facilities. The
compliance note allowing a reduction to the
1 20 cyclist provision in rural locations has been
building accounted for in the unit of measure for this
visitors or transport type. It should not therefore be
beds applied again.
Transport hubs 1 10 public Apply the sliding scale (as per compliance
users note) to a maximum of 5000 daily public
users. Public users refer to regular peak time
users of the service who start or finish their
public transport journey at the assessed
building.
MOD non-residential 1 10 living- These criteria apply to MOD buildings where
out the majority of personnel live off site.
personnel
MOD residential 1 2 residents None
Where the number of building users (based upon the unit of measure) exceeds 200, the sliding scale of
compliance can be used to identify the appropriate number of cycle spaces required
Compliance notes
Tra 03 Alternative modes of transport ccxli
Methodology
Number of building occupants unknown

If the number of building occupants commuting to the development cannot be confirmed, e.g. speculative
developments, use the default occupancy rates given in the table in Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity �on
page ccxlvi. Alternatively, the number of building occupants in an existing development of similar type and size can
be used (the assessor must justify or validate the number used in their certification report).
Phased developments
New transport facilities provided at a later stage, as part of a large phased development, can be deemed to meet
the requirements on condition that:
A commitment has been made within the General Contract Specification or in the form of a Section 106
Agreement, to provide transport facilities within the shortest of the following periods:
1. The transport facilities will be available for use by the time 25% of all phases have been completed and are
ready for occupation. OR
2. The transport facilities will be available for use within 25% of the total build time for the phase in which the
assessed building forms a part, measured from the completion date of that phase.
Where the transport facilities will not be available for use within a period of five years from occupation of the
building, they cannot be considered for determining compliance with the BREEAM criteria.
Building locations with a high level of public transport accessibility

Sites where at least 50% of the available credits for BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility have been
awarded (rounded to the nearest whole credit) can reduce the number of compliant cycle spaces requirement by
50%. This reduction will also reduce the requirement for compliant shower or lockers by the same margin.
Building types where the number of required showers or lockers is not based on cycle storage provision can reduce
the actual requirement for compliant showers or lockers by 50%.
This reduction cannot be combined with the sliding scale.
Rural locations
For sites in rural locations:
1. Where the distance to the nearest urban location is greater than 10 miles, the number of compliant cycle
spaces can be reduced by 50%.
The reduction will also reduce the requirement for compliant shower and lockers by the same margin for most
building types by default, since the calculation is based on the number of cycle storage spaces. Building types where
the number of required showers or lockers is not based on cycle storage provision can reduce the actual
requirement for compliant showers or lockers by 50%, 70% or 90% as appropriate.
This reduction cannot be applied in addition to the 50% reduction due to the building's Public Transport
Accessibility level (as described in Methodology).
ccxlii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Sliding scale of compliance

To recognise the increased confidence in availability that occurs where there is larger scale provision of facilities, it is
acceptable to reduce the provision requirement for building users by increasing the standard unit of measure
(defined in Table 37 on page ccxxxix) and potentially the provision of cyclists' facilities on a sliding scale as follows:
1. For buildings with more than 200 users but less than 300, the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio
of 1.5.
2. For buildings with more than 300 users but less than 400, the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio
of 2.
3. For buildings with more than 400 users, the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 2.5.
For example, an office building with 800 users would be required to provide the following number of cycle storage
spaces:
– 1–200 users @ 1 space per 10 users = 20 spaces

– 201–300 users @ 1 space per 15 users (standard unit of measure x 1.5) = 7 spaces
– 301–400 users @ 1 space per 20 users (standard unit of measure x 2) = 5 spaces
– 401+ users @ 1 space per 25 users (standard unit of measure x 2.5) = 16 spaces
– Total compliant cycle storage spaces required = 48 spaces
The sliding scale of compliance does not apply to the following building types: primary schools, multi-residential
buildings and MOD residential buildings.
Minimum cycle storage provision

Where the calculated number of required cycle storage spaces is less than four, total provision should be based on
the lower of the following:
1. A minimum of four compliant storage spaces must be provided OR

2. One space per user (staff and where appropriate other user groups).
Provision of cycle storage and facilities on sites with multiple buildings

Where a new or infill building is constructed on an existing site, or multiple new buildings are to be constructed on
the same site, compliance with this issue may be assessed based on the standalone building or on a site-wide basis.
How this is determined depends on the configuration of the proposed cycle storage, cycle facilities and the
interpretation and justification of the assessor.
Standalone approach
Cycle storage and associated facilities for the assessed building only:
Cyclists' storage:
– The number of cycle storage spaces is compliant based on the number of users in the assessed building. The
sliding scale of compliance can be used (where applicable) when determining the number of storage spaces
required.
– All storage spaces provided must be BREEAM compliant and these must be located within, or in close proximity
to the assessed building. Access arrangements, demarcation and positioning clearly associate the cycle storage
provided with the assessed building only.
Cyclists' facilities:
– All new and existing facilities may be included provided they are BREEAM compliant.
– Facilities should be located within the assessed building, or in an accessible adjacent building for the sole use of
the assessed building’s users.
Tra 03 Alternative modes of transport ccxliii
Site-wide approach
Cycle storage and associated facilities accessible to users of the entire site, or where there is a distinct group of local
buildings within a site that would share facilities:
Cyclists' storage:
– The number of cycle storage spaces is compliant based on the number of users on site or within a group of local
buildings. The sliding scale of compliance can be used (where applicable) when determining the number of
storage spaces required.
– All new storage spaces must be BREEAM compliant. Existing storage spaces may also be counted, provided they
allow bikes to be easily stored and accessed with the ability to be locked securely against a fixed structure.
Cyclists' facilities:
– The number of compliant cyclists' facilities is based on the number of users on site who would be able to use
these facilities.
– Cyclists' facilities may be located anywhere on site. However, the total route that cyclists must take to access the
nearest cycle storage, cyclists' facilities and building entrances must be no greater than 500m via a safe and
convenient route. The distances should be measured from the first to the last point on the route. Where possible,
different types of cyclist facilities should be grouped together in designated areas for ease of access and use.
– All new and existing facilities may be included provided they are BREEAM compliant and conform to the 500m
requirement above.
Combination of the two approaches

A mixture of the two approaches can be applied where cycle storage is delivered as a site-wide approach and
facilities are being met for the assessed building only. However, where the opposite is being proposed (i.e. storage
spaces are provided only for the assessed building and facilities are provided on a site-wide basis); the number of
compliant cyclists' facilities must be based on the number of users on site and the facilities must located in an
accessible location in close proximity to the storage spaces.
Evidence

Definitions

Other Building transport type A: A building predominantly occupied by staff or employees with occasional
business related visitors. This includes hotels.
Other Building transport type B: A building occupied by a number of core staff or employees with a larger
number of consistently frequent visitors or users (either resident or non-resident). This includes secure
accommodations.
Other Building transport type C: As type B, but building transport types specifically required to be located rurally
as a result of their function, i.e. buildings which would never be located within an urban area, e.g. a National Park
ccxliv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
visitor centre (see definition of rural and rural location sensitive buildings location).
Compliant cycle storage spaces

Compliant cycle storage spaces are defined as those that meet the following:
1. Cycles can be secured within spaces in racks with overhead covering. The cycle racks are set in or fixed to
a permanent structure (building or hardstanding) or alternatively may be located in a locked structure
fixed to, or part of, a permanent structure with appropriate surveillance.
2. The distance between each cycle rack, and the cycle racks and other obstructions, e.g. a wall, allows
appropriate access to the cycle storage space for easy storage and access to bikes.
3. The storage facility or entrance to the facility is in a prominent site location that is visible to potential users
from either an occupied building or a main access to a building.
4. The cycle storage facility has adequate lighting; demonstrated by meeting the lighting criteria in BREEAM
issue Hea 01 Visual comfort on page lxxxix. The lighting must be controlled to avoid out-of-hours use
and operation during daylight hours, where there is sufficient daylight in or around the facility.
Compliant changing facilities

Compliant changing facilities are defined as those that meet the following:
1. Appropriately sized for the number of users. The assessor uses their judgment on whether the changing
area is appropriately sized given the number of cycle storage spaces or showers provided.
2. Changing areas include adequate space and facilities to hang or store clothing and equipment while
changing or showering, e.g. bench seat or hooks.
3. Toilet or shower cubicles cannot be counted as changing facilities.
Compliant lockers
Compliant lockers are defined as those that meet the following:
1. The number of lockers is at least equal to the number of cycle spaces required.
2. Lockers are in or adjacent to compliant changing rooms, where provided.
3. The lockers are sized appropriately for the storage of a cyclist's equipment.
Compliant drying spaces

A compliant drying space is defined as a space that is specifically designed and designated with adequate
heating and ventilation for the drying of wet clothes. A plant room, for example, is not a compliant drying space.
Compliant showers
Compliant showers are defined as those that meet the following:
1. Provision of one shower for every 10 cycle storage spaces, subject to a minimum provision of one
shower.
2. Any building providing eight showers or more complies regardless of the number of cycle storage
spaces provided.
3. Both male and female users must be catered for either separate showers within shared gender-specific
facilities (required provision split 50-50) or single shower cubicles and changing space for mixed use.
4. The showers do not need to be dedicated to cyclists and can be those shared with other users or uses.
Small retail type

Includes smaller retail units or shops that may form part of a wider retail or business district, city or town centre or
mixed use sites, and typically do not have the scope to provide their own dedicated cyclists' facilities.
Large retail type

Includes large retail developments, such as shopping centres, retail parks and supermarkets, which typically will
have covered or uncovered parking, or external areas, and therefore scope to provide their own dedicated cyclist
facilities.
Tra 03 Alternative modes of transport ccxlv
Rural location

therefore locating the building at an alternative site which could have higher public transport accessibility levels, i.e.
within an urbanised area, is unfeasible. The following building types are examples of those that may fall into this
category.

5. GP surgery
None.
ccxlvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity
Up to 2 Not applicable Up to 2 Up to 2
Aim
To avoid excessive use of private cars by limiting car parking provision, thereby helping to reduce transport-related
emissions and traffic congestion associated with the building’s operation.
Value
– Reduced land requirements and
associated costs
– Improved safety and security around the
building or site
– Discourages reliance on the private car for
commuters by restricting the number of car
parking spaces provided
– Encourages the use of public transport for
sites located in the proximity of transport
links
– Reduces transport-related energy use,
congestion, noise pollution, carbon emissions
and traffic-related issues
– Encourages active travel, improving people’s
health
Context
Cities around the world are actively looking at ways of improving quality of life, air quality, congestion, etc. The use
of private cars is a key area that is being looked at. This is resulting in the consideration of increasingly stringent
policies relating to controls over private car use and the dependency on them. Future asset value is likely to be
impacted by the availability of alternative means of transport and their viability is dependent on the ease of private
car use. Reducing car parking provision is a key area being considered.
Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity ccxlvii
While limiting car park provision for a development benefits building users’ health, on a larger scale it frees up space
for public space improvements and on-site amenity space with consequent benefits to occupant health, wellbeing
and satisfaction. It also challenges the perception that there is never enough parking, when the reality is different.
Assessment scope

Applicable Assessment criteria All Not applicable All All

None
None
ccxlviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Assessment criteria
Up to two credits - Car parking capacity

1. Determine the Accessibility Index (AI) in accordance with BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility
on page ccxxiii), so that the building’s car parking capacity relates to the development's accessibility to the
public transport network.
2. Compare the building’s car parking capacity to the maximum car parking capacity benchmarks in Table 38
and award the relevant number of BREEAM credits.
Table 38 Credits available in Tra04. Maximum car parking capacity for different building types
Criteria Credits
Building's Accessibility Index <4 ≥4<8 ≥8
Building Type Max. parking capacity

1 space per x building users, where x is:
Office, industrial, student residences and key 3 4 5 1
worker accommodation 4 5 6 2
Sheltered housing, care homes and 4 5 6 1
supported living facility 5 6 7 2
Further and higher education 15 20 25 1
20 25 30 2
Other Building – Transport type 1 3 4 5 1
4 5 6 2
Other Building – MOD (where building users 2 3 4 1
are ‘living-out personnel’) 3 4 5 2
For the building types listed below, the maximum number of parking spaces provided must not be greater
than the total of the following:
Healthcare - Hospitals (Acute, Specialist, One parking space for every four staff, plus; 1
teaching, mental health) One parking space for every four beds, plus
Two parking spaces for each consulting,
examination, treatment, therapy room and
A&E cubicle.
Healthcare - GP surgery, health centre, One parking space for every two medical staff, 1
community hospital plus;
One parking space for every three non-
medical staff, plus;
Two parking spaces for each consulting,
examination, treatment, therapy room and
A&E cubicle.
Preschool, schools, sixth form, Retail, Prison, Issue not assessed for these building types
Court, Other Building–Transport type 2,
Other Building–Transport type 3, Other
Building–Transport hubs
Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity ccxlix
Compliance notes
Methodology
Exclusions
Parking spaces set aside for the following building users can be excluded provided these spaces are dedicated for
that use, i.e. sized accordingly with the appropriate signage or markings:
1. Disabled
2. Parent and baby
3. Motorbike
4. Car share
5. Operational
In the case of excluding car share spaces, the future building occupier will need to confirm they have an enforceable
car share policy.
Parking shared with other buildings

Where the assessed building forms part of a wider site, e.g. campus, business park, hospital, and parking is not
designated to individual buildings, then the assessor has two options:
1. Assess compliance on the basis of parking capacity for the whole development, accounting for all existing
and new users and parking spaces.
2. Assess compliance using a pro-rata of parking capacity to building users, e.g. if the assessed building is
occupied by 20% of the development’s total occupants, then attribute 20% of the total parking spaces to
the assessed building for the purpose of the assessment.
Evidence

All Where relevant, a completed copy of Tra As per interim design stage.
01 calculator confirming the building's
Accessibility Index.
ccl SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Definitions

Higher Education transport type 1: H.E. buildings located on a campus where less than 25% of students are
Higher Education transport type 2: H.E. buildings located on a campus where 25% or more of the students are
Other Building transport type 1: A building predominantly occupied by staff or employees with occasional
business related visitors.
Other Building transport type 2: A building occupied by a number of core staff or employees with a larger
number of consistently frequent visitors or users (either resident or non-resident).
Other Building transport type 3: As type 2, but building types specifically required to be located rurally as a result
of its function, i.e. a building which would never be located within an urban area, e.g. a National Park visitor centre
(see definition of rural and rural location sensitive buildings location).
Accessibility index (AI)

Building users
Where the term building users is referenced in this BREEAM issue it refers to the following, where relevant to the
building type:
1. Staff (who will work within the building).

2. Students (who will access the building for work or study during a typical academic term time or semester
day).
3. Residents (who will reside permanently or for a short period of time in the building).
If known, or can be reasonably estimated, project specific occupancy figures should be used. If this is not
possible, for example where the building is a speculative project, use the default occupancy rates given in Table
39 to determine the number of users. Where the number of building users is variable, provision of parking spaces
should be based on the maximum number of building users likely to be using the building at any time during a
typical day.
Care homes
For the purpose of BREEAM, care homes are defined as those buildings which are legally required to register with
the Commission for Social Care Inspection by the Care Standards Act, 2000.
Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity ccli
MOD Living-out personnel

This refers to staff that work in the assessed building and are not residents on the MOD site where the assessed
building is located.
Operational parking spaces

Parking spaces dedicated to vehicles which are used as part of the building's operation. For example, delivery
vehicles or maintenance vehicles, which are required to travel off site, in connection with the building's operations.
Rural location

therefore locating the building at an alternative site which could have higher public transport accessibility levels, i.e.
within an urbanised area, is unfeasible. The following building types are examples of those that may fall into this
category.

5. GP surgery
Sheltered housing
Sheltered housing falls within Class C3 of the Town and Country Planning (Use Classes) Order 1987, and can be
defined as self-contained accommodation, usually with an emergency alarm system, communal facilities and a
resident warden. This includes all sheltered housing defined as 'Category 1, 2, 2.5 and 3' in accordance with the
1969 Ministry of Housing and Local Government Circular 82/69 and Local Authority Guidelines.
Table 39 Default occupancy rates by building type

Building type and function area Occupant Building type and function area Occupant density
density
Business Secure residential institution
Office area (including reception 0.111 Cell 0.190
areas)
Food preparation area 0.108 Reception 0.121
cclii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
density
(staffed)
Small workshop or category lab 0.068 Hall, lecture theatre or 0.183
space assembly area
Industrial Eating and drinking area 0.141
Food preparation area 0.213 Workshop - small-scale 0.048
Industrial process area 0.022 Laundry 0.086
Laboratory 0.107 Classroom 0.183
Reception 0.110 Office and consulting areas 0.093
Warehouse storage 0.009 Food preparation area 0.111
Generic office area 0.108 Libraries, museums, galleries
Hospitals, care homes Reception 0.095
Reception 0.152 Food preparation area 0.176
Post mortem facility 0.050 Hall, lecture theatre or 0.150
assembly area
Food preparation area 0.161 Laboratory 0.098
Physiotherapy studio 0.200 Workshop - small-scale 0.062
Bedroom unit 0.105 Display and public areas 0.150
Laundry 0.117 Generic office area 0.099
24-hours consulting or 0.000 General assembly and leisure, clubs, theatres
treatment areas
Assembly areas or halls 1.000 Dry sports hall 0.047
Hydrotherapy pool hall 0.100 Fitness studio 0.132
Industrial process area 0.124 Fitness suite or gym 0.170
Laboratory 0.080 Food preparation area 0.131
Operating theatre 0.125 Hall, lecture theatre or 0.175
assembly area
Classroom 1.000 Auditoria 0.341
Diagnostic imaging 0.100 Ice rink 0.225
Generic ward 0.175 Performance area (stage) 0.049
Office and consulting areas 0.195 Public circulation areas 0.241
Primary healthcare Reception 0.126
Reception 0.11 Sales area - general 0.102
Office and consulting areas 0.082 Swimming pool 0.163
Further and higher education Workshop - small-scale 0.067
Residents bedroom 0.120 Generic office area 0.116
Classroom 0.203 Display area 0.001
Food preparation area 0.096 Community or day centres
Hall, lecture theatre or 0.202 Reception 0.108
assembly area
Computer laboratory 0.231 Dry sports hall 0.047
Laboratory 0.106 Food preparation area 0.143
Laundry 0.105 Workshop - small scale 0.064
Reception 0.112 Hall, lecture theatre or 0.169
assembly area
Workshop - small scale 0.068 Office and consulting areas 0.106
Office and consulting areas 0.098 Other spaces and buildings
Hotels Data centre 0.096
Bedroom 0.094 Server room 0.096
Food preparation area 0.108 Heavy plant room 0.096
Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity ccliii
density
Reception 0.105
Generic office area 0.106
Default occupancy rates

1. The net floor area for each function must be multiplied by the equivalent occupant density to determine an
overall occupancy for the function area.
2. Not all potential building areas are listed, only those required to reflect estimated building occupancy for
the building type. For example, an office building may have a canteen but it will be the staff that
predominantly uses the canteen. The office staff numbers will be estimated using the default occupancy
rate for the office area; therefore to include the canteen would result in double counting of occupancy.
3. If a building type is not listed, occupancy rates for a similar building type or function area may be used.
4. The above occupancy rates have been sourced from the activity database of the Simplified Building Energy
Model.
ccliv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Tra 05 Travel plan
1 Not applicable 1 1
Aim
To minimise the environmental, economic and social impacts of transport use in operation through careful design
and the preparation of information to aid the ongoing management of the building and its occupants.
Value
– Promotes the implementation of travel
solutions that are relevant to the challenges
and opportunities of a specific site
– Raise awareness, understanding and
accessibility of travel options, allowing for
affordable access to services
– Encourages more sustainable modes of
transport and movement of people and
goods to and around the site
– Allows designers to take account of the
travel needs of future occupants, thus
allowing for better management in
operation
– Reduced congestion and improved safety of
the site and local roads
– Increased attractiveness of the site to
potential users
Context
The National Planning Practice Guidance indicates that travel plans should be considered in parallel to development
proposals and that they should be integrated into the design of a new site.
Tra 05 Travel plan cclv
Based on evidence of the anticipated transport impacts of new developments, Travel Plans are a long-term
management strategy for implementing the mitigating measures addressed by the Transport Assessments or
Statements.
While they are not meant to unrealistically penalise drivers and impact negatively on the local street network, they
intend to promote sustainable and active travel. Their purpose is to deliver transport and transport-related
benefits to the development itself but also to the wider community(164). As they include a package of actions
designed to address the needs of the users in that local area, effective but unpopular solutions, such as parking
restrictions, can be combined with popular but expensive solutions, such as bus subsidies, to ensure that the
negative impacts are neutralised by the benefits.
The transport tools proposed by the Travel Plan are user-focused and ensure the increase and improvement of
travel choices to the users, cost savings and improved company image and staff health and wellbeing.
Assessment scope

Applicable Assessment criteria All Not applicable All All

1.0 End occupier is not known
A travel plan is still required even if the end user or occupier is not known, albeit that it may only be
an interim travel plan or one that broadly addresses all the issues covered in the assessment criteria.
The developer must confirm that they will hand over a copy of the travel plan to the building’s future
tenants or owner-occupier, so that it may inform their own travel plan or strategy.
None
cclvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Tra 05 Travel plan
Assessment criteria
One credit
1 Develop a travel plan during the feasibility and design stages.
2 Produce a site-specific travel assessment or statement for the particular site covering, as a minimum:
2.a: Existing travel patterns and opinions of existing building or site users towards cycling and walking
identifying constraints and opportunities , if relevant.
2.b: Travel patterns and transport impact of future building users
2.c: Current local environment for walkers and cyclists (accounting for visitors who may be accompanied by
young children).
2.d: Disabled access (accounting for varying levels of disability and visual impairment).
2.e: Public transport links serving the site.
2.f: Current facilities for cyclists.
3 Includes a package of measures in the travel plan to encourage the use of sustainable modes of transport and
movement of people and goods during the building's operation and use.
4 Involve the occupier, if known, in the development of the travel plan and confirm they will implement it post-
construction with in-use operational support from the building's management .
Compliance notes
Methodology
Travel assessment or statement

A travel assessment (also referred to as transport assessment) will be required where a proposed development is
likely to have significant transport and related environmental impacts. The study area for a transport assessment
related to a proposed development should be determined in discussions between the developer and appropriate
authorities. A transport statement is required where the proposed development is not likely to have a significant
transport impact. A transport statement is suitable to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM when the proposed
development is expected to generate relatively low numbers of trips or traffic flows, with minor transport impacts.
For further guidance refer to:Transport evidence bases in plan making and decision taking
Tra 05 Travel plan cclvii
Travel plan measures

The following measures could be considered as part of the travel plan for development:
– Providing parking priority spaces for car sharers

– Providing dedicated and convenient cycle storage and changing facilities
– Lighting, landscaping and shelter to make pedestrian and public transport waiting areas pleasant
– Negotiating improved bus services, i.e. altering bus routes or offering discounts
– Restricting or charging for car parking
– Criteria for lobby areas where information about public transport or car sharing can be made available.
– Pedestrian and cycle friendly (for all types of user regardless of the level of mobility or visual impairment) via the
provision of cycle lanes, safe crossing points, direct routes, appropriate tactile surfaces, well-lit and signposted to
other amenities, public transport nodes and adjoining off-site pedestrian and cycle routes
– Providing suitable taxi drop-off or waiting areas
– Ensuring that rural buildings are located with appropriate transport access to ensure that they adequately serve
the local community (where procured to do so, e.g. community centre).
Evidence

Definitions
Travel plan
A travel plan is a strategy for managing all travel and transport within an organisation, principally to increase
choice and reduce reliance on the car by seeking to improve access to a site or development by sustainable
modes of transport. A travel plan contains both physical and behavioural measures to increase travel choices and
reduce reliance on single occupancy car travel.
Building users
Where the term 'building users' is used, this refers to the following, as appropriate to building type:
1. Staff (commuter journeys and business travel)

2. Pupils and students
3. Visitors
4. Patients
5. Customers
6. Community users
7. Personnel who make deliveries and collections to and from the development
8. Contractors or service providers, who regularly work at and access the building or development
9. Residents of multi-residential buildings.
cclviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
None.
Water cclix
Water
7% 4.5% 4% 2%
Summary
This category encourages sustainable water use in the operation of the building and its site. Issues in this section
focus on identifying means of reducing potable water consumption (internal and external) over the lifetime of the
building and minimising losses through leakage.
Wat 01 Water consumption min standards 5 credits
– Reducing the demand for potable water through the provision of efficient sanitary fittings, rainwater collection
and water recycling systems.
Wat 02 Water monitoring min standards 1 credit
– Specification of water meters to allow for management and monitoring of water use in the building. This
encourages reductions in water use by identifying areas of high usage and investigating potential causes.
Wat 03 Water leak detection 2 credits
– Reducing the unintended water consumption due to leaks by installing leak detection systems and flow control
devices.
Wat 04 Water efficient equipment 1 credit
– Reducing water consumption for non-domestic scale, non-sanitary water uses by specifying efficient systems
and improving the design efficiency of any water-using processes.
cclx SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Wat 01 Water consumption
Aim
To reduce the consumption of potable water for sanitary use in new buildings through the use of water efficient
components and water recycling systems.
Value
– Improving water efficiency and reducing
cost related to water consumption in use.
– Reducing potable water use so helping to
conserve stretched water reserves at times
of shortage.
– Reducing water industry greenhouse gas
emissions, pollution impacts and associated
costs on a national level.
Context
In England (165) the average person uses about 150 litres of water a day for a range of uses including sanitation,
where significant savings are possible. Given that climate projections forecast half as much rainfall in summer in the
South East of England by 2080, it is important to build water efficiency in to our building stock and minimise the
need for major infrastructure enhancements to meet these pressures as well as growing demands. Under these
scenarios and with the expected high population growth, unless adaptation interventions are made, deficits are
Wat 01 Water consumption cclxi
expected to be already widespread by the 2050s. The UK is expected to be in deficit by up to 16% of the total
water demand in the 2050s and of up to 29% in the 2080s leading to major impacts on cost and resource levels
(166).
Assessment scope

Applicable Assessment criteria All All All None
Assessment type specific notes None None see ref 1.0 and 1.1 see ref 1.2

1.0 Components to be included as a minimum:
– WCs
– wash-hand basin taps
– showers
– urinals
– kitchen taps: kitchenette
If the developer is not installing some of these, use the baseline values for any unknown
components.
All water-consuming components and greywater or rainwater systems specified and installed by
the developer are assessed.
Components not listed above and located within tenant areas that are not specified by the
developer, but will be specified by the tenant, do not need to be assessed.
In cases where the end client is known and they make a commitment to specify and install specific
water-consuming components, assess the issue based on the relevant information.
1.1 Where components are not specified and installed by the developer but by the tenant, the
minimum standard will not prevent the assessment from achieving a BREEAM rating.
1.2 Minimum standard is not applicable.
2.0 Healthcare Components in clinical areas may be omitted. Clinical areas refer to all areas with a
scrub-up trough, clinical sink or clinical basin. This is not an exhaustive list and guidance should always
be sought from the appropriate professional, to ascertain areas of exemption specific to infection
control and other considerations. Appropriate professionals could include a health authorities
infection control officer or a client infection control representative or equivalent.
Although exempt, HTM 07-04 (167) contains guidance on water savings from medical-related
activities. Furthermore, in some cases, the use of water efficient fittings and appliances may not be
appropriate to the needs of the patient, and inappropriate specification may adversely affect the
incidence and propagation of infections. In such instances, the assessor will need to confirm with
BRE Global whether components from the relevant building areas are exempt. The design team
should also consult NHS guidelines concerning appropriate selection of sanitary fittings and fixtures
and the control of Legionella.
cclxii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Wat 01 Waterconsumption
Assessment criteria
Up to five credits
1 Use the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator to assess the efficiency of the domestic water-consuming components.
2 Use the standard Wat 01 method (seeMethodology on the facing page) to compare the water consumption
(L/person/day) for the assessed building against a baseline performance. Award BREEAM credits based upon
Table 40 below. Where it is not possible to use the standard method, complete the assessment using the
alternative Wat 01 method (seeMethodology on the facing page).
Table 40 BREEAM Credits available for percentage improvement over baseline building water consumption
No. of BREEAM credits % improvement
1 12.5%
2 25%
3 40%
4 50%
5 55%
1 Exemplary performance credit 65%
For some building types an alternative approach to compliance must be used to award credits (for further
information please refer to Methodology on the facing page and the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator).
3 If a greywater or rainwater system (seeDefinitions on page cclxix) is specified, use its yield in L/person/day to
offsetpotable water demand from components.
4 If a greywater or rainwater system is specified,specify and install:
4.a: Greywater systems in compliance with BS 8525-1:2010 Greywater Systems - Part 1 Code of Practice(168).
4.b: Rainwater systems in compliance with BS 8515:2009+A1:2013 Rainwater Harvesting Systems - Code of
practice(169).
Additionally for Healthcare building types only:

5 The flushing control for each WC or urinal must be suitable for operation by patients with frail or infirm hands
or activated by electronic sensors (see).
Additionally for Prison building types only:

6 Sanitary components specified within a prison cell have a volume controller specified on the individual fittings
or water supply to each cell (see Definitions on page cclxix).

7 Achieve criteria 1 to 4 above (and if applicable 5 or 6 above).
8 The water consumption (L/person/day) for the assessed building achieves the 65% improvement described
as exemplary performance in Table 40 above.
Wat 01 Waterconsumption cclxiii
Compliance notes
Methodology
Calculation of water efficiency performance

A non-domestic building’s water efficient performance is determined using the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator.
Include the efficiency of the following domestic scale water-consuming components (where specified):
– WCs
– Urinals
– Taps (wash-hand basins and, where specified, kitchen taps and waste disposal unit)
– Showers
– Baths
– Dishwashers (domestic and commercial-sized)
– Washing machines (domestic and commercial or industrial sized).
The BREEAM Wat 01 calculator defines the building types and activity areas for which the above components must
be assessed.
Use one of the following methods to determine the building's water efficient performance:
– Standard approach for common building types
OR
– Alternative method for other building types
Each method is summarised below.
Standard Wat 01 method

This method uses the buildings actual component specification and default usage patterns for the building type
and its activity areas to determine water efficiency (measured in L/person/day and m³/person/yr) for a building. The
modelled output is compared with the output for a baseline component specification and the water demand
saving determined as a percentage improvement. The percentage improvement determines the number of
BREEAM credits achieved, see Table 40 on the previous page.
The baseline component specification is equivalent to the water efficiency of industry standard components (see
Table 42 on page cclxv), steered by the minimum levels required by the Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations
(170) and Part G of the Building Regulations(171). The BREEAM percentage improvement benchmarks are based on
progressively more efficient standards and product market availability for water-consuming components. For the
higher levels of performance, the specification of greywater and rainwater systems is required.
The standard approach is the default method for calculating the water efficiency of the assessed building. It is used
for most of the common building types, where usage data are available. For building types where usage data are
not available, the standard approach cannot be used, an alternative approach to compliance must be used
(described below). Refer to the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator for the building types which can currently be assessed
using the standard approach.
Alternative Wat 01 method

Where the standard approach cannot be used to determine the buildings water consumption (L/person/day) the
cclxiv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
assessment is completed on an elemental basis, as follows:
1. Use the list of applicable domestic scale water-consuming components and determine those that are
specified or present in the assessed building.
2. Use the actual specification for each component type to complete the 'Other building type calculator'
worksheet of the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator. Table 42 on the facing page defines the levels of
performance for each component type. The volumes quoted are maximum values for each level but the
greywater or rainwater system % is a minimum for the '% of WC or urinal flushing demand met using
recycled non-potable water’ .
3. Weightings applied in the calculator are:
a. building type specific weightings to each component level to reflect its ‘in-use’ consumption relative to
the other components present. A component with high ‘in-use’ water consumption has a higher
weighting than one with lower ‘in-use’ consumption and therefore makes a relatively larger contribution
to the building’s overall level of performance .
b. derived from data on actual water consumption per day from non-domestic buildings, sourced from
BNWAT22 (172). These are in the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator.
4. Based upon the performance level of each component type and the component weighting, the calculator
determines an overall level of performance and awards the relevant number of BREEAM credits, see Table
41 below:
Table 41 : BREEAM credits based on overall performance level.

Greywater and rainwater level achieved
- 4 5
Overall component level
Baseline 0 credits 1 credit 2 credits
Level 1 1 credit 2 credits 3 credits
Level 2 2 credits 3 credits 4 credits
Level 3 or 4 3 credits 4 credits 5 credits
Level 5 4 credits 5 credits 5 credits
1. An exemplary performance credit is awarded where the component specification achieves level 5 and >
95% of WC or urinal flushing demand is met using recycled non-potable water.
2. Achieving a specific overall component level does not necessarily mean that an equivalent number of
credits is awarded. The levels are not directly linked to the improvement percentages and the greywater
and rainwater levels achieved also have an influence.
3. Due to the use of the weightings, the overall component level achieved is not necessarily a whole number.
Where this is the case the methodology always rounds down to the nearest component level and
therefore BREEAM credits level, e.g. if the component specification achieved is 3.6 credits, the actual
number of credits awarded is 3 credits (the methodology does not round up to 4 credits because the
performance specification for 4 credits has not been achieved).
4. Where the assessed building development has multiple specifications for the same water-consuming
component type, the number of fittings and component level achieved for each specification is entered in
the 'Other building type calculator'. Using this information, the calculator determines the building’s
aggregated performance level for that component type.
While attempts have been made to align the benchmarking of both the standard and alternative methodologies,
performance is determined in different ways. The number of BREEAM credits awarded by each method could
differ for the same water component specification. This could lead to variation in the credits achieved when
applying BREEAM New Construction to a number of different building types that form a part of the same overall
development.
Component type
Table 42 outlines the consumption performance levels, by component type, used in BREEAM. These levels of
efficiency have been steered by a range of published sources of information(173) and reflect robust levels of
typical, good, best and exemplary practice.
Wat 01 Waterconsumption cclxv
Table 42 Water efficient consumption levels by component type

Component Performance levels (quoted numbers are minimum performance required to
achieve the level)
Base 1 2 3 4 5 Unit
WC 6 4.5 4 3.75 3.5 3 Effective flush volume (litres)
(seeDefinitions on
page cclxix)
wash-hand basin 10 8 6 5 4 3 litres/min
taps
Showers 12 10 8 6 5 3.50 litres/min
Baths 200 180 160 140 120 100 litres
Urinal (2 or more 7.50 6 3 1.50 0.75 0 litres/bowl/
urinals) hour
Urinal (1 urinal only) 10 8 4 2 1 0 litres/bowl/
hour
Greywater and 0% 0% 0% 25% 50% 75% % of WC or urinal flushing
rainwater system demand met using recycled
non-potable water
Kitchen tap: 10 8 7 6 5 5 litres/min
kitchenette
Kitchen taps: 10.30 9 8.30 7.30 6.30 6 litres/min
restaurant (pre-rinse
nozzles only)
Domestic sized 17 13 13 12 11 10 litres/cycle
dishwashers
Domestic sized 90 60 50 40 35 30 litres/use
washing machines
Waste disposal unit 17 17 0 0 0 0 litres/min
Commercial sized 8 7 6 5 4 3 litres/rack
dishwashers
Commercial or 14 12 10 7.50 5 4.50 litres/kg
industrial sized
washing machines
Specifying components for a building in accordance with the above levels might result in the corresponding
number of BREEAM credits being achieved. However, the component specifications above are akin to thresholds
between each level. Therefore caution should be exercised when defining a component specification for a BREEAM-
assessed building using exactly the same levels as the threshold levels. It is recommended that, where Wat 01
credits are targeted, the performance of a particular building’s component specification is verified using the
BREEAM Wat 01 calculator before committing to a particular specification and ordering or installing components.
This will provide greater assurance that the component specification achieves the targeted number of BREEAM
credits.
Water-consuming components - data requirements

For each component type, the appropriate data will need to be collected from manufacturers’ product
information to complete the assessment.
Table 43 Data requirements for each domestic component type

Domestic Data requirements
component
WCs Actual maximum or, where dual flush, effective flush volume in litres/use.
Urinals Flush volume in litres/use for single use flush urinals. For cistern fed systems, the flushing
frequency/hour and cistern capacity in litres.
cclxvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Taps Flow rate of each tap, at full flow rate in litres per minute measured at a dynamic
pressure:
For high pressure (Type 1) taps 3± 0.2 bar (0.3 ± 0.02 MPa)
OR
For low pressure (Type 2) taps 0.1 ± 0.02 bar (0.01 ± 0.002 MPa)
(BS EN 200:2008, sanitary tapware, single taps and combination taps for supply
systems of type 1 and 2. General technical specifications)
This includes any reductions achieved with flow restrictions.
Showers Flow rate of each shower at the outlet using cold water (T 30˚C), in litres per minute
measured at a dynamic pressure:
3 ± 0.2 bar (0.3 ± 0.02 MPa) for high pressure (Type 1) supply systems
OR
0.1 ± 0.05 bar (0.01 ± 0.005 MPa) for low pressure (Type 2) supply systems (BS EN
1112:2008 (174)).
Kitchen taps Maximum flow rate litres/minute.
Baths Capacity to overflow in litres. Taps on baths should not be included in the calculation, as
the water consumption from bath taps is taken into account in the use factor for baths.
The calculation of water consumption for baths assumes 40% of the capacity to the
overflow. This is to reflect that:
1. Users tend not to fill the bath to overflow; and
2. The displacement effect the user has on the actual volume of water required
for a bath.
Dishwasher Litres/cycle for domestic applications or appliances or litres/rack for commercial
applications or appliances.
Washing machine Litres/use for domestic applications (for a typical wash cycle) or appliances or litres/kg
for commercial applications or appliances, e.g. in hotels.
Waste disposal Flow rate in litres/minute.
unit
Unspecified water-consuming components

The methodology for awarding credits for water efficiency compares the buildings' modelled water consumption
performance against the performance of a baseline specification for the same component types. Therefore,
where a component type is not specified it is not accounted for in the methodology, i.e. the component is excluded
from both the proposed and baseline building. No benefit is gained in terms of BREEAM performance, by deciding
not to specify a particular component. However, the methodology will reflect the reduction in overall water
consumption (L/person/day) for the building, as a result of not specifying a particular component.
Buildings with greywater or rainwater systems

The following information is required where a greywater or rainwater system is specified:
Rainwater: In accordance with BS 8515 (175) ‘intermediate approach’:
1. Collection area (m²)

2. Yield co-efficient (%)
3. Hydraulic filter efficiency (%)
4. Rainfall (average mm/year).
Rainwater: In accordance with BS 8515 ‘detailed approach’:
1. Daily rainfall collection (litres)
Greywater: in accordance with BS 8525-1 (176):
1. Manufacturer or system designer details.

2. The percentage volume of waste water collected (and reused) from the following (where relevant): wash-
hand basins, showers, kitchen basins, dishwashers, baths, washing machines and sources of waste water
from non-domestic components.
Wat 01 Waterconsumption cclxvii
Where greywater or rainwater systems are specified, a minimum level of component efficiency must be achieved to
award 4 or 5 BREEAM credits and the exemplary level credit. This is to avoid awarding a higher number of BREEAM
credits where performance from less efficient fittings is offset by the specification of a greywater or rainwater
collection system.
The intention behind this, is to ensure demand reduction is prioritised before offsetting consumption. Where a
greywater or rainwater system is specified or installed, the component specification must achieve at least a 25%
percentage reduction in water consumption (over the baseline specification) equivalent to 2 credits. Where this level
is achieved, the total water demand met by greywater or rainwater sources can contribute to the overall
percentage improvement required to achieve BREEAM credits. If this minimum is not achieved, the percentage of
greywater or rainwater allowable will be equivalent to the percentage improvement in water consumption
achieved for the component specification, i.e. percentage improvement on baseline performance.
For example, if a 20% improvement only is achieved, and therefore the building does not meet the 25%
requirement, only 20% of the water demand met via greywater or rainwater sources can be used to offset water
consumption from the micro-components. This minimum requirement does not apply where only 1, 2 or 3 credits
are sought or where no greywater or rainwater system is specified, i.e. percentage improvement is based solely on
the water efficiency of the micro-component specification.
BRE Global may allow some exemptions to this rule in instances where a particular fitting type requires a high flow
rate due to specialised end user requirements, and its specification prevents compliance with the 25%
improvement.
Buildings with a mixture of different functional areas

For the majority of buildings using the standard Wat 01 method, the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator defines the building
type and range of different water-consuming activity areas within that building. For example, a retail development
may contain sales area and goods storage or an office building may include a canteen and gym. However, where
carrying out a single assessment of a building or development consisting of a diverse mix of activity areas or
building types, each one of which can be assessed separately within the calculator, the following applies:
Determine the building’s total water consumption performance by carrying out separate assessments for each
relevant activity area or building type. On completion of all the individual assessments, the assessor will need to
determine the percentage improvement as follows:
Where greywater or rainwater systems are specified, the assessor should take care to avoid unintended double
counting of the yield from such systems and use it to offset demand for each activity area or building type.
No fittings present
Where a project under assessment contains none of the specified components, identify in the assessment the
facilities most likely to be used by the occupants and visitors of the assessed building (e.g. specific facilities provided
in a nearby accessible building). Conduct the calculations based on the performance specification of the
components in those nearby facilities.
This rule also applies where a project under assessment consists solely of an extension to an existing building, i.e.
where the extended building contains no new sanitary facilities because there are facilities present within the
existing building.
cclxviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Water consumption calculation for push and automatic shut-off taps

For input into the Wat 01 calculator, calculate the water consumption of push and automatic shut-off taps using
the following steps:
Step 1: Calculate the water consumption per person per use.
If a tap runs for less than 20 seconds per activation, assume it will be activated twice per person for the timed
duration. For example, for a tap with a flow rate of 9 litres/min and a 15 second usage duration, the water
consumed per person would be: 9 x 15/60 x 2 = 4.5 litres/min.
If a tap runs for 20 seconds or more per activation, assume one activation per person for the timed duration. For
example, for a tap with a flow rate of 9 litres/min and a 20 second usage duration, the water consumed per
person would be: 9 x 20/60 x 1 = 3 litres/min.
Step 2: Multiply the water consumption figure per person by 1.5 and enter this figure into the calculator tool.
Multiplying by 1.5 adjusts the consumption figure to compensate for the typical non-timed tap use of 40 seconds
that has already been taken into account in the tool. Taking the first example above, if we multiply 4.5 litres/min by
1.5 we get 6.75 litres/min. When this is used in the tool as the flow rate specification, the consumption is 4.57
L/person/day which more closely reflects the true level of water consumption for the push tap.
Flow rates for click taps present

The flow rate for click taps shall be taken as the maximum flow rate, as quoted by the manufacturer, of the lower
range before the water break or ‘click’.
Fixed water use

The BREEAM water efficiency calculation includes an allowance for fixed water use. This includes water consumption
for vessel filling (for building users drinking water), cleaning in kitchens and food preparation in buildings with a
catering facility. Fixed uses are included to provide greater accuracy in the reporting of the building’s overall
estimated water consumption. As these uses are fixed for both actual and baseline building models, their totals do
not influence the achievement of BREEAM credits.
Other permissible component demand for non-potable water

This BREEAM issue focuses on the performance of the building's permanent domestic scale water-consuming
components. Where a grey water or rainwater system is specified, the yield from the system should be prioritised
for such uses, i.e. WC or urinal flushing. However, where the building demonstrates that it has other consistent (i.e.
daily) and equivalent levels of non-potable water demand, and such demands are intrinsic to the building’s
operation, then it is permissible for the demand from these non-domestic uses to be counted, i.e. the demand for
rainwater or greywater yield from such systems or components can be used as well as, or instead of non-potable
water demand from the building's WC or urinal components. Examples of consistent and intrinsic demands could
include laundry use in hotels and multi-residential developments or horticultural uses in garden centres, botanical
gardens and golf courses. Demand for general landscaping and ornamental planting irrigation are not considered
as equivalent or intrinsic by BREEAM.
Other permissible sources of non-potable water

The methodology allows for the collection and recycling of non-potable water from the relevant components
listed in the criteria, i.e. taps, showers, baths and dishwashers or washing machines. In addition, where non-potable
water is collected from a non-domestic component or source that is intrinsic to the building, then the amount
collected can be accounted for in the methodology. This could include for example wastewater from active
hygiene flushing, i.e. a regular hygiene flushing programme to minimise poor water quality in a potable cold or hot
water system. In order for the method to account for this total, the design team needs to confirm to the assessor
the yield from the component or system (in litres) and the frequency of that yield (in days), i.e. if once a week, the
frequency would be seven days.
Wat 01 Waterconsumption cclxix
Evidence

1 A completed copy of the BREEAM Wat 01 As per interim design stage
calculator
1 Documentary evidence supporting the As per interim design stage
data used to complete the calculator
tool.
Definitions
BREEAM Wat 01 calculator for New Non-Domestic Buildings

The BREEAM Wat 01 calculator is a tool for the assessment of water efficiency in most common types of new
non-domestic buildings. The calculator assesses the contribution that each domestic scale water-consuming
component (as listed in the criteria) has on the building's total water consumption. Please note, the calculator is a
compliance tool and not a design tool for water demand and drainage systems. The tool uses default usage and
occupancy rates to provide a benchmark of the typical consumption based on the specified fittings (in
L/person/day andm³/person/year) and their impact on the building's overall water efficiency. Due to the impacts
and differences of actual user behaviour and occupancy rates, the results of the method will not reflect directly
the actual water use during building operation. The results from the methodology should, therefore, not be used
for the purpose of comparison with or prediction of actual water consumption from a non-domestic building.
Clinical areas
Domestic scale water-consuming components

Domestic scale components include kitchen taps, wash-hand basin taps, baths, showers and dishwashers, WCs,
urinals, washing machines and waste disposal units. These components might consume potable or non-potable
water.
Water fittings used for a process related function, e.g. laboratory or classroom taps, scrub-up taps, cleaners’
sinks etc., should be excluded from the assessment of water consumption for sanitary use.
Effective flush volume

The effective flush volume of a single flush WC is the volume of water used for one flush. The effective flush
volume of a dual flush WC is the ratio of full flush to reduced flush. This is taken to be one full flush for every three
reduced flushes for non-domestic buildings and one full flush for every two reduced flushes in domestic
(residential) buildings or areas. The effective flush volume can therefore be calculated as follows, using a 6/4 litre
dual flush volume WC as an example:
cclxx SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
– Non-domestic: {(6 litre x 1) + (4 litre x 3)}/4 = 4.5 litre effective flushing volume (for a 6/4 dual flush WC)
– Domestic: {(6 litre x 1) + (4 litre x 2)}/3 = 4.67 litre effective flushing volume (for a 6/4 dual flush WC)
The different ratio between non-domestic and domestic buildings reflects the different patterns of user
behaviour between these building types.
Where buildings have both, domestic and non-domestic function areas, conduct the calculations accordingly for
the WCs specified in the relevant spaces. For example, in a hotel building, for WCs in hotel rooms use the
'domestic' effective flush volume calculation and for WCs in staff areas use the 'non-domestic' calculation.
Greywater recycling
The appropriate collection, treatment and storage of domestic wastewater (which is defined as that discharged
from kitchens, baths or showers, laundry rooms and similar) to meet a non-potable water demand in the
building, e.g. WC flushing, or other permissible non-potable use on the site of the assessed building.
Potable water
Water suitable for human consumption that meets the requirements of Section 67 (Standards of
Wholesomeness) of the Water Industry Act 1991 (177) is referred to as 'wholesome water'.
Non-potable water
Any water other than potable water, also referred to as unwholesome water (BS 8525).
Rainwater recycling
The appropriate collection and storage of rainwater run-off from hard outdoor surfaces to meet a non-potable
water demand in the building, e.g. WC flushing, or other permissible non-potable use on the site of the assessed
building.
Volume controller
An automatic control device used to turn off the water supply once the maximum preset volume is reached
within a defined period.
European Water Label Scheme: Water efficiency label

The European Water Label is a scheme initiated by bathroom manufacturers across the globe and it provides a
database of bathroom products of different levels of water efficiency. It includes products by multiple European
bathroom manufacturers and can help project teams identify products appropriate for their specifications.
Useful guidance
The following list of documents may be useful:
– BRE Global. SD129: Certification and Listing of Low Flush WC appliances. 2008.
– BS 6465-3:2006. Sanitary installations. Code of practice for the selection, installation and maintenance of
sanitary and associated appliances. BSI; 2006.
– Communities and Local Government. Waterwise: Water Efficiency Calculator for New Dwellings [Internet]. 2009.
Available from: www.waterwise.org.uk
– Entec UK Limited. BD 2683: Assessing the costs and benefits of improvements to the water efficiency of new
non-household buildings - Final research report. Department for Communities and Local Government; 2010.
– Environment Agency. Conserving water in buildings, a practical guide. 2007.
Wat 01 Waterconsumption cclxxi
– Market Transformation Programme. BNWAT07: Baths - water efficiency performance tests (version 2.0). 2007.
– Market Transformation Programme. BNWAT23: Reliability of information on water consumption of appliances
(version 1). 2007.
– Market Transformation Programme. Sustainable Products 2006: Policy Analysis and Projections. Defra; 2006.
– Waggett R, Arotsky C. CIRIA W10 Key Performance Indicators for water use in hotels. CIRIA; 2006.
– Waggett R, Arotsky C. CIRIA W11 Key Performance Indicators for water use in offices. CIRIA; 2006.
– Water UK. Waste macerators - the impact on sewers: 2009.
– BRE Global. SD175: Certification and Listing of Water Efficient Baths. 2008.
– Water efficient product labelling scheme: www.water-efficiencylabel.org.uk
cclxxii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Wat 02 Water monitoring
1 1 1 1
Aim
To reduce the consumption of potable water in new buildings through the effective management and monitoring
of water consumption.
Value
– Increasing awareness of water usage
within the building.
– Identifying and monitoring large water uses
and changed consumption levels to improve
management and maintenance as well as to
encourage reductions in unnecessary
consumption.
– Reducing costs related to water
consumption.
– Managing water demand for different
building areas and uses.
– Reducing the need for large scale increases in
water infrastructure in the future which are
likely to increase costs over time as well as
impact on our rural and urban landscapes
and communities.
Context
Due to our increasing population densities and relatively high levels of water consumption, much of the UK is at risk
of water shortages which are likely to increase over time as rainfall patterns change as a result of a changing
climate. Reducing water consumption in the UK is, therefore, crucial.
Wat 02 Water monitoring cclxxiii
Sub-metering water consumption means that water consumption can be better accounted for. Large water
consumers can be identified with the aim to encourage the reduction of water use where practical. Moreover,
changes in consumption can be identified and dealt with as appropriate, minimising risks of systems failures which
can have costly and disruptive consequences.
Assessment scope

Applicable Assessment criteria All All All 1 and 3–5
Assessment type specific notes None None see ref 1.0 and 1.1 see ref 1.2

1.0 Demonstrate compliance with criterion2for water-consuming plant or building areas identifiable
by the developer. Do not assess water-consuming plant or building areas to be added or installed
by the tenant. When the developer installs no water-consuming plants, the credit is awarded based
on the rest of the criteria.
1.1 Minimum standard is applicable, however the assessor may, for speculative assessments, subject
to their justification and evidence from the design team, seek for this to be reviewed by BRE Global.
1.2 Minimum standard is not applicable
2.0 For healthcare buildings and sites with multiple departments, e.g. large health centres or acute
hospitals, fit separate sub-meters on the supply to the following areas where present:
– Staff and public areas
– Clinical areas and wards
– Letting areas: on the water supply to each tenant unit
– Laundries
– Main production kitchen
– Hydrotherapy pools
– Laboratories
– Central sterile supply department (CSSD), hospital sterilisation and disinfection unit (HSDU),
pathology, pharmacy, mortuary and any other major process water use
– Supplementary supply of water from a cold water tank.
cclxxiv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Assessment criteria
One credit
1 Specify a water meter on the mains water supply to each building. This includes instances where water is
supplied via a borehole or other private source.
2 For water-consuming plant or building areas consuming 10% or more of the building’s total water demand:
2.a: fit easily accessible sub-meters
OR
2.b: install water monitoring equipment integral to the plant or area.
3 For each meter (main and sub):
3.a: install a pulsed or other open protocol communication output
AND
3.b: connect it to an appropriate utility monitoring and management system, e.g. a building management
system (BMS), for the monitoring of water consumption. If there is no BMS system in operation at Post-
Construction stage, award credits provided that the system used enables connection when the BMS
becomes operational.
4 In buildings with swimming pools, fit separate sub-meters on the water supply of the swimming pool and its
associated changing facilities (toilets, showers etc.) irrespective of their water consumption levels.
5 In buildings containing laboratories, fit a separate water meter on the water supply to any process or cooling
loop for ‘plumbed-in’ laboratory process equipment, irrespective of their water consumption levels.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Sites with multiple units or buildings.

See criterion 2 above.
On sites with multiple units or buildings, e.g. shopping centres, industrial units, retail parks etc. fit separate sub
meters on the water supply to the following areas (where present):
– Each individual unit supplied with water

– Common areas (covering the supply to toilet blocks)
Wat 02 Water monitoring cclxxv
– Service areas (covering the supply to outlets within storage, delivery, waste disposal areas etc.)
– Ancillary or separate buildings to the main development with water supply.
No water supply to the building or unit - Extensions to existing buildings.

See criterion 2.a on the previous page
If no new water supply is installed, identify in the assessment the facilities most likely to be used by the occupants
and visitors of the assessed building (e.g. specific facilities provided in a nearby accessible building). In this case,
provide the following in this building:
1. A water meter for the mains water supply

2. Sub-meters for large water-consuming plant or facilities, e.g. evaporative cooling, swimming pool etc.
(where present).
The meters provided must have a pulsed output or connection to existing BMS in accordance with the assessment
criteria.
No additional monitoring benefit from sub-metering.

See criterion 2 on the previous page.
Where the assessor confirms there is no additional monitoring benefit resulting from the installation of sub-meters,
the requirement does not apply in the following cases:
– The building has only one or two small sources of water demand (e.g. an office with sanitary fittings and a small
kitchen).
– The building has two sources of water demand, one significantly larger than the other, and the water
consumption for the larger demand is likely to mask the smaller one.
Evidence

Definitions
Clinical areas
Meter outputs
Examples include pulsed outputs and other open protocol communication outputs, such as Modbus.
Patient areas
cclxxvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Staff areas
Areas of the building used mainly by staff (e.g. offices, meeting rooms, staff rooms) and medical areas where
patients are admitted but that do not require restricted environmental conditions (e.g. consulting rooms,
physiotherapy, etc.).
Utility monitoring and management system

Examples include automatic meter reading systems and building energy management systems. Automatic
monitoring and targeting is an example of a management tool that includes automatic meter reading and data
management.
None
Wat 03 Water leak detection cclxxvii
Wat 03 Water leak detection
2 2 2 2
Aim
To reduce the consumption of potable water in new buildings through minimising wastage due to water leaks.
Value
– Reducing potable water wastage
associated with leaks.
– Minimising damage, costs and disruption
arising from water leaks.
consumption.
Context
Water leakage within customers’ properties represents 6% of the total public water supply in England and Wales
(178). This is equivalent to 25% of the total water leakage, with the rest being attributed to water distribution
systems of the supply companies. Water leaks in building systems are responsible for major damage to property
resulting in major disruption and costs. It is, therefore, important to ensure that water leaks are detected and
controlled on a building level as early as possible.
cclxxviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Assessment scope

Applicable Assessment criteria All All All 1–2
Assessment type specific notes None see ref 1.0 and 1.1 see ref 1.2 None

1.0 As an alternative to criteria 1 and 2, install automatic excess flow valves at relevant locations to
protect property from damage caused by leaking pipes or tanks.
1.1 An automatic excess flow valve acts as a flow switch (‘fuse’) to automatically stop the flow of water
and prevent uncontrolled release when the flow of water exceeds a predetermined rate (such as
may occur in the event of failure of water supply pipes and tanks).
1.2 Assess the water supplies to WC areas or facilities as per criterion 3 regardless of whether the WC
areas or facilities are fitted out or not.
2.0 Healthcare this issue does not apply to toilet facilities in clinical areas
2.1 Multi-residential and guest accommodation Flow control devices in WC areas or facilities are not
required for ensuite facilities in residential areas, e.g. ensuite in individual bedrooms, a single
bathroom for several individual bedrooms in halls of residence, key worker accommodation or
sheltered accommodation. Occupants of this type of long-term residential accommodation have a
sense of ownership and would identify and report a potential leak. Where only ensuite facilities are
provided, the credit is filtered out of the assessment. However, the credit applies to buildings with
guest bedrooms with ensuite facilities, e.g. hotel rooms, and communal WC areas or facilities, e.g.
communal WC facilities in hotels, hostels and care homes.
2.2 For Short term stay residential institutions such as hotels, compliance with criterion 3 for WC
facilities in hotel rooms can be achieved through providing the required flow control devices to
groups of 10 rooms, rather than to each individual room.
Wat 03 Water leak detection cclxxix
Assessment criteria
One credit - Leak detection system

1 Install a leak detection system capable of detecting a major water leak:
1.a: On the utilities water supply within the buildings, to detect any major leaks within the buildings.
AND
1.b: Between the buildings and the utilities water supply, to detect any major leaks between the utilities supply
and the buildings under assessment.
2 The leak detection system is:
2.a: A permanent automated water leak detection system that alerts the building occupants to the leak OR an
inbuilt automated diagnostic procedure for detecting leaks.
2.b: Activated when the flow of water passing through the water meter or data logger is at a flow rate above
a pre-set maximum for a pre-set period of time. This usually involves installing a system which detects
higher than normal flow rates at meters or sub-meters. It does not necessarily require a system that
directly detects water leakage along part or the whole length of the water supply system.
2.c: Able to identify different flow and therefore leakage rates, e.g. continuous, high or low level, over set time
periods. Although high and low level leakage rates are not specified, the leak detection equipment
installed must have the flexibility to distinguish between different flow rates to enable it to be
programmed to suit the building type and owner's or occupier's usage patterns.
2.d: Programmable to suit the owner's or occupier's’ water consumption criteria.
2.e: Where applicable, designed to avoid false alarms caused by normal operation of large water-consuming
plant such as chillers.
Where there is physically no space for a leak detection system between the utilities water meter and the building,
alternative solutions can be used, provided that a major leak can still be detected.
One credit - Flow control devices

3 Install flow control devices that regulate the supply of water to each WC area or facility according to demand,
to minimise minor water leaks and wastage from sanitary fittings, which could otherwise be undetected.
Compliance notes
cclxxx SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Methodology
Flow control devices

Flow control systems may control combined WC areas, such as male and female toilets within a core; they are not
required for each individual sanitary appliance. The criteria are set to encourage the isolation of the water supply to
each WC block when not in use.
The flow control criteria for this issue do apply to facilities which have only a single WC (potentially within smaller or
low occupancy buildings). In these instances shut-off could be provided via the same switch that controls the
lighting (whether proximity detection or a manual switch).
Flow control devices include the following:
– A time controller, i.e. an automatic time switch device to switch off the water supply after a predetermined
interval
– A programmed time controller, i.e. an automatic time switch device to switch water on or off at predetermined
times.
– A volume controller, i.e. an automatic control device to turn off the water supply once the maximum pre-set
volume is reached
– A presence detector and controller, i.e. an automatic device that switches water on and off, depending on the
detection of occupancy or movement
– A central control unit, i.e. a dedicated computer-based control unit for the overall management of a water
control system, utilising some or all of the types of control elements listed above.
No water supply to the building or unit

Where a project under assessment contains no installed fittings and therefore there is no water supply to the
building, identify and assess the facilities most likely to be used by the occupants and visitors of the assessed
building (e.g. specific facilities provided in a nearby accessible building.

If the water supply to the new extension is via the existing building then the water supply to the existing building
must be assessed against the criteria of this issue.
Utilities water meters.

See criterion 1 on the previous page.
Where there is a utilities water meter at the site or building boundary, it may be necessary to install a separate flow
meter (or alternative measurement system) just after the utilities water meter to detect leaks. However, if the water
utilities company agrees to some form of leak detection being installed on their meter, this would also be
acceptable.
Wat 03 Water leak detection cclxxxi
Evidence

Definitions
Clinical areas
WC areas or facilities
WC areas or facilities refer to the cold water supply to taps, WCs and urinals. The water supply system must not
allow the cold water to automatically switch off in the showers while the hot water is still running to avoid hot-
water scalding.
None
cclxxxii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Wat 04 Water efficient equipment
1 1 1 1

Aim
To reduce water consumption for uses not assessed under Wat 01 by encouraging specification of water efficient
equipment.
Value
– Reducing potable water use in high
consumption equipment and associated
energy consumption.
consumption and water heating.
– Promoting innovation and manufacture of
more water efficient equipment.
Context
Water consumption associated to non-domestic scale, non-sanitary water uses can be very significant depending
on the building type and relevant uses. Industrial processes and other project-specific processes do not always
require water to be treated to potable quality. Therefore there is scope to adopt more imaginative solutions to
meeting this demand through alternative sources, reuse or recycling solutions which are often project-specific.
Wat 04 Water efficient equipment cclxxxiii
With the predicted higher climatic temperatures and drier summers, the need for irrigation is likely to increase in the
UK, impacting on our ability as a society to provide adequate water supplies at a reasonable cost.
Therefore, there is a need to address these types of water uses, encouraging reductions in potable water
consumption.
Assessment scope

Applicable Assessment criteria All None All All
Assessment type specific notes None None see ref 1.0 see ref 1.0

1.0 Where the only non-domestic scale, non-sanitary water demand comes from an irrigation system
specified or installed by the developer, then use this system to assess compliance.
None
cclxxxiv SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Assessment criteria
One credit
1 Identify all water demands from uses other those listed under Wat 01 Water consumption �on page cclxthat
could be realistically mitigated or reduced. Where there is no water demand from uses other than domestic-
scale, sanitary use components in the building, this issue is not applicable.
2 Identify systems or processes to reduce the relevant water demand (criterion 1 above), and establish, through
either good practice design or specification, a demonstrable reduction in the total water demand of the
building.
Compliance notes
Methodology
None.
Evidence

Definitions
Non-domestic scale, non-sanitary water uses

For the purposes of this BREEAM Issue, non-domestic scale, non- sanitary water uses refer to any water uses not
assessed under Wat 01. This includes, but is not limited to the following:
Wat 04 Water efficient equipment cclxxxv
– swimming pools
– recreational hot tubs and hydrotherapy pools
– equipment used for irrigation
– vehicle wash equipment
– project-specific industrial processes
– building services (e.g. boilers, cooling towers and humidification systems.
Vehicle wash
A commercial scale automatic, semi-automatic or manual system for washing vehicles. This includes wheel and
chassis wash, fixed gantry and screen wash systems using brushes, spray or handheld jet hoses.
None.
cclxxxvi SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Materials
15% 18% 18% 21.5%
Summary
This category encourages decisions which reduce the environmental and social impact of construction products
used on a project. It takes a ‘whole life cycle’ approach to construction product impacts, encouraging consideration
of impacts during manufacture, design, procurement, installation, in-use and end-of-life. The issue focuses on
construction product efficiency, environmental impact, responsible sourcing and product durability.
Mat 01 Environmental impacts from construction products - Building life cycle assessment on
page 287
– Reducing buildings’ environmental life cycle impacts through conducting Life Cycle Analysis and integrating its
outcomes in the design decision-making process.
Mat 02 Environmental impacts from construction products on page 302 1 credit
– Encouraging the reduction of environmental life cycle impacts through rewarding the specification of products
with a recognised environmental product declaration. Encouraging the reduction of environmental life cycle
impacts through rewarding the specification of products with a recognised environmental product declaration.
4 credits
Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials on pagemin307standards
– Recognising and encouraging responsible sourcing of construction materials. This includes the source of
products and the intermediary companies processing and transport of the product to site.
Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience on page 319 1 credit
– Increasing the lifespan of the building through designing for durability and protection from degradation and
specifying appropriate construction products.
Mat 06 Material efficiency on page 325
– Encouraging the reduction of environmental impacts through optimising the use of materials during all stages
of the project.
Mat 01 Environmental impacts from

construction products - Building life cycle
assessment
Aim
To reduce the burden on the environment from construction products by recognising and encouraging measures
to optimise construction product consumption efficiency and the selection of products with a low environmental
impact (including embodied carbon), over the life cycle of the building.
Value
– Help project teams to understand the
overall environmental impact of the building
design.
– Ensure that all life cycle greenhouse gas
emissions are taken into account in the
design, not just operational emissions.
– Reduce the impact of the construction
industry and construction product industries.
– Assess the environmental impacts at the
building level to provide flexibility when
specifying materials and components, to take
into account project specific conditions and
priorities.
– Allow optimal solutions to be identified and
adopted to reduce overall environmental
impacts arising from materials use.
Context
The use of construction materials leads to a wide range of environmental and social impacts across the life cycle
through initial procurement, wastage, maintenance and replacement. Taken together, construction products make
a highly significant contribution to the overall life cycle impacts of a building. In some cases they may even outweigh
operational impacts (such as energy consumption).
The introduction of Part L into the building regulations has led to reductions in the operational energy consumption
of buildings which are being progressively tightened. As a result, greenhouse gas emissions from other aspects of
buildings, such as embodied emissions, are becoming increasingly important in terms of reducing the overall
emissions, resulting from the procurement, maintenance and replacement of materials over the buildings life, that
lead to climate change.
In addition to climate change, there are several other embodied environmental impacts associated with
construction products and the processes that occur during and after construction that should be considered
during design, for example CSR and other regulatory obligations.
Assessment scope

Applicable Assessment criteria All 3–18 All 1–8 and 11–18
Assessment type specific notes 1.1, 1.2 1.0. 1.1, 1,2 1.1, 1.2 1.1, 1.2

1.0 Simple buildings
All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply except criteria 1 to 2 on page 289.
1.1 Mixed use buildings
Where a single building use type accounts for ≥ 50% of the net internal floor area, all criteria
relevant to the building type and function apply. Where < 50%, all criteria relevant to the building
type and function apply except criteria 1 to 2 on page 289.
1.2 Part new-build, part refurbishments
All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply except criteria 1 to 2 on page 289.
None

construction products - Building life cycle
assessment
Assessment criteria
Seven credits (see criteria 1 to 7) and three exemplary credits (see criteria 8 to 18) are available in this issue. Some
credits require preceding criteria to be fulfilled first.
Credits for building Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) of the superstructure (criteria 1 to 5) are awarded as a combined
total. Of these, credits for LCA benchmarking of the superstructure (criteria 1 to 2) are only applicable to offices,
industrial and retail buildings.
For other building types, the same number of credits are available for LCA options appraisal alone (criteria 3 to 5).
For further details, please see Table 44 on page 291.
Building LCA comparison with the BREEAM benchmark

Superstructure (offices, industrial and retail buildings (except for Simple Buildings and where Notes 1.1 and 1.2 on
page 288 apply)
1 During RIBA stage 2 ‘Concept design’, carry out a building LCA on of the superstructure design and compare
the results with the benchmark to demonstrate environmental impact performance, as follows :
1.a: Using either the BREEAM Simplified building LCA tool or an IMPACT Compliant LCA tool.
1.b: The scope of the assessment shall include the building elements indicated in Mat 01 Environmental
impacts from construction products - Building life cycle assessment �Assessment scope on page 288,
where present in the building.
1.c: The building LCA tool and LCA shall fulfil the quality requirements shown in Table 48 on page 297.
1.d: The results from the building LCA tool and other required information shall be entered into the Mat 01
Results Submission Tool. The Mat 01 Results Submission Tool will calculate the number of credits awarded.
1.e: The Mat 01 Results Submission Tool shall be submitted to BRE Global before the end of RIBA stage 2, and
before planning permission is applied for (that includes external material or product specifications).
2 At the end of RIBA stage 4 (technical design), using the same tool as used for the RIBA stage 2 submission,
update the building LCA of the superstructure design and recompare the results with the benchmark, as
follows:
2.a: As criteria 1.c 1.b to 1.d1.e
2.b: The Mat 01 Results Submission Tool shall be submitted to BRE Global at the end of RIBA stage 4.
Building LCA option appraisal at RIBA stage 2 – Superstructure

3 For offices, industrial and retail building types, criterion 1 is achieved (except where Simple buildings or where
Notes 1.1 and 1.2 on page 288 apply).
4 During RIBA stage 2 ‘Concept design’, carry out building LCA options appraisal of 2 to 4 significantly different
superstructure design options to identify reductions in environmental impacts, as follows:
4.a: Using a building LCA tool as defined in criterion 1.a or another building LCA tool recognised by BREEAM as
suitable for assessing superstructure at RIBA stage 2.
4.b: As criteria 1.b to 1.d
4.c: Each design option shall fulfil the same functional requirements by the client and statutory requirements
(to ensure functional equivalency).
4.d: The building LCA activity shall be integrated within the wider design decision-making process.
4.e: An LCA options appraisal report shall be produced by the project design team that enables the design
team and client to make better informed decisions on the different design options. The LCA options
appraisal report shall provide information on the environmental impacts of each design option along with
the effect, if any, on other relevant factors such as (but not necessarily limited to) capital cost and delivery
times (life cycle cost integration is rewarded by criteria 10 to 14). The LCA options appraisal report shall be
reviewed by the design team and client.
4.f: Prior to submission, the following shall be recorded in the Mat 01 Results Submission Tool. The differences
between the design options; the design option selected by the client to be progressed beyond the
current RIBA stage; the reasons for selecting it and the reasons for not selecting the other design options.
4.g: As criterion 2.b.
If the building LCA tool recognised by BREEAM used for criteria 3 to 7 (and 8 to 9, if pursued) is not an IMPACT
Compliant LCA tool and criteria 4 to 2 are applicable, then the BREEAM Simplified building LCA tool (or an IMPACT
Compliant LCA tool) shall be used for criteria 1 to 2.
Building LCA options appraisal at RIBA stage 4 - Superstructure

5 During RIBA stage 4 ‘Technical design’, carry out building LCA options appraisal of 2 to 3 significantly different
superstructure design options to identify further reductions in environmental impacts, as follows:
5.a: Using either an IMPACT Compliant LCA tool or another building LCA tool recognised by BREEAM as
suitable for assessing superstructure at RIBA stage 4.
5.b: As criteria 4.b to 4.f. Where an options appraisal report was produced at RIBA stage 2, it is updated to
include the RIBA stage 4 design options.
5.c: As criterion 2.b.
Building LCA options appraisal at RIBA stage 2 - Substructure and hard

landscaping
6 Criteria 3 and 4 are achieved.
7 During RIBA stage 2 ‘Concept design’, carry out building LCA options appraisal of a combined total of at least
6 significantly different substructure or hard landscaping design options (at least two shall be substructure
and at least two shall be hard landscaping) to identify reductions in environmental impacts, as follows:
7.a: Using a building LCA tool recognised by BREEAM as suitable for assessing substructure and hard
landscaping.
7.b: As criteria 4.b to 4.g
Hard landscaping that is within a defined curtilage of the building or is clearly more associated with it rather than
any other building shall be included. Hard landscaping with no such distinction shall be excluded.

To achieve exemplary performance credits
Building LCA options appraisal at RIBA stage 2 - Core building services

8 Criteria 3 to 4 are achieved .
9 During RIBA stage 2 ‘Concept design’, carry out building LCA options appraisal of at least 3 significantly
different core building services design options to identify reductions in environmental impacts, as follows:
9.a: Using a building LCA tool recognised by BREEAM as suitable for assessing core building services.
9.b: As criteria 4.b to 4.g.
Building LCA options appraisal - LCA and LCC alignment

11 Achieve Elemental LCC plan and Component Level LCC options appraisal credits ( Man 02 Life cycle cost and
service life planning on page liv).
12 The design options appraised for criteria 3 to 4 (and 6 to 7 and 8 to 9, if pursued) at RIBA stage 2 are included
in the ‘elemental LCC plan’ in issue ‘Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning’.
13 The design options appraised for criteria 5 at RIBA stage 4 are included in the ‘Component level LCC option
appraisal’ in ( Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning on page liv).
14 The relevant cost information from the ‘elemental LCC plan’ and ‘Component level LCC option appraisal’ shall
be summarised in the LCA options appraisal report to enable the client and design team to make better
informed decisions at the relevant stages given in criteria 3 to 5 (and 6 to 7 and 8 to 9, if pursued).
Building LCA - Third party verification

15 Criteria 1 to 7 (as applicable to the building type) are achieved.
16 A suitably qualified 3rd party (see Definitions on page 294) shall either carry out the building LCAs or produce a
report verifying the building LCAs accurately represent the designs under consideration at RIBA stages 2 and 4
with reference to the requirements of criteria 1 to 7 (and 8 to 14 if pursued).
17 For each LCA option, the report shall itemise the findings of the verification checks made by the suitably
qualified 3rd party including, as a minimum, the quality requirements show in Table 48 on page 297.
18 The report shall include details of their relevant skills and experience and a declaration of their 3rd party
independence from the project client and design team.
Credit Summary
Table 44 sets out the allocation of credits for the criteria above. The actual credits achieved in an assessment is
calculated by the Mat 01 Results Submission Tool.
Table 44 Credit summary table

Description RIBA Applicable Credits available
stage Criteria
Where BREEAM Where no
benchmark BREEAM
available ** benchmark
available (all
others)
[Prerequisite criteria shown in brackets]
Building LCA comparison with the 2 and 1 to 2 Up to 2 [None] N/A
BREEAM benchmark – Superstructure 4
Building LCA Superstructure 2 only 3 to 4 Up to 4* [1 to 2] Up to 4 [None]
option appraisal 4 only 5 Up to 3* [1 to 2] Up to 2 [None]
2 and Up to 6* [1 to 4] Up to 6* [3 to 4]
4
Substructure and 2 6 to 7 1 [3 to 4]
hard landscaping
Core building 2 8 to 9 1 exemplar [3 to 4]
services
Building LCA option appraisal - LCA and 2 and 10–14 1 exemplar [3 to 5]
LCC alignment 4
Building LCA – 3rd party verification 2 and 1 exemplar [1 to 1 exemplar [3 to

4 7] 7]
* Number of credit possible in total with the prerequisite criteria shown in brackets. For example, a score of 1.2
for ‘Building LCA comparison with the BREEAM benchmark – Superstructure’ plus a score of 3.4 for ‘Building
LCA option appraisal – Superstructure’ (at RIBA stage 2 and 4) equals a total of 4 credits (4.6 rounded down)
out of 6.
** Mandatory for: offices, industrial and retail buildings. Except for Simple Buildings and where Notes 1.1 and
1.2 on page 288 apply
For criteria 1 to 2, the number of credits awarded depends on the environmental impacts of the building
compared with the BREEAM benchmark.
For criteria 3 to 5:
– The number of credits depends on the number of design options included in the options appraisal.
– The BREEAM Simplified building LCA tool is subject to a credit cap.
– LCA tools recognised by BREEAM may be subject to a credit cap.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Building LCA comparison with the BREEAM benchmark and building LCA
option appraisal
Criteria 1 to 9.
Method using the BREEAM Simplified building LCA tool

Step 1: Identify the elements that are present in the building and are in -scope, based on Mat 01 Environmental
impacts from construction products - Building life cycle assessment �Assessment scope on page 288.
Step 2: In the BREEAM Simplified building LCA tool, for the elements identified in step 1 only, select the elemental
construction description that is the most similar to the actual elemental construction. If an element has more than
one type of construction, then select an elemental construction for each type.
Step 3: For each of the elemental constructions, enter the total quantity in the building. Enter any further information
required by the tool. Ensure that the quality requirements are adhered to (see Table 48 on page 297).
Step 4: A total EcoPoint result is generated by the BREEAM Simplified building LCA tool.
Step 5: Enter the total BRE EN EcoPoints result into the Mat01 Results Submission Tool. Enter any further information
required by the tool. The Mat 01 Results Submission Tool will calculate the credit award for the building.
Method using an IMPACT Compliant LCA tool or another building LCA tool
recognised by BREEAM
Step 1: Identify the elements that form the building and are in scope, based on Mat 01 Environmental impacts from
construction products - Building life cycle assessment �Assessment scope on page 288.
Step 2: Using a building LCA tool that is recognised by BREEAM (see The Mat 01 Results Submission Tool), produce a
building LCA model. Ensure as a minimum that all the in -scope elements are included. Ensure that the quality
requirements are adhered to (see Table 48 on page 297).
Step 3: Obtain the LCA results for the building from the tool only for the in -scope elements. Enter the results into
the Mat 01 Results Submission Tool. Enter further information required by the tool including (but not necessarily
limited to) construction and product descriptions, quantities, service lives, transport distances, classifications and
justification for design decisions. The Mat 01 Results Submission Tool will calculate the credit award for the building.
Depending on the functionality of the building LCA tool, the information required may be readily exportable for
importing into the Mat 01 Results Submission Tool.
Significantly different design options

Submitted design options that are significantly different in terms of either the types of or quantity of construction
products specified for one or more major elemental constructions that are within the scope of the assessment.
This will depend on the stage of the assessment.
At Concept Design (RIBA stage 2), significantly different options are typically at the elemental construction level, for
example:
– For the majority of the element ‘1. External enclosing walls above ground floor level’, option ‘A’ has a timber
cladding external finish and option ‘B’ has cement render (each will likely have different substrates accordingly).
– For element ‘2. Superstructure/1. Frame’, option ‘A’ is a concrete based frame and option ‘B’ is a steel based
frame.
– For element ‘2. Superstructure/1. Frame’, option ‘A’ is a cast in-situ concrete based frame and option ‘B’ is a
precast concrete based frame.
– For ‘5. Central heating and cooling’, option ‘A’ is a refrigerant distribution based system and option ‘B’ is an air
distribution based system.
At Technical Design (RIBA stage 4), significantly different options are typically at the product level (within elemental
constructions established at RIBA stage 2), for example:
– For the element ‘1. External enclosing walls above ground floor level’, where both options have cement render
but ‘A’ is a different type of render from ‘B’.
– For the element ‘3. Roof’, option ‘A’ has a one type of insulation and option ‘B’ has another type of insulation.
– For ‘5. Central heating and cooling’, the pipework manufacturer for option ‘A’ is different from option ‘B’.
The Mat 01 Results Submission Tool contains functionality to assist in determining if the options are significantly
different.
Evidence

1–2 At RIBA stage 2 As per interim design stage (updated)
– The Mat 01 Results Submission Tool
3–4 At RIBA stage 2 As per interim design stage
As criteria 1 to 2
– The LCA options appraisal report
– Evidence that the LCA options
appraisal report has been reviewed by
the design team and client (meeting
minutes, letter of acknowledgement)
– Evidence of how the LCA design
options have been integrated into the
wider design process (e.g. meeting
minutes, documented design
development showing how the LCA

options have affected the design).
5 At RIBA stage 4 As per interim design stage
– As criteria 3 to
4
(updated).
6–7 At RIBA stage 2
– As criteria 3 to
4
.
includes core building services
according to the criteria.
– As criteria 3 to 4
includes substructure and hard
landscaping according to the criteria.
– As criteria 5
– The 'elemental LCC plan' and
'Component level LCC option
appraisal; in issue 'Man 02 Life cycle
cost and service life planning'.
15–18 The third party’s report: As per interim design stage
– Verifying the building LCAs accurately
represent the designs under
consideration.
– Itemising the findings of their
verification checks.
– Evidence that the requirements of a
Suitably qualified third party are
fulfilled.
Definitions
Building LCA tools recognised by BREEAM

Building LCA tools that have been technically evaluated by BRE Global are recognised as suitable for carrying out
building LCA on one or more of the credits in this issue (e.g. superstructure; substructure and hard landscaping;
building services). A list of recognised tools, and the credits they are considered suitable for, can be found in the
Mat01 Results Submission Tool.
Building LCA tools that are recognised as having fewer environmental categories will have a credit cap (fewer
than: CO2e AND either water or waste processing AND at least 2 other categories).
Where a project team is considering using a building LCA tool that is not listed in the Mat01 Results Submission
Tool, the assessor should shall contact BRE Global as soon as possible to initiate the evaluation process. The
evaluation process will require the involvement and issue of evidence by the tool owner. The fee sheet on the
assessor extranet provides details of fees for LCA tool evaluations.
BREEAM Simplified building LCA tool

The BREEAM Simplified building LCA tool is an elemental construction level LCA tool that is free to use by BREEAM
Assessors and design team members working on a registered BREEAM assessment for this issue. The tool has
been designed to simplify LCA by reducing the information that needs to be entered by the user and the amount
of time required.
The accuracy of the results produced by the tool are appropriate for criteria 1 to 2. However, for criteria 3 to 4
the results are less appropriate than the other LCA tools recognised by BREEAM. As such, the credits awarded for
criteria 3 to 4 when using this tool will have a credit cap.
BRE EN EcoPoints
BRE EN EcoPoints are an indicator that is made up of broad set of individual environmental indicators which are
then combined into a single value. For more information about BRE EN EcoPoints, visit www.bre.co.uk or contact
BRE.
Core building services

Building services components or elements that are part of the building-wide system, rather than a specific tenant
or space (local building services).
Credit cap
The total number of credits that the tool can be awarded is less than the total number of credits available
because the tool is technically inferior to uncapped tools. For example, fewer environmental indicators are
reported or the requirements on data entered by the user are less detailed. The Mat01 Results Submission Tool
indicates which tools have a credit cap.
Functional requirements
The functional requirements are normally determined by the project client at RIBA stage 1 with the help of the
design team. They define the required functional properties such as the activities that the building will be used for,
usable floor area, design life, budget, sustainability targets etc. The functional requirements exclude any
requirements that only relate to visual or other non-functional preference.
If the client has not set formal functional requirements, the design team shall determine functional requirements
that reasonably serve the client’s needs as far as they are understood.
IMPACT (Integrated Material Profile And Costing Tool)

IMPACT is a specification and database for software developers to incorporate into their tools to enable
consistent LCA and LCC. IMPACT compliant tools work by allowing the user to attribute environmental and cost
information to drawn or scheduled items in the BIM. Further information about IMPACT is available from
www.impactwba.com.
IMPACT Compliant LCA tool

An IMPACT Compliant tool is a tool that has been tested for compliance with the IMPACT specification, and is
listed here: www.impactwba.com.
Mat01 Results Submission Tool

The Mat01 Results Submission Tool provides a standardised way for BRE Global to collect information for this
issue. In addition, it can be used by those who do not have access to the building LCA tool to compare what is
modelled with other sources of design information (bills of quantities, drawings, specifications etc.), and see the
breakdown of environmental impacts. In addition, the data in the tool may be used by BRE Global for updating
the BREEAM benchmarks and for other research activities (in a way that is not attributable to individual buildings).
New Rules of Measurement (NRM)

NRM provides a standard set of measurement rules and essential guidance for the cost management of
construction projects and maintenance works. For more information visit www.rics.org. IMPACT Compliant LCA
tools currently use NRM classification as a default.
Suitably qualified third party

An individual who:
– Is a third party
– Has received training on using the building LCA tool that is recognised by the tool supplier, and has passed the
associated tests or exams (if any).
– Has completed building LCA for at least three projects for paying customers in the last two years.
– Is able to interpret construction documentation (drawings, specifications, schedules etc.), which may be
evidenced by a suitable construction related qualification or relevant experience.
Third party
A person or body that is recognised as being independent of the parties involved (parties involved are typically
a supplier (1st party) or purchaser (2nd party), as concerns the issue in question
Checklists and tables
Scope of assessment
The following tables indicates the level 3 sub-elements that shall be included in the scope of the building LCA.
Inclusion of the in scope sub-elements is necessary to ensure an appropriate level of comparability between
assessments. All other sub-elements shall be ignored for the purposes of the BREEAM LCA. For tables showing
sub-elements that shall be excluded see ‘Out of scope elements’ within ‘Additional Information’.
If a sub-element is not present in the building, it does not need to be included. If a particular sub-element appears
to be associated with more than one classification, the classification with the strongest association shall be used. If
a particular sub-element appears to be associated with an in scope classification and an out of scope classification,
it shall be classified under the in scope classification (and included in the assessment).
If the BREEAM Simplified building LCA tool is used, the constructions available in the tool may cover more than one
item identified in the tables below. A completed BREEAM Simplified building LCA tool (that includes one or more
constructions for each building element identified as present in the building) is compliant with these scope
requirements.
In addition, the table shows the classification codes that shall be used in the BREEAM Simplified building LCA tool,
based on the RICS New Rules of Measurement (NRM) classification system. For example, the code for ‘Standard
foundations’ is ‘1.1.1’.
Table 45 Superstructure – In scope (criteria 1 to 5)

Level 1 Group element Level 2 Element Level 3 Sub-element
2. Superstructure 1. Frame 1. Steel frames
2. Space decks
3. Concrete casings to steel frames
4. Concrete frames
5. Timber frames
6. Other frame systems
2. Upper floors 1. Floors
3. Roof 1. Roof structure
2. Roof coverings
3. Specialist roof systems
4. Rooflights, skylights and openings
4. Stairs and ramps 1. Stair or ramp structures
5. External walls 1. External enclosing walls above ground
floor level
2. External enclosing walls below ground
level
3. Solar or rain screening
6. Windows and 1. External windows
external doors
7. Internal Walls and 1. Walls and partitions (Education only)
Partitions
Table 46 Substructure and hard landscaping – In scope (applicable to criteria 6 and 7)

1. Substructure 1. Substructure 1. Standard foundations
2. Specialist foundation
systems
3. Lowest floor
construction
4. Basement excavation
5. Basement retaining walls
8. External Works 2. Roads, paths and pavings 1. Roads, paths and pavings
2. Special surfacings and
pavings
Table 47 Core building Services – In scope (applicable to criteria 8 and 9)

5. Services 5. Heat source 1. Heat source
6. Space heating and Air- 1. Central heating
conditioning 2. Central cooling
3. Central heating and
cooling
4. Central air-conditioning
7. Ventilation 1. Central ventilation
2. Smoke extract or
control
9. Fuel installations and systems 1. Fuel storage
2. Fuel distribution
systems
Quality requirements
The LCA fulfils the following requirements at the relevant RIBA stage.
Table 48 LCA Quality requirements

Item At RIBA stage 2 submission At RIBA stage 4 submission
Elemental construction ± 10% of quantities shown in design documents
quantities
LCA or EPD data type Generic or manufacturer specific. Use the closest matching data in the tool.
Product quantities Typical or generic values Generic (non-project ± 10% of quantities shown in
(mass per unit of specific) elemental constructions may be design documents. All
elemental construction) used. elemental constructions shall
must be created from
individual products.
Product transport Typical or generic values.
distances Project specific distances may
be used where known.
Product service lives A reasonable estimate for the
and site wastage actual installation scenario.
Adhesives Excluded if the adhesive is applied to less than Excluded if the adhesive is
20% of the product's surface applied to less than 20% of the
product's surface
Minor fixings (e.g. Excluded Excluded
brackets, nails, screws),
sealants and
ironmongery items
Study period 60 years 60 years
Results reported Results reported separately for each environmental indicator, for each EN
15978:2011 module as follows:
– Stage A: A1, A2 and A3 (may be combined).
– Stage B: Separately, each module possible in the building LCA tool (see
definition Building LCA tools recognised by BREEAM)
– Stage C: As stage B
Out of scope elements

The following tables indicates the building sub-elements that shall be excluded from the scope of the building LCA.
In addition, the table shows classification codes based on the RICS New Rules of Measurement (NRM) classification
system. For example, the code for ‘Standard foundations’ is‘1.1.1’.
Table 49 Superstructure – Out of scope

2. Superstructure 2. Upper Floors 2. Balconies
3. Roof 6. Roof features
4. Stairs and Ramps 2. Stair or ramp finishes
3. Stair or ramp balustrades
and handrails
4. Ladders, chutes, slides
5. External Walls 4. External soffits
5. Subsidiary walls,
balustrades, handrails,
railings and proprietary
balconies
6. Façade access or cleaning
systems
6. Windows and External 2. External doors
Doors
7. Internal Walls and 2. Balustrades and handrails
Partitions 3. Moveable room dividers
4. Cubicles
8. Internal Doors 2. Internal doors
3. Internal finishes 1. Wall finishes 1. Finishes to walls
2. Floor finishes 1. Finishes to floors
2. Raised access floors
3. Ceiling finishes 1. Finishes to ceilings
2. False ceilings
3. Demountable suspended
ceilings
4. Fittings, furnishings and 1. Fittings, furnishings and 1. General fittings,
equipment equipment furnishings and
equipment
2. Domestic kitchen fittings
and equipment
3. Special purpose fittings,
furnishings and
equipment
4. Signs or Notices
5. Works of art
6. Equipment
7. Internal planting
8. Bird and vermin control
Table 50 Substructure and hard landscaping – Out of scope

Level 1 Group Level 2 Element Level 3 Sub-element
element
8. External 1. Site Preparation Works 1. Site clearance
Works 2. Preparatory groundworks
3. Soft Landscaping, Planting and 1. Seeding and turfing
Irrigation Systems 2. External planting
3. Irrigation systems
4. Fencing, Railings and Walls 1. Fencing and railings
2. Walls and screens
3. Retaining walls
4. Barriers and guardrails
5. External Fixtures 1. Site or Street furniture and
equipment
2. Ornamental features
8. Minor Building Works and Ancillary 1. Minor building works
Buildings 2. Ancillary buildings and
structures
3. Underpinning to external site
boundary walls
Table 51 Core building Services – Out of scope

2. Superstructure 2. Upper Floors 3. Drainage to balconies
3. Roof 4. Roof drainage
5. Services 1. Sanitary Installations 1. Sanitary appliances
2. Sanitary ancillaries
3. Pods
2. Services Equipment 1. Services Equipment
3. Disposal Installations 1. Foul drainage above ground
2. Chemical, toxic and industrial liquid
waste drainage
3. Refuse disposal
4. Water Installations 1. Mains water supply
2. Cold water distribution
3. Hot water distribution
4. Local hot water
5. Steam and condensate distribution
6. Space Heating and Air 2.Local heating
Conditioning 4.Local cooling
6.Local heating and cooling
8.Local air-conditioning
7. Ventilation 2. Local and special ventilation
8. Electrical Installations 1. Electrical mains and sub-mains
distribution
2. Power installations
3. Lighting installations
4. Specialist lighting installations
5. Local electricity generation systems
6. Earthing and bonding systems
10. Lift and Conveyor 1. Lifts and enclosed hoists
Installations or Systems 2. Escalators
3. Moving pavements
4. Powered stairlifts
5. Conveyors
6. Dock levellers and scissor lifts
7. Cranes and unenclosed hoists
8. Car lifts, car stacking systems,
turntables and the like
9. Document handling systems
10. Other transport systems
11. Fire and Lightning 1. Fire fighting systems
Protection 2. Fire suppression systems
3. Lightning protection
12. Communication, 1. Communication systems
Security and Control 2. Security systems
Systems 3. Central control or building
management systems
13. Special Installations or 1. Specialist piped supply installations
Systems 2. Specialist refrigeration systems
3. Other specialist mechanical
installations or systems
4. Specialist electrical or electronic
installations systems
5. Water features
14. Builder’s Work in 1. General builder’s work
Connection with
Services
8. External Works 6. External Drainage 1. Surface water and foul water drainage
2. Ancillary drainage systems
3. External chemical, toxic and industrial
liquid waste drainage
4. Land drainage
7. External Services 1. Water mains supply
2. Electricity mains supply
3. External transformation devices
4. Electricity distribution to external plant
and equipment
5. Gas mains supply
6. Telecommunications and other
communication system connections
7. External fuel storage and piped
distribution systems
8. External security systems
9. Site or street lighting systems
10. Local or district heating installations
11. Builder’s work in connection with
external services
None.

construction products
1 1 1 1

Aim
To encourage availability of robust and comparable data on the impacts of construction materials through the
provision of EPD.
Value
– Improve the accuracy of building life cycle
assessment (LCA)
– Improve the availability if robust and
comparable data for designers and
specifiers to aid materials selection and
specification
– Increase the consistency in the information
requested from manufacturers
– Increase the uptake of EPD by material and
product manufacturers
– Increase the accuracy and comparability of
building level LCA so helping to reduce the
overall life cycle impacts arising from the
building
Context
A variety of construction product environmental claims are offered by manufactures, other industry sources and in
guidance, but the results presented are often inconsistent and therefore not suitable for making comparisons. In
addition, even comparable information is difficult for a non-specialist to understand. Such information will often be
biased towards presenting the benefits of a material and avoid or reduce the emphasis on negative impacts. This
risks designers, clients and constructors being misled by the information provided, leading to incorrect decisions
being taken that could result in increased environmental impacts. As a result, available information can often be
misleading to designers and specifiers.
Specifiers can make better informed decisions using comparable EPD and generic LCA data in a recognised
building LCA tool (see Mat 01 Environmental impacts from construction products - Building life cycle assessment
on page 287), that presents results at the building level and over the life cycle of the building.
Increasing numbers of EPD are being produced by construction product manufacturers. However, many
construction products do not have an EPD, meaning generic LCA data must be used when carrying out a building
LCA. While helpful in making basic materials choices at the early design stage, this does not assist in specifying less
impacting products and materials during detailed design and construction stages. Further accuracy can be gained
when carrying out LCA or specifying materials and components by using EPD specific to a manufacturer’s product
range or, better still, the specific construction product.
Assessment scope


None
None

construction products
Assessment criteria
One credit - Specification of products with a recognised environmental

product declaration (EPD)
1 Specify construction products with EPD that achieve a total EPD points score of at least 20.
2 Enter the details of each EPD into the Mat 01 Results Submission Tool, including the material category
classification. The Mat 01 Results Submission Tool will verify the EPD points score and credit award
Compliance notes
Methodology
Total EPD points score methodology

The total EPD points score shall be calculated as follows:
1. For each EPD that is applicable to a specified construction product, use Table 52 below to find the EPD
points score.
2. For each EPD, use Table 53 on the facing page to find the applicable material classification (according to
the construction product). If a product comprises more than one material, the material category
classification representing the majority of the product (by volume) should be selected.
3. Add together the applicable EPD points for each material classification (an EPD can be counted in only one
classification group).
4. If a material classification has a calculated score higher than 4 EPD points, reduce the score to 4.
5. Add together the EPD points calculated for each material classification to obtain the total EPD points score.
Table 52 EPD points for different types of EPD

Recognised types of EPD Validity EPD
points
EPD applicable to more than one – EPD unexpired at the point of specification. 0.5
product in the same product category, – Product installed in the building by the end of RIBA
and a more than one manufacturer stage 5 ‘Construction’.
– EPD issued or registered by an ISO 14025 compliant
programme operator.
– For products covered by the Construction Product
EPD applicable to more than one Regulations, the EPD must have been generated 0.75
product in the same product category, using product category rules based on either EN
and a single manufacturer 15804 or ISO 21930
EPD applicable to a single product, and 1.5
a single manufacturer (the product may
be manufactured in more than one
location)
Table 53 Material classification

Material category Uniclass
equivalent
code (for
information)
Timber or timber-based P5
Concrete or cementitious P2*
Metal P4
Stone or aggregate P1, P3*
Clay-based P33
Gypsum P232
Glass P314
Plastic, polymer, resin, paint, chemicals and bituminous P7, P34
Animal fibre or skin, cellulose fibre P6
Other
*Except subsets listed separately. For example, P2 generally relates to ‘2. Concrete or cementitious’ except for
the subset P232 which relates to ‘6.Gypsum’
Evidence

All The Mat 01 results Submission tool As per interim design stage
All Copies of EPD certificates As per interim design stage
Definitions
Environmental Product Declaration (EPD)

An EPD compliant with BREEAM is an independently verified environmental label (i.e. ISO Type III label) according to
the requirements of ISO14025
Mat 01 Results Submission Tool

The Mat 01 Results Submission Tool provides a standardised way for BRE Global to collect information for this
issue. In addition, it can be used by those who do not have access to the building LCA tool to compare what is
modelled with other sources of design information (bills of quantities, drawings, specifications etc.), and see the
breakdown of environmental impacts. In addition, the data in the tool may be used by BRE Global for updating
the BREEAM benchmarks and for other research activities (in a way that is not attributable to individual buildings).
None.
Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials
4 4 4 4
Fully fitted Simple building Shell & core Shell only Criterion 1
Aim
To facilitate the selection of products that involve lower levels of negative environmental, economic and social
impact across their supply chain including extraction, processing and manufacture.
Value
– Promote more economically , socially and
environmentally responsible practices across
the construction materials, component
manufacturing and supply sectors.
– Encourages the construction industry to
identify risks and reduce the environmental,
economic and social issues in the supply chain
of construction products.
– Encourages the use and the improvement of
credible and comparable schemes to
evaluate the responsible sourcing of
materials.
Context
Most construction materials involve long and complex supply chains that result in a wide range of impacts globally.
These might include environmental (e.g. toxicity or biodiversity), economic (e.g. corruption) or social (e.g. slave
labour, equality) issues and can occur during the extraction, processing, manufacturing or supply chain stages. The
construction sector in the UK has considerable growth opportunities, not only nationally, but also internationally.
The global construction market is forecast to grow by over 70% by 2025. Increased global competition does risk
less responsible practices being employed. Credible certification schemes exist to give confidence to specifiers that
risks are being minimised or avoided and their use ensures that specifiers are able to demonstrate the responsible
nature of their selection decisions.
Assessment scope


None
None
Assessment criteria
Prerequisite
1 All timber and timber-based products used on the project are legally harvested and tradedtimber as per the
UK government's Timber Procurement Policy (TPP)(179). See Definitions on page 316.
Compliance with criterion 1 is a minimum requirement for achieving any BREEAM rating.
There are no prerequisite requirements for other materials.
One credit - Sustainable procurement plan

2 Source materials in accordance with a documented Sustainable procurement plan. The plan must:
2.a: Be in place before RIBA stage 2 Concept Design
2.b: Include sustainability aims, objectives and targets to guide procurement activities
2.c: Include an assessment of the potential to procure materials locally. There must be a policy to procure
materials locally where possible.
2.d: Include details of procedures in place to check and verify the effective implementation of the sustainable
procurement plan
In addition, if the plan is applied to several sites or adopted at an organisational level it must:
2.e: Identify the risks and opportunities of procurement against a broad range of social, environmental and
economic issues following the process set out in BS ISO20400:2017 (180).
Up to 3 credits - Responsible sourcing of materials (RSM)

3 Use the Mat 03 calculator tool and methodology to determine the number of credits achieved for the
materials specified or procured. Credits are awarded in proportion to the number of RSM points achieved, as
set out inTable 54 below.
Table 54 BREEAM credits available for percentage of RSM points achieved

Credits achieved % of available RSM points achieved
1 ≥ 10%
2 ≥ 20%
3 ≥ 30%
1 exemplary performance credit ≥ 50%
Compliance notes
Methodology
Assessment process
To determine the number of credits that are achieved for the Responsible Sourcing of Construction Products
(criterion 3), the Mat 03 calculator tool must be completed with all the relevant information. Each construction
product is entered in the tool individually unless they are below the relevant threshold. Where the quantity of a
product has not been calculated, use Route 1 on page 315 for that product. Where the quantity of a product is
known, use Route 2 on page 315. This It may be the case that across an assessment there will be a combination of
routes for products. For example, route 1 may be used for the timber or timber-based category and route 2 for
the metal category. Only one route may be used per materials category. The following steps outline the process to
be followed to determine the number of credits achieved for responsible sourcing, followed by illustrative
examples.
For examples and a further explanation of this method, along with a simplified methodology for building services
construction products, see Guidance Note 24.
Step 1: Collating information and entering it in the BREEAM UK Mat 03 tool
For all routes, the BREEAM UK Mat 03 tool is used according to the following steps.
1. For each construction product in the building that is in the scope: (see Table 56 on page 314 under 'Scope of
assessment' section below):
Note: For route 1, only steps 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7 and 1.9 must be followed. Step 1.4 is optional for routes 1 and 2.
Step 1.1: Estimate if the quantity of the product is above the cut-off volume (see Route 1 Cut-off on page 315).
If it is, enter the construction product in the tool and assign it a ' Location and use' category, then proceed to the
next step. If the quantity meets the cut-off then the product can be excluded.
Step 1.2 Route 2: Estimate the quantity (mass or volume) of the product. (See Quantities precision on
page 315).
Step 1.3: Obtain the BREEAM recognised responsible sourcing certifications scheme (RSCS) certification or
environmental management system (EMS) certification, if any (see Definitions on page 316). Compare the
certification with Guidance Note 18 and obtain the RSCS point score. Where the construction product has no
certification, is non-compliant with broken chain requirements (see Broken chain on page 314) or the
certification type is not listed in Guidance Note 18, the score is zero. Where the construction product is a reused
product, obtain the score from Guidance Note 18 for these products.
Step 1.4 (Optional, if not being followed go to step 1.5): Where a constituent construction product has a better
certification score than the overall construction product and it complies with the broken chain requirements, the
following steps should be followed:
Step 1.4.1: Identify the materials categories that make up an estimated≥ 80% of the
constituent construction product's volume.
Step 1.4.2: Include each identified materials category in the tool (by creating new rows in the
tool).
Step 1.4.3: If ≥ 5% of the volume is unaccounted for in step 1.4.1, include the 'Other' material
category.
Step 1.4.4 Route 2: For each material following route 2 and identified in step 1.4.1, enter the
building-wide quantity into the tool. This may be based on a percentage of the overall
construction product's quantity estimated in step 1.1.
Step 1.4.5: For each material category (including 'Other'), enter the constituent's certification
score identified in step 1.4 into the tool.
Step 1.5: Identify the materials categories that make up an estimated≥ 80% of the product's volume (excluding
quantities entered for step 1.4.1 , if applicable).
Step 1.6: Include each identified materials category in the tool (by duplicating the entry made in step 1.1).
Step 1.7: If ≥ 5% of the volume is unaccounted for in step 1.5 (and step 1.4, where applicable), include the
'Other' material category.
Step 1.8 Route 2: For each material category following route 2 and identified in step 1.5, enter the building-
wide quantity into the tool. This may be based on a percentage of the overall construction product's quantity
estimated in step1.1.
Step 1.9: For each material category (including 'Other'), enter the overall construction product's certification
score (from step 1.3) into the tool.
Step 2: BREEAM UK Scoring and Reporting tool
Step 2.1: Enter the credit result produced by the BREEAM UK Mat 03 tool into the BREEAM UKs Scoring and
Reporting tool.
Scope of Assessment
Table 55 below (based on the New Rules of Measurement (NRM) classification system) indicates the building
elements that must be included in the scope of the assessment. Including these elements (and only these) is
necessary to ensure an appropriate level of comparability. All construction products that are installed as part of
one or more of these building elements are in scope and must be included in the BREEAM UK Mat 03 tool. For each
building element the respective location or use category for use in the BREEAM UK Mat 03 tool is provided in the
table.
Table 55 Scope assessment, common building element designation and location and use categories
RICS NRM elements and BREEAM equivalents
Level 1 element: 1–Substructure
Level 2 element: 1–Substructure
Level 3 sub-element BREEAM ‘Location and use’ category To be
included
1 Standard foundations 7. Structure , primary and secondary Y
2 Specialist foundations systems 7. Structure , primary and secondary Y
3 Lowest floor construction 7. Structure , primary and secondary Y
4 Basement excavation N/A Y
5 Basement retaining walls 7. Structure , primary and secondary Y
Level 1 element: 2–Superstructure
Level 2 element: 1–Frame
Level 3 sub-element BREEAM ‘Location and use’ category To be
included
1 Steel frames 7. Structure, primary and secondary Y
2 Space decks 7. Structure, primary and secondary Y
3 Concrete casings to steel frames 7. Structure, primary and secondary Y
4 Concrete frames 7. Structure, primary and secondary Y
5 Timber frames 7. Structure, primary and secondary Y
6 Other frame systems 7. Structure, primary and secondary Y
Level 2 element: 2–Upper Floors
Sub- BREEAM Location BREEAM ‘Location and use’ category To be
element included

1 Floors 3. Floor (including floor finishes) Y
2 Balconies 3. Floor (including floor finishes) Y
3 Drainage to balconies 11. Other Y
Level 2 element: 3–Roof
element included
1 Roof structure 6. Roof (including roof finishes) Y
2 Roof coverings 6. Roof (including roof finishes) Y
3 Specialist roof systems 6. Roof (including roof finishes) Y
4 Roof drainage 6. Roof (including roof finishes) Y
5 Roof lights, skylights and openings 2. Door and window Y
6 Roof features 6. Roof (including roof finishes) Y
Level 2 element: 4–Stairs and ramps
element included
1 Stairs and ramps structures 7. Structure, primary and secondary Y
2 Stair and ramp finishes 3. Floor (including floor finishes) Y
3 Stair and ramp balustrades and 11. Other Y
handrails
4 Ladders, chutes and slides 11. Other Y
Level 2 element: 5–External walls
element included
1 External enclosing walls above ground 8. External wall Y
floor level
2 External enclosing wall below ground 7. Structure, primary and secondary Y
floor level
3 Solar and Rain screening 8. External wall Y
4 External soffits 8. External wall Y
5 Subsidiary walls, balustrades, handrail 11. Other Y
and proprietary balconies
6 Façade access and cleaning systems 11. Other Y
Level 2 element: 6–Windows and external doors
element included
1 External windows 2. Door and window Y
2 External doors 2. Door and window Y
Level 2 element: 7–Internal walls and partitions
element included
1 Walls and partitions 5. Internal partition and internal walls Y
(including finishes)
2 Balustrades and handrails 11. Other Y
3 Moveable room dividers 5. Internal partition and internal walls Y
4 Cubicles 5. Internal partition and internal walls Y

Level 2 element: 8–Internal doors
element included
1 Internal doors 2. Door and window Y
Level 1 element: 3–Internal Finishes
Level 2 element: 1–Wall finishes
element included
1 Finishes to walls 5. Internal partition and internal walls Y
Level 1 element: 3–Internal Finishes
Level 2 element: 3–Ceiling finishes
element included
1 Finishes to ceilings 1. Ceiling (including ceiling finishes) Y
2 False ceilings 1. Ceiling (including ceiling finishes) Y
3 Demountable suspended ceilings 1. Ceiling (including ceiling finishes) Y
Level 1 element: 4–Fittings, Furnishings and Equipment
Level 2 element: 1–Fitting, furnishings and equipment
element included
2 Kitchen fittings and equipment (ONLY) 11. Other Y
Level 1 element: 5–Services
Level 2 element: (ALL)
element included
(ALL) 9. Building services Y
Level 1 element: 8–External Works
Level 2 element: 2–Roads, paths and pavings
element included
1 (ALL) 10. Hard landscaping Y
Level 2 element: 2–Roads, paths and pavings
element included
Level 2 element: 3–Soft landscaping, planting and irrigation systems
element included
N/A N
Level 2 element: 4–Fencing, railings and walls
element included
Level 2 element: 5–External fixtures
element included

N
Level 2 element: 6–External drainage
element included
Level 2 element: 7–External services
element included
The material categories, for use in the BREEAM UK Mat 03 tool, must be in accordance with Materialcategories
below. For each construction product, identify the closest matching category.
Table 56 Materialcategories
Material categories
1. Timber or timber-based products
2. Concrete or cementitious
3. Metal
4. Stone or aggregate
5. Clay-based
6. Gypsum
7. Glass
8. Plastic, polymer, resin, paint, chemicals and bituminous
9. Animal fibre, skin, cellulose fibre
10. Other.
BREEAM recognised responsible sourcing certification schemes and their

point scores
Typically certificates are used to confirm compliance of materials to the requirements. Where a valid certificate is
not available from the manufacturer claims may be confirmed via the relevant responsible sourcing scheme
provider. Many of the organisations who administer RSM certification schemes will, via their website, list companies
and products that have been certified against their standards, including the scope of any such certification.
Some schemes will provide downloadable copies of the relevant certificate which can in turn be used as evidence of
compliance for this BREEAM issue.
Approach to building services

A simplified approach for building services products and materials has been set out in Guidance Note 18:
Demonstrate Compliance with BREEAM Issue Mat 03. Building services products and materials are included in Mat
03 assessments to stimulate the market for responsible sourcing certification products in this sector. It is
acknowledged that their inclusion is challenging due to the high number and complexity of these products.
Broken chain
To recognise responsible sourcing certification where it does exist in the supply chain, while reducing the risks
associated with a broken chain, it is permissible to use the upstream certification score in the BREEAM UK Mat 03
tool where the downstream risk to responsible sourcing is considered to be low. Specifically, it is acceptable for the
following types of organisations in the supply chain (that are downstream of the organisation with certification)
not to have their own responsible sourcing certification:
1. Organisations that only handle or transport, OR

2. Organisations that only fabricate, assemble or install and are using a recognised quality management
system to ensure the mixing and substitution of the certified upstream source with uncertified sources has
not occurred AND are operating in a jurisdiction that can demonstrate relatively robust and well enforced
environmental, social and economic controls. For example, states which are members of the EU1—states
that have declared adherence to the OECD Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises.
Route 1 Cut-off
See Step 1: Collating information and entering it in the BREEAM UK Mat 03 tool on page 310. Any construction
product in the following location or use categories which clearly accounts for less than the following volumes can
be excluded from the assessment. The volume considered should be taken as the construction product's overall
external dimensions, including any internal voids and air spaces. Minor fixings (brackets, nails, screws etc.), adhesives,
seals and ironmongery would normally fall below this threshold. See also Quantities precision. - 'Internal partition
and internal walls (including finishes)': Less than 0.33 m³per 1000m²of gross internal floor area (GIFA). - 'Ceiling
(including ceiling finishes)': Less than 0.33 m³per 1000m²of GIFA. - All other location or use categories: Less than
1m³per 1000 m²of GIFA.
Quantities precision
The degree of tolerance accepted for estimating quantities is ± 20% of the final installed quantity. It is not
necessary for the assessor to submit calculations in order to justify estimates. In particular, the cut-off estimation
for many construction products (that are clearly below the cut-off) may be done without the need for any
calculations at all.
Route 1
Route 1 does not require the quantities of each construction product to be entered into the BREEAM International
Mat 03 tool. This reduces the time taken to calculate the score achieved per construction product but, because the
varying quantities of each construction product in the building cannot be taken into account when the credit is
calculated, the lowest 'location or use' category score per materials category is used for the overall materials
category score.
Route 2
Route 2 provides a more accurate measurement of the risks in the building design associated with construction
products by taking account of the quantity of each construction product with a location and use category. It
requires quantities to be entered into BREEAM International Mat 03 tool rather than using the lowest 'location or
use' category score per material category. The improvement in rigour justifies route 2 having the potential to
produce better scores than route 1.
Evidence

All See The BREEAM evidential requirements on page 38 section for a list of general
evidence types that can be used to demonstrate compliance with the relevant criteria for
this issue.
All Evidence of level of responsible sourcing As per interim design stage.
achieved for each material and product. For
example, certificates.
All Completed copy of the Mat 03 Calculator As per interim design stage.
tool
All Evidence to show how the Mat 03 calculator As per interim design stage.
tool has been completed.
Definitions
BREEAM Mat 03 calculator

A Calculator tool used by the BREEAM Assessor to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved for
BREEAM issue Mat 03.
BREEAM recognised responsible sourcing certification schemes (RSCSs)

These are third party schemes evaluated by BRE Global for recognition under BREEAM. Refer to Guidance Note
18 available in the Responsible sourcing section of the BREEAM website for information on the evaluation criteria
and the process for the evaluation and acceptance of schemes, including application and appeals.
Legally harvested and traded timber

BREEAM follows the UK government's definition of legally sourced timber, as outlined in the Central Point of
Timber (CPET) 5th Editionon the UK Government Timber Procurement Policy (TPP). At the time of writing, the
policy requires all timber and wood-based products to be covered by at least one of the following (but the
webpage below should be checked for changes):
1. Independently verifiable legal and sustainable sources (FSC or PEFC)

2. Forest Law Enforcement, Governance and Trade (FLEGT)—licensed timber or equivalent sources
3. Evidence on a case-by-case basis in line with the Framework for Evaluating Category B evidence
For the avoidance of doubt, 100% of the timber and timber-based products must be compliant.
Further information on the UK Government's TPP and compliant responsible sourcing certification schemes is
available from the CPET website www.gov.uk/guidance/.
New rules of measurement (NRM)

construction projects and maintenance works. For more information visit:www.rics.org.
Responsible sourcing
The management and implementation of sustainable development principles in the provision, procurement and
traceability of construction materials and components. In BREEAM, this is demonstrated through auditable third
party certification schemes. Refer to Guidance Note 18 available in the Resources section of the BREEAM website
for an up-to-date table of responsible sourcing certification schemes recognised by BRE Global Ltd for the
purposes of a BREEAM assessment.
Responsible sourcing certification scheme point scores

A graded scale to reflect the rigour of the certification scheme used to demonstrate responsible sourcing,
forming the basis for awarding credits in the BREEAM issue Mat 03. Refer to Guidance Note 18 available in the
Resources section of the BREEAM website for an up-to-date table of responsible sourcing certification schemes
recognised by BRE Global Ltd for the purposes of a BREEAM assessment.
Sustainable procurement plan

A plan that sets out a clear framework for the responsible sourcing of materials to guide procurement
throughout a project and by all involved in the specification and procurement of construction materials. The plan
may be prepared and adopted at an organisational level or be site or project specific.
None.
Mat 04 Insulation
This is no longer assessed as a separate issue within BREEAM UK New Construction 2018.
Mat 05 Designing for durability and

resilience
1 1 1 1
Fully-fitted Simple building Shell & core Shell only No minimum standards
Aim
To reduce the need to repair and replace materials resulting from damage to exposed elements of the building
and landscape.
Value
– Avoid unnecessary cost and material use
resulting from the need to repair and replace
damaged elements as a result of operational
wear and tear.
–
Minimise costs and disruption resulting from
environmental degradation to building
elements as a result of avoidable
weathering and changes to climatic
conditions over time.
Context
Exposed elements of a building or landscaping are at risk of damage through impact or wear and tear. This can
result in significant and unnecessary materials use and waste generation across the life of a building. This can be
minimised by risk areas being identified and designed out, and suitable protection measures being provided. The
inclusion of this issue within BREEAM, highlights the need to consider future repairs and replacements, as well as
their associated costs, when designing and specifying materials for a new building.
In addition climate change can significantly accelerate the deterioration of materials used in a building. It is therefore
important to consider the impact of climate change and its associated environmental changes on the vulnerable
elements within the built environment. Impacts of climate change can be mitigated by good design and
specification so that stakeholders can have increased confidence in the durability of new buildings and their
individual elements.
Assessment scope


None
None
Mat 05 Designing for durability and

resilience
Assessment criteria
One credit
Protecting vulnerable parts of the building from damage

1 Protection measures are incorporated into the building's design and construction to reduce damage to the
building’s fabric or materials in case of accidental or malicious damage occurring. These measures must
provide protection against:
1.a: Negative impacts of high user numbers in relevant areas of the building (e.g. corridors, lifts, stairs, doors
etc.).
1.b: Damage from any vehicle or trolley movements within 1m of the internal building fabric in storage,
delivery, corridor and kitchen areas.
1.c: External building fabric damage by a vehicle. Protection where parking or manoeuvring areas are within 1
metre of the building façade and where delivery areas or routes are within 2 metres of the façade, i.e.
specifying bollards or protection rails.
1.d: Potential malicious damage to building materials and finishes, in public and common areas where
appropriate.
Protecting exposed parts of the building from material degradation

2 Key exposed building elements have been designed and specified to limit long and short term degradation
due to environmental factors. This can be demonstrated through one of the following:
2.a: The element or product achieving an appropriate quality or durability standard or design guide (or if none
available, BS 7543:2015 (181) as the default appropriate standard)
2.b: A detailed assessment of the element's resilience when exposed to the applicable material degradation
and environmental factors set out in Table 57 on page 324.
3 If BS 7543:2015 is used, the design team can deviate from it to meet criterion 2.a. The assessor should use
their professional judgment in determining whether the deviations are acceptable, ensuring that the choices
demonstrated that they have designed and specified materials or measures which will be effective in
preventing unnecessary deterioration, so reducing frequent replacements, repairs and maintenance through
the life cycle of the building.
4 Include convenient access to the roof and façade for cost effective cleaning, replacement and repair in the
building's design.
5 Design the roof and façade to prevent water damage, ingress, and detrimental ponding.
See Table 57 on page 324 for an example list of relevant industry durability and quality standards.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Examples of suitable durability measures

Suitable durability and protection measures to vulnerable parts of the building can include:
1. Bollards, barriers or raised kerbs to delivery and vehicle drop-off areas

2. Robust external wall construction, up to 2m high
3. Corridor walls specified to Severe Duty (SD) as per BS 5234-2 and, for Healthcare buildings, Health
Technical Memorandum 56 - Partitions.(182)(183)
4. Protection rails to walls of corridors
5. Kick plates or impact protection (from trolleys etc.) on doors
6. Hard-wearing and easily washable floor finishes in heavily used circulation areas (i.e. main entrance,
corridors, public areas etc.)
7. Door stoppers to prevent door handles damaging walls
8. Designing out the risk without the need for additional materials specification to protect vulnerable areas.
Designed to prevent water damage

A common and potentially significantly damaging failure mechanism for external envelopes is water ingress or
other type of water damage. The design team should demonstrate that they have carefully considered the
drainage mechanisms of the façade and roof on a small and large scale to prevent staining, detrimental oxidation,
ponding, rot, ingress or any other deleterious effect. This should take the form of a risk assessment, the complexity
and detail of which is related to the complexity and innovative nature of the façade and roof. The final design
should demonstrate that, where possible, these negative impacts have been avoided.
None.
Evidence

Definitions
Appropriate industry quality or durability standard

An established industry quality standard, certification or mark with testing procedures which demonstrate the
quality and durability of the product or element. Examples of relevant standards for various element types are
provided in Table 57 on page 324. The use of relevant standards outside of the examples provided is also a
compliant route providing the standard is relevant for the element. It is the responsibility of the assessor to
confirm that the standard used is appropriate for the element or product it is applied to and increases its
durability.
Convenient access
Access to the roof and façade is safe and convenient for routine maintenance, cleaning and repair. A façade
access strategy designed in line with CIRIA guide C686 would be considered compliant. If access to the majority
of the façade requires contracting on a one-off basis an external firm with specialist equipment, or specialist
access professionals it would not generally be considered to be convenient.
Durability
Ability of a building and its parts to perform its required function over a period of time and under the influence of
degrading agents, without undue maintenance, repair, replacement or refurbishment.
Key exposed building element

Key exposed building elements in the context of this issue are those adding up to at least 80% by area of each of
the following categories:
1. External walls and cladding

2. Roof or balconies
3. Glazing: windows, skylights
4. Hard landscaping
Material efficiency
The process of undertaking a building project to enable the most efficient use of materials over the life cycle of
the building and its components. This includes using fewer materials, reusing existing demolition and strip-out
materials and, where appropriate, procuring materials with higher levels of recycled content. It may also include
the adoption of alternative means of design and construction that result in lower materials usage and lower
wastage levels including off-site manufacture and use of pre-assembled service pods.
New rules of measurement (NRM)

construction projects and maintenance works. For more information visit: www.rics.org.
Relevant industry durability design guide

An established industry design guide with the objective of improving the durability of the element. Examples of
relevant standards or guides for various element types are provided in Table 57 on the next page. The use of
relevant guides outside of the examples provided is also a compliant route providing the guide is relevant for the
element. It is the responsibility of the assessor to confirm that the guide used is appropriate for the element or
product it is applied to and increases its durability.
BS 7543:2015: Guide to durability of buildings and building elements, products

and components
This standard gives a useful overview of the field of durability and provides a process for predicting a materials
service life. It provides useful guidance on the methodology for assessing and measuring durability and identifies
common durability failures for typical construction materials. In addition, it lists some example predicted service
lives for typical materials.
Table 57 Examples of relevant industry durability or quality standards and design guides
Examples of relevant industry durability or quality standards and design guides
Timber
Class 1 or 2 against BS EN 350-1:1994
TRADA: WIS 4-28 Durability by design
TRADA: Specifying timber exposed to weathering
TRADA: Timber external Doors
(BRE Good practice guidance?)
BS8605:2014 External Timber Cladding Part 1 - Method of Specifying
Curtain walling
Centre for Window and Cladding Technology (CWCT) Curtain Wall Standards
BS EN ISO 9001, BS EN ISO 14001 and OHSAS 18001 Standards. Weather tested to CWCT Sequence B and
EN13830:2003
BS EN 13830 Specification for Curtain Walling
CWCT: Curtain Wall Installation Handbook
Brickwork, blockwork
BDA Design note 7: Brickwork Durability
BDA: Severely Exposed Brickwork
Roof elements
BRE: Roofs and roofing. Performance, diagnosis, maintenance, repair and the avoidance of defects. 3rd edition
(2009)
NFRC: Profiled Sheet Roofing and Cladding- The guide to Design and Best Practice (2016)
CIBSE: Guidelines for the design and application of green roof systems (2013)
Flexible Membrane Roofing: A Professional's Guide to Specifications
Metal cladding
NFRC: Profiled Sheet Roofing and Cladding- The guide to Design and Best Practice (2016)
MCRMA: Metal Fabrications: Design, Detailing and Installation Guide
Glazing
BS EN 12488:2016: Glass in building - glazing recommendations - assembly principles for vertical and sloping
glazing
Masonry
PD 6697:2010 – Recommendations for the design of masonry structures
BS EN 1996-2:2006 Design of Masonry Structures –Durability Section
Other useful standards or design guides
BRE: Cracking in Buildings (2016)
BS 7543:2015: Guide to durability of buildings and building elements, products and components
If you would like an additional standard or design guide to be recognised, please submit your proposal as a
technical query to [email protected].
Mat 06 Material efficiency
1 1 1 1
Minimum standards
Aim
To avoid unnecessary materials use arising from over specification without compromising structural stability,
durability or the service life of the building.
Value
– Reductions in cost as a result of a reduction
of material use in building design.
– Encourages the reuse of existing materials.
– Encourages the use of materials with higher
levels of recycled content.
– Improve understanding of and the
performance of alternative design and
construction methods that result in lower
material usage and waste levels.
Context
The construction industry accounts for approximately 55% of the total annual material use and buildings
contribute 50% of total emissions of CO2eq. They are also responsible for 30% of total UK water use and 35% of
arising waste. The breakdown of global industrial carbon emissions shows that 55% comes from the
manufacturing and processing of five stock materials: steel (25%), cement (19%), paper (4%), plastic and
aluminium (3%).
Building standards and institutional requirements are often based on standardised, tried and tested design
solutions which can result in significant over specification of elements and hence material use. Some of this is to
allow for future flexibility in use that will never in reality be used and more is the result of conservative evaluation of
risk.
Therefore, optimising material use in the context of a specific project is one of the key resource efficiency goals for
any sustainability strategy. This can be achieved through careful consideration of current and future project
demands to maximise the efficient use of materials, waste prevention and reduction, minimal damage to the
environment and reduced depletion of natural resources.
Assessment scope


None
None
Assessment criteria
One credit
1 Identify opportunities to optimise the use of materials during the design, procurement, and construction of the
project, also considering material maintenance and end of life
2 Implement appropriate and effective opportunities in the building’s design and specification
3 The design and construction team consult with relevant participants at each of the following RIBA stages:
3.a: Preparation and Brief
3.b: Concept Design
3.c: Developed Design
3.d: Technical Design
3.e: Construction.
Compliance notes
Methodology
None.
Evidence

All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements on
page 38 can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Definitions
Appropriate and effective opportunities

Material efficiency measures which do not compromise the aesthetics, structural stability, durability or service life
of the building. The measures should also be implementable in practice and cost-effective.
Material efficiency
The process of designing a building to achieve its stated performance standards while reducing its embodied
impact by reducing the quantity of materials required to do so. This includes using fewer materials, reusing
existing demolition and strip-out materials and, where appropriate, procuring materials with higher levels of
recycled content. It may also include the adoption of alternative means of design and construction that result in
lower materials usage and lower wastage levels including off-site manufacturer or use of pre-assembled service
pods.
Table 58 Examples of material efficiencies at each work stage

Work stages and efficiencies
Preparation and Brief
Objective To set requirements that inform decisions throughout the design and construction of
the project.
Participants Client or client's agent with input from the design team if appointed
Action Assess the site, the likely project scale, and the client's functional and aesthetic
requirements to set material efficiency objectives for the project.
Evidence Dedicated report that sets out a clear framework to guide material efficiency activities
throughout the design and construction of the project. The report should set out aims,
objectives, targets, performance indicators, opportunities, constraints and
responsibilities to guide material efficiency activities.
Concept Design
Objective Develop strategies to implement or action the materials efficiency requirements set
under the Preparation and Brief stage.
Participants Design team including at least:
– Architect
– Structural Engineer
– Building Services Engineer
Action Hold workshops with the project team to identify design opportunities to reduce or
optimise materials use through design, specification, construction techniques etc.
Evidence Minutes of the workshops held. Documentation demonstrating how the feedback
from the workshop has been incorporated in the concept design of the project, for
example: outline specification for materials selection, report on approximate predicted
reductions in material quantities.
Developed Design and Technical Design
Objective Develop design proposals based on learning from the concept design.
Participants All relevant members of the design team
Work stages and efficiencies

Action Incorporate material efficiency measures and strategies identified in concept design
into architectural, structural and building services design as appropriate. Review
performance against previous stages and identify deviations.
Evidence Report on deviations from previous stages and additional actions to be taken.
Documentation demonstrating the incorporation of the outcomes from the concept
stage and additional actions, for example: design drawings or specifications
demonstrating materials efficiency measures undertaken.
Construction
Objective Implement material efficiency measures in construction.
Participants Principal contractor
Action Implement material efficiency measures and strategies identified in previous stages in
building construction and identify deviations. Identify further efficiencies as appropriate
for this stage.
Evidence Report on deviations from previous stages. Documented evidence of activity to further
identify efficiencies at this stage, for example: meeting minutes, training events, waste
reduction documentation etc.
This table is based on the principles set out in parts 1 and 2 of the BS8895 (184)(185)series of standards, and
provides examples of how material efficiency can be considered in each work stage. As a minimum, the
measures listed under the 'evidence' column must be met to show compliance with the issue.
Optimising material use

The construction industry accounts for approximately 55% of the total annual materials consumption and
buildings contribute 50% of total emissions of CO2e. They are also responsible for 30% of total UK water use and
35% of arising waste. The breakdown of global industrial carbon emissions shows that 55% comes from the
manufacture and processing of five stock materials- steel (25%), cement (19%), paper (4%), plastic and aluminium
(3%).
Optimising material use is one the key resource efficiency goals for any sustainability strategy. This involves various
components to ensure efficient use of materials, waste prevention and reduction, minimal damage to the
environment and depletion of natural resources. This new BREEAM issue aims to encourage and support efforts to
reduce the amount of materials use in building design without compromising on the structural stability. BRE intends
to further develop the assessment criteria for this issue in future updates of BREEAM and as such BRE would
welcome any feedback on the application of this assessment issue to assist with the evolution of the criteria and
inclusion of additional guidance on compliance in future BREEAM versions.
Tools to guide material efficiency strategies

The following provide frameworks for the consideration and review of resource efficiency in design and
construction:
Examples of material efficiency opportunities

Examples of suitable material efficiency design measures can include:
1. Increasing the utilisation factor of structural members

2. Designing to standard material dimensions to reduce off-cuts and waste on site
3. Removing redundant materials from the design
4. Using materials that can be recycled or reused at the end of their service life
5. Making use of recycled or reclaimed materials
6. Designing for de-construction and material re-use
7. Designing with low embodied carbon materials
8. Using pre-fabricated elements where appropriate to reduce material waste
9. Consider using an ‘exposed thermal mass’ design strategy to reduce finishes
10. Avoiding over-specification of predicted loads
11. Using lightweight structural design strategies
12. Making use of bespoke structural elements
13. Reducing the ‘rationalisation’ of structural elements

14. Optimising the foundation design for embodied environmental impact
BS 8895 Designing for material efficiency in building projects

The standard outlines specific material efficiency processes, key tasks, team members and their responsibilities and
outputs specific to each work stage, along with supporting guidance and tools. This serves as a useful tool to assist
the design team in developing and implementing material efficiency strategies for their developments.
– The standard is comprised of the following four parts:

– Part 1: Code of practice for Strategic Definition and Preparation and Brief (published)
– Part 2: Code of practice for concept and developed design (published)
– Part 3: Code of practice for technical design (planned for development)
– Part 4: Code of practice for operation, refurbishment (planned for development)
WRAP
Designing out Waste: A design team guide for Buildings(186). This document outlines five principles of designing
out waste and can be applied during design development, and prompts opportunities to investigate for material
efficiency in design. Some key questions to consider are:
1. Can the design, form and layout be simplified without compromising the design concept?
2. Can the design be coordinated to avoid or minimise excess cutting and jointing of materials that generate
waste?
3. Is the building designed to standard material dimensions?
4. Can the range of materials required be standardised to encourage reuse of offcuts?
5. Is there repetition and coordination of the design, to reduce the number of variables and allow for
operational refinement (e.g. reusing formwork)?
Waste 331
Waste
6% 7.5% 7% 8.5%
Summary
This section encourages the reduction of waste from construction and throughout the lifetime of the building. It
rewards sustainable waste management, as well as waste reporting, reduction and diversion from landfill during
construction, but also encourages sustainable practices during the building operation. Finally, this section
encourages waste minimisation through optimised design methods, which consider current, but also future needs,
responding to functional requirements and climate change adaptation.It includes recognition of measures to
reduce future waste as a result of the need to alter the building in the light of future changes to climate.
Wst 01 Construction waste management 5 credits
Improving resource efficiency through developing a pre-demolition audit and a Resource Management Plan,
maximising the recovery of material during demolition and diverting non-hazardous waste from landfill.
Wst 02 Use of recycled and sustainably sourced aggregates 1 credit
Encouraging the use of recycled or secondary aggregate or aggregate types with lower environmental impact to
reduce waste and optimise material efficiency.
Wst 03 Operational waste 1 credit
Encouraging the diversion of operational waste form landfill through the provision of space and facilities allowing
the segregation and storage of recyclable waste.
Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes 1 credit
Specification of floor and ceiling finishes only where agreed with the occupant or, for tenanted areas where the
future occupant is unknown, installation in a show area only, to reduce wastage.
Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change 1 credit
Encourage consideration and implementation of measures to mitigate the impact of more extreme weather
conditions arising from climate change over the lifespan of the building.
Wst 06 Design for disassembly and adaptability 2 credits
Encourage consideration and implementation of measures design options related to adaptability and
disassembly, which can accommodate future changes to the use of the building and its systems over its lifespan.
Wst 01 Construction waste management
5 5 5 5

Minimum standards
Aim
To reduce construction waste by encouraging reuse, recovery and best practice waste management practices to
minimise waste going to landfill.
Value
– Minimise cost and environmental damage
resulting from waste going to landfill
–
Maximise the recovery and reuse of
construction materials to avoid
unnecessary extraction and processing of
virgin materials
– Reduces construction costs resulting from

wastage on site
Context
One third of all waste in the UK, 120 million tonnes of waste per year, is generated by the construction and
demolition sector, which is the largest contributor of waste in the nation.
Best practice solutions include; off-site construction, where construction waste can be halved, the adoption of
waste management methods such as the waste hierarchy and the implementation of the circular economy
concept, which provides an alternative to a traditional linear economy (make, use, dispose). This approach is
adopted by certain manufacturers that offer a 'take back' scheme and by design teams that use the concept of
'design for de-construction'(187).
Reducing waste simultaneously reduces the environmental impact as well as the cost of the construction process.
The true cost of waste encompasses the cost of the product or material that is wasted, the cost of handling waste
and the cost of waste management. While there may be revenue associated with the recycling of certain material
streams, typically construction sites have to pay for collection or processing of the waste. Legislation in this area has
changed over time, however the benefit to the developer of avoiding unnecessary materials use and waste and the
environment remain the same.
Assessment scope

Applicable Assessment criteria 1–10 11–18 1–10 1–10

None
None
Assessment criteria
– Pre-demolition audit (1 credit)

– Construction resource efficiency (3 credits)
– Diversion of resources from landfill (1 credit).
One credit - Pre-demolition audit

1 To determine if refurbishment or reuse is feasible, complete a pre-demolition audit of any existing buildings,
structures or hard surfaces to be demolished. If infeasible, use the pre-demolition audit to maximise the
recovery of material for subsequent high grade or value applications. The audit must cover the content of Pre-
demolition audit scope and:
1.a: Follow the pre-demolition or pre-refurbishment Code of Practice.
OR
1.b: Be carried out at Concept Design stage (RIBA Stage 2) by a competent person (see Definitions); prior to
strip-out or demolition works;
1.c: Guide the design, consider materials for reuse and set targets for waste management;
1.d: Engage all contractors in the process of maximising high grade reuse and recycling opportunities.
1.e: Compare actual waste arisings and waste management routes used with those forecast and investigate
significant deviations from planned targets.
2 Make reference to the audit in the Resource Management Plan (RMP) (see Definitions).
Up to three credits - Construction resource efficiency

3 Prepare a compliant Resource Management Plan (RMP) covering:
3.a: Non-hazardous waste materials (from on-site construction and dedicated off-site manufacture or
fabrication, see Additional information ), including demolition and excavation waste.
3.b: Accurate data records on waste arisings and waste management routes (see KB).
4 Meet or improve upon the benchmarks in Table 59 for non-hazardous construction waste, excluding
demolition and excavation waste.
Table 59 Construction waste resource efficiency benchmarks

BREEAM credits Amount of waste generated per 100m²(gross internal floor area)
m³(actual, not bulk volume) tonnes
One credit ≤ 13.3 ≤ 11.1
Two credits ≤ 7.5 ≤ 6.5
Three credits ≤ 3.4 ≤ 3.2
Exemplary level ≤ 1.6 ≤ 1.9
One credit - Diversion of resources from landfill

5 Meet, where applicable, the diversion from landfill benchmarks in Table 60 for non-hazardous construction
waste and demolition and excavation waste generated.
6 Sort waste materials into separate key waste groups as per Table 61, either on-site or through a licensed
contractor for recovery.
Table 60 Diversion from landfill benchmarks

BREEAM credits Type of waste Volume Tonnage
One credit Non-demolition 70% 80%
Demolition 80% 90%
Excavation N/A N/A
Exemplary level Non-demolition 85% 90%
Demolition 85% 95%
Excavation 95% 95%

7 Non-hazardous construction waste generated, excluding demolition and excavation waste, is less than or
equal to the exemplary level resource efficiency benchmarks (see Table 59).
8 The percentage of non-hazardous construction, demolition and excavation waste (if relevant) diverted from
landfill meets or exceeds the exemplary level percentage benchmarks in Table 60.
9 All key waste groups in Table 61 for diversion from landfill are covered in the RMP.
10 Waste data obtained from licensed external waste contractors is reliable and verifiable, by using data from
EA/SEPA/EA Wales/NIEA Waste Return Forms or from a PAS 402:2013 certified company (see Definitions on
page 337).
One credit - Simple buildings - Pre-demolition audit

11 Meet compliance with criteria 1 and 2.
One credit - Simple buildings - Construction resource efficiency

12 Produce a Resource Management Plan (RMP) with the aim of minimising and monitoring waste.
Two credits - Simple buildings - RMP measurements and reporting

13 Meet compliance with criterion 12.
14 Waste management procedures recorded in the RMP and implemented measure and report:
14.a:Construction waste generated by the project in m3 or tonnes per 100m2 gross internal floor area; exclude
14.b:The proportion of construction waste diverted from landfill, i.e. reused, recycled or recovered
One credit - Simple buildings - Diversion from landfill

15 Meet compliance with criteria 5 and 6.
Exemplary level criteria - Simple buildings

To achieve an exemplary performance credit
16 Achieve the first three construction resource efficiency credits .

17 Record the source of the waste arisings of the non-hazardous construction waste measured or monitored by
associating the waste with project work packages (see Methodology below).
18 Meet or improve on the BREEAM exemplary level benchmark (Table 60) for the diversion from landfill of
generated non-hazardous construction and demolition waste.
Compliance notes
Compliance notes
Methodology
Resource Management Plan records

The project materials waste arisings and waste management routes should be recorded for construction,
The performance benchmarks for the award of credits are based on non-hazardous materials and exclude
hazardous waste, demolition waste, excavation waste, canteen, office and municipal waste.
Pre-demolition audit scope

The pre-demolition audit must cover:
1. Identification and quantification of the key materials where present on the project (see Table 61);
2. Potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of the key materials in accordance
with the waste hierarchy;
3. Opportunities for reuse and recycling within the same development;
4. Identification of local reprocessors or recyclers for recycling of materials;
5. Identification of overall recycling targets where appropriate;
6. Identification of reuse targets where appropriate;
7. Identification of overall landfill diversion rate for all key materials.
Work packages
For the simple building exemplary criteria, the waste arisings need to be associated with the source of waste by
project work packages. These work packages could include:
1. Asbestos removal
2. External and site works
3. Fixtures and fittings

4. Groundworks and excavation
5. Refurbishment
6. Remediation
7. Re-roofing
8. Services
9. Soft strip
10. Substructure
11. Superstructure.
Evidence

All A copy of the Resource Management As per interim design stage
Plan and, where relevant, pre-demolition
audit.
Definitions
Pre-demolition audit competent person

An individual who has appropriate knowledge of buildings, waste and options for reuse and recycling of
different waste streams. Ideally this would be a demolition contractor, but could also be the main contractor.
Resource Management Plan (RMP)

A RMP aims to promote resource efficiency and to prevent illegal waste activities. Resource efficiency includes
minimising waste at source and ensuring that clients, designers and principal contractors assess the use, reuse
and recycling of materials and products on and off the site. A compliant RMP defines:
1. A target benchmark for resource efficiency, i.e. m³of waste per 100m²or tonnes of waste per 100m²
2. Procedures and commitments to minimise non-hazardous waste in line with the target benchmark
3. Procedures to minimise hazardous waste; these are:
a. A waste-minimisation target and details of waste minimisation actions to be undertaken
b. Procedures to estimate, monitor, measures and report on hazardous and non-hazardous site waste
and demolition waste, where relevant, arising from work carried out by the principal contractor and
all subcontractors. Waste data obtained from licensed external waste contractors needs to be
reliable and verifiable, e.g. using data from EA/SEPA/EA Wales/NIEA waste return forms or from
PAS402 certified company
c. Monthly reporting of all construction waste data throughout the project checked against what
would be expected based on the stage of the project, invoices, etc., to validate completeness of
waste reporting data
d. Procedures to sort, reuse and recycle construction waste into defined waste groups, either on site or
through a licensed external contractor
e. Procedures to review and update the plan
f. The name or job title of the individual responsible for implementing the above.
4. A waste-minimisation target and details of waste minimisation actions to be undertaken
5. Procedures to estimate, monitor, measures and report on hazardous and non-hazardous site waste
and demolition waste, where relevant, arising from work carried out by the principal contractor and all
subcontractors. Waste data obtained from licensed external waste contractors needs to be reliable and
verifiable, e.g. using data from EA/SEPA/EA Wales/NIEA waste return forms or from PAS402 certified
company
6. Monthly reporting of all construction waste data throughout the project checked against what would be
expected based on the stage of the project, invoices, etc., to validate completeness of waste reporting
data
7. Procedures to sort, reuse and recycle construction waste into defined waste groups, either on site or
through a licensed external contractor
8. Procedures to review and update the plan
9. The name or job title of the individual responsible for implementing the above.
Best practice construction waste management plan (see RMP and SWMP)
Best practice is a combination of commitments to:
1. Design out waste (materials optimisation)

2. Reduce waste generated on site
3. Develop and implement procedures to sort and reuse and recycle construction and demolition waste on
site and off site (as applicable)
4. Follow guidance from:
– Defra (Department of Environment, Food and Rural Affairs)
– BRE (Building Research Establishment Ltd)
– Welsh Government
– SEPA.
Dedicated off-site manufacturing or fabrication

Production of a component or material carried out in an off-site manufacturing or processing facility specifically
set up for the development project.
Diversion from landfill

Actions to avoid waste being disposed of in landfill include:
– Reusing the material on site (in situ or for new applications)

– Reusing the material on other sites
– Community reuse and recycling
– Salvaging or reclaiming the material for reuse
– Returning material to the supplier via a ‘take-back’ scheme
– Direct recycling of materials via a specialist material reprocessor or recycler
– Recovery of the material from site by an approved waste management contractor and recycled or sent for
energy recovery
– Utilising waste in exempt or permitted applications (not landfill).
PAS 402:2013
PAS 402:2013 is a specification for performance reporting that can be adopted by waste management
organisations. It is applicable to waste management organisations that process waste, e.g. a waste treatment
facility and not those operating solely as carriers or brokers. The specification provides the framework for the
demonstration of performance against key areas of delivery, including how waste management activities are
conducted, landfill diversion and materials recovery, assuring potential and existing customers of the service they
are procuring. It can provide clients such as government and local authorities with a framework for good practice
which they can specify.
Site Waste Management Plans

Some locations may have a legal requirement, due to government requirements, to produce a Site Waste
Management Plan (SWMP) containing prescribed details. An SWMP is a form of resource management plan. To
achieve any of the construction waste management credits the assessed development, regardless of value or
locality, must have a BREEAM compliant Resource Management Plan that should be written in line with best
practice.
Waste hierarchy
The order of priority for the management of waste where waste generation could or does occur. This is listed in
descending order of environmental preference in The Waste (England and Wales) Regulation 2011 (188) as:
– Prevention: using material in design and manufacture, keeping products for longer, re-use, using less
hazardous materials
– Preparing for re-use: checking, cleaning, repairing, refurbishment, whole items or spare parts
– Recycling: turning waste into a new substance or produce. It includes composting if it meets quality protocols
– Other recovery: includes anaerobic digestions, incineration with energy recovery, gasification and pyrolysis,
which produce energy (fuels, heat and power) and materials from waste
– Disposal landfill and incineration without energy recovery.
Waste minimisation
This term encompasses two elements of the waste hierarchy: waste reduction or prevention = using less material
in design, manufacture and installation, keeping products for longer, using no hazardous materials; Reuse = using
products again for the same purpose for which they were conceived, which may require checking, cleaning or
repairing (preparing for reuse). Types of waste minimisation actions include:
1. Set and report against waste reduction targets

2. Design for standardisation of components
3. Avoid waste from excavation or groundworks and consider opportunities for zero cut and fill
4. Return packaging for reuse
5. Consider community reuse of surplus or offcuts
6. Include waste minimisation initiatives and targets in tenders or contracts and engage with the supply
chain
7. Consider use of BIM (Building Information Modelling)
8. Design for off-site or modular build
9. Design for flexibility, adaptability and future deconstruction
10. Design to use fewer materials
11. Use of reusable temporary elements such as shuttering and protection.
This list is not exhaustive and other waste minimisation actions can be taken.
Waste management routes

Description of how waste will be managed according to the waste hierarchy, e.g. reused, recycled, recovered and
disposed.
Construction waste groups

Table 61 Construction waste groups
European Key group Examples
Waste
Catalogue
170102 Bricks Bricks
European Key group Examples

Waste
Catalogue
170101 Concrete Pipes, kerb stones, paving slabs, concrete rubble, precast and in
situ
170604 Insulation Glass fibre, mineral wool, foamed plastic
1501 Packaging Paint pots, pallets, cardboard, cable drums, wrapping bands,
polythene sheets
170201 Timber Softwood, hardwood, board products such as plywood,
chipboard, medium density fibreboard (MDF)
1602 Electrical and Electrical and electronic TVs, fridges, air-conditioning units, lamps
electronic equipment
equipment
1301 Oils Hydraulic oil, engine oil, lubricating oil
1703 Asphalt and tar Bitumen, coal tars, asphalt
170103 Tiles and ceramics Ceramic tiles, clay roof tiles, ceramic, sanitary ware
1701 Inert Mixed rubble or excavation material, glass
1704 Metals Radiators, cables, wires, bars, sheet
170802 Gypsum Plasterboard, plaster, fibre cement sheets
170101 Binders Render, cement, mortar
170203 Plastics Pipes, cladding, frames, non-packaging sheet
1705 Soils Soils, clays, sand, gravel, natural stone
Most relevant Liquids Non-hazardous paints, thinners, timber treatments
EWC
Most relevant Hazardous Defined in the Hazardous Waste List (HWL) of the European
EWC Waste Catalogue (EWC)
Most relevant Floor coverings Carpets, vinyl flooring
EWC (soft)
Most relevant Architectural Roof tiles, reclaimed bricks, fireplaces
EWC features
170904 Mixed or other Efforts should be made to categorise waste into the above
(Mixed) categories wherever possible.
BREEAM construction resource efficiency benchmarks

The resource efficiency benchmarks used in BREEAM have been derived using data collected from hundreds of real
life projects using BRE's SMARTWaste system, from July 2008 to July 2016. The BREEAM credits are aligned to the
benchmarks as follows:
1. One credit: Performance in the top 50% of projects (better than standard practice)
2. Two credits: Performance in the top 25% of projects (good practice)
3. Three credits: Performance in the top 10% of projects (best practice)
4. Exemplary level: Performance in the top 5% of projects (exemplary practice).
For more information please see www.smartwaste.co.uk
Why does BREEAM exclude demolition and excavation waste from the
resource efficiency benchmarks?
BREEAM does not include demolition and excavation (D&E) waste in its resource efficiency benchmark, despite it
often being the largest tonnage of waste on-site, because the amount of D&E waste produced is site-dependent.
Furthermore, it is not necessarily possible to reduce the amount of demolition waste (unless a decision is taken not
to demolish in the first place).
Including D&E waste in an overall construction resource efficiency benchmark would:

1. Not encourage sites with unavoidably large amounts of D&E waste to focus on reducing waste arising
from construction materials (which would have further knock-on environmental impacts); and
2. Mean that sites with little or no D&E waste would find compliance with the benchmark more straight
forward, which would weaken the drivers for reducing construction waste resulting from the specification
and use of new building materials.
BREEAM aims to ensure that, where D&E waste is generated, it is diverted from landfill and where possible reused
for high grade use on site to reduce the volume of new materials produced or required in the supply chain (which
themselves may go on to generate additional waste). One credit and an exemplary level credit are available where it
can be demonstrated that D&E waste has been diverted from landfill.
Tools for preparing, implementing and reviewing a RMP

SMARTWaste® is a web-based membership tool allowing users to measure and monitor construction site
impacts..
The tool can be used for:
– Preparing, implementing and reviewing SWMPs or RMPs

– Online measuring and reporting on
– Waste (aligned to defined waste groups)
– Site energy, fuel and water use
– CO2 production from energy usage
– Procurement of certified or sustainable timber
– Transport impacts from materials deliveries, waste removal and staff travel to and from the site
– Pre-demolition versus post-demolition waste data
– Industry waste benchmarks
This membership tool is frequently updated and offers the user flexibility, reporting and support. Templates are
available to meet the latest BREEAM credits and can also be downloaded. More information is available at
www.smartwaste.co.uk.
Other tools for preparing, implementing and reviewing a RMP may be available.
342 Wst 02 Use of recycled and
SD5078: BREEAM sustainably
UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
sourced aggregates
1 1 1 1

Aim
To encourage the use of more sustainably sourced aggregates, encourage reuse where appropriate and avoid
waste and pollution arising from disposal of demolition and other forms of waste.
Value
– Encourages the specification of more
sustainable aggregate sourcing options
– Considers a broad range of factors
influencing aggregates’ selection, i.e. regional
aggregate availability, environmental and
social impacts of transport and the overall
carbon footprint
Context
The use of secondary and recycled aggregate in higher value situations should be rewarded as a means to
discourage their devaluation as a material resource or their disposal to landfill.
Thanks to the Aggregates Levy and the Landfill Tax, recent evidence indicates that the amount of aggregates being
disposed of in landfill and being used as low grade fill has decreased markedly in recent years. However sourcing of
aggregates remains an issue in terms of the range of environmental and social impacts that arise from the
extraction and transport of aggregates in the UK.
Therefore, primary aggregates can still be considered a sustainable option, where locally sourced, sustainably
transported and from a region where that aggregate type is abundant. In addition, the use of secondary
aggregates resulting from other processes such as marine dredging can also be considered sustainable under
certain circumstances.
Assessment scope


None
None
None
Wst 02 Use of recycled and sustainably

sourced aggregates
1 1 1 1
5

Minimum standards
Assessment criteria
Prerequisite
To encourage the reuse of site-won material on site, when demolition occurs, complete a pre-demolition audit of
any existing buildings, structures or hard surfaces to be demolished in accordance with Wst 01 Construction waste
management: Criterion on page 332.
One credit - Project Sustainable Aggregate points

1 Identify all aggregates uses and type on the project Table 63 and Table 64 on page 346
2 Determine the quantity in tonnes for each identified use and aggregate type
3 Identify the region in which the aggregate source is located
4 Identify the distance in kilometres travelled by all aggregates by transport type
5 Enter the information into the BREEAM Wst 02 calculator to calculate the Project Sustainable Aggregate points.
The corresponding number of BREEAM credits will be awarded as shown in Table 62
Table 62 Credits available relating to the Project Sustainable Aggregate points

Project Sustainable Aggregate Credits Project
Sustainable
Aggregate
points
1 3.56
1 exemplary performance credit >6

6 The Project Sustainable Aggregate points score meets or exceeds the exemplary level performance
benchmark in Table 62.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Information on the quantity, source and use of each type of aggregate used must be obtained and entered into
the BREEAM Wst 02 calculator. This generates the Project Sustainable Aggregate point score, which determines the
number of credits awarded.
The information required to calculate the Project Sustainable Aggregate point score is specified below:
1. Identify all aggregates uses on the project (Table 63) and the aggregate type (Table 64);
Table 63 Aggregate uses

Reference Conversions Potential
applications
on project
Engineered fill Aggregates compliant with Assume 1m³of engineered Backfill to
Class 6 or Class 9 under the fill is approximately 2.0 basement
Specification for Highways tonnes walls Sub-
Works (SHW) Series 600 base and
Earthworks base courses
for hard
landscape
and local
roads
Concrete coarse 4 -20mm aggregate Assume 1m³of concrete Foundations,
aggregate produced in accordance requires 1 tonne of coarse frame, floors
with EN12620: Aggregates aggregate (or 0.5 tonnes in as ready-mix
for concrete the case of lightweight concrete or
Or aggregate) precast
EN13055 Lightweight concrete
aggregates Part 1
Concrete fine aggregate 0-4mm aggregate Assume 1m³of concrete Foundations,
produced in accordance requires 0.7 tonne of fine frame, floors
with EN12620: Aggregates aggregate as ready-mix
for concrete concrete or
precast
concrete
Asphalt aggregate Aggregates produced in Assume 1m³of asphalt Access roads
accordance with EN13043: requires approximately 2.1 and external
Aggregates for bituminous tonnes of aggregate circulation
mixtures and surface areas
treatments for roads,
airfields and other
trafficked areas
Granular bedding for Aggregates produced in Assume 1m³of pipe Bedding for
pipes accordance with EN13242: bedding is approximately surface water
Aggregates for unbound 2.0 tonnes drainage and
and hydraulically bound sewage pipes
materials for use in civil installed in
Reference Conversions Potential

applications
on project
engineering work and road external areas
construction
Granular bedding for hard Aggregates produced in Assume 1m³of hard Bedding for
landscape products accordance with EN13242: landscaping is concrete
Aggregates for unbound approximately 2.0 tonnes paving
and hydraulically bound stones,
materials for use in civil natural stone
engineering work and road or concrete
construction blocks in
external
circulation
areas
Hydraulically bound Aggregates produced in Assume 1m³of Piling mats
materials accordance with EN13242: hydraulically bound Sub-base and
Aggregates for unbound materials requires base courses
and hydraulically bound approximately 2.1 tonnes for hard
materials for use in civil of aggregate landscape
engineering work and road and local
construction roads
Utility trench
reinstatement
Table 64 Aggregate types

Aggregate types
Hard rock (including limestone and granite)
Land-based sand or gravel
Marine-dredged sand or gravel
Recycled
Secondary
1. Determine the quantity in tonnes for each identified use and aggregate type. Include all aggregates that
represent at least 5% of the overall aggregate demand for the project. The conversions in Table 63 can be
applied at Design Stage where exact details of concrete mix designs and aggregate specifications are not
yet known. Exact values must be reported at Post Construction;
2. Identify the region in which the aggregate source is located, according to the categories inTable 65
3. Identify the distance in kilometres travelled by all aggregates by transport type from ‘aggregate gate’ to
site;
4. Based on the above data inserted for all aggregates, the Wst 02 calculator will determine
a. Mineral resource depletion (kgSbeq)
b. Social cost of transport (pence/tonne)
c. Carbon footprint (kgCO2e/tonne)
d. The correspondent Sustainable Aggregates Points per tonne
e. The number of credits achieved, as per Table 62
5. Enter the credit score into the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool.
Off-site recycled aggregates

Where off-site recycled aggregates from construction, demolition and excavation waste are used, they shall be
produced according to the relevant Quality Protocol(189) or comply with the relevant BS/EN standards for
aggregates(190) in order to contribute to the Project Sustainable Aggregate point score.
Aggregates in off-site manufactured applications

Where any of the listed applications have been manufactured off-site, any aggregate present shall be included in
the assessment of this issue.
Transport distance calculation

Where distribution is undertaken by road from the quarry or wharf, determine the likely road kilometres undertaken
on strategic motorways, other motorways, main roads and secondary roads. For rail or water distribution,
estimates can be made based on the equivalent distance that would be made by road. For asphalt and concrete,
onward distribution from the batching facility must also be included.
Table 65 Region of source (quarry or marine dredge site)

Aggregate types
North East
Yorkshire and Humber
North West
East Midlands
West Midlands
East of England
London
South East
South West
North Wales
South Wales
Evidence

All A completed copy of the Wst 02 As per interim design stage.
calculator.
All Documentary evidence supporting the As per interim design stage.
data used to complete the Calculator
tool.
Definitions
Air-cooled blast furnace slag (see secondary aggregates definition)

Air-cooled blast furnace slag is classified as a byproduct (rather than a waste) and can therefore be used as an
aggregate without the need for a quality protocol. The slag used must meet the requirements of the European
and BS Aggregates Standards that apply to the end use application (e.g. bitumen bound, unbound etc.)
Aggregate gate source

Consider the 'gate' as following:
– Marine dredged aggregates: the wharf at which the aggregate is first landed;
– Land-based resources: the quarry or recycling facility.
Main roads and secondary roads

Main roads refer to A-roads and secondary roads should include all B-roads and other local roads.
Quality Protocol
The purpose of a Quality Protocol is to provide a uniform control process for producers, from which they can
reasonably state and demonstrate that their product has been fully recovered and is no longer a waste. It also
provides purchasers with a product quality managed to common standards, which increases confidence in
performance. Aggregates that do not meet the requirements of a Quality Protocol or relevant aggregate
standards will still be considered waste. Protocols exists for:
– Aggregates produced from inert waste

– Use of pulverised fuel ash (PFA) and furnace bottom ash (FBA) in bound applications.
Recycled aggregates
Recycled aggregates are those derived from reprocessing materials previously used in construction, e.g. crushed
concrete or masonry from construction and demolition waste material and recycled glass bottles.
Secondary aggregates
By-products of industrial processes that can be processed to produce secondary aggregates. Secondary
aggregates are subdivided into manufactured and natural, depending on their source. Recognised non-
construction post-consumer or post-industrial byproducts include:
1. China clay waste (also known as Cornish granite, or stent)

2. By-products of dredging for navigational purposes
3. Slate overburden
4. Lightweight aggregate manufactured from PFA
5. Ground granulated blast furnace slag (GGBFS)
6. Air-cooled blast furnace slag
7. Steel slag
8. Quarry overburden, or other material not subject to the Aggregates Levy
9. FBA
10. Incinerator bottom ash
11. Foundry sands
12. Recycled glass
13. Recycled plastic
14. Spent oil shale
15. Colliery spoil
16. Municipal solid waste treatment residues.
PFA and GGBFS, used as a cement replacement, should not be included in these calculations
Strategic motorways
In the UK these are:
M60, M25, M3 in Hampshire (junctions 9 to 14), M6 in the vicinity of Birmingham (junctions 4 to 10a), M6 in the
vicinity of Manchester (and junctions 15 to 21a), M62 in the vicinity of Rochdale (junctions 18 to 21), M62 in the
vicinity of Leeds (junctions 26 to 30), M42 in the vicinity of Solihull (junctions 3a to 7), M1 in the vicinity of
Northampton and Rugby (junctions 15 to 17), M1 in the vicinity of Nottingham and Sheffield (junctions 28 to
35a), M4 in the vicinity of Slough (junction 4b to 7), M4 in the vicinity of Cardiff (junctions 30 to 33).
Wst 02 calculator
The Wst 02 calculator combines scores for regional mineral depletion, social cost of transport and carbon
footprint. Each of these metrics has an equal weighting in the scoring tool, with a maximum score of 3 for each
metric, giving a maximum Sustainable Aggregate Point score of 9.
– The regional mineral depletion is measured using the Abiotic Depletion Potential, which is determined by the
aggregate type and the region where it is sourced.
– The social cost of transport reflects expenses to society that arise from additional congestion, respiratory
disorders, accidents, noise, taxation and infrastructure maintenance associated with transport.
– The carbon footprint score is determined by the aggregate type, the transport mode and the distance travelled.
The data used to build the Wst 02 tool is based on extensive analysis of existing dataset and reference sources
including: the Crown Estate, British Marine Aggregates Producers Association, Mineral Products Association,
Department of the Environment, Food and Rural Affairs, Waste Resources Action Programme, Building Research
Establishment, Environment Agency and Industry data from rail, aggregate and concrete industries.
Table 66, Table 67 and Table 68 summarise the datasets used by the Wst 02 tool.
Table 66 Aggregate regional abiotic depletion potential

Region Regional
abiotic
depletion
potential
Rock Land sand and gravel Marine Secondary
dredged and recycled
sand and materials
gravel
North East 8.9 x 10 -6 8.9 x 10 -3 3.2 x 10 -6 0
Yorkshire and Humber 9.2 x 10 -9 0 6.4 x 10 -5 0

North West 2.4 x 10 -4 0.017 2.1 x 10 -5 0
East Midlands 1.7 x 10 -5 4.0 x 10 -4 1.0 0
West Midlands 4.9 x 10 -5 2.5 x 10 -4 1.0 0
East of England 0.35 2.0 x 10 -3 5.2 x 10 -6 0
London 1 2.7 x 10 -3 2.0 x 10 -7 0

South East 1.7 x 10 -4 0.015 2.6 x 10 -7 0
South West 6.3 x 10 -6 0 0.014 0
North Wales 5.2 x 10 -4 6.3 x 10 -3 0.17 0
South Wales 0 0 3.5 x 10 -6 0
The calculator tool uses an ADP value of ‘0’ when the resource is not currently depleting and a value of ‘1’ when no
reserves are available.
Table 67 Social cost of transport

Social cost (pence per tonne/km)
Motorway (strategic) 3.9
Motorway (other) 0.6
A-road 3. 6
Other road 10.2
Rail or water 0.2
UK quarries, concrete batching plants, precast concrete suppliers and asphalt plants that hold BES6001
certification can be found through GreenbookLive
Table 68 Carbon footprint

Aggregate type kgCO kgCO
2e/tonne 2
e/tonne
Quarried stone Rock (limestone 4.11
or granite)
Sand and gravel Land-based 3.57
sand or gravel
Recycled aggregates Recycled 4.65
Secondary aggregates Secondary 3.82
Marine dredged long haul Marine sand or Yorkshire and 10.8
gravel Humber 10.8
North East 10.8
East of 10.8
England
East Midlands
Marine dredged short haul Marine sand or London 6.4
gravel South East 6.4
North West 6.4
South West 6.4
North Wales 6.4
South Wales 6.4
West 6.4
Midlands
Distribution method kgCO
2e/tonnekm
Road 0.07
Rail 0.011
Barge 0.008
Other aspects kgCO
2e/tonnekm
Intermodal handling 0.15
Carbon penalty where recycled or secondary aggregates 11.2
are used in ready-mix concrete
This does not represent the total carbon footprint of the concrete or asphalt product and should not be
referenced as such.
Further guidance
The Environment Agency publishes and updates Quality Protocols at www.environment-agency.gov.uk
Current guidance
– The Quality Protocol for production of aggregates from inert waste, www.gov.uk/government/publications
– Steel slag, incinerator bottom ash aggregates and furnace bottom ash (from coal fired power generation) are
not covered by the above Quality Protocol but are or will be covered by their own quality protocols.
– BS EN 12620:2013. Aggregates for concrete. BSI; 2013.
– BS EN 13139:2013. Aggregates for mortar. BSI; 2013.
– BS EN 13450:2013. Aggregates for railway ballast. BSI; 2013.
– BS EN 13242:2013. Aggregates for unbound and hydraulically bound materials for use in civil engineering work
and road construction. BSI; 2013.
– BS EN 13383-1:2013. Armourstone. Specification. BSI; 2013.
– BS EN 13108-1:2016. Bituminous mixtures. Material specifications. Asphalt Concrete. BSI; 2006.
– BS EN 13108-2:2016. Bituminous mixtures. Material specifications. Asphalt Concrete for Very Thin Layers (BBTM).
BSI; 2016.
– BS EN 13108-4:2016. Bituminous mixtures. Material specifications. Hot Rolled Asphalt. BSI; 2016.
– BS EN 13108-6:2016. Bituminous mixtures. Material specifications. Mastic asphalt. BSI; 2006.
– BS EN 13108-7:2016. Bituminous mixtures. Material specifications. Porous Asphalt. BSI; 2016.
– BS EN 13108-8:2016. Bituminous mixtures. Material specifications. Reclaimed asphalt. BSI; 2016.
– BS EN 13108-3:2016. Bituminous mixtures. Material specifications. Soft Asphalt. BSI; 2016.
– BS EN 13108-5:2016. Bituminous mixtures. Material specifications. Stone Mastic Asphalt. BSI; 2016.
– BS EN 450-1:2012. Fly ash for concrete. Definition, specifications and conformity criteria. BSI; 2012.
– BS EN 14227-3:2013. Hydraulically bound mixtures. Specifications. Fly ash bound granular mixtures. BSI; 2013.
– BS EN 14227-4:2013. Hydraulically bound mixtures. Specifications. Fly ash for hydraulically bound mixtures. BSI;
2013.
– BS EN 13055:2016. Lightweight aggregates. BSI; 2016.
– Highways Agency. Specification for Highway Works - series 600. 2016.
– BS EN 13285:2010. Unbound mixtures. Specifications. BSI; 2010.
Wst 03 Operational waste
1 1 1 1

Minimum standards
Aim
To encourage the recycling of operational waste through the provision of dedicated storage facilities and space.
Value
–
Helping to meet corporate and statutory
waste recycling targets
–
Reducing environmental impacts and costs
arising from the disposal of operational
waste
–
Ensuring that occupants have the facilities to
enable them to sort waste at source rather
than paying for this to be carried out off
site
– Providing convenient and well integrated

waste storage areas in suitable locations
Context
It is a statutory requirement for local authorities and private sector organisations to meet increasing recycling
targets. The aim is to reach higher amounts of recyclable and reusable waste that is re-processed as useful
materials.
It is therefore important to provide sufficient storage areas within the building to reflect the recyclable waste
streams that are generated and then collected by the local waste authority. This makes it as clear and convenient as
possible for the building users to separate waste at source and encourage the reduction of waste to landfill.
Assessment scope

Applicable Assessment criteria All All 1–3 1–3

None
2.0 Small industrial units For an industrial building or development site consisting of a number of
smaller units, each ≤ 200m²floor area, shared facilities that meet the above criteria for the building
or site as a whole are sufficient to achieve this credit.
2.1 Shopping centres and retail parks For shopping centres and retail parks there must be adequate
space to cater for each tenant and their potential recyclable waste volumes. Tenants that occupy a
large proportion of the centre, i.e. ‘flagship tenants’, must have their own dedicated compliant
facilities. For smaller non-flagship tenant units, compliant central or common facilities on-site or
dedicated spaces for individual units will meet the assessment criteria for this BREEAM issue.
2.2 Home composting information leaflet (multi-residential buildings) The leaflet must provide
information on:
– How composting works and why it is important;
– The materials that can be composted (e.g. raw vegetable peelings and fruit, shredded paper, tea
bags, etc.); and
– Details of the operation and management plan for the communal composting scheme.
Where a green or kitchen waste collection scheme is in operation, the information leaflet provided
by the local authority is sufficient to meet the information leaflet criteria.
2.3 Secure accommodation For a secure accommodation unit, compliance should be based on visitors
(not beds).
2.4 Multi-residential: supported living facility Where it is not possible to locate the recycling bins within a
communal area accessible to residents for safety reasons (e.g. where the residents have mental
health problems and free access to these facilities would pose significant risk of self-harm or harm
to others), it is acceptable to locate them within a dedicated non-obtrusive position accessible to
staff only, but in close proximity to the areas where recyclable waste material is generated.
2.5 Healthcare buildings and country-specific guidance In addition to the standard criteria, the waste
facilities are compliant with the relevant NHS guidelines for that part of the UK.
England
Use HTM 07-01 (England version) where the criterion refers to the use of relevant NHS guidelines
for the country.
Northern Ireland
Use HTM07-01 (Northern Ireland version)where the criterion refers to the use of relevant NHS
guidelines for the country.
Scotland
Use SHTN3 NHS Scotland Waste Management guidance Part A-Best Practice Overview and Part B
Waste Management Policy template where the criterion refers to the use of relevant NHS guidelines
for the country.
Wales
Use WHTM07-01 Safe management of healthcare (Wales) where the criterion refers to the use of
relevant NHS guidelines for the country.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Operational waste

1 Provide a dedicated space for the segregation and storage of operational recyclable waste generated. The
space is:
1.a: Clearly labelled, to assist with segregation, storage and collection of the recyclable waste streams
1.b: Accessible to building occupants or facilities operators for the deposit of materials and collections by
waste management contractors
1.c: Of a capacity appropriate to the building type, size, number of units (if relevant) and predicted volumes of
waste that will arise from daily or weekly operational activities and occupancy rates.
2 For consistent and large amounts of operational waste generated, provide:
2.a: Static waste compactors or balers; situated in a service area or dedicated waste management space
2.b: Vessels for composting suitable organic waste OR adequate spaces for storing segregated food waste
and compostable organic material for collection and delivery to an alternative composting facility
2.c: A water outlet provided adjacent to or within the facility for cleaning and hygiene purposes where organic
waste is to be stored or composted on site.
Additionally for healthcare buildings only

3 The specified or installed operational waste facilities are compliant with the relevant NHS guidelines for that
part of the UK.
Additionally for multi-residential buildings with self-contained dwellings or

bedsits only
4 Provide three internal storage containers for each dwelling or bedsit with:
4.a: A minimum total capacity of 30 litres
4.b: No individual container smaller than 7 litres
4.c: All containers in a dedicated non-obstructive position
4.d: Storage containers for recycling in addition to non-recyclable waste storage
5 Provide home composting facilities and a home composting information leaflet within the kitchen area or
communal space for each self-contain dwelling or bedsit
Additionally for multi-residential buildings with individual bedrooms and

communal facilities only
6 Meet criteria4.aand 4.bfor self-contained dwellings or bedsits for every six bedrooms
7 Locate recyclable storage in a dedicated non-obstructive position in:
7.a: Communal kitchens OR

7.b: Communal space such as communal lounges or utility areas, if no communal kitchens are present
8 Provide home composting facilities and a home composting information leaflet within the kitchen area or
communal space
9 Internal composting waste storage is a minimum of 10 litres in volume for all homes
Compliance notes
Methodology
Determining if the dedicated space complies.

See criteria 1 and 2
The design team demonstrates that the provision of waste management facilities for the assessed building is
adequate given the building type, occupier (if known), operational function and likely waste streams and volumes to
be generated.
Where it is not possible to determine what provision should be made, use the following guide for minimum
storage space provision:
1. At least 2m²per 1000m²of net floor area for buildings < 5000m²
2. A minimum of 10m²for buildings ≥ 5000m²
3. An additional 2m²per 1000m²of net floor area where catering is provided (with an additional minimum
of 10m²for buildings ≥ 5000m²).
The net floor area should be rounded up to the nearest 1000m².
General waste
The storage area for recyclable materials must be in addition to areas and facilities provided for dealing with
general waste and other waste management facilities, e.g. compactors, balers and composters.
Internal storage areas

Where the facilities are situated internally, vehicular gate heights, widths and manoeuvring and loading space must
be sized to ensure ease of access for vehicles collecting recyclable materials.
Evidence

Definitions
Accessible space
Accessible space is typically within 20m of a building entrance. Depending on the size of the building, site
restrictions or tenancy arrangements, it may not be possible for the facilities to be within 20m of a building
entrance. In such circumstances, judgment on whether the space is ‘accessible’ to the building occupants and
vehicle collection must be made.
Clinical waste
Waste-derived from medical practices and defined as bodily fluids and wastes, drugs and medical equipment;
and other waste which, unless rendered safe, may prove hazardous or infectious to persons coming into contact
with it.
Dedicated non-obstructive position

An easily accessible cupboard under the sink or any other cupboard in the kitchen, next to the storage or likely
area for storing non-recyclable waste, where practical. Where a kitchen cupboard location is not possible, the
bins can be located near to the kitchen, in a utility room or connected garage, for example.
Flagship or anchor tenant

The largest and primary tenant within a retail development, typically department store-type retailers.
Recyclable storage
The following footprint dimensions (informed by the Metric handbook, Planning and design data(191)) can act as
a guide when determining size and accessibility criteria for the recyclable storage space:
1. Compactor dimensions: about the size of one car parking bay; 4.8 x 2.4m
2. Skip: the footprint of an 8 and 12 cubic yard skip measures 3.4m x 1.8m, therefore allow a minimum of
2.0m width and 4.0m length or 8m²area for the storage and access of such containers
3. Wheeled bins: 360 litre = 0.86m x 0.62/660 L= 1.2m x 0.7m/1100 L = 1.28m x 0.98m
4. Roll-on-roll-off containers: allow a minimum of 6.1m x 2.4m
5. Vehicle access: the following are dimensions for lorry types that are typically used to collect waste.
Therefore gate height and widths should not be smaller than these measurements:
a. Dustcart: medium capacity; length = 7.4m Height = 4m width 3.1m
b. Skip lorry: length = 7m Height = 3.35m width 3.1m.
Consideration must also be given to any other types of vehicle requiring access to this area, e.g. lorries for roll
on/off containers.
Individual recycling bins located at convenient locations throughout the building are necessary to maximise
recycling rates.
Waste compactor or baler

A machine that is designed to compress waste streams in order to improve storage and transport efficiency.
None.
Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes
1 1 1
Fully fitted Simple building Shell & core

Shell only
Aim
To minimise the wastage associated with the installation of floor and ceiling finishes in lettable areas in speculative
buildings where tenants have not been involved in their selection.
Value
–
Reduce costs associated with the
procurement, installation, removal and
disposal of materials following letting of
tenants' areas
–
Avoid environmental impacts associated with
the disposal of speculative materials
– Promote responsible selection of floor and

ceiling finishes and their maintenance during
occupation and operation, to avoid
unnecessary costs, time and disruption
Context
It is common practice for carpets and other floor finishes to be installed throughout office buildings built as
speculative developments. However, once tenants occupy the buildings they often replace the floor finishes to suit
their particular requirements, resulting in the original materials being wasted as it is rarely possible for them to be
reused elsewhere. In a typical office development, floor finishes are responsible for approximately one third of the
total embodied impacts.
Assessment scope

Applicable Assessment criteria All All All Not applicable

1.0 Where the developer has not specified or installed any floor or ceiling finishes for a shell and core
assessed building, the requirements are met and the credit can be awarded.
2.0 Office: show area A show area can be either a floor plate or an individual office but must be less
than 25% of the net lettable floor area to award this credit.
Assessment criteria
One credit - Speculative floor and ceiling finishes
Speculative office building types only

1 For tenanted areas where the future occupant is not known, install carpets, other floor finishes and ceiling
finishes in a show area only.
2 Only install specified floor and ceiling finishes selected by the known occupant of a development. Alternatively,
where only ceiling finishes and no carpets are installed, the building owner confirms that the first tenants will be
refused permission to make substantial alterations to the ceiling finishes.
None.
Compliance notes
Methodology
None.
Evidence

Definitions
None.
None.
Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change
1 1 1 1

Aim
To minimise the future need of carrying out works to adapt the building to take account of more extreme weather
changes resulting from climate change and changing weather patterns.
Value
– Maximise asset resilience and value
through consideration of the likely impacts of
future climate change on the project.
– Reduce future risks to end user safety arising
from extreme weather events and climate
change.
– Contribute to business continuity, planning in
response to the risks of extreme weather
events and climate change.
– Reduce the need for future adaptation,
maintenance, and disruption associated with
responding to climate change and extreme
weather events.
Context
Annual average UK temperature was 0.9C higher during the period 2005-2014 compared to 1961-1990.
Moreover, sea levels around the UK have risen by 15-20 centimetres since 1900 (192). These figures are forecast to
continue to change as a result of climate change. At the same time, there are upward trends in rainfall across the
UK. Higher levels of winter rainfall have been experienced often in increasingly heavy rainfall events leading to more
flooding and damage to buildings and infrastructure. These patterns are consistent with projections of more and
heavier rainfall for the UK in a warmer global atmosphere.
These changes increase health and safety risks to people and the built environment, increasing costs and disruption
for repair and adaptation. The building stock will largely remain as it currently is for the next 50 to 60 years, given
the relatively low levels of replacement that are likely to occur.
Therefore, there is a need for strategies to mitigate the impact of these events on our building stock overall and in
particular to ensure that new buildings are designed and constructed to minimise future risks while avoiding over
specification and resource use in the meantime.
Assessment scope

Applicable Assessment criteria All All All 1–3

None
None
Assessment criteria
One credit - Resilience of structure, fabric, building services and renewables

installation
1 Conduct a climate change adaptation strategy appraisal by the end of Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or
equivalent) using:
1.a: A systematic risk assessment to identify the impact of expected extreme weather conditions arising from
climate change on the building over its projected life cycle. The assessment covers the installation of
building services and renewable systems, as well as structural and fabric resilience aspects and includes
(see Methodology on the next page):
1.a.i Hazard identification
1.a.ii Hazard assessment
1.a.iii Risk estimation
1.a.iv Risk evaluation
1.a.v Risk management.
2 Develop recommendations or solutions based on the climate change adaptation strategy appraisal, during or
prior to Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent), that aim to mitigate the identified impact.
3 Provide an update during Technical Design (RIBA Stage 4 or equivalent) demonstrating how the
recommendations or solutions proposed at Concept Design have been implemented where practical and
cost effective. Omissions have been justified in writing by the assessor.
Exemplary level criteria – Responding to climate change

Achievement of the following criteria demonstrates a holistic approach to the design and construction of the
building's life cycle to mitigate against the impacts of climate change.
To achieve an exemplary performance credit :
4 Meet criteria 1 above to 3 above.
5 Meet the criteria or achieve credits of the assessment issues given in Table 69 below.
Table 69 Criterion 5 above requirements

Issue Requirements Link to Wst 05 issue
Hea 04 Thermal comfort Criterion 6 Prevent increasing risks of overheating
Ene 01 Reduction of energy A minimum of eight Maximise energy efficiency to tackle likely energy
use and carbon emissions credits demand and minimise resultant carbon emissions
Ene 04 Low carbon design The passive design Maximise opportunities to avoid unnecessary
analysis credit carbon emissions
Wat 01 Water consumption A minimum of three Minimise water demand in periods of drought
credits
Mat 05 Designing for Criteria 2–5 Avoid increased risks of deterioration and higher
durability and resilience maintenance demands
Pol 03 Flood and surface Flood resilience : a Minimise the risks of increased flood risk and surface
water management minimum of one water run-off affecting the site or others
credit
Surface water run-
off: two credits
Compliance notes
Methodology
As a minimum follow these steps when completing the climate change adaptation strategy appraisal (see criterion
1)
Responsible individual
1. Nominate an individual to co-ordinate the necessary work and to be responsible for the final report. For
example, this could be a BREEAM AP if appointed.
Hazard identification
1. Review the evidence and information from relevant bodies and resources (Additional information on
page 367) to identify and understand the expected impacts of increased extreme weather events and
climate change on the building. Relevant bodies include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Local authorities
b. Statutory bodies, e.g. Defra, Environment Agency, Northern Ireland Environment Agency (NIEA), Scottish
Environment Protection Agency (SEPA) etc.
c. Technical bodies, e.g. CIBSE, UK Climate Impacts Programme (UKCIP).
2. As a guide, all adaptation plans should consider the following impacts of climate change and extreme
weather events and describe how the design mitigates against them, where appropriate:
a. Flooding
b. Storms (including high winds)
c. Cold events
d. Heat waves (including temperature increases)
e. Drought (including reduced summer rainfall)
f. Milder winters
g. Wetter winters (including increased moisture and driving rain)
h. Warmer summers and increased solar radiation
i. Temperature variation
j. Precipitation, e.g. rain and snow
k. Subsidence or ground movement
3. Identify likely hazards.
Hazard assessment
1. Identify the likelihood and the magnitude or scale of the hazards identified.
This includes climate change scenarios and their potential impact throughout the lifetime of different building
elements.
Risk estimation
1. Identify the risk presented by these hazards to the building and the likely impact of the hazards taking into
account the following aspects as a minimum:
a. Structural stability
b. Structural robustness
c. Weather proofing and detailing
d. Material durability
e. Health and safety of building occupants and others
f. Impacts on building contents and business continuity.
Risk evaluation
1. Evaluate the potential impact of these risks on the building.
2. Determine the tolerable risk threshold.
3. Check the sensitivity of the risk assessment (see Definitions below).
4. Identify areas where the risks are unacceptable in health and safety, life cycle assessment and financial
terms.
Risk management
1. Identify risk reduction measures.
2. Mitigate the hazards as far as is practically feasible.
3. Adapt the design and specification to incorporate the measures identified by the risk assessment in the
final design.
Evidence

Definitions
Durability
The ability to withstand wear, pressure or damage.
Hazard
A hazard is a situation or event which has the potential to cause harm. It may be an accidental or a malicious
action, insufficient strength or resistance, or excessive deviation from intended limits.
Resilience
The ability of a building or structural system or material to withstand an accidental or exceptional loading or other
incident without experiencing an undue degree of damage or decrease in performance, such that progressive
collapse, loss of performance or disproportionate degree of damage occurs.
Sensitivity of the risk assessment

Sensitivity analysis is a technique used to determine how changing the values of a variable will alter a dependent
variable under a given set of assumptions. Where several values could be changed to affect a dependent
variable, changes need to be made one at a time. For example, the use of different climate change scenarios
would alter the hazards of the development.
Structural and fabric resilience

BREEAM defines this as the ability of a structure to withstand an increased burden of weather, increased pressure
or hazards associated with climate change. Examples of increased pressures or hazards to be considered include
the impacts of climate change and extreme weather events described in the Methodology on page 364 section
under Hazard identification.
Systematic risk assessment

A structured approach to help professionals identify, evaluate and manage risk, where the reduction of the risks
identified is integral to the process. It includes:
1. Identifying the hazards

2. Eliminating the hazards, as far as reasonably practicable
3. Reducing the risks from each hazard, as far as reasonably practicable
4. Developing the building design to be robust.
Checklists and tables
Table 70 below is an example of a climate change adaptation strategy appraisal for a selection of building
elements and climate change impacts. This example is not a complete appraisal, but illustrates some of the content
that should be included in the appraisal.
Table 70 Climate change adaptation strategy appraisal examples

Hazard
Climate change hazard Flooding Cold events
Hazard assessment
Hazard scale High High
Building element Ground floor flooring material Façade finishing materials
Building element lifetime 10–15 years 10 years
Hazard likelihood High High
Impact magnitude Medium Medium
Risk
Risk estimation Flooring material becomes unusable and Façade finishing materials
needs to be changed. Potential health risks are not affected by cold, but
associated to dampness. Potential impact primarily by snow, strong
on business continuity. winds and rain
Risk evaluation Risk assessment sensitivity: flooding has a Risk assessment sensitivity:
high likelihood under all scenarios. Health flooding has a high likelihood
risks are beyond the tolerable risk threshold. under all scenarios. No health
risks identified.
Risk reduction measure Select a flood-resistant flooring material None
The following resources for climate change scenarios and impacts are available:
1. Relevant Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) report on Impacts of Climate Change and
Adaptation(193)
2. UK Climate Change Risk Assessment (194)
3. Climate Change Impacts www.climatejust.org.uk
4. Developing H++ climate change scenarios for heat waves, droughts, floods, windstorms and cold snaps
(195)
The following resources for best practice design guidance are available:
5. The Environmental Design Pocketbook(196)

6. Adaptation resources: www.climatejust.org.uk/resources
7. Adaptation or retrofitting (197)
8. Zero Carbon Hub: www.zerocarbonhub.org/full-lib
9. Design for climate change(198)
The book 'Design for climate change' describes buildings and issues as part of the Design for Future
Climate, Adapting Buildings programme, the largest programme focusing on the climate change
adaptation of buildings in the UK. This programme from the Technology Strategy Board (TSB) aims to
improve the climate resilience of building projects. The book has guidance on construction, including
structural stability.
10. The UKCIP Adaptation Wizard v 4.0 2013: www.ukcip.org.uk/wizard/about-the-wizard/

11. Potential costs and benefits of adaptation options: A review of existing literature(199). This is a technical
paper by the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC), which reviews methods
of costing adaptation options and assessing their benefits.
12. National Adaptation Programme 2013 (200)
The National Adaptation Programme report has been drawn up by the government, industry and other non-
government organisations working together. It contains a mix of policies and actions to help the UK to adapt
successfully to future weather conditions, by dealing with the risks and making the most of the opportunities.
13. Potential implications of climate change in the built environment (201)
The BRE report 'Potential implications of climate change in the built environment', discusses climate change
adaptation strategies, including some for structural resilience
Wst 06 Design for disassembly and

adaptability
2 2 2 2

Aim
To avoid unnecessary materials use, cost and disruption arising from the need for future adaptation works as a
result of changing functional demands, climatic change and to maximise the ability to reclaim and reuse materials at
final demolition in line with the principles of a circular economy.
Value
– Reduced waste and cost associated with
future refurbishment or fit-out works and
ultimately in demolition.
– Improved the ability to cost-effectively reuse
and recycle materials.
– Increased the lifetime value of materials and
products.
– Encourage consideration of circular economy
principles during design and construction.
– Reduced costs and disruption associated
with the need for future adaptation,
demolition and strip-out, and therefore
reducing the associated waste and costs.
Context
The construction industry is responsible for approximately 60% of total UK materials use and one third of all waste
produced (202). At least 17 million tonnes of inert waste are produced by the UK construction industry(203).
Typically buildings are stripped out or in many cases even demolished considerably earlier than their design life
would predict or structural stability require. In most cases only high value materials are reclaimed or reused and
many resources are either used for low grade uses, taken to landfill or in some cases, even illegally dumped leading
to increased environmental damage and costs to local authorities and society. This risk can be reduced by
considering building adaptability and also future disassembly to allow easy material separation and reuse. This
includes exposed and reversible connections, layer independence and standardisation which can facilitate
disassembly.
Assessment scope

Assessment type specific notes None see ref 1.0 None None

None
1.0 Criterion 5 is not applicable to prison buildings.
1.1 Healthcare buildings Some openings in public and patient areas need to be provided with
restricted opening distances of not more than 100mm (HBN 00-10 Part D: Windows and
associated hardware(204)). This is for health and safety reasons, especially where windows are
within reach of the elderly, mentally ill or children. However, it is felt that good design can overcome
these restrictions and provide compliant natural ventilation solutions, even in safety-sensitive areas.
1.2 Industrial buildings Criterion 5 only applies to office areas and not to operational ones. If the
building does not contain any office areas, this criterion is not applicable.
Wst 06 Design for disassembly and

adaptability
Assessment criteria
One credit - Design for disassembly and functional adaptability

1 Conduct a study to explore the ease of disassembly and the functional adaptation potential of different
design scenarios (see Functional adaptation strategy study and Ease of disassembly) by Concept Design (RIBA
Stage 2 or equivalent).
2 Develop recommendations or solutions (see Functional adaptation implementation ) based on the study
(criterion 1 above), during or prior to Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent), that aim to enable and
facilitate disassembly and functional adaptation.
3 Provide an update, during Technical Design (RIBA Stage 4 or equivalent), on
3.a: How the recommendations or solutions proposed by Concept Design have been implemented where
practical and cost effective. Omissions have been justified in writing to the assessor.
3.b: Changes to the recommendations and solutions for the development during the development of the
Technical Design.
4 Produce a building adaptability guide to communicate the characteristics allowing functional adaptability and
disassembly to prospective tenants.
One credit - Adaptability: Potential for natural ventilation (credit not

applicable to prison buildings)
5 Design the building ventilation strategy to be flexible and adaptable to potential building occupant needs and
climatic scenarios. This can be demonstrated as follows:
5.a: Design occupied spaces of the building so that they are capable of providing fresh air entirely via a natural
ventilation strategy. The following are methods deemed to satisfy this criterion dependent upon the
complexity of the proposed system:
5.a.i Design room depths in accordance with CIBSE AM10 (205) (section 2.4) to ensure effectiveness of
any natural ventilation system. The openable window area in each occupied space is equivalent to
5% of the gross internal floor area of that room or floor plate;
OR
5.a.ii The design demonstrates that the natural ventilation strategy provides adequate cross flow of air
to maintain the required thermal comfort conditions and ventilation rates. This is demonstrated
using ventilation design tool types that meet the requirements of CIBSE AM10 (or for education
buildings by using the ClassVent tool).
5.b: For a strategy which does not rely on openable windows, or which has occupied spaces with a plan depth
greater than 15m, the design must demonstrate (in accordance with criterion 5.a.ii above above) that the
ventilation strategy can provide adequate cross flow of air to maintain the required thermal comfort
conditions and ventilation rates.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Functional adaptation strategy study

The study must consider the following as a minimum:
– Feasibility: The likelihood to contain multiple or alternative building uses and area functions over the expected life
cycle, e.g. related to the structural design of the building.
– Accessibility: Design aspects that facilitate the replacement of all major plant within the life of the building, e.g.
panels in floors and walls that can be removed without affecting the structure, providing lifting beams and
hoists. Accessibility also involves access to local services, such as local power, data infrastructure etc.
– Versatility: The degree of adaptability of the internal environment to accommodate changes in working
practices.
– Convertibility: The degree of adaptability of the internal physical space and external shell to accommodate
changes of in-use.
– Expandability: The potential for the building to be extended, horizontally or vertically.
– 'Refurbishment potential': The potential for major refurbishment, including replacing the façade.
For additional guidance, see Table 71 on page 373.
Functional adaptation implementation

The implementation will be specific to the building and scope of the project, but information should be made
available to the assessor covering:
– Options for multiple building uses and area functions based on design details, e.g. modularity.
– Routes and methods for major plant replacement, e.g. networks and connections have flexibility and capacity for
expansion.
– Accessibility for local plant and service distribution routes, e.g. detailed information on building conduits and
connections infrastructure.
– The potential for the building to be extended, horizontally or vertically.
Ease of disassembly
Ease of disassembly is facilitated by principles allowing the building or parts of the building to be disassembled at
the end of its life, or to be renovated rather than demolished, with individual components being used for other
purposes. The study should consider the following as a minimum:
– Accessibility (see Functional adaptation strategy study).
– Durability: use materials which require less frequent maintenance, repair or replacement, considering them within
the context of the life span of the building.
– Exposed and reversible connections: making the connections more visible provides opportunities to optimise
material and product reuse. Welded connections prohibit disassembly and it is preferable to use screws and
bolts to allow for disassembly and material reuse.
– Layer independence: designing building systems and components in layers so that removal, adjustment or
replacement of some elements is feasible, especially when different components have different life spans and
maintenance needs.
– Avoidance of unnecessary toxic treatments and finishes. Some finishes can contaminate the substrate in a way
that they are no longer reusable or recyclable. This should be avoided unless finishes serve a specific purpose.
– Standardisation can accommodate reuse and upgrading. It involves aspects such as dimensions, components,
connections and modularity.
For additional information, see Table 72 on page 374.
Mechanically ventilated or cooled buildings

See criterion 5 on page 370.
Buildings that employ a mechanically ventilating or cooling strategy are still able to achieve this credit provided it can
be demonstrated that the features required by the criteria can be made easily available to the building user, e.g.
windows fixed shut for an air-conditioned strategy can be modified to be opening windows. The aim of the
potential for natural ventilation criteria is to ensure that a building is capable of providing fresh air using a natural
ventilation strategy. Where the building is predominantly naturally ventilated, but mechanical ventilation is necessary
to boost ventilation during peak conditions, (i.e. maximum occupancy and peak temperature conditions) due to the
function or specific usage patterns of the building, the potential for the natural ventilation credit can still be
awarded provided calculations or modelling demonstrate that the mechanical ventilation system will be required
for ≤ 5% of the annual occupied hours in the occupied spaces for the adopted building design or layout.
Evidence
Ref Interim design stage Final post-construction stage

All Disassembly and functional adaptability As per interim design stage.
study, implementation plan report,
building adaptability guide.
BRE has avoided being overly prescriptive for this issue, recognising that this is a complex environmental and design
issue where solutions and approaches are largely influenced by building specific factors. The evidence required to
demonstrate compliance will vary according to RIBA stage. Some examples are:
– Concept Design: reports outlining the activity relating to functional adaptability and disassembly - ideas
discussed, analysis and decisions taken
– Concept and Developed Design stages: drawings or building information model (BIM).
– All stages: meeting notes, construction programme, responsibilities schedule-indicating parties consulted.
The BREEAM Assessor should use their judgment in determining whether the aim and intent of the credit has been
met using appropriate project information to back their judgment. BRE Global will endorse the BREEAM Assessor's
judgment through the Quality Assurance audit where a reasonable justification to award the credit on the basis of
project team actions and proposed design solutions is evident.
Definitions
Building adaptability guide
The guide can be in the form of an analogue document or an Asset Information Model from the Building
Information Model (BIM) created in accordance with PAS 1192 Part 2-2013 (206) and PAS 1192 Part 3-2014
(207). See the new ISO 20887 for information on what the guide could include.
Building functional adaptability

Work to an existing building that responds to a required change of use or requirements and goes beyond
maintenance and repairs. These changes solve functional problems and could provide significant improvements.
The functional adaptation works could include alterations, conversions or extensions.
Functional adaptability
The ability of a building to be adapted for a change in operational requirements within the same building type or
for use as a different building type.
Occupied space
The Health Technical Memorandum 07-07 (208) includes guidance on future-proofing healthcare buildings.
A new ISO (20887) focusing on the ‘Design for disassembly and adaptability of buildings and civil engineering
works’ is expected to be published.
Table 71 below provides examples of functional design measures that may be adopted for each assessment part
when considering accessibility, spatial adaptability and expandability
Table 71 Design measures allowing future adaptation

Accessibility Spatial Expandability
adaptability
Fabric and Use of products or systems which allow Location of Provision to add
structure: easy replacements structural extensions or
– External walls components alterations to increase
– Cladding within the floor building capacity
– Ground and space
first floor
– Roof
Core and local Inclusion of facilities management Provision of capacity in
services: requirements and construction design infrastructure to enable
– Mechanical management feedback for future future expansion and
and electrical operational needs. adaptation
– Plumbing
– Stairs and lifts
– Fire
Interior design: Use of products or systems which allow – Layout in – Identifying or
– Finishes easy replacements. standardised recognising potential
– Floors grids future functional
– Interior walls – Use of requirements
– Connections inherent – Efficient use of space
finishes to to allow for any
allow increase in occupancy
replacement
– Use of
standardised
material sizes
Table 72 on the next page provides examples of considerations when designing for disassembly.
Table 72 Examples of design measures and aspects to consider regarding future disassembly
Principles for Examples of design measures and aspects to consider
disassembly
Durability – Durability of different building elements based on warranties and risk of being
broken during disassembly
– Consider building elements within the context of the building life span and the
building sector
– Use of temporary structures when a short life span is expected
Exposed and reversible – Exposed and reversible connections facilitate disassembly
connections – Consider space availability between building elements when aiming to
accommodate disassembly
– Poured and welded connections are likely to harm components and prevent
disassembly
Layer independence Layers standing independently, especially when components have different
lifespans.
The following principal layers can be identified as follows:
– Structure: foundation and load-bearing elements
– Skin: exterior surfaces
– Services
– Space plan: the interior layout
– Stuff: furnishings and carpets
Standardisation – Standard-size materials can accommodate multiple uses, reuse and upgrading
– Standard types of connections can be separated and reused more easily
– Modularity allows elements to be slotted together or taken apart to promote
disassembly and flexible environments
Land Use and Ecology 375
Land Use and Ecology
13% 12.5% 15.5% 19%
Summary
This category encourages sustainable land use, habitat protection and creation, and improvement of long term
biodiversity for the building’s site and surrounding land. Issues in this section relate to the reuse of brownfield sites
or those of low ecological value, mitigation and enhancement of ecology and long term biodiversity management.
LE 01 Site selection 2 credits
– Recognition of the reuse of previously developed and contaminated land where appropriate remediation has
taken place.
LE 01 Site selection
fsd 2 2 2

Aim
To encourage the use of previously occupied or contaminated land and avoid land which has not been previously
disturbed.
Value
– Avoids the use of greenfield land
therefore reducing the environmental impact
of the development
– Regeneration provides social and economic
benefits to the development and the
surrounding local community
– Remediation removes threats to health and
safety, and enables land, to be improved that
would otherwise be left.
Context
Brownfield redevelopment not only cleans up environmental health hazards and eyesores, but also stimulates
community regeneration, particularly when communities input into the consultation process. The reclamation and
reuse of previously developed sites also aligns with Government policies to increase the uptake of brownfield land,
and allows us to preserve existing biodiversity by reducing our reliance on greenfield land.
Assessment scope


None
2.0 Education (schools only) - Playing fields
Development of a playing field within the development footprint can be counted as development
on previously occupied land only if an equivalent area of playing field is reinstated within one year of
the completed construction works; and where such reinstatement will not encroach on land of high
ecological value.
2.1 Prisons
All land within a secure perimeter fence on an existing prison sites can be classified as previously
occupied land. Therefore assessments of buildings located within this area will achieve the credit.
If the secure perimeter fence of a prison is being extended to accommodate the proposed
building, or the proposed building is located on a completely new site, then the building must
comply with the assessment criteria defined above.
Assessment criteria
– Previously occupied land (1 credit)

– Contaminated land (1 credit)
One credit - Previously occupied land

1 At least 75% of the proposed development’s footprint is on an area of land which has previously been
occupied (see Definitions on the facing page).
One credit - Contaminated land

2 A contaminated land professional's site investigation, risk assessment and appraisal has deemed land within
the site to be affected by contamination. The site investigation, risk assessment and appraisal have identified:
2.a: The degree of contamination
2.b: The contaminant sources or types
2.c: The options for remediating sources of contamination which present an unacceptable risk.
3 The client or principal contractor confirms that remediation of the site will be carried out in accordance with the
remediation strategy and its implementation plan as recommended by the contaminated land professional
(see Definitions).
Compliance notes
Methodology
Previously developed land - Infill sites

When assessing new buildings developed within the boundary of an existing site, they do not automatically comply
with the reuse of land criteria. At least 75% of the land on which the new building will be sited must meet the
definition of 'previously occupied' (for prisons, refer the Assessment Scope section).
Contaminated Land - Scope

Contaminated land that has been decontaminated solely for health and safety reasons, or for historic remediation
(rather than for the specific purpose of re-development) is not within the scope of the assessment. The credit for
use of contaminated land can only be awarded where remediation has taken place to enable development of the
site for the assessed building, or a larger phased development that includes the assessed building.
Contaminated land - Large sites split into smaller plots

When assessing a large site that has been remediated and then packaged up into smaller plots of land for
individual buildings (possibly as part of a phased development strategy), the credit can be awarded regardless of
the plot location of the assessed building within the wider development plan. This is on the condition that the site
could not have been developed without remediation work taking place.
Evidence

3 A copy of the remediation Evidence to demonstrate the recommendations
strategy and implementation set out in the remediation strategy and
plan implementation plan have been implemented
Definitions
Contaminated land professional

An individual that holds a degree or equivalent qualification in chemistry, environmental science or management,
earth sciences, civil engineering or a related subject, and has a minimum of three years relevant experience (within
the last five years) in site investigation, risk assessment and appraisal. Such experience must clearly demonstrate a
practical knowledge of site investigation methodologies and understanding of remediation techniques and
national legislation on the subject; as well as acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for
remediation.
Development footprint
The development footprint includes any land used for buildings, hardstanding, landscaping, site access or where
construction work is carried out (or land is being disturbed in any other way), plus a 3m boundary in every
direction around these areas. It also includes any areas used for temporary site storage and buildings. If it is not
known exactly where buildings, hardstanding, site access, temporary storage and buildings will be located, it
must be assumed that the development footprint is the entire development site.
Land affected by contamination

Land that could not be legally or safely developed or built on to the proposed end use without the remediation
of contamination. Contamination is defined as any substance or agent in, or on the ground within the
development footprint, which presents an unacceptable risk to human health, property or the environment. For
the purposes of BREEAM, substances or agents that could present unacceptable contamination risks are defined
as those that act as a barrier to the development of land, which could include certain plant species such as, but
not limited to, Japanese knotweed and giant hogweed.
Where asbestos is found to be present in the ground this is classed as contamination for the purposes of this
issue. If asbestos is present in existing building fabric, the site cannot be classified as contaminated land.
Previously occupied land

For the purposes of this issue BREEAM defines previously occupied land as that which is or was occupied by a
permanent structure, including any associated fixed surface infrastructure (the definition is based on the National
Planning Policy Framework(209) definition of previously developed land, with some further clarifications for items
3 and 4). The definition excludes:
1. Land that is or has been occupied by agricultural or forestry buildings.

2. Land that has been developed for minerals extraction or waste disposal by landfill purposes where
provision for restoration has been made through development control procedures.
3. Land inbuilt-up areas such as parks, recreation grounds and allotments which, although they may feature
paths, pavilions and other buildings, have not been previously occupied.
4. Land that was previously occupied but where the remains of the permanent structure or fixed surface
structure have blended into the landscape in the process of time (to the extent that it can reasonably be
considered as part of the natural surroundings), typically over a period of more than fifty years.
Proposed development
Any development (building, hard landscaping, car park and access roads) that falls within the boundary of the
assessed site.
Remediation
Any activity undertaken to prevent, minimise, remedy or mitigate the risk caused by contaminated land to human
health, the environment or local resources such as sources of potable water.
None.
Pollution 381
Pollution
10% 9% 9.5% 5.5%
Summary
This category addresses the prevention and control of pollution and surface water run-off associated with the
building's location and use. Issues in this section aim to reduce the buildings impact on surrounding communities
and environments arising from light-pollution, noise, flooding and emissions to air, land and water.
Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants 3 credits
– To reward buildings that reduce the impact of refrigerant gas emissions.

Pol 02 Local air quality Up to 2 credits
– To recognise buildings which limit their impact on local air quality, by consideration of the combustion plant and
fuel used on site.
Pol 03 Flood and surface water management 5 credits
– To reward buildings and their sites that limit on and off-site local flooding and hence the damage this can lead
to.
Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution 5 credits
– Avoidance or reduction of the impact of night time light pollution, through careful design and specification of
light sources.
Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution 5 credits
– Avoidance or reduction of the impact of external noise from the building.

Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants
Aim
To reduce the level of greenhouse gas emissions arising from the leakage of refrigerants from building systems.
Value
– Increase system resilience and market
value through the use of low impact
refrigerants in buildings.
– Minimising future liabilities and adaptation
costs associated with changes to statutory
requirements relating to refrigerant use.
– Limit the potential release and impact of
refrigerant gases into the atmosphere.
– Assist in meeting corporate CSR reporting
targets relating to refrigerant use.
Context
The typical refrigerants used in building cooling systems are major greenhouse gases that are many times more
potent than carbon dioxide in their contribution to global warming and climate change. Although released in much
smaller quantities they are, never the less, a significant contributor to increasing global temperatures. As such they
are the focus of increasingly strict regulatory controls internationally and nationally. Worldwide agreements such as
the 1992 United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC) and its extension the Kyoto
Protocol commit signatories to reducing greenhouse gas emissions and banning the worst performing gases. The
agreements seek to shift use to low impact refrigerants over time and so provide a timescale for the phasing out
of more potent refrigerants because the use of the gases is widespread and key to industries across developed
and developing countries.
BREEAM seeks to support this agenda and promote more rapid change by creating market value for
developments with reduced impact refrigerants by limiting the volume or weight of gases used, their potential
impact and for specifying systems which detect and control leakage of gas to the atmosphere.
Assessment scope

Applicable Assessment criteria All Not applicable All Not applicable
Assessment type specific notes None None See ref 1.0 None

1.0 If the building is designed to avoid the need for refrigerant containing building services, so no
refrigerant use will be specified for the fit-out, the available credits can be awarded by default.
None
Assessment criteria
Three credits - No refrigerant use

1 Where the building does not require the use of refrigerants within its installed plant or systems. For Shell only
assessments, if the building is designed in such a way that it avoids the need for refrigerant containing building
services, and therefore no 'refrigerant-using' building services or systems will be specified for the fit-out, then
the available credits can be awarded by default.
OR alternatively, where the building does require the use of refrigerants, the three credits can be awarded as
follows:
Prerequisite
2 All systems (with electric compressors) must comply with the requirements of BS EN 378:2008 (210) (parts 2
and 3). Where refrigeration systems containing ammonia are installed, the Institute of Refrigeration Ammonia
Refrigeration Systems code of practice(211) must be complied with.
Impact of refrigerant
Two credits
3 Where the systems using refrigerants have direct effect life cycle CO2 equivalent emissions (DELC) of ≤ 100
kgCO2e/kW. For systems which provide cooling and heating, the worst performing output based on the lower
of kW cooling output and KW heating output must be used to complete the calculation. To calculate the DELC
please refer to the relevant definitions in the Methodology on the facing page and Additional information on
page 389 sections.
OR
4 Where air-conditioning or refrigeration systems are installed the refrigerants used have a Global Warming
Potential (GWP) ≤ 10.
OR
One credit
5 Where the systems using refrigerants have DELC of ≤ 1000 kgCO2e/kW cooling and heating capacity.
One credit - Leak detection

6 Where the system is hermetically sealed. See Hermetically sealed systems on page 388
OR
6.a: Where the system is not hermetically sealed.
6.a.i Systems using refrigerants have a permanent automated refrigerant leak detection system
installed, that is robust and tested and capable of continuously monitoring for leaks.
OR
6.a.ii Where an inbuilt automated diagnostic procedure for detecting leakage is installed, which is enabled
for detecting leaks.
6.b: In the event of a leak, the system must be capable of automatically responding and managing the
remaining refrigerant charge to limit loss of refrigerant (see Automatic isolation and containment of
refrigerant on page 389).
Compliance notes
Methodology
BREEAM Pol 01 calculator

The number of Pol 01 BREEAM credits achieved is determined by the assessor using the BREEAM Pol 01 calculator.
The direct effect life cycle CO2e emissions (DELC) per kW of cooling and heating capacity are calculated using the
following equation:
Where:
Refrigerant loss operational: (Ref charge x Sys op-life x (L1 + L2 + S1 + S2))/100
Refrigerant loss system retirement = Ref charge x (1 - (Ref RecEff /100))
Where:
1. Ref charge: Refrigerant charge (kg)

2. Sysop-life: System operational lifetime (years)
3. Ref RecEff : Refrigerant Recovery Efficiency factor (%)
4. L1: Annual Leakage Rate (units: % Refrigerant charge)
5. L2: Annual Purge Release factor (% Refrigerant charge)
6. S1: Annual Service Release (% Refrigerant charge)
7. S2: Probability factor for catastrophic failure (% refrigerant charge loss/year)
8. GWP: Global Warming Potential of refrigerant
9. cooling and heating capacity (kW).
The following default values must be used, where system specific data are not available:
Sysop-life: System operational design life (years): see Table 73 on the next page
Ref RecEff : Refrigerant recovery efficiency factor (%): 95
L1: Annual leakage rates (% refrigerant charge): see Table 74 on the next page.
L2: Annual purge release factor (% refrigerant charge): 0.5 (if the system does not require an annual purge, zero
should be used).
S1: Annual service release (% refrigerant charge): 0.25 (this applies where the system requires opening up to carry
out the annual service. For systems which do not require opening up, there will be no associated annual release of
refrigerant, therefore a default of zero should be used).
S2: Probability factor for catastrophic failure (% refrigerant charge loss/year): 1 (based on a failure rate of 1 in 100
systems).
The following information must be sourced from the design team's mechanical and electrical engineer or system
manufacturer:
– System type
– Ref charge: Refrigerant charge (kg)
– GWP: Global Warming Potential of refrigerants
– cooling and heating capacity (kW).
Table 73 Default system operational design life values

System type Default system operational design life values (years)
Small or medium capacity chillers 15
Large capacity chillers 20
Unitary split 15
Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) system 15
All other systems 10
These figures are based on those reported in LOT 6 for air-conditioning units and the British Refrigeration
Association's (BRA) Guideline Methods of Calculating TEWI (Total Equivalent Warming Impact) (2006)(212).
Note: The following should be considered when determining whether the system specified is defined as small,
medium or large:
– Large capacity chiller: centrifugal compressor
– Medium capacity chiller: scroll or screw compressor
– Small capacity chiller: scroll compressor.
Table 74 Default values for DELC calculation when manufacturer's figures are not available
System type Annual leakage rate
(% of charge per annum)
Cold storage and display systems
Integral cabinets 3%
Split or condensing units 18%
Centralised 19%
Air-conditioning systems
Unitary split 15%
Small-scale chillers 10%
Medium or large chillers 5%
Heat pumps 6%
These figures are based on those reported in LOT 6 for air-conditioning units and also Table 2 of the Market
Transformation Programmes Briefing Note for Commercial Refrigeration no. 36, 'Direct Emission of
Refrigerant Gases' (version 1.2). The figures are based on the average of the leakage rates from the four
separate studies reported in Table 2 (where a range is reported, the higher value was used).
Specification of multiple systems

Where more than one air-conditioning or refrigeration system is installed in the building, the assessor must source
the relevant technical data for each system and enter it into the Pol 01 calculator. The calculator will then determine
the weighted average DELC for the multiple installation and the BREEAM credits can be awarded or withheld
accordingly.
Leak detection
The refrigerant leak detection criteria are still applicable in instances where any type of non-solid refrigerant is
present, i.e. even if the refrigerant meets BREEAM's DELC CO2e benchmarks. Exceptions to this are systems that use
natural and environmentally benign refrigerants, such as air and water (for example lithium bromide or water
absorption chillers) and installations of small multiple hermetic systems. These types of system or refrigerants will
achieve the leak detection credit by default. See criterion 6 on page 384.
District cooling systems

Where a project is connected to a district cooling system which is outside the scope of the project or the wider
development (for example phased developments), the system does not need to be included in the assessment.
This is on the basis that the design team do not have control over the specification of the system. Where the design
team do have control over the specification of the system, then it must be assessed.
Evidence

3, 5 Completed copy of the Pol 01 As per interim design stage
Calculator tool
3, 5 Documentary evidence supporting As per interim design stage
the data used to complete the
calculator tool.
Definitions
Direct effect life cycle (DELC) carbon dioxide equivalent

A measure of the effect on global warming arising from emissions of refrigerant (in the case of this BREEAM
assessment issue) from the equipment to the atmosphere over its lifetime (units: kgCO2eq.). The calculation
involves estimating the total refrigerant release over the period of operation and subsequent conversion to an
equivalent mass of carbon dioxide. Should the system use several different refrigerants, e.g. a primary refrigerant
and a secondary coolant, or a cascade system, individual calculations are made for all refrigerants which
contribute to the direct effect (see Methodology on page 385 section for a description of how DELC is
calculated).
Refrigerant leak detection

An automated permanently installed multi-point sensing system, designed to continuously monitor the
atmosphere in the vicinity of refrigeration equipment and, in the event of detection, raise an alarm. The system
may be aspirated or have multiple sensor heads linked to a central alarm unit or BMS (Building Management
System). Various sensor types are available including infra-red, semi-conductor or electro-chemical.
Refrigerant recovery
The process of removing refrigerant from a system and storing it in an airtight container.
Refrigerant pump down

The specification of automatic refrigerant pump down can further limit potential losses and damage to the
environment and have subsequent economic benefits to the building owner. Under the United Kingdom
Environmental Protection Act 1990 unwanted refrigerant and refrigerating system oil are classified as either
controlled or hazardous waste. Not only is it an offence to discharge them to the environment, but there are
procedures regarding transport, storage, transfer of ownership and ultimate disposal. Article 16 of EC
Regulation 2037/2000 specifies that used CFCs and HCFCs must be recovered for destruction or recycling or
reclamation.
Robust and tested refrigerant leak detection system

This is normally defined as that included on the Enhanced Capital Allowance (ECA) Energy Technology Product List
(213) (or an equivalent list). Where the system does not fall within the scope of the ECA energy technology
product list or an equivalent list, the design team must demonstrate to the assessor that the system specified
meets the principles of the scheme as far as is applicable.
Small-scale white goods

These should be defined as domestic scale white goods and would also include small individual display cabinets,
for example drinks cabinets in small retail shops.
Systems using refrigerants

The criteria of this issue apply to all building services installed in the building, regardless of the systems refrigerant
charge (kg). Services including, but are not limited to:
– Comfort cooling or space heating (including assessment of refrigerants in heat pumps)

– Cold storage, including commercial food and drink display cabinets but excluding small-scale white goods
– Process-based cooling loads, e.g. servers and IT equipment.
Global warming potential (GWP)

GWP is defined as the potential for global warming that a chemical has relative to 1 unit of carbon dioxide, the
primary greenhouse gas. In determining the GWP of the refrigerant, the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate
Change methodology using a 100-year integrated time horizon should be applied.
Hermetically sealed systems

Hermetically sealed plant (as defined in the F Gas regulations) can be awarded the Leak Detection credit by
default. The Regulations definition of hermetically sealed plant only allows systems to have a tested leakage rate
of less than 3 grams per year. This results in the risk of a large refrigerant leak due to system failure being
minimised.
Refrigerant
There are three main types of refrigerants:
1. Hydrogenated fluorocarbon refrigerants (HFCs) are made up of hydrogen, fluorine and carbon. These
do not use a chlorine atom (which is used in most refrigerants). Due to this they are known to be one of
the least damaging to the earth's ozone layer.
2. Hydrogenated chlorofluorocarbon refrigerants (HCFCs) are made up of hydrogen, chlorine, fluorine and
carbon. These refrigerants contain minimal amounts of chlorine; they are not as detrimental to the
environment as some other refrigerants.
3. Chlorofluorocarbon refrigerants (CFCs) contain chlorine, fluorine and carbon. These refrigerants carry
high amounts of chlorine so they are known to be the most hazardous to the ozone layer.
The use of CFCs and HCFCs as refrigerants has been addressed under the Montreal protocol. Phase-out
programmes have been agreed resulting in these substances no longer being used as refrigerants in all new
installations and most existing situations. The industry's favoured replacements are currently HFCs which are
often potent global warming contributors. Hydrocarbons and ammonia-based refrigerants have low or zero
GWP and are therefore preferred long term options. These are now widely available and are valid alternatives to
HFCs in all buildings, provided health and safety issues are fully addressed. The United Nations Environment
Programme (UNEP) hosts a HCFC help centre which contains information about the management and phase out
of HCFCs and alternatives to HCFCs in the refrigeration and air-conditioning sector www.uneptie.org.
Automatic isolation and containment of refrigerant

An example of a system which would meet criterion 6.b could be one which initiates an automated shut down and
pump down of the refrigerant into a separate storage tank.
Limiting loss of refrigerant in the event of a leak

BREEAM has not set specific requirements or methods regarding the most appropriate way of limiting refrigerant
loss. This will be different depending on the system type. Example methods are pump down, isolation or system
shut-down, etc.
Common refrigerants
Table 75 List of some common refrigerant types with low GWP
R-Number Chemical name GWP
100-yr
R-30 Dichloromethane 9
R-170 Ethane 3
R-290 Propane 3
R-600 Butane 3
R-600a Isobutane 3
R-702 Hydrogen 5.8
R-717 Ammonia 0
R-718 Water 0.2–0.2
R-729 Air (nitrogen, oxygen, argon) 1
R-744 Carbon dioxide 1
R1150 Ethylene 3
R-1234yf 2,3,3,3-Tetrafluoropropene 4
R-1270 Propylene 3
Sources: The United Nations Environment Programme '2010 Report of the Refrigeration, Air-conditioning and
Heat Pumps Technical Options Committee'
EN 378-1:2008+A2:2012 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements.
Part 1: Basic requirements, definitions, classification and selection criteria - Annex E.
The Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change' 5th Assessment Report, Chapter 8, 'Anthropogenic and
Natural Radiative Forcing', 2013
R-Number Chemical name GWP

100-yr
'Global environmental impacts of the hydrogen economy', Derwent et al, Int. J. Nuclear Hydrogen Production
and Application, Vol. 1, No. 1, 2006
The formula used to calculate the DELC emissions in BREEAM is based on the total equivalent warming impact
(TEWI) calculation method for new stationary refrigeration and air-conditioning systems. TEWI is a measure of the
global warming impact of equipment that takes into account both direct emissions and indirect emissions
produced through the energy consumed in operating the equipment. This BREEAM issue is concerned with direct
emissions and the BREEAM energy section is concerned with indirect emissions.
Refer to BS EN 378-1 (214) and the BRA's Guideline methods of calculating TEWI for further details. The BRA
publication also includes sectorial release factors for new systems designed to best practice standards.
REAL Zero
The refrigeration and air-conditioning sector supported by the Carbon Trust is working across all sectors of
business and industry, to help achieve significant reductions in carbon emissions due to refrigerant leakage from
installed systems. The Institute of Refrigeration led initiative, Real Zero, is building a clearer understanding of where
and why leakage occurs as well as how to prevent it.
For further information including guidance notes, calculators, tools and case study information, visit:
www.ior.org.uk and www.realskillseurope.eu.
Pol 02 Local air quality
Aim
To contribute to a reduction in local air pollution through the use of low emission combustion appliances in the
building.
Value
– Improved air quality for building occupants, visitors and neighbours leading to better health and wellbeing
outcomes.
– Increased staff satisfaction and productivity.
– Enhanced acceptability of a building locally especially in areas with compromised air quality that have their
emissions even more tightly controlled.
Context
Poor air quality has a detrimental effect on humans, fauna and flora. Gases such as Nitrous Oxides (NOx) can react
with other gases and environmental factors including sunlight to create substances that have a major impact on
health and wellbeing. The resulting substances can be highly detrimental to human health. They can be carcinogenic,
affect respiratory function (including asthma and other bronchial complaints), have a sensitising effect for allergy
suffers and increase instances of heart disease. Legislation covering the UK sets maximum acceptable limits for
measured air pollutants. Under this issue BREEAM seeks to limit emissions from developments in use that affect
local air quality.
Assessment scope

Applicable Assessment criteria All All All Not applicable

None
None
Assessment criteria
Up to two credits
1 All installed combustion plant that provide space heating and domestic hot water and for which minimum
emission levels have been set under European Directive 2009/125/EC(215)must meet the following emission
levels. All measurements must be provided by manufacturers, following the labelling requirements of the
directive. To award either one or two credits, all systems must be compliant for all emission levels, including the
second table if relevant to the fuel. Regardless of the pollutants responsible for the creation of an Air Quality
Management Area (AQMA), if the development is in an AQMA all emissions must meet the lower levels for that
technology and fuel for the credits to be awarded.
Table 76 Maximum NOx emission levels by appliance type, fuel and AQMA
Appliance type and unit Fuel In AQMA Outside AQMA
NO x NO x NO x NO x
(1 credit) (2 credits) (1 credit) (2 credits)
Boiler (mg/kWh) Gas 27 24 41 27
Boiler (mg/kWh) Oil 56 50 63 56
Boiler (mg/m³) Biomass 56 50 165 131
Boiler (mg/m³) Solid fuel 56 50 165 131
Cogeneration or heat pumps using Gas 34 30 52 34
external combustion (mg/kWh)
Cogeneration or heat pumps using Oil 56 50 108 96
external combustion(mg/kWh)
Cogeneration - using internal Gas 56 50 179 119
combustion engine
Cogeneration - using internal Oil 56 50 379 339
combustion engine(mg/kWh)
Local Space Heaters (mg/kWh) Gas and Oil 56 50 103 76
Open and closed fronted local Biomass, 56 50 165 131
space heaters (mg/m³) Solid fuel
and Wood
pellets
Table 77 Maximum particulate matter and volatile organic compound emissions for appliances using biomass,
solid fuel and wood pellets
Appliance type and Fuel In AQMA Outside AQMA
unit 1 Credit 2 Credits 1 Credits 2 Credits
PM VOC PM VOC PM VOC PM VOC
Boiler (mg/m³) Biomass 6 7 4 5 27 13 14 7
Boiler (mg/m³) Solid Fuel 6 7 4 5 29 13 19 7
Open faced local Biomass 6 20 4 10 39 50 29 50
space heater (mg/m³) and Solid
Fuel
Closed face local Wood 6 20 4 10 16 43 13 26

space heater (mg/m³) Pellets
Closed face local Biomass 6 20 4 10 33 50 26 50
space heater (mg/m³)
Closed face local Solid Fuel 6 20 4 10 33 50 40 50
space heater (mg/m³)
PMs = particulate matter and VOC = volatile organic compounds.
For the purposes of BREEAM, PM and VOC emissions are only relevant to the assessment of biomass and solid
fuel fired technologies.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Awarding credits
All three emission levels (if applicable to the fuel) must be met. Where a development is in an AQMA, regardless of
the emissions which have resulted in the AQMA, all relevant emission levels in the tables need to be met to award
credits.
Units of measure for emissions

The Ecodesign Directive comes into force in September 2018. This sets performance requirements for combustion
powered heating systems and requires manufacturers to publish the NOx, particulate matter and VOC emission
levels of their products. BREEAM uses the same units of measure as the Directive, which are: NOx measured in
mg/kWh fuel input (Gross Calorific Value (GCV)) for gas or oil appliances Particulate matter and VOCs for all solid
fuel or biomass boilers measured in mg/mm³10% O2 dry basis Particulate matter and VOCs for all solid fuel or
biomass local heaters measured in mg/m³13% O2 dry basis.
New build extensions to existing building

If the heating and hot water demand for the new extension is being met by an existing system, then the NOx
emission levels for the existing system must be assessed against the criteria of this issue.
Grid electricity
Where grid electricity is used to supply building systems emissions should be assumed to be zero for the purpose
of BREEAM. The reason for this is based on the aim of the issue, which is to improve local air quality.
Heat recovery
Heat recovery can be considered as having zero NOx emissions for the purpose of this issue.
Open flue
No credits may be awarded for open flue heating or hot water systems.
Buildings not heated by combustion appliances

Buildings which do not use combustion appliances as a source of space heating or hot water (for example those
using only grid electricity) will have zero emissions affecting local air quality. This means the aim of the issue has been
met, so the two Pol 02 credits can be awarded by default.
Evidence

Definitions

www.ncm.bre.co.uk
www.ncm.bre.co.uk/
NO x emissions
NOx emissions are pollutant gases produced by the combustion of fossil fuels. NOx reacts with heat and sunlight
to produce ozone that can cause serious respiratory problems. It also reacts with water to produce acid rain
which has a detrimental effect on ecosystems.
Particulate matter emissions

Particulate matter (PM) is made up of microscopic solid and liquid particles suspended in air. They are a form of
air pollution and included in the assessment of Pol 02 because of their wide ranging effects especially on humans
(for example they are designated as a Group 1 carcinogen), climate and plants. They range in size, but local
monitoring for AQMAs report on those which are less than 10 micrometres.
Volatile organic compounds

Volatile organic compounds (VOC) are any liquid or solid that evaporates spontaneously at the prevailing
temperature and pressure of the atmosphere with which it is in contact. Some VOCs can affect human health
directly, including being cancer causing and affecting the respiratory tract. They can also react with ozone to
produce other products which can cause serious respiratory problems. VOCs emissions are assessed for their
impact on internal air quality in issue Hea 01 Visual comfort on page lxxxix. The impact of VOC emissions from
combustion on local air quality is assessed in this issue.
Air quality management areas (AQMA)

Local authorities and boroughs monitor air quality (including nitrogen oxides and dioxide, particulate matter and
VOCs) comparing it to levels set by the Department of Food and Rural Affairs (Defra). Where any measured
pollutants breach the levels, the area is designated as an AQMA.
The BREEAM requirements are set against AQMAs because these areas have fallen below an acceptable standard.
Hence, air quality is of greater importance in these areas, so new buildings and assets are required to perform
better to achieve credits.
See www.uk-air.defra.gov.uk.
Ecodesign Directive
The EU’s Ecodesign Directive sets a framework for mandatory requirements for energy-using products. A number
of separate commission regulations documents specify minimum levels for various emissions for different
technologies. Where minimum emission levels have been set, the measured emission levels achieved must be
included on the product label. These documents define both minimum and BAT (best available technology)
emission levels for relevant emissions and BREEAM has used these emission levels as a basis for setting the
benchmarks in Table 76 on page 393 and Table 77 on page 393. Regardless of the implementation date of the
regulation covering the appliance, the relevant BREEAM benchmarks must be achieved to award credits.
The relevant EU Commission Regulation documents are listed below together with the relevant implementation
dates:
– Commission Regulation (EU) No 813/2013 of 2 August 2013 implementing Directive 2009/125/EC of the
European Parliament and of the Council with regard to ecodesign requirements for space heaters and
combination heaters
– Commission Regulations (EU) No 814/2013 of 2 August 2013 implementing Directive 2009/125/EC of the
European Parliament and of the Council with regard to ecodesign requirements for water heaters and hot water
storage tanks
– Commission Regulations (EU) No 2015/1189 of 28 April 2015 implementing Directive 2009/125/EC of the
European Parliament and of the Council with regard to ecodesign requirements for solid fuel boilers
– Commission Regulation (EU) 2015/1188 of 28 April 2015 implementing Directive 2009/125/EC of the
European Parliament and of the Council with regard to ecodesign requirements for local space heaters
– Commission Regulation (EU) 2015/1185 of 24 April 2015 implementing Directive 2009/125/EC of the
European Parliament and of the Council with regard to ecodesign requirements for solid fuel local space heaters
Market research shows that the benchmarks are achievable but in some cases is challenging and in AQM areas only
technologies and fuel types with lower emission levels are likely to achieve any credits. This has been done to
incentivise the market to improve the performance of products.
Pol 03 Flood and surface water

management
5 5 5 5
No Minimum standard
Aim
To avoid, reduce and delay the discharge of rainfall to public sewers and watercourses, thereby minimising the risk
and impact of localised flooding on and off-site, watercourse pollution and other environmental damage.
Value
–
– Incentivise site selection and development
design that minimises the potential for
flooding on and off site.
– Limit the impact of development on off-
site water management infrastructure,
including the potential future increase in
rainwater from climate change.
– Enhance the resilience of local drainage
and flood prevention systems.
– Minimising the release of waterborne
pollutants off-site.
Context
In the UK around 0.5 million homes, offices, factories and warehouses are considered to be at a significant risk of
flooding, i.e. they have a greater than one in 75 chance per year of being flooded. Apart from the initial effects of
being flooded, i.e. access and use of the building, once flood water is removed significant resources (man hours,
time and cost) are usually required to clean, refit and re-open buildings for use.
This has major impacts on business continuity that can be costly and time consuming to manage. With due
consideration at an early stage the location, design and specification of the development (including the building,
curtilage and wider site) the risk of flooding and impact if it is flooded can be managed.
Assessment scope
Fully Simple building Shell and Shell
fitted core only
Applicable Assessment 1–22 All 1–22 1–22
criteria
Assessment type specific None 1 (2 credit) or 2 and 3 (1 None None
notes credit)
23 (2 credits) or 24 (1 credit)
4 to 14 (1 exemplary credit)
15 to 22 (1 credit)

None
None
Pol 03 Flood and surface water

management
Assessment criteria
Up to two credits - Flood resilience
Prerequisite
1 An appropriate consultant is appointed to carry out, demonstrate and confirm the development's compliance
with all criteria.
Two credits - Low flood risk

2 Where a site-specific flood risk assessment (FRA) confirms the development is situated in a flood zone that is
defined as having a low annual probability of flooding (in accordance with current best practice national
planning guidance (refer to Table 78 on page 410). The FRA must take all current and future sources of
flooding into consideration (see Sources of flooding on page 402).
One credit - Medium or high flood risk

3 Where a site-specific FRA confirms the development is situated in a flood zone that is defined as having a
medium or high annual probability of flooding and is not in a functional floodplain. This must be in accordance
with current best practice national planning guidance (refer to Table 78 on page 410). The FRA must take all
current and future sources of flooding into consideration (see Sources of flooding on page 402). For smaller
sites refer to Pol 03 Flood and surface water management above, which overrides criterion 2 above.
4 To increase the resilience and resistance of the development to flooding, one of the following must be
achieved:
4.a: The ground level of the building and access to both the building and the site, are designed (or zoned) so
they are at least 600mm above the design flood level of the flood zone in which the assessed
development is located (see Pol 03 Flood and surface water management above).
4.b: The final design of the building and the wider site reflects the recommendations made by an appropriate
consultant in accordance with the hierarchy approach outlined in section 5 of BS 8533:2011 (216).
Two credits - Surface water run-off
Prerequisite for surface water run-off credits

5 Surface water run-off design solutions must be bespoke, taking account of the specific site requirements and
natural or man-made environment of and surrounding the site. The priority levels detailed in the Methodology
must be followed, with justification given by the appropriate consultant where water is allowed to leave the
site.
One credit
6 Where drainage measures are specified to ensure that the peak rate of run-off from the site to the
watercourses (natural or municipal), a 30% improvement must be shown for the developed site compared to
the pre-developed site. This should comply at the 1-year and 100-year return period events.
7 Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified
Sustainable Drainage Systems (SuDS) are in place.
8 Calculations include an allowance for climate change; this should be made in accordance with current best
practice planning guidance (see definitions).
One credit
9 Where flooding of property will not occur in the event of local drainage system failure (caused either by
extreme rainfall or a lack of maintenance); AND
EITHER
10 Drainage design measures are specified to ensure that the post development run-off volume, over the
development lifetime, is no greater than it would have been prior to the assessed site’s development. This
must be for the 100-year 6-hour event, including an allowance for climate change (see criterion 14).
11 Any additional predicted volume of run-off for this event is prevented from leaving the site by using infiltration
or other SuDS techniques.
OR (only where criteria 10 and 11 for this credit cannot be achieved):
12 Justification from the appropriate consultant indicating why the above criteria cannot be achieved, i.e. where
infiltration or other SuDS techniques are not technically viable options.
13 Drainage design measures are specified to ensure that the post development peak rate of run-off is reduced
to the limiting discharge. The limiting discharge is defined as the highest flow rate from the following options:
13.a:The pre-development one-year peak flow rate
13.b:The mean annual flow rate (Qbar)
13.c:2L/s/ha.
For the one-year peak flow rate, the one-year return period event criterion applies.
SuDS are in place.
15 For either option, above calculations must include an allowance for climate change; this should be made in
accordance with current best practice planning guidance.
One credit - Minimising watercourse pollution

16 There is no discharge from the developed site for rainfall up to 5mm (confirmed by the appropriate
consultant).
17 In areas with a low risk source of watercourse pollution, an appropriate level of pollution prevention treatment
is provided, using appropriate SuDS techniques.
18 Where there is a high risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil, separators (or an
equivalent system) are installed in surface water drainage systems.
19 Where the building has chemical or liquid gas storage areas, a means of containment is fitted to the site
drainage system (i.e. shut-off valves) to prevent the escape of chemicals to natural watercourses (in the event
of a spillage or bunding failure).
20 All water pollution prevention systems have been designed and installed in accordance with the
recommendations of documents such as the National Planning Policy Framework(217) or where applicable the
SuDS manual (218). They must be bespoke solutions taking account of the specific site requirements and
natural or man-made environment of and surrounding the site. For areas where vehicle washing will be taking
place, pollution prevention systems must be in accordance with Pollution Prevention Guidelines 13 (219).
21 A comprehensive and up to date drainage plan of the site will be made available for the building or site
occupiers.
SuDS must be in place.
23 Where present, all external storage and delivery areas designed and detailed in accordance with the current
best practice planning guidance (see Pol 03 Flood and surface water management on page 399).
Two credits - Simple buildings - Surface water run-off

For 'simple buildings', the criteria below should be applied in place of the surface water run-off criteria above.
24 Either of the following criteria is met:
24.a:There is a decrease in the impermeable area by 50% or more, from the pre-existing impermeable hard
surfaces.
24.b:Where all run-off from the roof for rainfall depths up to 5mm from all new and existing parts of the
building have been managed on-site using source control methods.
OR
One credit - Simple buildings - Surface water run-off

25 Either of the following criteria is met:
25.a:There is no increase in the impermeable surfaces as a result of the new construction; OR
25.b:If there is an increase in the impermeable surface as a result of the new construction then the following
must be met:
25.b.iHard standing areas—where there is an extension or increase in the hardstanding areas and hence
an increase in the total impermeable area as a result of the new construction, the hardstanding area
must be permeable or be provided with on-site SuDS to allow full infiltration of the additional
volume, to achieve the same end result. The permeable hardstanding must include all pavements
and public rights of way, car parks, driveways and non-adoptable roads, but can exclude small
garden paths which will drain onto a naturally permeable surface.
25.b.iiBuilding (new-build or extension)—where there is an increase in building footprint, extending onto

any previously permeable surfaces, the additional run-off caused by the area of the new build or
extension must be managed on site using an appropriate SuDS technique for rainfall depths up to 5
mm.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Applicable assessment criteria

None of the credits can be awarded where the assessed development has proceeded against the
recommendation of the statutory body on the basis that the flooding implications are too great. This includes a
recommendation given by the statutory body even where such a recommendation cannot or is not statutorily
enforced. Where the local authority (or other statutory body) has set more rigorous criteria than those above these
must be met in order to achieve the relevant credits.
Contaminated sites
Drainage designs for sites must take into account legislation relating to contaminated sites, however in many
circumstances, even on contaminated sites, there may be opportunities for the installation of some SuDS
techniques.
Sources of flooding
The FRA must detail the risk of flooding from the following sources:
1. Fluvial (rivers)
2. Tidal
3. Surface water: sheet run-off from adjacent land (urban or rural)
4. Groundwater: most common in low-lying areas underlain by permeable rock (aquifers)
5. Sewers: combined, foul or surface water sewers
6. Reservoirs, canals and other artificial sources.
Pol 03 Flood and surface water management on page 399 provides more detail on the above sources of
flooding.
The content of the FRA should be based on historic trends, but should also account for predicted changes to the
climate which may impact on the flood risk to the site in future
600mm threshold
It is accepted that, for buildings located in medium and high risk flood zones, areas of the car park and site access
may be allowed to flood and therefore fall below the 600mm threshold. In such cases the credit is still achievable
provided safe access to the site, and the ground floor of the building can be maintained (i.e. they are 600mm
above the design flood level) to ensure the building and site do not become an ‘island’ in the event of a flood.
Where the development has been permitted and the ground levels of the topography or infrastructure
immediately adjacent to the site fall below the 600mm threshold, the credit can still be awarded. This is provided
there are no other practical solutions for access to the site above this level and the assessed building, and access to
it, meet the assessment criteria. As much of the external site area as possible (or as required by an appropriate
statutory body) should be designed at or above the threshold. For buildings located in medium or high flood risk
zones, any areas used to store sensitive, historical, hazardous, valuable and perishable materials, e.g. radioactive
materials, microbiological facilities, server rooms, libraries, etc., must be located above the 600mm threshold.
Level of detail required in the FRA for smaller sites

For smaller sites, e.g. less than 1 ha (10,000 m²), the level of detail required in an acceptable FRA will depend on the
size of the site and the arrangement of buildings on that site. For a small site with a relatively simple arrangement of
buildings this might consist of a brief report. For larger sites with a higher density of buildings a more detailed
assessment would be appropriate.
For small simple sites (2000 m²and less), an acceptable FRA could be a brief report carried out by the contractor’s
engineer confirming the risk of flooding from all sources of flooding, including information obtained from the
Environment Agency, water company or sewerage undertaker, other relevant statutory authorities, site
investigation and local knowledge.
Sites with multiple buildings

Where the assessed building is part of a larger development of buildings, there are a number of options for
assessment of the surface water run-off credits:
1. The individual building and its associated hardstanding areas can be assessed independently where the
run-off is being dealt with on a building-by-building basis (i.e. each building has its own dedicated sub-
catchment that serves only that building).
2. When assessing the run-off from a number of buildings (including domestic and non-domestic buildings)
the assessment must take into account the drainage from the local sub-catchment serving all those
dwellings or buildings. Note that proportioning cannot be used to calculate the percentage of run-off
discharging into the local sub-catchment resulting from just the assessed building.
3. The whole development can be assessed for compliance.
Whichever approach is taken to demonstrate compliance, it must be consistent when completing both the rate of
run-off and volume of run-off calculations.
No change in impermeable area

Where the man-made impermeable area draining to the watercourse (natural or municipal) has decreased or
remains unchanged post development, the peak and volume rate of run-off requirements for the surface water
run-off credits will be met by default. Flow rate calculations will not need to be provided. Instead, drawings clearly
showing the impermeable areas of the site draining to the watercourse should be provided for the pre- and post
development scenarios. Figures must also be given (ideally on the drawings) to show a comparison between the
areas of drained impermeable surfaces pre- and post development. In this instance a flood risk assessment must
be carried out and any opportunities identified to reduce surface water run-off are implemented.
Limiting flow-rate discharge

For the surface water run-off credits, where the limiting discharge flow rate would require a flow rate of less than
5L/s at a discharge point, a flow rate of up to 5L/s may be used where required to reduce the risk of blockage.
Areas that are a source of pollution

For the purpose of assessing the watercourse pollution credit, an area that presents a risk of watercourse pollution
includes vehicle manoeuvring areas, car parks, waste disposal facilities, delivery and storage facilities or plant areas.
Suitable level of treatment

In all cases the appropriate consultant should use their professional judgment to determine the most appropriate
strategy for minimising watercourse pollution.
Roof plant
Roof-top plant space must be considered where there is a risk from polluting substances such as petrol or oil.
Refrigerants are not assessed under the pollution aspect of this issue, as the main risk of pollution is to air and not
the watercourse.
Calculating peak rate of run-off

Key publications that should be referred to for guidance on calculating the peak rate of run-off include:
1. The SuDS Manual (220).

2. Preliminary rainfall run-off management for developments (221).
3. National planning policy guidance or statement for the specific country.
4. IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments (Marshall and Bayliss, 1994) (222).
5. Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, 1999) (223).
Greenfield sites of less than 50 ha

The calculation of greenfield run-off rates must be in accordance with IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small
catchments (Marshall and Bayliss, 1994). The pro-rata method on the size of catchment detailed in Table 4.2 in The
SuDS Manual, CIRIA C697 (2007) must be followed.
Greenfield sites of 50 ha to 200 ha

The calculation of greenfield run-off rates must be in accordance with IH Report 124. Flood Estimation Handbook
can be used for these sites as an alternative, where there is a preference to do so, but only if the catchment is
considered to be suitable for its application.
Greenfield sites of more than 200 ha

The calculation of greenfield run-off rates must be in accordance with the Flood Estimation Handbook. Where the
Flood Estimation Handbook is not considered appropriate for the development, IH Report 124 can be used.
Brownfield sites
The calculation of brownfield run-off rates should be as follows:
– If the existing drainage is known then it should be modelled using best practice simulation modelling, to
determine the one-year and 100-year peak flow rates at discharge points (without allowing surcharge of the
system above cover levels to drive greater flow rates through the discharge points).
– If the system is not known, then the brownfield run-off should be calculated using the greenfield run-off models
described above but with a Soil Type 5.
Surface water run-off management

When specifying and designing surface water run-off management, the appropriate consultant must follow the
priority levels listed below (noting that level 1 has the highest priority). Justification must be provided for each level
which does not contribute to managing surface water run-off. This has been set so the most appropriate water
management solutions are used, prioritising water use in the development and infiltration over discharge (i.e. so
that the volume of water that leaves the site is limited as far as practicable).
– Priority Level 1 Water is collected for use in the development (e.g. rainwater harvesting)
– Priority Level 2 Water is infiltrated into the ground
– Priority Level 3 Water is discharged to surface water body
– Priority Level 4 Water is discharged to the drainage system
– Priority Level 5 Water is discharged to a combined sewer
Limiting discharge rate

The limiting discharge for each discharge point should be calculated as the flow rates from the pre-developed site.
The calculation should include the total flow rate from the total area of the site feeding into the discharge point
(this should include both BREEAM-assessed and non-BREEAM-assessed parts of the development, if applicable).
The discharge point is defined as the point of discharge into the watercourse or sewers (including rivers, streams,
ditches, drains, cuts, culverts, dykes, sluices, public sewers and passages through which water flows, see Relevant
definitions in the Pol 03 Flood and surface water management on page 399 section). Where this calculation results
in a peak flow rate of less than 5L/s, the limiting discharge rate may be increased up to a level of no more than 5L/s
at the point of discharge from the site to reduce the risk of blockage.
For example, if the flow rate for the 1 year and 100 year events were 4L/s and 7L/s respectively, then the limiting
discharges would be 5L/s and 7L/s. Similarly, if it was calculated to be 2L/s and 4L/s, then a maximum of 5L/s
limiting discharge rate could be applied to both discharge points.
Sites should not be subdivided to enable higher overall limiting discharge rates to be claimed. It is, however,
recognised that some sites may require more than one discharge point as a result of the local topography or
existing surrounding drainage infrastructure. In such cases, the limiting discharge flow rate may be increased to a
level no more than 5L/s at each discharge point. The assessor should seek evidence that the number of discharge
points is necessary due to topography or infrastructure limitations. Evidence may be in the form of a topographical
map and an explanation from the appropriate consultant as to why multiple discharge points are required, stating
that it is not feasible to have fewer discharge points.
100-year peak rate event: excess volume of run-off

The storage of excess flows from the 100-year event does not necessarily have to be contained within the
drainage system or SuDS features (the features designed solely for the purpose of drainage). Where appropriate,
storage of some or all of this volume can be achieved using temporary surface flooding of areas such as a playing
field. Specific consideration should be given to overland flow routing. Overland flood flows and temporary storage
of flood water on the surface must not be so frequent as to unreasonably inconvenience residents and other users.
Designing for exceedance guidance

CIRIA publication C635 (2006) Designing for exceedance in urban drainage–good practice (224) should be
referred to for guidance.
Evidence

6 Calculation results for the pre-and post Refer to generic evidence requirement
development peak rate of run-off above
9 Information showing the proposed As per interim design stage
drainage solution, system failure flood
flow routes, potential flood ponding
levels and ground floor levels
10–13 Calculation results for the pre- and post Refer to generic evidence requirement
development volume of run-off above
13 Calculation results for the limiting As per interim design stage.
discharge
7, 14, 22 No 'specific' evidence applies at Design Relevant maintenance agreements for the
Stage ownership, long term operation and
maintenance of all specified SuDS.
24.b, 25.b.ii Calculation of the 5mm rainfall event Refer to generic evidence requirement
from the relevant areas above
Definitions
Adoptable highways
For the purposes of BREEAM, an ‘adoptable’ highway is a highway that is the responsibility of the highways
authority in terms of installation and maintenance of surface water drainage which only carries run-off from the
highway itself. This means that to fall under the definition of an ‘adoptable highway’ the drainage network must
not be directly connected to any other upstream drainage network (e.g. from a private development) and only
handle run-off from the adoptable highway. Where drainage within the highway will carry run-off from both the
highway and housing, it is not regarded as an 'adoptable' highway. In this instance the drainage design must take
account of the highway run-off.
Appropriate consultant
A consultant with qualifications and experience relevant to designing SuDS and flood prevention measures and
completing peak rate of run-off calculations. Where complex flooding calculations and prevention measures are
required, this must be a specialist hydrological engineer.
Appropriate statutory body

This refers to either the appropriate national body (i.e. The Environment Agency in England and Wales, the Rivers
Agency in Northern Ireland and the Scottish Environment Protection Agency in Scotland) or the relevant local
authority or internal drainage board.
Catchment
The area contributing surface water flow to a point on a drainage or water course. It can be divided into sub-
catchments.
Control devices
Any drainage structure or unit designed to control the run-off of storm water. Examples of SuDS control devices
are check dams within swales and basins, and combined weir or orifice controls for ponds. Examples of
traditional control devices are throttles constructed with pipes and vortex controls. The control devices must be
capable of regular inspection and maintenance, and the system should be failsafe so that upstream flooding
does not result from blockage or other malfunction. For guidance on control devices, refer to The SuDS manual
(CIRIA C697, 2007) and other best practice guidelines.
Current best practice national planning guidance

These are current at the time of publication: Planning Practice Guidance - Flood Risk and Coastal Changes–
England; Planning Policy Statement 15–Northern Ireland; Scottish Planning Policy 7 - Scotland; Technical Advice
Note - Wales.
Design flood level

The maximum estimated water level during the design storm event. The design flood level for a site can be
determined through either known historical data or modelled for the specific site.
Design flood event

An historic or notional flood event of a given annual flood probability, against which the suitability of a proposed
development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are designed.
Design storm event

Historic or notional weather conditions of a given annual probability, against which the suitability of a proposed
development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are designed.
Discharge point
The discharge points is the point at which the run-off from the site leaves the site boundary and enters a
watercourse.
Flood defences
Flood defences do not completely remove the risk of flooding, but they do reduce it. Building in areas where
flood defences are present (and appropriately designed to withstand a certain magnitude of flooding) is
therefore preferable to those built in medium or high risk areas without defences. However, for the purpose of
this issue, it is still preferable to build in areas of low risk than encourage development of new flood defences in
areas with a higher risk of flooding purely for the sake of new development.
Flood event
A flooding incident characterised by its peak level or flow, or by its level or flow hydrograph.
Flood probability
The estimated probability of a flood of given magnitude occurring or being exceeded in any specified time
period. For example, the 100-year flood has a 1% chance of occurring in any given year.
Flood risk
The combination of the flood probability and the magnitude of the potential consequences of the flood event.
Flood risk assessment

A study to assess the risk of a site flooding, and to assess the impact that any changes or development on the
site will have on flood risk to the site and elsewhere. A Flood Risk Assessment (FRA) should be prepared
according to relevant planning policy and technical guidance documents. The FRA must account for future climate
change and detail any necessary adaptation measures where or if required. Where more than five years have
passed since the FRA was carried out, evidence would be required to demonstrate that the basis of the FRA has
not changed in that time.
Flood storage
The temporary storage of excess run-off or river flow in ponds, basins, reservoirs or on the flood plain during a
flood event.
Flood zones
Flood zones are defined in the relevant planning, policy and technical guidance documents for each country in the
UK: Planning Practice Guidance - Flood Risk and Coastal Changes (England), TAN15 (Wales), SPP7 (Scotland),
PPS15 (Northern Ireland). Please note, PPS15 does not categorise flood risk zones and there are no similar
publicly available flood maps covering Northern Ireland. Assessments in Northern Ireland will therefore need to
rely on-site-specific flood risk assessments, or other relevant data or surveys, to determine the extent of flood
risk for a specific development, and use the same definitions as those outlined for England ( Table 78 on
page 410). The Northern Ireland Department of Environment or Rivers Agency may offer further advice or
recommendations in this respect www.doeni.gov.uk and www.dardni.gov.uk.
While the definitions of flood zones and probabilities of flooding are generally the same throughout the UK,
there are some differences. The definitions are outlined in Table 78 on page 410.
Greenfield
A site which has either never been built on, or one which has remained undisturbed for five years or more.
Greenfield run-off rate

The rate of run-off that would occur from the site in its undeveloped and therefore undisturbed state.
Hard surfaces
These include roofs, car parks, access roads, pavements, delivery or service yards and external hard landscaping.
Footpaths less than 1.5 m wide which have free drainage to soft landscaped areas on both sides may be
excluded.
Infiltration
The passage of water into a permeable surface, such as soil, permeable paving, soakaways and so on.
Limiting discharge
The limiting discharge is based upon the calculated pre-development flow rate at a discharge point.
Level of pollution prevention treatment

When used in the context of one, two or three levels of treatment for surface water, the treatment level should
be regarded as the number of SuDS components in series through which run-off passes from the originating
surface on which rainfall fell to the site discharge point. Where a SuDS component has more than one treatment
process, it might be considered to provide more than one level of treatment. In these circumstances advice
should be sought from the BREEAM office.
Low risk areas (with respect to watercourse pollution)

Low risk areas can be defined as areas where the risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol
and oil is reduced. For the purpose of this credit, roofs and small car parks may be considered as low risk areas.
Peak run-off rate (referred to as Qp [m 3/sec])

This is the highest rate of flow from a defined catchment area assuming that rainfall is uniformly distributed over
the drainage area, considering the entire drainage area as a single unit and estimation of flow at the most
downstream point only.
Pre-development
The state of the site under assessment immediately prior to purchase of the site by the client or developer (or,
where the client has owned or occupied the site for a number of years, its current state).
Qbar
An estimation of the mean annual flood flow rate from a catchment (see Report IH124 Flood estimations for
small catchments).
Rainwater discharge
Rainwater discharge is the rainwater which flows from the development site to watercourses and sewers. It is
also referred to as run-off.
Run-off
This is usually rainwater, but can also be groundwater or overspill from sewers and other sources.
Sewerage undertaker
This is a Body, typically a water company, with statutory responsibility for sewerage and sewerage disposal and
also surface water from roofs and yards of premises.
Soakaways
A subsurface structure designed to promote the infiltration of surface water into the ground. As a general point,
soakaways may be shallow and broad–as in a blanket under permeable paving, or deeper structures. Deeper,
point source soakaways should be avoided for road and car park drainage, but shallow structures providing
infiltration in an extensive way (infiltration trenches and permeable paving) do not need oil separators.
SuDS management train

An approach to drainage design that combines a sequence of appropriate surface water drainage structures
using SuDS systems for management of the run-off to treat the flow, reduce run-off volume and restrain the run-
off rate in order to minimise man’s impact on the environment. Additional benefits associated with operation
and maintenance, ecology and amenity are aspects which are considered when designing a management
system. The management train incorporates a hierarchy of techniques:
1. Source control. Examples of SuDS techniques include:

– Soakaways
– Porous or pervious paving
– Roof water directed to garden (rather than piped drains)
– Rainwater reuse and harvesting
– Green roofs
– Other surface infiltration, attenuation and conveyance techniques that deal with run-off at source.
2. Site or local control. Examples of SuDS techniques include:
– Swales
– Pond
– Infiltration basins
– Detention basin
– Larger soakaways
– Pervious (porous or permeable) paving.
3. Regional control. Examples of techniques include:
– Balancing ponds
– Wetlands
– Large detention basin.
SuDS techniques
One or more components built to manage surface water run-off to prevent flooding and pollution, including for
example: wet ponds, infiltration basins, detention basins, swales, reed beds, pervious (porous or permeable)
paving, soakaways, rainwater harvesting, filter strips, filter drains and trenches with or without perforates pipes,
green roofs and underground attenuation storage. For more information refer to The SuDS manual (CIRIA C753,
2015).
Surface water run-off

Water flow over the ground surface to a drainage system. This occurs if the ground is impermeable, is saturated
or if the rainfall is particularly intense.
Tidal estuary
A tidal estuary is defined as a semi-enclosed coastal body of water which has a free connection with the open sea
and within which seawater is measurably diluted with fresh water derived from land drainage. An estuary should
be unconstrained tidal waters, i.e. there should be no barriers or constricted shorelines that would restrict the
free flow of water into the open sea in any conditions. The impact on the total volume of run-off from the site
(and other sites which may in future discharge into the estuary) should be insignificant in terms of the overall
water levels in the estuary. Tidal rivers (i.e. where no or limited measurable seawater content is present during
normal tidal movements) cannot be included as part of the estuary for the purposes of BREEAM.
Treatment
Improving the quality of water by physical, chemical or biological means.
Types of oil separator

Class 1 Separators: These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 5 mg/l oil under standard test
conditions. They should be used when the separator is required to remove very small oil droplets, such as those
arising from car park run-off.
Class 2 Separators: These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 100 mg/l oil under standard test
conditions. They are suitable for dealing with discharges where a lower quality requirement applies or for
trapping large spillages. Both classes can be produced as ‘full retention’ or ‘bypass’ separators:
Full retention separators: These treat the flow that can be delivered by the drainage system, which is normally
equivalent to the flow generated by a rainfall intensity of 50mm/hr.
Bypass separators: These fully treat all flows generated by rainfall rates of up to 5mm/hr. Flows above this rate
are allowed to bypass the separator. These separators are used when it is an acceptable risk not to provide full
treatment for high flows.
Volume of run-off
The volume of run-off that is generated by rainfall occurring on the site. This is typically measured in cubic metres.
Additional predicted volume of run-off is the difference between the volumes of run-off pre- and post
development.
Watercourses and sewers

A term that includes rivers, streams, ditches, drains, culverts, dykes, sluices, sewers and passages through which
water flows.
This section will be revised when the national standards for sustainable drainage and associated regulations come
into force.
Definition of flood zones by country

Table 78 Definition of flood zones by country
Definition England Wales Scotland
Low annual Zone 1 Zone A Little or no risk area
probability of Less than 1 in 1000 chance of Considered to be at little As defined for
flooding river and sea flooding (< 0.1%). or no risk. England.
Zone B
If site levels are greater
than the flood levels used
to define adjacent
extreme flood outline.
Medium annual Zone 2 Zone B Low to medium
probability of Between 1 in 100 and 1 in 1000 If site levels are not risk area
flooding chance of river flooding (1%– greater than the flood Watercourse, tidal
0.1%) and between a 1 in 200 levels used to define or coastal flooding
and 1 in 1000 chance of sea adjacent extreme flood in the range 0.1%–
flooding (0.5%–0.1%). outline. 0.5% (1:1000–
Zone C 1:200).
Equal to or greater* than
0.1% (river, tidal or
coastal flooding).
* For the purposes of
BREEAM assume upper
probability of flooding no
greater than that
specified for England.
High annual Zone 3a High Probability Zone C1 and C2 Medium to high
probability of 1 in 100 or greater chance of * For the purposes of risk areas
flooding river flooding (>1%) and a 1 in BREEAM assume the Annual probability
200 or greater chance of same lower and upper of watercourse,
Definition England Wales Scotland

flooding from the sea (>0.5%). probability of flooding as tidal or coastal
Zone 3b The Functional that specified for flooding: greater
Floodplain England. than 0.5% (1:200).
Land where water has to flow or
be stored in times of flood.
Northern Ireland PPS15 does not categorise flood risk zones and there are no similar publicly available flood
maps covering Northern Ireland. Assessments in NI will therefore need to rely on-site-specific flood risk
assessments, or other relevant data or surveys, to determine the extent of flood risk for a specific
development, and use the same definitions as those outlined for England.
The Northern Ireland Department of Environment or Rivers Agency may offer further advice or
recommendations in this respect www.doeni.gov.uk and www.riversagencyni.gov.uk.
The above country-specific risk levels are based on flooding from rivers and the sea. Please refer to Sources of
flooding on page 402 which confirms the list of sources of flooding that need to be taken account of when
conducting a flood risk assessment for a particular site.
Sources of flooding and flood risk

1. Streams and rivers: Flooding that can take place from flows that are not contained within the channel due
to high levels of rainfall in the catchment.
2. Coastal or estuarine: Flooding that can occur from the sea due to a particularly high tide or surge, or a
combination of both.
3. Groundwater: Where the water table rises to such a height where flooding occurs. Most common in low-
lying areas underlain by permeable rock (aquifers), usually due to extended periods of wet weather.
4. Sewers and highway drains: Combined, foul or surface water sewers and highway drains that are
temporarily over-loaded due to excessive rainfall or due to blockage.
5. Surface water: The net rainfall falling on a surface (on or off the site) which acts as run-off which has not
infiltrated into the ground or entered into a drainage system.
6. Infrastructure failure: Canals, reservoirs, industrial processes, burst water mains, blocked sewers or failed
pumping stations.
SuDS - sustainable drainage systems

A sequence of management practices and control structures designed to drain surface water in a more
sustainable fashion than some conventional techniques. Examples of SuDS devices include:
– Holding ponds
– Swales
– Reed beds
– Permeable paving - in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow this to function, e.g. block
paved surface on permeable sub-base over gravel bed to store the water and allow it to seep into the soil. For
less permeable soils, the gravel layer might be deeper and the water taken to a soakaway although this is not an
option in some areas
– Local or centralised soakaways either as full systems or as ‘overflow’ or ‘holding’ systems, in areas where local
geological and hydrological conditions allow them to function
– Run-off from roofs collected as a part of a rainwater harvesting system
– Run-off from roofs directed to a local soakaway or other holding facility such as tanks, ponds, swales etc.
– Green roofs.
For more information refer to The SuDS Manual (CIRIA C753, 2015).
External storage and delivery areas guidance documents

Wales and England
For assessment in Wales and England, the recommendations of the Environment Agency’s publication Pollution
Prevention Pays Guidance, 2013 (225) should be followed.
Scotland and Northern Ireland

For assessment in Scotland and Northern Ireland, the 'Pollution Prevention Pays Guidelines' from the Environment
Agency reference the following documents which are relevant:
– Introducing Pollution Prevention: PPG1

– Above ground oil storage tanks: PPG2
– The use and design of oil separators in surface water drainage systems: PPG3
– Working at demolition and construction sites: PPG6
– Vehicle washing and cleaning: PPG13
– Managing firewater and major spillages: PPG28
– Dewatering underground ducts and chambers: PPG20
– Incident response planning: PPG21
– Dealing with spills: PPG22
– Drums and intermediate bulk container: PPG26
– Underground storage tanks: PPG27.
Contaminated sites
Examples of contamination legislation that should be considered includes: the Water Resources Act 1991, the
Environmental Protection Act 1990, the Groundwater Directive (2006/118/EC) and, more recently the
Groundwater (England and Wales) Regulations 2009. Where the site risk assessment confirms that infiltration SuDS
techniques are not appropriate, SuDS techniques that do not allow infiltration, such as swales lined with an
impermeable membrane, can be used.
It may be the case that only some areas of the site are contaminated and therefore infiltration SuDS techniques can
be used elsewhere on the site. There may also be a requirement to remediate the contaminated soils, creating
opportunities for the use of infiltration SuDS post-remediation.
Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution
1 1 1 1
Aim
To ensure that external lighting is concentrated in the appropriate areas and that upward lighting is minimised,
reducing unnecessary light pollution, energy consumption and nuisance to neighbouring properties.
Value
– Minimise nuisance to neighbouring
properties due to lighting.
– Maintain an adequate level of safety and
security lighting on the site.
– Reduce energy use by designing coverage
and control systems that are appropriate for
the development.
Context
The external lighting used by buildings can have a detrimental impact on the use and enjoyment of neighbouring
properties and the mental and physical wellbeing of individuals in them. It also has a significant and often
detrimental impact on local wildlife.
The design of lighting installations can reduce the impacts without limiting their functionality and there are a
number of appropriate best practice standards for the design and control of such lighting installations that aim to
minimise these detrimental impacts.
By limiting light pollution the impact and energy use of the building may be reduced making it more acceptable to
local communities and reducing impacts on local wildlife.
Assessment scope


None
None
A
Assessment criteria
One credit
1 Where external lighting pollution has been eliminated through effective design that removes the need for
external lighting without adversely affecting the safety and security of the site and its users.
OR alternatively, where the building does have external lighting, one credit can be awarded as follows:
2 The external lighting strategy has been designed in compliance with Table 2 (and its accompanying notes) of
the Institute of Lighting Professionals (ILP) Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light, 2011 (226).
Buildings
3 All external lighting (except for safety and security lighting) can be automatically switched off between 23:00
and 07:00.
4 If safety or security lighting is provided and will be used between 23:00 and 07:00, this part of the lighting
system complies with the lower levels of lighting recommended during these hours in Table 2 of the ILP
guidance notes.
5 Illuminated advertisements, where specified, must be designed in compliance with ILP PLG05 The Brightness of
Illuminated Advertisements .(227).
Compliance notes
Methodology
Scope of assessment
Where the assessment is of an individual building on an existing site then only those areas affected by the works, i.e.
within the construction zone, need to be assessed. Where the assessment is of a building that forms part of an
entire new development, the criteria apply site-wide.
Lighting for security purposes

Where light fittings are specified to comply with specific security standards and these conflict with the BREEAM
criteria, they can be excluded from the assessment of this issue. In these circumstances the assessor must obtain
evidence confirming the specific security standards and that they are applicable to the assessed development.
Illuminated advertisements
All types of illuminated advertisement must meet the criteria, both self-illuminated and those illuminated by
reflection from other sources.
Evidence

All One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements on
page 38 can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.
Definitions
Construction zone
For the purpose of this issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the
BREEAM-assessed building and its external site areas, i.e. the scope of the new works.
The ILP Guidance notes for the Reduction of Obtrusive Light, 2011 are available free of charge from the ILP website
www.theilp.org.uk.
Table 2 of the ILP guidance and its accompanying notes outlines four sets of recommendations:
1. Limits to the average upward light ratio of the luminaires, to restrict sky glow.
2. Limiting illuminance at the windows of nearby properties for which light trespass might be an issue.
3. Limiting the intensity of each light source in potentially obtrusive directions beyond the site boundaries.
4. Limiting the average luminance of the building, if it is floodlit.
In each case the limiting values depend on the location of the site of the building (for example rural, urban or city
centre). A calculation of illuminance (2) or intensity (3) is not required if all luminaires are cut-off types and angled so
that light in potentially obtrusive directions is blocked.
Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution
1 Not applicable 1 Not applicable

No Minimum standard
Aim
To reduce the likelihood of noise arising from fixed installations on the new development affecting nearby noise-
sensitive buildings.
Value
– Minimise nuisance noise to neighbours and
local wildlife.
Context
Excessive noise can have a detrimental effect on the use and enjoyment of private property such as dwellings and
business premises. It can also cause disruption for wildlife. Noise can have a major impact on the mental and
physical wellbeing of individuals both within and neighbouring a building. Legislation is in place to control buildings
and other noise-producing processes but these are typically enforced following complaints from neighbours and
improvements required as a result can be costly to make.
It is important to consider the noise that will be produced by developments at an early stage, plan the
development in a way that minimises them, and seek to design and specify the building and its services in a way that
limits its impact.
Assessment scope

Applicable Assessment criteria All Not applicable All Not applicable

None
None
Assessment criteria
One credit
1 Where there are, or will be, no noise-sensitive areas or buildings within 800m radius of the assessed site.
OR
2 Commission a noise impact assessment compliant with BS4142:2014, if the building has noise-sensitive areas
or buildings within 800m radius of the site, with noise levels measured or determined for:
2.a: Existing background noise levels
2.a.i at the nearest or most exposed noise-sensitive development to the proposed development
2.a.ii including existing plant on a building to which an extension is being built and assessed
2.b: Rating noise level from the new noise source.
3 The noise impact assessment must be carried out by a suitably qualified acoustic consultant..
4 The noise level from the proposed site or building, as measured in the locality of the nearest or most exposed
noise-sensitive development, is a difference to the background noise of at least -5dB throughout the day and
night.
5 Where the noise sources from the proposed site or building is greater than the levels described in criterion 4,
measures have been installed to attenuate the noise at its source to a level where it will comply with the
criterion.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Compliance at the design stage

At the design stage of assessment, where noise-sensitive areas or buildings are present, actual measurement is
unlikely to be possible due to the planned but non-existent installation. In such situations compliance can be
demonstrated through the use of acousticians’ calculations or by scale model investigations.
For such cases, BS4142 states ‘Determine the specific sound level by calculation alone if measurement is not
practicable, for example if the source is not yet in operation. In such cases, report the method of calculation in detail
and give the reason for using it’. Where prediction methods are not possible, measurement will be necessary using
either a noise source similar to that proposed or, alternatively, measurement of the actual noise from the
installation (once installed); compliance with the latter approach requires a written commitment to appoint a
suitably qualified acoustician to carry out the required measurements post-installation, and a further commitment
to attenuate the noise source in compliance with criteria 4 on the previous page and 5 on the previous page (if
proved necessary by the measurements).
Evidence

Definitions
Noise-sensitive area
Landscapes or buildings where the occupiers are likely to be sensitive to noise created by the new plant installed
in the assessed building, including:
1. Residential areas
2. Hospitals, health centres, care homes, doctor’s surgeries etc.
3. Schools, colleges and other teaching establishments
4. Libraries
5. Places of worship
6. Wildlife areas, historic landscapes, parks and gardens
7. Located in an Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty or near a Site of Special Scientific Interest
8. Any other development that can be considered noise-sensitive.
Not all of these locations will necessarily be “sensitive” at all times. The assessments should be carried out at
times which are relevant to the location use. For example, schools, libraries and doctor’s surgeries may not
require a night-time assessment of background noise if they are unoccupied at the time. When making the
assessment the SQA should make it clear during which periods the receptor is considered “sensitive” providing
clear reasoning and justification.
Suitably qualified acoustician (SQA)

An individual achieving all the following items can be considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of a
BREEAM assessment:
1. Has a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such experience must clearly
demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting acoustics in relation to construction and the
built environment; including, acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for suitable
acoustic performance levels and mitigation measures.
2. An individual who holds a recognised acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate
professional body. The primary professional body for acoustics in the UK is the Institute of Acoustics.
Where an SQA is verifying the acoustic measurements or calculations carried out by another acoustician who
does not meet the SQA requirements, they must, as a minimum, have read and reviewed the report and confirm
in writing that they have found it to:
1. Represent sound industry practice

2. Be appropriate given the building being assessed and scope of works proposed
3. Avoid invalid, biased and exaggerated recommendations.
Additionally, written confirmation from the third-party verifier that they comply with the definition of an SQA is
required.
Attenuating noise at its source

BS 8233:2014 (228) gives recommendations for the control of noise in and around buildings and may be a useful
reference when considering control of noise from external plant.
See criteria 4 and 5 on page 419.

Innovation
10% 10% 10% 10%
Summary
The innovation category provides opportunities for exemplary performance and innovation to be recognised that
are not included within, or go beyond the requirements of the credit criteria. This includes exemplary performance
credits, for where the building meets the exemplary performance levels of a particular issue. It also includes
innovative products and processes for which an innovation credit can be claimed, where they have been approved
by BRE Global Ltd.
The cost-saving benefits of innovation are fostered and facilitated by helping encourage, drive and publicise
accelerated uptake of innovative measures.
Inn 01 Innovation
10 10 10 10
Aim
To support innovation within the construction industry through the recognition of sustainability related benefits
which are not rewarded by standard BREEAM issues.
Value
– Testing out new ideas which, if successful,
could change the status quo of the industry
– Allows the industry to explore new
opportunities and evolve its processes.
Context
Innovation creates a platform to encourage free thinking, for industry to push the boundaries of what is considered
the norm, and propose new ideas and approaches which may change the way the industry works in future.
Innovation allows the industry to grow and develop new ideas, and ultimately produce better buildings, more
efficiently.
Assessment scope

Applicable assessment criteria 1b-1k All 1b-1j 1b-1d,1f-1j

None
None
Inn 01 Innovation
Assessment criteria
Up to a maximum of 10 credits are available in aggregate from a combination of the following:
Exemplary level of performance in existing BREEAM issues
Approved innovations
1 Where the building demonstrates exemplary performance by meeting defined exemplary level performance
criteria in one or more of following BREEAM assessment issues:
1.a: Man 01 Project brief and design (Simple buildings only)
1.b: Man 03 Responsible construction practices
1.c: Hea 01 Visual comfort
1.d: Hea 02 Indoor air quality
1.e: Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions
1.f: Wat 01 Water consumption
1.g: Mat 01 Environmental impacts from construction products - Building life cycle assessment
1.h: Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials
1.i: Wst 01 Construction waste management
1.j: Wst 02 Use of recycled and sustainably sourced aggregates
1.k: Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change
1.l: Pol 03 Flood and surface water management (Simple buildings only).
Please refer to the relevant BREEAM issue within this scheme document for details of the exemplary level
performance assessment criteria.
2 One innovation credit can be awarded for each innovation application approved by BRE Global, where the
building complies with the criteria defined within an approved innovation application form.
Compliance notes
Methodology
Exemplary level of performance in existing BREEAM issues

For information on the methodology for exemplary level credits refer to the Methodology section of the relevant
BREEAM issues.
Approved innovations
Innovation applications can be submitted to BRE Global by a licensed BREEAM Assessor using the formal Approved
Innovation Application Form (available from the BREEAM website).
Evidence

1 As defined within existing As defined within existing BREEAM issues.
BREEAM issues.
2 A copy of the Approved As per interim design stage
Innovation Application Form AND
AND Relevant documentary evidence confirming that
A copy of the Innovation the project has achieved or installed the approved
Application Report stating the innovation as described and quantified within the
application outcome as approved innovation application form.
‘approved’
AND
Relevant documentary evidence
demonstrating specification of
the approved innovation.
Definitions
Approved innovation
Any new technology, design, construction, operation, maintenance or demolition method or process that can be
shown to improve the sustainability performance of a building and is of demonstrable benefit to the wider
industry in a manner that is not covered elsewhere in BREEAM. In addition the innovation has been approved by
BRE Global in accordance with its published BREEAM Innovation credit procedures.
Applying for innovation credits

Refer to the BREEAM Innovation section documents available from the BREEAM website for more information on
BREEAM Innovation credit eligibility criteria, application process, application fees and previously approved
innovations.
cdxxviii SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Appendices
Appendix A – Healthcare building types A
Appendix A – Healthcare building types

BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 can be used to assess the following healthcare establishments:
1. Teaching or specialist hospitals

2. General acute hospitals
3. Community and mental health hospitals
4. GP surgeries
5. Health centres and clinics
Typical facilities and services offered by and forming part of one of the healthcare buildings are described in Table
A1 below. If a healthcare development does not fit one of the building type descriptions , it can still be assessed if it
falls within the building type category descriptions outlined in the scope section of this document. Where it does
not fall in to one of these categories, bespoke assessment criteria will be required to assess the project.
Table A1 Typical facilities and services

Typical Facility Service
descriptions
Teaching In patient Diagnostic and treatment services for
hospital High concentration of energy- intensive physical healthcare together with specialist
Specialist engineering services and specialist services
acute equipment consultant-led
hospital
General Inpatient Diagnostic and treatment services for
acute Medium concentration of energy- intensive physical healthcare
hospital engineering services and specialist Consultant-led
equipment
Community Inpatient Limited diagnostic and treatment services
hospital Basic engineering services and equipment for physical healthcare
Cottage Nurse- or GP-led
hospital Care services for physical healthcare
Mental Nurse- or GP-led
health Mental health and learning disability services
hospital or Consultant- or nurse-led
unit
Learning
disability unit
GP surgery Non-in patient Primary care consultation
Use typically 50-65 hours per week GP-led
Basic engineering services and equipment
Health Non-in patient Primary care and mental health
centre or Use typically 35-45 hours/week Nurse, dental, visiting consultant or specialist
clinic Basic engineering services and equipment
Other ‘healthcare’ associated building types

BREEAM New Construction can also be used to assess the following:
1. Ambulance trust buildings (‘Other buildings’ type)

2. Residential care homes and staff residential accommodation (Multi-residential accommodation building
type)
3. Non-patient building types, e.g. offices, laboratories, storage buildings (as listed in the table of building
types in the scope section).
B SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Appendix B – Education building types

BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 can be used to assess the following educational establishments:
1. Preschool, including;
a. Nursery schools(229)
b. Children’s centres(230)
2. Schools, including;
a. Primary schools
b. Secondary schools (including those containing sixth form colleges)
c. All age range schools (including education or teaching buildings at boarding schools)
d. Academies
e. Non-acute special educational needs (SEN) schools
3. Sixth form colleges
4. Further and higher education or vocational colleges and Institutions, including;
a. Teaching facility
b. Learning Resource Centre
c. Laboratory, workshop or studio
d. Student union
e. Or a mixture of the above types.
All age range schools and academies

All age range schools and academies can typically be assessed using the guidance or criteria applicable to
secondary schools. If the school contains functional or operational areas more akin to further or higher education
buildings it is more appropriate to use the assessment criteria for further education colleges. If the needs of the
accommodation and occupiers are similar to those of primary or early years pupils use the assessment criteria for
primary schools. The BREEAM Assessor should determine the most appropriate BREEAM criteria to apply in the
assessment of the building.
Acute special educational needs (SEN) schools

Acute special educational needs (SEN) refers to children with severe disabilities or learning difficulties that prevent
them from interpreting their surroundings without feeling anxious or distressed. These children can become easily
distracted or over-stimulated. This group of pupils mainly include children with behavioural, emotional or social
difficulties (BEDS) and children with communication and interaction disability (autistic spectrum disorder (ASD)).
This scheme has not been specifically tailored to assess acute SEN schools. Assessment is still possible, except
where highly specialised accommodation is provided. Acute SEN schools are defined as an 'Other' building type and
BREEAM Assessors carrying out assessments on schools for pupils with such needs need to consider carefully all
the BREEAM issues that might be affected by the need to provide special facilities for these building users, e.g. View
out, Cyclist facilities, etc. Where criteria in this scheme document are not explicit for this building type, the assessor
will need to decide which criteria are appropriate and apply them accordingly, seeking confirmation from BRE
Global Ltd. on the application of alternative building criteria.
For more information on SEN refer to Building Bulletin 102 Designing for disabled children with special educational
needs, published by the Department for Children Schools and Families (available from www.education.gov.uk)
Student residential accommodation

This scheme can be used to assess boarding school residential and halls of residence accommodation buildings.
These types of building are classified as a multi-residential accommodation building type for a BREEAM
assessment.
Appendix C – Multi-residential building types C
Appendix C – Multi-residential building

types
BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 can be used to assess multi-occupancy residential buildings that are not
suitable for assessment under the Home Quality Mark (HQM) in England, Wales and Scotland.
BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 can be used to assess the following types of multi-residential buildings:
1. Student halls of residence

2. Key worker accommodation
3. Care homes that do not contain extensive or specialist medical facilities (i.e. contain limited consulting
rooms and medical rooms)
4. Sheltered housing
5. Other multi-residential buildings which contain a mix of residential accommodation with communal areas
such as some military accommodation.
Care homes providing acute care

Care homes providing acute care would typically be assessed as either a ‘Healthcare’ or 'Other' building type.
BREEAM Assessors carrying out assessments on these types of buildings will need to consider carefully all the
BREEAM issues that might be affected by the need to provide special facilities for the building users. Where criteria
in this scheme document are not explicit for this building type, the assessor will need to decide which criteria are
appropriate and apply them accordingly, seeking confirmation from BRE Global Ltd. on the application of
alternative building criteria if necessary.
BREEAM Multi-residential and the Home quality Mark (HQM)

BREEAM New Construction for non-domestic buildings provides a whole building assessment methodology which
can also be applied to a building containing self-contained dwellings and communal facilities.
Where both an HQM and a BREEAM assessment are required, to avoid duplication of effort, evidence collected for
the purpose of an HQM assessment can be used towards demonstrating compliance with the equivalent BREEAM
assessment criteria and vice versa.
D SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Appendix D – Shell only and Shell and Core

Project Assessments
Speculative or non-speculative shell only or shell and core new buildings can be assessed using the BREEAM UK New
Construction 2018 scheme.
This section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the application of BREEAM to shell only and shell
and core projects.
A shell only or shell and core building project is defined as one where the developer’s scope of works is the design
and construction of the base building only, leaving a range of construction and fit-out works to be completed
before the building can be occupied. The project will have some or all of the following elements:
– the structure
– building envelope
– core building systems including building servicing strategy
– installations (such as HVAC) or plant support for installation of such systems
– fit-out of common areas
Category A and B projects

Shell and core projects will often be fitted out to a 'Category A' standard, the scope of which varies between
different developers, and may include in addition the shell and core of the building the provision of raised floors,
suspended ceilings, extension of core services above ceilings across the lettable space, finishes to the internal face
of external and core walls and blinds. Upon completion, the whole building or space within the building is sold or let
to be fitted out as appropriate for occupation. The new owners or tenants will fit-out the accommodation in
accordance with their corporate and operational needs, often referred to as a 'Category B' fit-out. These terms
widely used in the property sector are not used within BREEAM as the scope of works varies significantly between
developers and as such makes them incomparable.
In these projects performance of the building and compliance with BREEAM is verified based on the developer’s
scope of works. Two standard project type options are defined with applicable assessment criteria . For projects
that in scope from these standard options, assessment against some BREEAM issues will be excluded even where
they are within the developer’s scope of works. This approach ensures clarity, consistency and comparability within
the property market. Varying the criteria or issues based on each individual projects scope would make BREEAM
ratings incomparable in terms of performance benchmarking and for promotional or publicity purposes.
Defining the project type

The scope of assessment and BREEAM certification labelling for a new construction project that is not fully fitted
out can be categorised in to one of the following types:
– Shell only assessment and certification

– Shell and core assessment and certification
Shell only assessment

This assessment and certification option is available where the developer’s scope of works covers new build works
to the fabric, sub and superstructure of the building only, including:
– External walls, windows, doors (external), roof, core internal walls, structural floors
– Hard and soft landscaping areas (where present and within scope of works)
Shell and core assessment

This assessment and certification option is available where the developer's scope of works covers shell works, as
described for Shell only, plus core building services. Core building services relates to the installation of central or
communal transport systems, water systems, fit-out of common areas, central mechanical and electrical systems
including HVAC, but without local fitting of systems within tenant areas. The systems will typically be centralised
with capped off distribution to each tenanted area (for future connection as part of a tenant’s fit-out works). This
Appendix D – Shell only and Shell and Core Project Assessments E
does not include the full scope of a typical Category A fit-out, due to the fact that the specification of items such as
ceiling finishes, raised floors and the zoning of local services above the lettable floor area and other Category A
works are not typically finalised until the space undergoes final fit-out according to the tenant's specification and
are liable to change. These items are, therefore, excluded from a shell and core assessment.
The Shell only and Shell and core assessment options are available for all building types
For these assessments, the scope of works being undertaken must be specified clearly and provided for the
accurate certification of the project.
Assessing new build shell and core projects

In the main, the assessment process and application of a majority of the BREEAM assessment issues will be
unaffected by the scope of the new build shell only or shell and core works. Most of the BREEAM criteria are
concerned with impacts, processes and management procedures that occur with any new build development,
regardless of whether or not it is a fully fitted project. Several BREEAM issues and criterion are, however, tailored for
the assessment of fitted out buildings, for example acoustic performance, and so additional guidance in the form
of compliance notes are given in the assessment issues . These Shell only and Shell and core compliance notes
confirm whether the assessment issue is applicable to the project and, where it does apply, how to assess it for the
project.
Table D1 on the next pagesummarises the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 assessment issues and their
applicability to shell only and shell and core projects.
Shell only and Shell and Core building assessments and

minimum BREEAM standards
BREEAM standards remain applicable to Shell only and Shell and core building assessments for the developers
scope of works. The only exception is minimum standards for BREEAM issues, credits or criteria which are not
assessed in a shell only or shell and core project (confirmed by the Compliance Note in the relevant issue).
Applicability of the Shell only and Shell and core assessment type
to Simple buildings assessments
Shell only and shell and core assessment criteria cannot be applied to Simple building assessments. For a project to
be assessed as a Simple Building, it must be clear that the building can be classified as a ‘simple’. At the shell only or
shell and core stage, it is not possible to determine whether a building will be ‘simple’ therefore these assessment
options are not applicable to Simple building assessments.
BREEAM UK New Construction and the BREEAM UK

Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme
The BREEAM UK New Construction and BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes can be used to assess a
fully fitted building where the construction works and finishing stages have been carried out separately. A Shell only
or Shell and core project assessed under the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme can undergo a first fit-out (and
subsequent fit-outs) assessed against the BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme. Figure D1 illustrates the
relationship between the UK New Construction and Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes.
F SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Figure D1 UK New Construction and the UK Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes and the assessment options
The scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction - Shell only and Shell and core assessment types - and BREEAM UK
Refurbishment and Fit-out schemes have been defined using recognised industry definitions, such as the British
Council for Offices definition of Category A and B fit-out as far as possible. However, in practice, there is no fixed
industry standard definition of refurbishment and fit-out works, with a large degree of variability from project to
project. Due to this variety and also the need to ensure a consistent definition is used for assessment comparability
purposes, the BREEAM Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme has defined a number of optional assessment 'parts'.
The scope for each of these assessment parts has largely been based upon setting boundaries around the key
physical parameters of the building. Under that scheme, clients are able to seek assessment certification against
any combination of parts according to the scope of their refurbishment and fit-out works, therefore providing a
highly flexible scheme.
The scope of Part 1 of the BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme aligns with the shell only option of the
BREEAM UK New Construction scheme. Parts 1 and 2 combined align with the shell and core option of the BREEAM
UK New Construction scheme. Parts 3 and 4 cover the scope of work that is covered under the tenants fit-out
works could be used to 'top up' a Shell and Core Assessment .
BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme assessment types :
– Part 1 - Fabric and structure: external envelope including walls, roof, windows and floor
– Part 2 - Core services: centralised mechanical and electrical plant including heating, cooling and ventilation
– Part 3 - Local services: localised services including lighting, local heating, cooling and ventilation
– Part 4 - Interior design: interior finishes, furniture, fittings and equipment
Further information on the BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme can be found at www.breeam.com.
Table D1 BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 assessment issues: shell only and shell and core project applicability
Ref Issue Applicability
Shell Shell and
only core
Management
Man 01 Project brief Y Y
Man 02 Life cycle costing and service life planning Y Y
Man 03 Responsible construction practices Y Y
Man 04 Commissioning and handover N Y
Appendix D – Shell only and Shell and Core Project Assessments G

Shell Shell and
only core
Man 05 Aftercare N N
Hea 01 Visual comfort Y Y
Hea 02 Indoor air quality Y Y
Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories N N
Hea 04 Thermal comfort N Y
Hea 05 Acoustic performance Y Y
Hea 06 Security Y Y
Hea 07 Safe and healthy surroundings Y Y
Energy
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Y Y
Ene 02 Energy monitoring N Y
Ene 03 Energy efficient external lighting Y Y
Ene 04 Low carbon design Y Y
Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage systems N Y
Ene 06 Energy efficient transport systems N Y
Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems N N
Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment N N
Transport
Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Y Y
Tra 02 Proximity to amenities Y Y
Tra 03 Alternative modes of transport Y Y
Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity Y Y
Tra 05 Travel plan Y Y
Water
Wat 01 Water consumption N Y
Wat 02 Water monitoring Y Y
Wat 03 Water leak detection and prevention Y Y
Wat 04 Water efficient equipment (process) Y Y
Materials
Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Y Y
Mat 02 Environmental impacts from construction products: Environmental Y Y
Product Declarations
Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials Y Y
Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience Y Y
Mat 06 Material efficiency Y Y
Waste
Wst 01 Construction waste management Y Y
Wst 02 Use of recycled and sustainably sourced aggregates Y Y
Wst 03 Operational waste Y Y
Wst 04 Speculative floor finishes N Y
Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change Y Y
Wst 06 Functional adaptability Y Y
LE 01 Site selection Y Y
Pollution
Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants N Y
Pol 02 Local air quality N Y
H SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft

Shell Shell and
only core
Pol 03 Surface water run-off Y Y
Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution Y Y
Pol 05 Noise attenuation N Y
Innovation Y Y
Appendix E – Simple Building Assessments I
3
Appendix E – Simple Building Assessments
The BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 version can be applied to both complex and less complex building
projects. This section provides guidance on its application to less complex projects, i.e. a Simple building
assessment.
A Simple building is defined as having building services that are predominantly of limited capacity and local in their
delivery, largely independent of other systems in the building fabric and without complex control systems.
If the building includes complex services, systems, functions or facilities including, but not limited to those listed
below, it cannot be defined or assessed as a Simple Building and a full BREEAM UK New Construction 2018
assessment should be carried out:
– Air-conditioning (with the exception of local split cooling systems, see Building Services section).
– Full mechanical ventilation, displacement ventilation, and complex passive ventilation (see Building Services section
for guidance on permitted systems).
– Renewable energy sources, with the exception of on-site micro-generation technologies(231) or connection to
existing community or district heating or cooling systems.
– Laboratories and buildings that contain either fume cupboards or safety cabinets or containment areas.
– Major water-consuming plant or functions such as swimming, hydrotherapy or research pools or vehicle wash or
irrigation systems.
– Cold storage plant and enclosures, with the exception of domestic scale refrigeration
– Escalators or travelling walkways.
This list is not exhaustive, but serves to indicate the types of services and systems likely to be present in a more
complex building and unlikely to be present in a simple building. Examples of a Simple building could (depending on
the remit of the works) include: office, educational and community buildings, GP surgeries, basic industrial units and
extensions to existing buildings.The Assessor can seek assistance in classifying a project through BREEAM Technical
Support by contacting [email protected]
The following section describes additional features a Simple Building may have. These descriptions can be used to
support the classification of a building of a BREEAM Simple building assessment.
Building services and systems

The following building services and systems can be assessed as a Simple building:
Heating
Space or hot water heating is provided by simple systems only, e.g. systems with total capacity of less than 100kW.
Cooling
Small systems, such as local split cooling systems to service single rooms or areas for occasional or seasonal use,
with a total system capacity of less than 12kW(232) and a total collective refrigerant charge of less than 6kg.
Ventilation
1. Single sided and cross ventilation using windows, rooflights or trickle vents
2. Simple ‘bespoke’ passive solutions utilising wind driven or stack ventilation where:
a. The system does not serve multiple rooms or levels
b. The system does not use multiple (more than one) control dampers to control air flow
c. The system uses local standalone controls only and is not linked to a building management system that
controls the whole building ventilation strategy
3. Standalone ‘off the shelf’ natural or assisted natural ventilation solutions where:
b. The system uses local standalone controls only and is not linked to a building management system that
c. The system utilises only basic components, e.g. low power fans, control dampers, filters
J SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
d. The product supplier or manufacturer does not recommend specialist commissioning, i.e. no special
training is required to ensure the unit is commissioned correctly
4. Local mechanical ventilation where:
b. The system uses local standalone controls only and is not linked to a building management system that
c. The central fan or air handling unit (AHU) utilises only basic components, e.g. fan, filter, basic air to air heat
recovery, and only requires a single phase electrical supply
d. The system does provide any form of heating, cooling or humidification to the supply air (except via basic
air to air heat recovery)
e. The system does not comprise multiple duct work branches that require proportional balancing
f. The system is not a Variable Air Volume (VAV) system, i.e. one which comprises variable performance
fans and complex control systems that would require specialist commissioning
g. The central fan or AHU supplier or manufacturer does not recommend specialist commissioning, i.e. no
special training is required to ensure the unit is commissioned correctly
Additional Requirements
Domestic scale sanitary, kitchen and laundry facilities with only basic connections for hot and cold water provision
and drainage.
Building services commissioning required will be limited in complexity.(233)
Typical profile of a Simple building

The cost and size of a Simple building will vary widely so the Assessor should use the complexity of the building
function and its services to determine whether to assess it using the BREEAM Simple building criteria.
If a building does not meet the profile described above, but exhibits features which suggest it could be classified as
a Simple building, review this guidance and highlight the areas for further consideration to BREEAM Technical
Support by contacting [email protected] for further advice and classification.
Table 79 below summarises the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 assessment issues, credits and criteria
applicable to a Simple building assessment '.
Table 79 BREEAM UK New Construction 2018issue applicability for Simple building assessments
Issue Criteria applicability to Simple Credits available Exemplary credits
ID Buildings available
No Simplified N/A
change
Management
Man ✔ 2 2
01
Man ✔ 1 0
02
Man ✔ 4 2
03
Man ✔ 2 0
04
Man ✔ 3 0
05
Hea ✔ (3 to 5) building type 1
01 dependent
Hea ✔ (2 to 3) building type 2
02 dependent
Hea ✔ N/A N/A
03
Appendix E – Simple Building Assessments K

No Simplified N/A
change
Hea ✔ 3 0
04
Hea ✔ (3 to 4) building type N/A
05 dependent
Hea ✔ 1 1
06
Hea ✔ 2 0
07
Energy
Ene 01 ✔ 13 5
Ene 02 ✔ (1 to 2) building type 0
dependent
Ene 03 ✔ 1 0
Ene 04 ✔ 3 0
Ene 05 ✔ N/A N/A
Ene 06 ✔ 2 0
Ene 07 ✔ N/A N/A
Ene 08 ✔ 2 0
Transport
Tra 01 ✔ (Up to 5) building type 0
dependent
Tra 02 ✔ (1 to 2) building type 0
dependent
Tra 03 ✔ (1 to 2) building type 0
dependent
Tra 04 ✔ N/A N/A
Tra 05 ✔ N/A N/A
Water
Wat ✔ 5 1
01
Wat ✔ 1 0
02
Wat ✔ 2 0
03
Wat ✔ N/A N/A
04
Materials
Mat ✔ (Up to 6) building type 3
01 dependent
Mat ✔ 1 0
02
Mat ✔ 4 1
03
Mat ✔ 1 0
05
Mat ✔ 1 0
06
L SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft

No Simplified N/A
change
Waste
Wst ✔ 5 1
01
Wst ✔ 1 1
02
Wst ✔ 1 0
03
Wst ✔ 1 0
04
Wst ✔ 1 1
05
Wst ✔ 2 0
06
LE 01 ✔ 2 0
Pollution
Pol 01 ✔ N/A N/A
Pol 02 ✔ (1 to 3) building type 0
dependent
Pol 03 ✔ 5 1
Pol 04 ✔ 1 0
Pol 05 ✔ N/A N/A
Appendix F – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates M
Appendix F – Examples of BREEAM UK New

Construction certificates
Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates for the interim Design Stage and final post-construction
Stage are provided in Figure F1 on page O and Figure F2 on page Q respectively.
N SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Appendix F – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates O
Figure F1 Example of Interim Certificate at Design Stage

P SD5078: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 – Consultation draft
Appendix F – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates Q
Figure F2 Example of Final Certificate at post-construction Stage

Appendix G – Notes for compliance

Management

No additional issue-specific compliance notes apply.
Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning



Man 05 Aftercare
6.0 Energy
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions



LZC feasibility When undertaking a feasibility study at a stage later than Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or
study timing equivalent), the study should highlight the local LZC energy sources which had been
discounted due to the constraints placed on the project by the late consideration, and the
reason for their omission. The late timing of the feasibility study does not mean that LZC
energy sources cannot be specified. If the feasibility study discounted all local LZC as
infeasible due to the study being undertaken at a later stage, then the credit for the feasibility
study must be withheld.
If the feasibility study undertaken at the Concept Design stage or earlier concluded that the
specification of any local LZC technology was infeasible, the LZC credit could still be awarded.




8.0 Water
Wat 01 Water consumption




9.0 Materials
Mat 01 Life cycle impacts
Mat 02 Environmental Product Declarations


A government A government licence, e.g. a UK Forestry Commission felling licence certificate, can be used to
provide evidence of legally sourced timber but does not meet the definition of a third party
licence
timber certification scheme and so does not comply with the responsible sourcing
requirements of this issue.
Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience


Transport

Tram services, Tram services are classified as train services when assessing transport accessibility.

Collective The amenitiesdo not need to be ‘standalone’. Amenities present within or as part of another
amenities type of amenity, e.g. a cash point or pharmacy in a supermarket, can count towards the
number of amenities requirement.
Amenities within An amenitywithin the assessed buildingor on the same site as the proposed development,
assessed e.g. where the assessed building is part of a campus, retail or business park or centre,
building or on complies with the assessment criteria.
site

Existing For assessments on a site where there are already existing compliant facilities, those facilities
compliant can be assessed against the requirements of this issue. The existing compliant facilities must be
facilities and sufficient to cater for the building users of the assessed building as well as the users from any
extensions to existing buildings.
existing For assessments of new buildings on an existing site, where there are existing compliant
buildings facilities, such facilities can be assessed against the requirements of this issue. The number of
existing compliant facilities must be large enough to cater for the building users of the
assessed building, in addition to the users from any existing buildings.

Tra 05 Travel plan

Existing travel plan
The creditcan be awarded if the assessed building is part of a site that has an existing up to date organisational
travel plan that is compliant with BREEAM, is applicable to all building users (in existing and assessed new buildings)
and accounts for the additional travel resulting from users of the new building.
Waste
Pre-demolition Where access to the building to carry out the audit is not possible at Concept Design stage,
audit this needs to be justified and evidence provided that the design has included feasibility of
refurbishment and consideration of material reuse.
Limitied site space for segregation and storage
When space is too limited to allow materials to be segregated on site, a waste contractor can be used to
separate and process recyclable materials off-site. Similarly, manufacturers’ take-back schemes can be used. In
such cases, evidence must be produced to demonstrate segregation of materials was carried out to the agreed
levels and that materials were reused or recycled appropriately. Such evidence could be Environment Agency
(EA), Scottish Environment Protection Agency (SEPA), Environment Agency Wales (EA Wales) or Northern Ireland
Environment Agency (NIEA) Waste Return Forms.
Waste from temporary structures
Waste generated on-site for the purposes of the development (excluding demolition and excavation waste)
must be included in the assessment of this issue. If temporary support structures, or any other materials or
system brought on-site to facilitate construction of a building enter the waste stream (albeit for recycling), they
will need to be classified as construction waste and will contribute to the construction waste generated.
If the support structure is reused by the contractor (or by another contractor) on other sites, it has not been
discarded and does not enter the waste stream. It wouldn’t be included in the waste generated nor be assessed
against the benchmark figures. The same would apply to timber formwork where reused.
Wst 02 Use of recycled and sustainably sourced aggregates


Extension to Facilities within the existing building, can be used to assess compliance. These facilities must
existing cater for the total volume of predicted recyclable waste arising from the new and existing
buildings buildings.
Multiple building Where the assessment applies to one or more buildings or units that are part of a wider
estate or campus, the design team can choose to demonstrate compliance through the
assessments
provision of dedicated centralised storage space and waste management facilities with the
and buildings capacity to accommodate the recyclable waste material generated from all buildings and
that form part their activities.
of a wider estate
See criterion
Limited space or
vehicle access
for a compactor
or bailer See
criterion
For sites that have limited space for static installations, compliance can be assessed on the basis
of the provision of adequate space for a smaller portable compactor or baler.


Wst 06 Design for disassembly and adaptability

5.0 Health and Wellbeing

Education - For Education buildings, where the EFA daylighting requirements have been achieved, for all
Education relevant rooms within the building (in accordance with Priority School Building Programme
Funding Agency (PSBP) Authority Draft, Facilities Output Specification: Generic Design Brief by the Education
(EFA) Funding Agency, June 2013 (234)), it can be assumed that the BREEAM daylighting requirements
requirements have also been met and therefore the two credits available for daylighting can be awarded by
default. In this instance, evidence would need to be provided to demonstrate that the EFA
requirements have been achieved.
Healthcare – Window openings

In healthcare buildings some openings in public and patient areas need to be provided with restricted opening
distances of not more than 100mm (HBN 00-10 Part D: Windows and associated hardware(235)). This is for health H
and safety reasons, especially where windows are within reach of the elderly, mentally ill or children. However, it is
felt that good design can overcome these restrictions and provide compliant natural ventilation solutions, even in
safety-sensitive areas.
e
a 03 Safe containment in laboratories


Hea 06 Safety and security


Compliance notes
11.0 Land Use and Ecology

Asbestos
Where the only remediation required is the removal of asbestos within an existing building
fabric, the site cannot be classified as contaminated land. However, where asbestos is found to
be present in the ground this will be classed as contamination for the purposes of assessing
this issue.
12.0 Pollution

Pol 03 Flood and surface water management

Functional flood plain
The BREEAM credit for locating in a flood zone of ‘medium or high annual probability’ cannot be awarded where
the building is located in the functional flood plain. This is defined in the current best practice national planning
guidance for each country’. If the building assessed is or has been defined as ‘water-compatible development’,
confirmation should be provided from the local planning authority that they are satisfied with the proposals.
Flood defences
Third party defences
There are many landscape feature defences, owned by third parties, which due to their location act as a flood
defence by default, e.g. motorway, railway embankments, walls etc. It can be assumed that such embankments
will remain in place for the lifetime of the development, unless the assessor or project team have reason to
believe otherwise. For walls, assurance must be sought that the wall is likely to remain for the design life of the
building.
Pre-existing flood defences
In an area protected by existing flood defences, (designed to withstand a certain magnitude of flooding), the
appropriate number of flood risk credits can be awarded where the defences reduce the risk to ‘low’ or
‘medium’ and the following conditions are met:
1. The development is not located in an area where new flood defences have to be, or have been, constructed to
minimise the risk of flooding to the site and its locality purely for the purpose of the development or its wider
master plan.
2. The development is located on previously occupied land (as defined by the criteria in BREEAM issue LE 01 Site
selection on page 376).
3. The relevant agency confirms that, as a result of such defences, the risk of a flood event occurring is reduced to
low or medium risk. If firm confirmation is not provided then the credit cannot be awarded.
A statutory body’s local or regional office may be able to provide more information on existing defences in the
area in which the assessed development is located.
Where a site is situated
Sitesacross
whichmore
crossthan
multiple
oneflood
flood zones
zone, the flood zone with the highest probability of flooding
must be considered for the purpose of the BREEAM assessment. This is unless the areas in the higher probability
zone only contain soft landscaping and access to the building will be maintained if there is a flooding event.
Discharge to the sea or tidal estuaries

The peak rate of run-off and volume run-off criteria can be deemed to be met by default if the site discharges
rainwater directly to a tidal estuary or the sea.
The site must discharge run-off directly into the tidal estuary or the sea, if these criteria are to be awarded by
default. Typically, this would mean that drainage pipes would only carry run-off from the site and that they would
not need to cross privately owned land outside the boundary of the development before reaching the sea.
Please see definitions section of Pol 03 for a definition of tidal estuary.
Highways and impermeable areas
Where new non-adoptable highways are built, including those for developments with a mixture of buildings, all
of the new impermeable surfaces must be included in calculations to demonstrate compliance with the peak
rate of run-off and volume of run-off criteria. Where buildings are built beside existing highways or where
adoptable highways are built, the impermeable area of the highway does not need to be included in the
calculations.
Derelict sites
If the site has been derelict for over five years, the appropriate consultant must assess the previous drainage
network and make reasonable assumptions to establish probable flow rates and volumes. To do this they
should use best practice simulation modelling, to determine the 1 year and 100 year peak flow rates at the
relevant discharge points. To complete the calculations, a site visit prior to development will be required unless
accurate data already exists from a previous survey. The resultant professional report can then be used to
determine the pre-development volumes and rates of run-off. Without this professional input, the site must be
deemed greenfield pre-development, assuming Soil type 5 for the calculation of the pre-development site run-
off.
Rainwater harvesting
BS 8515 Rainwater harvesting systems: Code of Practice, Annex A (236) must be followed where rainwater
harvesting systems are specified for storm water control. To ensure flood risk is not increased if the rainwater
harvesting system is, for some reason, unavailable, the exceedance flow route capacity provided in accordance
with CIRIA report C635 should ignore the beneficial effect of the rainwater harvesting system.
5mm discharge for minimising watercourse pollution
In a small number of sites it may not be possible for the first 5mm of rainfall to be prevented from leaving site
completely. Where this is the case, an appropriately qualified professional must design the system to ensure that
the intent of this criterion has been met as far as possible and provide justifications to explain why the criterion
could not be fully achieved on the site. Where this can be justified, the awarding of the water quality credit would
not be affected, provided all other relevant criteria have been achieved.
5mm requirement - end-of-pipe solutions
End-of-pipe solutions, such as ponds and basins, will only be deemed to comply with the 5mm criteria where the
principal run-off control to prevent discharge from the first 5mm of a rainfall event, is achieved using source
control and site control methods.
5mm requirement - green roofs
Green roofs can be deemed to comply with this requirement for the rain that falls onto their surface. However
evidence is still required to demonstrate that the 5mm rainfall from all other hard surfaces on-site is being dealt
with, to allow this credit to be awarded.
Extension or infill building on existing site
Where the assessment is of an individual building on an existing site, i.e. infill development, the watercourse
pollution criteria apply to areas within the construction zone that present a risk of pollution, as well as any areas
external to the construction zone that are affected by the new works, i.e. drainage onto or from the proposed
development.

If the scope of the assessment covers
Assessmentof newa extension
new extension
only only, then only new lighting specified as part of the
extended works need to be assessed.
Flush stud lighting

Flush stud lights used for safety purposes in vehicle manoeuvring areas may be excluded from the assessment.
Lighting for security purposes
Where light fittings are specified to comply with specific security standards and these conflict with the BREEAM
criteria, they can be excluded from the assessment of this issue. In these circumstances the assessor must obtain
evidence confirming the specific security standards and that they are applicable to the assessed development.

Untreated buildings
This assessment issue does not apply to buildings designed to be untreated, i.e. where internal spaces will not be
serviced by heating, ventilation or air-conditioning systems and therefore have no noise generating plant.
Examples of such building types could include industrial warehouse storage.
Existing plant on site
The background level from the assessed area should exclude any existing noise from externally mounted plant
serving the same building.
13.0 Innovation
Inn 01 Innovation
References 25
References
1 For some assessment issues the number of credits available will vary by building type. Furthermore, some issues
may not be applicable to certain building types or buildings which do not contain a particular function or area, e.g. a
laboratory.
2 For schools, further and higher educational building types, see also Appendix B – Education building types.
3 For healthcare building types, see also Appendix A – Healthcare building types.
4 The prisons category includes any building type that is part of a prison establishment, including residential blocks
or a hybrid of building types.
5 For multi-residential building types, see also Appendix C – Multi-residential building types for further detail of
scope
6 For the purpose of BREEAM the specific clause of the specification must be referenced within the report.
7 Evidence in the form of design drawings must be presented in a clear, professional working format with clearly
identified legends indicating revision number, date, title, owner etc. (where appropriate).
8 Heravitorbati A, Coffey V, Trigunarsyah B, Saghatforoush E. Evaluating the influences of stakeholder management
on construction project quality. In: Proceedings of 1st International Construction Business & Management
Symposium. University Teknologi Malaysia, Kuala Lumpur; 2011.
9 Usable Buildings Trust. BSRIA BG 4/2009: The Soft Landings Framework, for better briefing, design, handover and
building performance in-use. BSRIA; 2009.
10 BSRIA. BSRIA BG 28/2011: BREEAM 2011 and Soft Landings, an interpretation note for clients and designers.
BSRIA; 2011.
11 HM Government. Construction 2025: Industrial Strategy: government and industry in partnership [Internet].
2013. Available from:www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/210099/bis-13-
955-construction-2025-industrial-strategy.pdf
12 PD 156865: 2008. Standardized method of life cycle costing for construction procurement. A supplement to
BS ISO 15686-5. Buildings and constructed assets. Service life planning. Life cycle costing. London: BSI; 2008.
13 RICS. Life cycle costing - RICS professional guidance, UK. RICS; 2016.
14 Churcher D, Tse P. BG 67/2016: Life cycle costing. BSRIA; 2016.
15 CLOCS. Standard for construction logistics: Managing work related road risk [Internet]. 2015. Available from
www.clocs.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/CLOCS-Standard-v2-DEC_2015-.pdf
16 ISO 14001: 2015. Environmental management systems - Requirements with guidance for use. ISO; 2015.
17 BS 8555: 2016. Environmental management systems. Guide to the phased implementation of an
environmental management system including the use of environmental performance evaluation. BSI; 2016.
18 Environment Agency, Northern Ireland Environment Agency, Scottish Environmental Protection Agency. Working
at construction and demolition sites: PPG6, Pollution Prevention Guidelines. Environment Agency; 2012.
19 Defra. Government conversion factors for company reporting: Greenhouse Gas Conversion Factor Repository
[Internet]. Defra; Available from: www.gov.uk/government/collections/government-conversion-factors-for-
company-reporting
20 Department for Environment Food and Rural Affairs. Guidance on measuring and reporting Greenhouse Gas
(GHG) emissions from freight transport operations. Defra; 2014.
21 Carbon Trust. CTG047 Closing the gap: Lessons learned on realising the potential of low carbon building
design. Carbon Trust; 2011.
22 Wild J. Commissioning HVAC Systems: Guidance on the division of responsibilities (TM 1/88.1). BSRIA; 2002.
23 CIBSE. CCA Commissioning Code A: 1996 (2006) Air Distribution Systems. CIBSE; 2004.
24 BS EN 13187: 1999. Thermal performance of buildings. Qualitative detection of thermal irregularities in building
envelopes. Infrared method. BSI; 1999.
25 BS EN ISO 9972: 2015. Thermal performance of buildings. Determination of air permeability of buildings. Fan
pressurisation method. BSI; 2015.
26 British Refrigeration Association, Institute of Refrigeration. Guide to Good Commercial Refrigeration Practice,
Part 5 Commissioning. 2008.
27 Carbon Trust. Good Practice Guide 347: Installation and Commissioning of Refrigeration Systems. Carbon
Trust; 2003.
28 Mills E, Bell G, Sartor D, Avery D, Siminovitch M, Piette MA. Labs21 programme: A Design Guide for Energy
Efficient Research Laboratories. 1996.
29 BS 7989: 2001. Specification for recirculatory filtration fume cupboards. BSI; 2001.
30 BS EN 14175-4: 2004. Fume cupboards. On-site test methods (incorporating corrigendum January 2014). BSI;
2004.
31 CLEAPSS G9 Fume Cupboards in Schools Revision of DfEE Building Bulletin 88. CLEAPSS; 2014.
32 The Air Tightness Testing and Measurement Association. Measuring air permeability of building envelopes
(non-dwellings), Technical standard Level 2 (TSL2). ATTMA; 2010.
33 British Council for Offices. BCO Guide to Post Occupancy Evaluation. BCO; 2007.
34 Jaunzens D, Grigg P, Cohen R, Watson M, Picton E. BRE Digest 478 Building performance feedback: getting
started. BRE; 2003.
35 HEFCE, AUDE, University of Westminster. Guide to Post Occupancy Evaluation: Report and Toolkit. Higher
Education Funding Council for England; 2006.
36 Agha-Hossein M, Birchall S, Vatal S. BG 63/2015 BSRIA Guide to Building Performance Evaluation is a general
introduction to BPE. BSRIA; 2015.
37 CIBSE. GVF2012 Guide F: Energy Efficiency in Buildings (2012 with 2016 corrigendum). CIBSE; 2012.
38 CIBSE. TM46: Energy Benchmarks. CIBSE; 2008.
39 CIBSE. TM47: Operational Ratings & Display Energy Certificates. CIBSE; 2009.
40 CIBSE. TM54: Evaluating Operational Energy Performance of Buildings at the Design Stage. CIBSE; 2013.
41 Carbon Trust. CTG047 Closing the gap: Lessons learned on realising the potential of low carbon building
design. Carbon Trust; 2011.
42 BS 8206-2:2008. Lighting for buildings. Code of Practice. BSI; 2008.
43 CIBSE. LG 7: Lighting Guide 07: Offices. 2015.
44 BS 5489-1: 2013. Code of practice for the design of road lighting - Lighting of roads and public amenity areas.
BSI; 2013. .
45 BS EN 12464-2:2014. Light and lighting. Lighting of work places - Outdoor work places. BSI; 2014.
46 CIBSE. LG 5: Lighting guide 05: Lighting for education. 2011.
47 CIBSE. LG 9: Lighting Guide 09: Lighting for Communal Residential Buildings. 2013.
48 BS EN 13779:2007. Ventilation for non-residential buildings - Performance requirements for ventilation and
room-conditioning systems. Annex 3. BSI; 2007
49 WHO. Guidelines for indoor air quality: Selected pollutants. World Health Organisation; 2010.
50 BS EN ISO 16000-2:2006. Indoor air - Part 2: Sampling strategy for formaldehyde. ISO; 2006.
51 BS ISO 16000-3:2011. Indoor air - part 3: Determination of formaldehyde and other carbonyl compounds in
indoor air test and chamber air - active sampling method. ISO; 2011.
52 BS ISO 16000-5:2007. Indoor air - Part 5: Sampling strategy for volatile organic compounds (VOCs). ISO; 2007.
References 27
53 BS ISO 16000-6:2011. Indoor air - part 6: Determination of volatile organic compounds in indoor and test
chamber air by active sampling on Tenax TA sorbent, thermal desorption and gas chromatography using MS or
MS-FID. ISO; 2011.
54 BS EN ISO 16017-2:2003. Indoor, ambient and workplace air. Sampling and analysis of volatile organic
compounds by sorbent tube/thermal desorption/capillary gas chromatography - Diffusive sampling. ISO; 2003.
55 BS EN 13779:2007. Ventilation for non-residential buildings - Performance requirements for ventilation and
room-conditioning systems. Annex 2. BSI; 2007.
56 Kukadia V, Hall D. FB30: Ventilation for healthy buildings: reducing the impact of urban air pollution. BRE; 2011.
57 Cheng H, Kukadia V, Hall D. IP9/14: Locating ventilation inlets to reduce ingress of external pollutants into
buildings: A new methodology. BRE; 2014.
58 CIBSE. TM21: Minimising pollution at air intakes. 1999.
59 BS EN ISO 10121 1:2014 (BS 2014) 'Test method for assessing the performance of gas-phase air cleaning
media and devices for general ventilation'
60 ISO/IEC 17025:2005. General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories. ISO;
2005.
61 BS EN 15457:2014. Paints and varnishes - Laboratory method for testing the efficacy of film preservatives in a
coating against fungi. BSI; 2014.
62 BS EN 15458:2014. Paints and varnishes - Laboratory method for testing the efficacy of film preservatives in a
coating against algae. BSI; 2014.
63 BS EN 16402:2013. Paints and varnishes. Assessment of emissions of substances from coatings into indoor air -
Sampling, conditioning and testing. BSI; 2013.
64 BS ISO 160009:2006. Indoor air - part 9: Determination of the emission of volatile organic compounds from
building products and furnishing -- Emission test chamber method. ISO; 2006.
65 CEN/TS 16516:2015. Construction products - Assessments of release of dangerous substances -
Determination of emissions into indoor air. BSI; 2015.
66 California Department of Public Health (CDPH). Standard method for the testing and evaluation of volatile
organic chemical emissions from indoor sources using environmental chambers. Version 1.1. 2010.
67 BS EN 717-1:2004. Wood-based panels. Determinations of formaldehyde release - Formaldehyde emission by
the chamber method. BSI; 2004.
68 BS EN 13999-1:2013. Adhesives. Short term method for measuring the emission properties of low-solvent or
solvent-free adhesives after application - General procedure. BSI; 2013.
69 BS EN 13999-2:2013. Adhesives. Short term method for measuring the emission properties of low-solvent or
solvent-free adhesives after application - Determination of volatile organic compounds. BSI; 2013.
70 BS EN 13999-3:2007+A1:2009. Adhesives. Short term method for measuring the emission properties of low-
solvent or solvent-free adhesives after application - Determination of volatile aldehydes. BSI; 2007.
71 BS EN 13999-4:2007+A1:2009. Adhesives. Short term method for measuring the emission properties of low-
solvent or solvent-free adhesives after application - Determination of volatile diisocyanates. BSI; 2007.
72 Regulation (EC) No 1272/2008 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 December 2008 on
classification, labelling and packaging of substances and mixtures, amending and repealing Directives 67/548/EEC
and 1999/45/EC, and amending Regulation (EC) No 1907/2006 (2008). European Union.
73 EN 16516:2015 Construction products - Assessment of release of dangerous substances - Determination of
emissions into indoor air (2015). European Committee for Standardisation (CEN).
74 BCO Guide 2009, Best Practice in the Specification of Offices, BCO, 2009.
75 HTM 03-01 Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises, Department of Health, 2007.
76 SHTM03-01 Ventilation for healthcare Premises Part A: Design and Validation, Health Facilities Scotland, Feb
2013
77 ISO 16000-2:2006 Indoor air. Part 2: Sampling strategy for formaldehyde (2006). International Organization
for Standardisation (ISO).
78 BS EN 14175-1:2003. Fume cupboards - Vocabulary. BSI; 2003.
79 BS EN 14175-2:2003. Fume cupboards - Safety and performance requirements. BSI; 2003.
80 BS EN 14175-3:2003. Fume cupboards - Type test methods. BSI; 2003.
81 DD CEN/TS 14175-5:2006. Fume cupboards - Recommendations for installation and maintenance. BSI; 2006.
82 BS EN 14175-6:2006. Fume cupboards - Variable air volume fume cupboards. BSI; 2006.
83 BS EN 14175-7:2012. Fume cupboards - Fume cupboards for high heat and acidic load. BSI; 2012.
84 DIN 25466:2012-08. Fume hoods for radioactive materials - Rules for construction and tests. 2012.
85 BS 7989:2001. Specification for recirculatory filtration fume cupboards. BSI; 2001.
86 BS EN 12469:2000. Biotechnology - Performance criteria for microbiological safety cabinets. BSI; 2000.
87 BS 5726:2005. Microbiological safety cabinets. Information to be supplied by the purchaser to the vendor and
to the installer, and siting and use of cabinets - Recommendations and guidance. BSI; 2005.
88 BS EN ISO 14644-7:2004. Cleanrooms and associated controlled environments - Separative devices (clean air
hoods, gloveboxes, isolators and mini-environments). BSI; 2004.
89 AGS-G001. Guideline for gloveboxes. 3rd ed. American Glovebox Society; 2007.
90 PD CEN/TR 16589:2013. Laboratory installations - Capture devices with articulated extract arm. BSI; 2013.
91 CLEAPSS. G9 - Fume cupboards in schools. 2014.
92 BS EN 12128:1998. Biotechnology - Laboratories for research, development and analysis - Containment levels
of microbiology laboratories, areas of risk, localities and physical safety requirements. BSI; 1998.
93 Advisory Committee on Dangerous Pathogens. The management, design and operation of microbiological
containment laboratories. 1st ed. HSE; 2001.
94 HSE. The genetically modified organisms (Contained Use) Regulations - Guidance on Regulations. HSE; 2014.
95 Advisory Committee on Dangerous Pathogens. Biological agents: Managing the risk in laboratories and
healthcare premises. HSE; 2005.
96 HSE. DRAFT - The biological agents and genetically modified organisms (contained use) regulations - Biosafety
guidelines. HSE; 2010.
97 Wong E, Alberico J. Technote 17: A dilution criterion for laboratory fume hood exhaust stacks. RWDI. (17).
98 Environment Agency. H4 odour management - how to comply with your environment permit. 2011.
99 CIBSE. AM11 - Building performance modelling. 2015.
100 CIBSE. GVA/15 CIBSE Guide A: Environmental Design 2015. 8th Edition. 2015.
101 CIBSE. TM 52: The Limits of Thermal Comfort: Avoiding Overheating in European Buildings. 2013.
102 CIBSE. TM59: Design methodology for the assessment of overheating risk in homes. 2017.
103 CTG065. Heating Control: Maximising comfort, minimising energy consumption. The Carbon Trust; 2011.
104 EN ISO 7730:2005. Ergonomics of the thermal environment - Analytical determination and interpretation of
thermal comfort using calculation of the PMV and PPD indices and local thermal comfort criteria. ISO; 2005.
105 HTM 03-01. Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises. Department of Health; 2007.
106 Education Funding Agency. Building Bulletin 101: Ventilation for school buildings. 2014.
107 Education Funding Agency. Building Bulletin 93: acoustic design of schools - performance standards. 2003.
108 ANC. ANC Good practice guide: Acoustics testing of schools. Version 1.2. 2011.
109 HTM 08-01. Health sector buildings: acoustic design requirements. Department of Health; 2013.
110 BS 8233:2014. Guidance on sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings. BSI; 2014.
111 Her Majesty’s Court Service HMCS. Court Service Design Guide (CSDG). 2010.
References 29
112 BS EN ISO 16283-1:2014. Acoustics - Field measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of building
elements. Airborne sound insulation. ISO; 2014.
113 BS EN ISO 354:2003. Acoustics - Measurement of sound absorption in a reverberation room. ISO; 2003.
114 BS EN ISO 140-7:1998. Acoustics - Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements -
Field measurements of impact sound insulation of floors. ISO; 1998.
115 ISO/IEC 17024:2012. Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of
persons. ISO; 2012.
116 SHTM 08-01. Specialist services Acoustics. NHS National Services Scotland; 2015.
117 ETS-01. Courtroom technology and spatial requirements: Design Guide. Scottish Court Service; 2011.
118 ETS-03. Estates technical standard environmental performance: Design Guide. Scottish Court Service; 2011.
119 Adler D. Metric handbook Planning and design data. 5th Edition; 2015.
120 Department for Education and Employment. Managing School Facilities, Guide 4 Improving Security in Schools.
1996.
121 BS 5489-1:2013. Code of practice for the design of road lighting - Lighting of roads and public amenity areas.
BSI; 2013.
122 Adler D. Metric handbook Planning and design data. 5th Edition; 2015.
123 2013 Progress Report to Parliament Committee on Climate Change. Meeting Carbon Budgets. 2013
124 CIBSE. TM54: Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage. 2013.
125 The Building Regulation, 2000. The conservation of fuel and power in new buildings other than dwellings.
2013.
126 National Calculation Methodology. Modelling Guide for Non-Domestic Buildings in Scotland. 2015.
127 National Calculation Methodology. Modelling Guide (buildings other than dwellings) in England and Wales.
2013.
128 National Calculation Methodology. Modelling Guide (buildings other than dwellings) in England and Wales.
2013.
129 Schneider Electric. Designing a metering system for small and medium sized buildings. 2010
130 CIBSE. TM39: Building Energy Metering. 2009.
132 CIBSE, TM46. 2008. Energy benchmarks. London: Chartered institution of building services engineers
133 CIBSE, The Society of Light and Lighting. Lighting Guide 6: The exterior environment. 2016
134 CIBSE. Guide F: Energy efficiency of buildings. 2012
135 United Nations. Sustainable Bioenergy: a framework for decision makers. 2007;
136 International Institute of Refrigeration. 17th Informatory Note on Refrigerating Technologies: How to improve
energy efficiency in refrigerating equipment. 2003
137 The Carbon Trust. Refrigeration systems: Guide to key energy saving opportunities. 2011
138 Institute of Refrigeration. Code of Conduct for carbon reduction in the retail refrigeration sector. Carbon Trust;
2011.
139 BS EN 378-2:2016. Refrigerating systems and heat pumps. Safety and environmental requirements Part 2:
Design, construction, testing, marking and documentation. BSI; 2016.
140 Department of Energy and Climate Change. Enhanced capital allowance scheme: energy technology product
list. 2014.
141 BS EN 378-1:2008. Refrigerating systems and heat pumps. Safety and environmental requirements Part 1:
Basic requirements, definitions, classification and selection criteria. BSI; 2008.
142 British Refrigeration Association. Guideline methods of calculating TEWI. BRA Specification; 2006.
143 CTG021. Refrigeration Road Map - An action plan for the retail sector. The Carbon Trust;
2012.www.carbontrust.com/resources/guides/energy efficiency/refrigeration/
144 Intelligent Energy Europe E4 project. Energy efficient elevators and escalators. 2010
145 BS EN ISO 25745-2:2015. Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving walks. Energy calculation and
classification for lifts. BSI; 2015.
146 BS EN ISO 25745-3:2015. Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving walks. Energy calculation and
classification of escalators and moving walks. BSI; 2015.
147 BS EN 81-20:2014. Safety rules for the construction and installation of lifts. Lifts for the transport of persons
and goods. Passenger and goods passenger lifts. BSI; 2014.
148 BS EN ISO 25745-1:2012. Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving walks. Energy measurement and
verification. BSI; 2012.
149 Schneider Electric. Four steps for improving energy efficiency in laboratories. 2013
150 CIBSE. TM46: Energy Benchmarks. 2008.
151 Design Buildings Wiki. Performance gap between building design and operation. 2010
152 HM Government. Enhanced Capital Allowance Scheme for water. 2014.
153 Acton M, Bertoldi P, Booth J, Flucker S, Newcombe L, Rouyer A. Best Practice Guidelines for the EU code of
conduct on data centre energy efficiency. Publications Office of the European Union; 2017.
154 Short A, Guthrie P, Soulti E, Macmillan S. Health Technical Memorandum 07-02: EnCO2de 2015- making energy
work in healthcare. Part B: Procurement and energy considerations for new and existing building facilities.
Department of Health; 2015.
155 CIBSE. TM50: Energy Efficiency in Commercial Kitchens. 2009.
157 Department of Energy and Climate Change. Enhanced capital allowance scheme: energy technology product
list. 2014. Enhanced Capital Allowance (ECA) scheme, Energy Technology Product List:etl.beis.gov.uk
158 Department of Energy and Climate Change. 2015. 2013 UK Greenhouse Gas Emissions, Final Figures. 2015
159 Sustrans. Why use public transport. Sustrans. [Online] [Cited:15 October 2015.] www.sustrans.org.uk/change-
your-travel/reducingyour-car-use/why-use-public-transport.
160 Department for Communities and Local Government. 2012.National Planning Policy Framework. 2012.
161 Department for Environment Food & Rural Affairs. Gov.uk [Online] 2015. [Cited:01 September 2017.] Policy
paper 2010 to 2015 government policy: environmental quality. www.gov.uk/government/publications/2010-to-
2015-government-policy-environmental-quality/2010-to-2015-government-policy-environmental-quality.
162 UK Government. 2015. Plug-in car grant.Gov.uk. [Online] 26 August 2015. [Cited:15 October 2015.]
www.gov.uk/government/publications/plug-in-car-grant.
163 Department for Transport. 2015. Public attitudes towards electric vehicles: 2015.
164 UK Government 2014. Travel Plans, Transport Assessments and Statements. Gov. UK. [Cited: 01 September
2017.] https://www.gov.uk/guidance/travel-plans-transport-assessments-and-statements.
165 HM Government, Defra. Future Water: The Government’s water strategy for England [Internet]. The Stationery
Office; 2008. Available from: https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_
data/file/69346/pb13562-future-water-080204.pdf
166 HR Wallingford. CCRA2: Updated projections for water availability for the UK Final Report [Internet]. 2015.
Available from: https://www.theccc.org.uk/wp-content/uploads/2015/09/CCRA-2-Updated-projections-of-
water-availability-for-the-UK.pdf
167 Department of Health. Health Technical Memorandum 07-04: Water management and water efficiency –
best practice advice for the healthcare sector. Crown copyright; 2013.
168 BS 8525-1:2010. Greywater systems. Code of practice. BSI; 2010.
References 31
169 BS 8515:2009+A1:2013, Rainwater harvesting systems – Code of practice, BSi, 2009.

170 The Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations. 1999 No. 1148 1999.
171 HM Government. The Building Regulations 2010: Part G Sanitation, hot water safety and water efficiency
(2015 edition). 2015.
172 Market Transformation Programme. BNWAT22: BNWAT22: Domestic water consumption in domestic and
non-domestic properties (version 1.1). 2007.
173 Grant N, Thornton J. AECB Water Standards: Delivering buildings with excellent water and energy performance
- Volume 2: The water standards technical background report (version 1.0.0). 2009.
174 BS EN 1112:2008. Sanitary tapware. Shower outlets for sanitary tapware for water supply systems type 1 and
2. General technical specifications. BSI; 2008.
175 BS 8515:2009+A1:2013. Rainwater Harvesting Systems - Code of practice. BSI; 2009.
176 BS 8525-1:2010. Greywater systems. Code of practice. BSI; 2010.
177 Great Britain, The Water Industry Act 1991. London: The Stationery Office
178 Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs. Future Water: The Government’s water strategy for
England [Internet]. The Stationery Office; 2008. Available from
www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/69346/pb13562-future-water-
080204.pdf
179 UK Government Timber Procurement Policy - Definition of Legal and Sustainable for Timber Procurement, Fifth
Edition, Central Point of Expertise on Timber, 2013
180 SBS ISO 20400:2017. Sustainable procurement - Guidance. BSI; 2017.
181 BS 7543:2015. Guide to durability of buildings and building elements, products and components. BSI; 2015.
182 BS 5234-2: Partitions (including matching linings) – Specification for performance criteria for strength and
robustness including methods of test, BSI 1992.
183 HTM 56 Partitions, 3rd Edition, Department of Health, 2005.
184 BS 8895-1:2013. Designing for material efficiency in building projects - Part 1: Code of practice for Strategic
Definition and Preparation and Brief. BSI; 2013.
185 BS 8895-2:2015. Designing for material efficiency in building projects- Part 2: Code of practice for concept
design and developed design. BSI; 2015.
186 WRAP. Designing out Waste: A design team guide for Buildings.
187 UK Green Building Council. Waste. [Online]. [Cited:15 October 2015.] https://www.ukgbc.org/resources/key-
topics/circular-economy/waste
188 The Waste (England and Wales) Regulations 2011, Environmental Protection, England and Wales, Statutory
Instrument No. 988.
189 ‘Quality Protocol: Aggregates from inert waste - End of waste criteria for the production of aggregates from
inert waste’, WRAP & Environment Agency, 2013.
190 BS EN 13043:2013. Aggregates for bituminous mixtures and surface treatments for roads, airfields and other
trafficked areas. BSI; 2013.
191 Adler D. Metric handbook: Planning and design data. 5th Edition; 2015.
192 Committee on Climate Change. UK Climate Change Risk Assessment 2017: Synthesis report: priorities for the
next five years. 2016.
193 Barros VR, Field CB, Jon Dokken D, Mastrandrea MD, Mach KJ. Climate Change 2014: Impacts, Adaptation, and
Vulnerability. Part B: Regional Aspects. Contribution of Working Group II to the Fifth Assessment Report of the
Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change. Cambridge University Press; 2014.
194 Humphrey K, Murphy J, Harris G, Brown S, Lowe J, McCarthy M, et al. UK Climate Change Risk Assessment
Evidence Report: Chapter 1, Introduction. London: Report prepared for the Adaptation Sub-Committee of the
Committee on Climate Change; 2016.
195 Met Office, University of Reading, CEH. Developing H++ climate change scenarios for heat waves, droughts,
floods, windstorms and cold snaps. 2015.
196 Pelsmakers S. The Environmental Design Pocketbook. 2nd ed. RIBA Publishing; 2015.
197 Three Regions Climate Change Group. Your home in a changing climate: Retrofitting existing homes for
climate change impacts: Report for policy makers. Greater London Authority; 2008.
198 Gething B, Puckett K. Design for climate change. RIBA Publishing; 2013.
199 UNFCCC. Potential costs and benefits of adaptation options: A review of existing literature. 2009.
200 HM Government. The National Adaptation Programme: Making the country resilient to a changing climate.
The Stationery Office; 2013.
201 Graves HM, Phillipson MC. Potential implications of climate change in the built environment. BRE; 2000.
202 Cheshire D. Building revolutions: Applying the circular economy to the built environment. RIBA; 2016.
203 Adams K, Hobbs G, Yapp C. Dealing with difficult demolition wastes: A guide. IHS BRE Press; 2013.
204 HBN 00-10. Health Building Note 00-10 Part D: Windows and associated hardware. Department of Health;
2013.
205 CIBSE. AM10 Natural Ventilation in Non-Domestic Buildings. CIBSE; 2005.
206 PAS 1192-2:2013. Specification for information management for the capital and delivery phase of
construction projects using building information modelling. PAS; 2013.
207 PAS 1192-3:2014. Specification for information management for the operational phase of assets using
building information modelling. PAS; 2014.
208 Health Technical Memorandum 07-07: Sustainable health and social care buildings. Department of Health;
2013
209 National Planning Policy Framework. www.gov.uk/guidance/national-planning-policy-framework/annex-2-
glossary
210 BS EN 378:2008. Refrigerating systems and heat pumps. Safety and environmental requirements. Operation,
maintenance, repair and recovery. BSI; 2008.
211 Institute of Refrigeration. Ammonia Refrigeration Systems Code of Practice. 2009.
212 British Refrigeration Association. Specification Guideline methods of calculating TEWI. 2006.
213 Department of Energy and Climate Change. Enhanced Capital Allowance Scheme: Energy Technology
Product List. Department of Energy & Climate Change; 2014.
214 BS EN 378-1:2008. Refrigerating systems and heat pumps. Safety and environmental requirements. Basic
requirements, definitions. classification and selection criteria. BSI; 2008.
215 EC European Commission. Directive 2009/125/EC Establishing a framework for the setting of ecodesign
requirements for energy-related products. 2009;
216 BS 8533:2011. Assessing and managing flood risk in development. Code of Practice. BSI; 2011.
217 National Planning Policy Framework. 2012.
218 CIRIA. The SuDS Manual (C753). CIRIA; 2015.
219 Environment Agency. GPP 13: Vehicle washing and cleaning. 2017.
220 CIRIA. The SuDS Manual (C753). CIRIA; 2015.
221 Environment Agency. Rainfall run-off management for developments. 2013.
222 Marshall D, Bayliss A. Flood estimation for small catchments. Institute of Hydrology; 1994.
223 Institute of Hydrology. Flood estimation handbook. 1999.
224 CIRIA. Designing for exceedance in urban drainage - good practice C635. CIRIA; 2006.
References 33
225 Environment Agency. PPG 1: Understanding Your Environmental Responsibilities - Good Environmental
Practice. 2013.
226 Institution of Lighting Professionals. Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light. GN01. 2011;
227 Institution of Lighting Professionals. The Brightness of illuminated advertisements. PLG05. 2015;
228 BS 8233:2014. Guidance on sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings. BSI; 2014.
229 Nursery school or education means full-time or part-time education suitable for children who have not
attained compulsory school age (whether provided at schools or elsewhere), i.e. facilities or buildings for the
teaching of children who are between the ages of two or three to five years old.
230 Children’s centres are multi-agency service hubs where young children and their families can receive early
education, full day childcare, parental support and child and family health services, such as access to health visitors
and health screening. Children’s centres will often be allied to a local primary school, on or adjacent to the school
site.
231 Micro-generation is defined under the Energy Act 2004 as < 45KWth (micro-heat) and <50KWe (micro-
electricity). Micro-generation can refer to community scale energy which may fall within these capacities
232 To refer to the total for more than one unit where applicable. Multi-split cooling systems and VRF systems
cannot be assessed under the Simple Buildings criteria
233 Typically, complex systems are systems that involve interaction between a number of components to ensure
proper operation. They will usually require specific knowledge and expertise to be designed and installed, and they
may depend on other systems such as control systems to work effectively
234 Education Funding Agency. PSBP: facilities and services output specifications. 2014.
235 HBN 00-10. Health Building Note 00-10 Part D: Windows and associated hardware. Department of Health;
2013.
236 BS 8533:2011. Assessing and managing flood risk in development. Code of Practice. BSI; 2011.

SD5078 DRAFT-UK Nondom NC 2018-Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SD5078 DRAFT-UK Nondom NC 2018-Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SD5078 DRAFT-UK Nondom NC 2018-Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PLEASE READ: BREEAM UK New Construction 2018 consultation i

PLEASE READ: BREEAM UK New

Land-use and Ecology: Implementation of the BREEAM UK

The Assessment issues are available here: www.breeam.com/strategic-ecology-framework

TERMS AND CONDITIONS

– the reproduction is for academic and other non-commercial purposes;

© BRE Global Ltd 2018

Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only

© BRE Global Ltd 2018

What the new icons mean xiii

About BRE Global Limited xv

About this Scheme Document xvi

BREEAM UK New Construction 20

Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2018scheme version 25

Scoring and rating BREEAM-assessed buildings 32

BREEAM rating benchmarks 33

BREEAM assessment issues and credits 36

Calculating a building's BREEAM rating 37

The BREEAM evidential requirements 38

Man 01 Project brief and design xlv

Man 01 Project brief and design xlvii

Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning liv

Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning lvi

Man 03 Responsible construction practices lx

Man 03 Responsible construction practices lxii

Man 04 Commissioning and handover lxxi

Man 04 Commissioning and handover lxxiv

Man 05 Aftercare lxxx

Man 05 Aftercare lxxxii

Health and Wellbeing lxxxviii

Hea 01 Visual comfort lxxxix

Hea 01 Visual comfort xci

Hea 02 Indoor air quality cvi

Hea 02 Indoor air quality cviii

Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories cxx

Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories cxxii

Hea 04 Thermal comfort cxxvi

Hea 04 Thermal comfort cxxviii

Hea 05 Acoustic performance cxxxiv

Hea 05 Acoustic performance cxxxvi

Hea 06 Security cxlv

Hea 06 Security cxlvii

Hea 07 Safe and healthy surroundings clii

Hea 07 Safe and healthy surroundings cliv

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions clix

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions clxi

Ene 02 Energy monitoring clxxiii

Ene 02 Energy monitoring clxxvii

Ene 03 External lighting clxxxii

Ene 03 External lighting clxxxiv

Ene 04 Low carbon design clxxxvii

Ene 04 Low carbon design clxxxix

Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage cxcvii

Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage cxcix

Ene 06 Energy efficient transport systems ccii

Ene 06 Energy efficient transport systems cciv

Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems ccviii

Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems ccx

Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment ccxv